P.F.I.

101 PLI CANONICAL LITERATURE

A study of the following topics is expected here; structure and contents of the Vinayapiaka, structure and contents of the
Suttapiaka, structure and contents of the Abhidhammapiaka, ninefold division; its basic meaning, commentarial
interpretation of it and the problems arisen thereof, Saying of the Buddha and thesaying of the disciples as found in the Pli
Canon, Pli Canon and the concept of the units of the Dhamma, use of verses in the Pli Canon, literary significance of the
Pli Tipiaka, the possibility of lost texts, Suttantika, Venayika and Abhidhammika.
Recommended Reading:
1. Pli Literature and Language
2. A History of Indian Literature, VOL. i.
3. A History of Indian Literature, VOL. ii.
4. A History of Indian Literature
5. Pli Literature Vol. vii Fasc 2

W. Geiger, New Delhi, 1978

B. C. Law
M. Winternitz, Motilal Banarsidas, Delhi, 1983
edited by J. Gonda
K. R. Norman, West Germany, 1972

PLI CANONICAL LITERATURE (LECTURED BY VEN. PIYADASSI)

Pli canonical literature consists of the three piakas for word piaka means a basket containing manuscripts.
Tipiaka consists of three piakas the Vinaya, Sutta and Abhidhamma.
Vinaya Piaka:
1. Prjika Pli
2. Pcittiya Pli
3. Mahvagga Pli
4. Clavagga Pli
5. Parivra Pli
Sutta Piaka:
There are five nikyas in Sutta Piaka:
1. Dgha nikya
2. Majjhima nikya
3. Sayutta nikya
4. Aguttara nikya
5. Khuddaka nikya
Abhidhamma Piaka:
1. Dhammasangan Pakarana
2. Vibhaga Pakarana
3. Dhatukath Pakarana
4. Puggalapaatti Pakarana
5. Yamaka Pakarana
6. Pathna Pakarana
7. Kathvatthu Pakarana

THREE PIAKAS (LECTURED BY VEN. MAHINDARATANA) (ORIGINAL BY VEN. SAMNANG PHY) (2009)
The Blessed One expected the disciplines his order would be succeeded to develop their lives
using Dhamma and Vinaya. Bhikkhus also followed that way, which was described by the Buddha.
There was not any problem during the st year period after the Buddhas Enlightenment in the order.

The Buddhist Order was an interesting and calmed at the light age of the Buddha as monks
developed their lives well as they tried to make complete to others. the Buddha also had uttered in
various occasions about his disciples with happy mind. We are provided true information of early
Buddhist disciples by the Thera and Ther Gths.
In the 20th year after the Enlightenment of the Buddha there was some problem in the order.
the Buddhas disciples who entered in the lives of Brahmacariya (monk) voluntarily were being tried
to understand the truth of the world and also they succeeded to reach their final goals. They had gone to
various religious leaders who were in India contemporary to the Buddha. Therefore, they did not want
to do any offense against the order and Bhikkhu-hood. They knew what are the suitable and unsuitable
things for a monk and they also do not want to perish (destroy) through the Buddhas Dhamma or
advices.
Although, there were not rules of disciplines (sikkhpada) we can see the early Buddhist
disciples had followed the same Sikkhpada. They are not sikkhpada but they are some kinds of
manners. Those are being denoted through sutta (discourse) by the Buddha; we can see those events in
the Citta Khanthaka. According to commentator it was through Bhikkhu Sudina, a nephew of Kalanda
near the village of Vesli, who committed major offense of having sexual intercourse with his ex-wife.
That is the first Parjika being come to be promulgated. It was laid down to deter Bhikkhus of
indulging in sexual intercourse and also this was not the first time happen an offense amongst the
monks but those are not being such major offense. Therefore, the Buddha did not lay down any rules
of disciplines at those times. He had blamed to the offenders not to do that offense again.
Once Arahant Sriputta requested the Buddha to promulgate the rules for those disciples but
the Buddhas answer was that It is not the time to promulgate the Vinaya. Arahant Sriputta saw
the situation of the order and he wanted to protect the Sagha Order but the Buddha did not want to
bind the disciples in the order. But after the first prjika the Buddha understood that It is the time to
lay down the rules of disciples (vinaya).
Although, the commentator uttered like that, in some suttas supplied the facts what were the
else reasons, which were caused to promulgate the Vinaya. According to Bddliya Sutta; it denotes
five items or reasons as causes of corruption in monastic order. Those are:
1. Labagga mahattat hoti
2. Yasagga mahattat hoti
3. Bhusacca mahattat hoti
4. Ruttau mahattat hoti
5. Vepulla mahattat hoti
At the beginning there were only few disciples in the order but it has been increased in
numerically, Bahunna vasanahne apsuka bhavat. All they entered to the Order to gain

Arahantship and some of them was learned person.

Regarding to this, there were some people who entered to the Order not because of getting Arhantship
but for the presents. They tried to argue with each other about the Buddha and his teachings. When the
order became famous, numbers of people came to visit the order with various gifts. Some monks
entered to the order in order to gain those gifts. The Blessed One could not control them at the certain
time the Order has been spread all over the India; some monks have seen the Buddha and some were
not. They then behaved in monastic order as how they wanted with their previous habits. Therefore, the
Buddha had to lay down the rules of disciplines involving the whole Order. the Buddha declared that
he lays down Sikkhpadas to serve the following needs,
1. Saghaphsutya - for convenience of Sagha.
2. Sagha suhutya for well-being of Sagha.
3. Dummagona puggalna nigghya - for refraining of evil-minded persons.
4. Pesalna bhikkhna phsuvihrya for ease of well-behaved monks.
5. Dihadhammikna savna paighatya for refraining of defilement of this world.
6. Samparyikna savna paightya for eradicating of defilement of the next world.
7. Appasannna v pasdya - for conversion of new adherents.
8. Pasannna v bhiyyo bhvya for enhancement of those have already converted.
9. SadDhammahitiyya for establishment and continuity of Dhamma.
10. Vinayonuggahya - for facilitating of the Buddhist disciplines.

WHAT IS TIPIAKA? (ORIGINAL BY VEN. HUNNY)

The Tipiaka is an extensive body of canonical Pli, in which are enshrined the teachings of the Buddha
expounded during forty five years from the time from his enlightenment up to his Parinibbna. The discourses of the

Buddha cover a wide field of subjects and are made up of exhortations. Expositions and injunctions. The Pli canon is
divided into three divisions called piakas, literally meaning 'baskets'. They are:
1. Suttanta Piaka (the discourses)
2. Vinaya Piaka (the discipline)
3. Abhidhamma Piaka (the ultimate doctrine)
Hence Tipiaka means three baskets or three separate divisions of the Buddha's teaching. The Vinaya Piaka
mainly deals with the rules and regulations of the order of monks (bhikkhus) and nuns (bhikkhuns). It describes in detail the
gradual development of the life and ministry of the Buddha.
Vinaya Piaka consists of the following books:
1. Prjika Pi (major offences)
2. Pcittiya Pi (minor offences)
3. Mahvagga Pi (greater section)
4. Cullavagga Pi (smaller section)
5. Parivra Pi (epitome of the Vinaya)
The Suttanta Piaka consists of discourses delivered by the Buddha himself on various occasions. This Piaka is
divided into five nikyas:
1. Dgha Nikya (collection of long discourses)
2. Majjhima Nikya (collection of middle-length discourses)
3. Sayutta Nikya (collection of kindred sayings, discourses)
4. Aguttara Nikya (collection of discourses arranged in accordance with number)
5. Khuddaka Nikya (collection of smaller discourses)
The fifth is subdivided into fifteen books:
1. Khuddaka Ptha (shorter texts)
2. Dhammapada (the way of truth)
3. Udna (heartfelt sayings or poems of joy)
4. Itivuttaka ('Thus-said' discourses)
5. Sutta Nipta (collected discourses)
6. Vimnavatthu (stories of celestial mansions)
7. Petavatthu (stories of the petas)
8. Theragth (psalms of the brothers)

9. Thergth (psalms of the sisters)

10. Jtaka (birth-stories)
11. Niddesa (expositions)
12. Paisambhid (analytical knowledge)
13. Apadna (lives of saints)
14. Buddhavasa (the history of Buddha)
15. Cariy Piaka (modes of conduct)

In the Dgha Nikya there are 3 vaggas:

1. Slakhandha vagga (division concerning morality)
2. Mah vagga (the large division)
3. Pthika vagga (discourse of a miscellaneous nature)
And 34 suttas in the Majjhima Nikya, there are 3 pis:
1. Mlapaasa Pi
2. Majjhima Paasa Pi
3. Uparipaasa Pli
and 15 vaggas and 152 suttas.
Sayutta Nikya has 7762 suttas and 5 vaggas:
1. Sagatha Vagga
2. Nidna Vagga
3. Khandha Vagga
4. Salyatana Vagga
5. Mah Vagga
Aguttara Nikya has 9557 suttas, 11 Pi from Ekaka Nipta Pi.

Khuddaka Nikya has 18 Pi:

1. Khuddaka Ptha Pi
2. Dhammapada Pli
3. Udna Pli
etc.
Abhidhamma Piaka is a deep thinking or the most important and interesting, as it contains the profound
philosophy of Buddha's teaching in contrast to the illuminating but simple discourses in the Suttanta Piaka. In the
Abhidhamma Piaka everything is nalayzed and explained in detail, and as such it is called analytical doctrine
(vibhajjavda). Four ultimate things (paramatha) are explained in the Abhidhamma. They are called:
1. Citta (consciousness or mind)
3. Rpa (matter)
2. Cetasika (mental concomitants)
4. Nibbna (the supreme bliss)
The Abhidhamma Piaka consists of the following words(?):
1. Dhammasaghani (enumeration of phenomena)
5. Dhtukath (discussion with reference to elements)
2. Vibhaga (the book of treatises)
6. Yamaka (the book of pairs)
3. Kathvatthu (point of controversy)
7. Pahna (the book of relations)
4. Puggala Paatti (description of individuals)

666WHAT IS TRIPITAKA?
The Tripitaka is an extensive body of canonical Pali in which are enshrined the teachings of the
Buddha expounded for forty five years from the time of his enlightenment to his Parinibbana. The
discourses of the Buddha cover a wide field of subjects and are made up of exhortations. Expositions
and injunctions. The Pali canon is divided into three divisions called Pitaka literally baskets.They are
Vinaya pitaka{the discipline} the suttanta{the discourses} and Abhidhamma pitaka{ultimate
doctrine}.Hence Tipitaka means three baskets or three separate divisions of the Buddhas teaching.The
Vinayapitaka mainly deals with the rules and regulations of the order of monks{Bhikkhus} and
nuns{Bhikkhunis}.It describes in detail the gradual development of the life and ministry of the Buddha.
This pitaka consist of the following books.1 Parajika pali{major offences}2 Pacittaya pali{minor
offences}3 Mahavagga pali{greater section}4 Culavagga pali{smaller section}5 Parivara pali{Epitome
of the Vinaya}. The Suttanta pitaka consists of discourses delivered by the himself on various
occasions. This Pitaka is divided into five Nikayas.1 Digha Nikaya{collection of long discourses}2
Majjhima Nikaya{collection of middle length discourses}3 Samyutta Nikaya{collection of kindred
sayings discourses}4 Anguttara Nikaya{collection of discourses arranged in accordance with number}5
Kuddhaka Nikaya{smaller collection discourses}.
The fifth is subdivided into fifteen books-1-Khiddaka patha{shorter texts}2-Dhammapada{the way of
truth}3-Udana heartfelt saying or poems of joy}4-Itivuttaka{thus said Discourses }5-Sutta

Nipata{collected discourses}6-Vimanavatthu{stories of celestial Mansions}7-Peta vatthu{stories of the

Petas}8-Theragatha{psalms of the brothers}9-Therigatha{psalms of the sisters}10Jataka{birthstories}11Niddesa{expositions}12Patisambhida{analytical knowledge}13-Apadana{lives
of saints}14-Buddhavamsa{the history of Buddha}15-Cariya pitaka{modes of conduct}.
In the DighaNilkaya there are three Vaggas, SilakhandhaVagga{division concerning
morality},mahaVagga{the large division}and PathikaVagga{Discourse of a miscellaneous nature}
and{34}-Suttas in the MajjhimaNikaya,there are three Palis,Mulapannasa Pali,Majjhima PannasaPali
and Uparipannasa Pali and 15-Vaggas and{152}Suttas. Samyuttanikaya has 7762suttas and five
Vaggas, SagathaVagga, NidanaVagga, KhandhaVagga, SalayatanaVagga and MahaVagga.
AnguttaraNikaya has9557 Suttas 11-Pali from Ekaka Nipata Pali.
Khuddaka Nikaya has 18-Pali Khuddakapatha pali, the Dhamma pada Pali, Udana Pali etc.the
Abhidhamma Pitaka is a deep think or the most important and interesting, as it contains the profound
philosophy of Buddha teaching in contrast to the illuminating but simpler discourses in the Suttanta
pitaka. In the Abhidhamma Pitaka, every thing is analyzed and explained in detail, and as such it is
called analytical doctrine{Vibhijjavada}four ultimate things{Paramattha}are called in the
Abhidhamma.they are1-Citta consciousness,2Cetasika mental concomitants,3 Rupa matter, and 4Nibhana supreme bliss.
The AbhidhammaPitaka consists of the following words DhammaSanghani{enumeration of
phenomena}2-Vibhanga{the books of the treaties}3-KathaVathu{point of controversy}4-Puggala
pannatti{description of individuls}5dhatukatha{discussion with reference to Elements}6-Yamaka{the book of pairs}7-patthana{the book
of relations}..
408

666AN INTRODUCTION TO TRIPITAKA

The Theravada pali canon consists of three sections, namely Vinaya, Sutta and Abhidhamma
Pitakas, known as the Three Baskets or Tipitaka.Generally the origin of the pali canon is traced to
the first council held three months of the Buddhas demise.
According to the Cullavagga, the first council was held to collect the Buddhas teachings, and thus
the Vinaya and sutta Pitaka were settled. In Cullavagga, Mahavajsa and Dipavajsa, neither of these
texts directly stated that Abhidhamma was taken to the discussed at the 1st Council. Thus Abhidhamma
Pitaka is considerably younger that both Vinaya and Sutta Pitakas.

1. Vinaya Pitaka

The Vinaya Pitaka is made up of rules of discipline laid down for regulating the conduct of the
Buddhas disciples who have been admitted as Bhikkhus and Bhikkhunis into the Order. These rules
embody authoritative injunctions of the Buddha on modes of conduct and restraints on both physical
and verbal actions. They deal with transgressions of discipline, and with various categories of restraints
and admonitions in accordance with the nature of the offence.
The Vinaya Pitaka is made up of five books:
1. Parajika
2. Pacittiya
3. Mahavagga
4. Culavagga
5. parivara
Parajika is the first book of the Vinaya Pitaka. It has consists of 4 offences, namely , parajika,
savghadisesa, aniyata and nissaggiya. The nucleus of the Vinaya pitaka is the Patimokkha, it consists of
227 rules for monks and 311 rules for nuns.

2. Sutta Pitaka

Sutta Pitaka is a collection of all the discourses in their entirely delivered by the Buddha on
various occasions (some by the disciples). It is divided into five separate collections known as nikayas,
the name and their number of suttas are as follows:
1.
Digha Nikaya
34 suttas
2.
Majjhima Nikaya
152 suttas
3.
Sajyutta Nikaya
7762 suttas
4.
Avguttara Nikaya
9557 suttas
5.
Khuddaka Nikaya
15 texts
1. Digha Nikaya

Digha Nikaya is the first book of the Sutta Pitaka and is a collection of long discourses. It is
made up of 34 suttas in three divisions:
(1) Silakkhanda-vagga (division concerning morality) 13 suttas
(2) Maha-vagga (the large division) 10 suttas
(3) Pathika-vagga (the division beginning with the discourse on Pathika, the naked ascetic) 11
suttas
According to the commentary, Digha Nikaya has the characteristic of promoting firmly faith,
because it has its historical value. From it we get an account of sports and pastimes, geographical
position of countries, effects of the life of the recluse in ancient days. It discusses social, political,

philosophical, cultural and religious history of ancient India at the time of the Buddha.

2. Majjhima Nikaya

The Majjhima Nikaya is mentioned as the second book of the Sutta Pitaka. It is called the
middle collection or the collection of discourses of medium length. It is made up of 152 suttas in
three books known as pannasa (fifty), namely, Mulapannasa, Majjhimapannasa and Uparipannasa
which divided into 15 vaggas, each consists of 5 vaggas, i.e.:
Mulapariyaya vagga
Sihanada vagga
Mupapannasa
Opamma vagga
Mahayamaka vagga
Culayamaka vagga

Majjhimapannasa

Uparipannasa

Gahapati vagga
Bhikkhu vagga
Paribbajaka vagga
Raja vagga
Brahmana vagga
Devadaha vagga
Anupada
sabbata vagga
Vibhavga vagga
Salayatana vagga

Mulapannasa by name for it deals with the first 50 sutta, the second book Majjhimapannasa
consists of the second fifty suttas too. The last 52 suttas in Uparipannasa, i.e, the last or little more than
fifty
Majjhima Nikaya, here we find discussion on almost all points of religion of the Buddha, on the
Four Noble Truths and kamma, on the reprehensibility of the belief in the soul etc. Thus, a brief
characteristic of the commentaries is given, such as destroyer of heretical opinions.
3. Sajyutta Nikaya

The Sajyutta Nikaya gains its title from the fact that its suttas are grouped together according to
their contents. There are 7762 suttas in 56 sajyutta, arranged in 5 vaggas, namely:
(1) Sagatha-vagga
(2) Nidana-vagga
(3) Khandha-vagga
(4) Salayatana-vagga

(5) Maha-vagga
Of the 5 vaggas, the Sagatha-vagga is the only section that consists of verses.
Sajyutta Nikaya is mentioned as A compilation of suttas with their main bearings on psychoethical and philosophical problems. Its characteristic is that it helps to analysis the doctrine
intelligently and contributes to our knowledge of the doctrine of the Buddha.
4. Avguttara Nikaya

The name of Avguttara Nikaya means literally the by-one-limb-more collection. It contains
9557 short suttas is divided into 11 sections called Nipata. Each nipata contains suttas according to a
numerical order with an arithmetical progression from one to eleven, e.g., eka-nipata, duka-nipata
ekadasa-nipata. Thus the Book of One (Eka-nipata) deals with a great variety of subjects, but always
from one single aspect at the time, for example: There is no other single form by which a mans heart
is so enslaved as it is by that of a woman. A womans form obsesses a mans heart.
Avguttara Nikaya constitutes an important source book on Buddhist psychology and ethics, which
provides an enumerated summary of all the essential features concerning the theory and practice of the
Dhamma. Therefore, its characteristic is helps to preach the interesting doctrines, and it is explained as
filling with joy about the explanation of all agamas.
5. Khuddaka Nikaya

Of the five Nikayas, Khuddaka Nikaya contains the largest number of treatises and the most
numerous categories of Dhamma. although the word Khuddaka literally means minor or small, the
actual content of this collection can by no means by regarded as minor, including as it does the two
major divisions of the Pitaka, namely, the Vinaya and the Abhidhamma Pitakas according to one
system of classification. According to the Sri Lankan tradition, there are 15 books in the Khuddaka
Nikaya:
(1) Khuddaka-patha
(2) Dhammapada
(3) Udana
(4) Itivuttaka
(5) Sutta-nipata
(6) Vimana-vatthu
(7) Peta-vatthu
(8) Theragatha
(9) Therigatha
(10)
Jataka
(11)
Niddesa
(12)
Patisajbhida-magga
(13)
Apadana
(14)
Buddhavajsa

(15)

Cariya-pitaka

The Niddesa, lists number 11, consists of two parts: Mahaniddesa and Culaniddesa. These two
books are counted as one; while counting them as two books, the total number is 16. According to the
Burmese tradition, there are 19 books in Khuddaka Nikaya, i.e., 4 others works besides the above
mentioned texts, they are:
(1) Nettipakarana
(2) Petakopadesa
(3) Milindapabha
(4) Sutta-savgaha

3. Abhidhamma Pitaka

The Abhidhamma Pitaka is the third great section of the Canon. It deals with a system of
classification, analytical enumeration and definitions, with no discursive treatment of the subject
matter.
A critical study of the Abhidhamma texts leads some scholars to the conclusion that
Abhidhamma is not the words of the Buddha since its origin and development extended over a
considerable period of gradual and systematic historical evolution.
The Abhidhamma resolved all phenomena into ultimate components analytically it aims as
synthesis by defining inter-relations between the various constituent factors. Thus Abhidhamma forms
a gigantic edifice of knowledge relating to the ultimate realities which, in its immensity of scope,
grandeur, subtlety, and profundity, properly belongs only to the intellectual domain of the Buddha.
The Abhidhamma Pitaka is made up of 7 massive treatises, namely:
(1) Dhammasavgani
(2) Vibhavga
(3) Dhatuvatthu
(4) Puggala-pabbatti
(5) Kathavatthu
(6) Yamaka
(7) Patthana

The method of preservation of the Buddhas teachings was memorizing by regular recitation
and handing down from teacher to pupil by word of mouth. The three Pitakas was committed to writing
for the first time in the 1st century B.C. at Alu-vihara in Matale in the central province of Sri Lanka.

666THE EVOLUTION OF THE PALI CANON

According to the oldest account, Cullavagga, the first council was held to preserve the purity of

the Buddhas teaching and discipline, the Vinaya and sutta Pitaka were settled. In Cullavagga,
Mahavajsa and Dipavajsa, neither of these texts directly stated that Abhidhamma was taken to the
discussed at the 1st Council.
Therefore, the Pali canon is a gradual compilation in different periods. But according to the
tradition, Buddhas discourses were collected and fixed in an authentic form at the First Council.
However, the texts itself inform us that there are some additions and not complete, e.g.:
1.

The last two chapters of the Cullavagga dealing with the first two councils do not mention
Abhidhamma Pitaka. It becomes clear that Abhidhamma is a later addition to the canon.

2.

The Kathavatthu was composed by Ven. Moggalliputta Tissa during the Third Council.
However the text was not finalised until the rise of latter Buddhist schools such as Hemavata,
the Uttarapathaka, the Vajira, the Vetullaka, the Andhaka, the Pubbeseliya and the
Aparaseliya, because the text mentioned these schools and these schools came into being
only after the Third Council.

3.

The last chapter of the Cullavagga is about the Second Council, which took place 100 years
after the demise of the Buddha. This shows that the Vinaya Pitaka was not closed after the 1st
Council.

4.

As shown in the Avguttara Nikaya (I. 232), the number of monastic rules in the Patimokkha
was originally 152. Buddhaghosa explains the Pali expression Sadhikaj
diyaddhasikkhapadasataj as 150 rules. This shows that the present code of 227 rules in the
Patimokkha is with later additions.

5.

The Parivarapatha is the last treatise to be included in the Vinaya Pitaka. This book, as
clearly stated in the colophon (nigamana), was written in Ceylon by a Sinhalese monk named
Dipa as a help to his pupils in the study of the Vinaya. This was canonised at the council held
during the reign of Vattagamini.

6.

The first volume of the Digha Nikaya is the earliest while the remaining two are late. The
facts are:
(1)

The 2nd volume contains 2 suttas, i.e. Mahapadana and Mahagovinda sutta
which are of the Jataka style.

(2)

The 3rd volume contains the Atanatiya sutta which is described as a rakkha or

saving chant manipulated apparently on a certain passage in the then known

Mahabharata.
The development of these elements, the Jataka stories and the parittas are of later accretions
in the texts, so are later.
7.

It has been directly pointed out by Buddhaghosa that the concluding verse of the
Mahaparinibbana sutta relating to the redistribution of the Buddhas relics were originally
composed by the rehearsers of the 3rd Buddhist Council and was added into the sutta later on
by the Buddhist teachers of Ceylon.

8.

Avgutta Nikaya contains a section (Mundarajavagga in the Pabcaka Nipata) commemorating

the name of king Munda who reigned in Rajagaha about half a century after the demise of
the Buddha. This proves that Avguttara Nikaya was not finalised at least during the 1st
Council.

9.

The Khuddakapatha is a later addition. Two points can prove the fact:

1. The Saranattaya presents a developed mode of refuge formula of the Buddhists which is not to
be found in the canon.
2. The Dvattimsakara enumerate matthake matthaluvgaj which is not found in the Nikaya.
10. In Buddhist tradition, the pakinnaka usually stands at the final chapter in a text. But it stands
at the 21st vagga of the Dhammapada. Thus the remaining 5 vaggas of the text are added
later.
11. The Udana was compiled after Pataligama became the capital of the Magadha empire under
the name Pataliputtta. This happened after the demise of the Buddha.
12. In the Vimanavatthu, Payasi (mentioned in the D.N.) was reborn in the heaven as Serissaka.
Thus this text is later than the Digha Nikaya.
13. One story in the Petavatthu is about king Pingalaka who reigned over Surat after 200years of
the demise of the Buddha. Thus Petavatthu was finalised much later.
14. Thera and Therigatha were finally shaped at the 3rd Council. Dhammapala points out 3 facts:
(1)

Thera Tekicchakan, whose gathas are embodied in the Theragatha, lived

under Bimbisara, the father of Dhammasoka.

(2)

Some verses are attributed to Ven. Vitasoka, the younger brother of

Dhammasoka.
(3)

Still some other verses are attributed to Tissa-kumara, the youngest brother
of the king.

15. Jatakas are arranged on the basis of the paramitas, a doctrine that plays no part in the
Nikayas. According to Rhys David, the present edition is not an edition of the text, but of the
oral-commentary. It was written in the 5th century A.D. in Ceylon by an unknown author. But
Childers thinks that he was Buddhaghosa. However one fact is true that many of these stories
were derived from the folklore of India.
16. The Mahaniddesa is an exegetical treatise which was modeled on an earlier exegesis
attempted by Mahakaccana on the Magandiya sutta of the Atthakavagga. But the exegesis of
Mahakaccana can be traced as a separate sutta of the Sajyutta Nikaya (V. III. P.22). A list of
places (e.g. Java, paramayona) visited by the sea-going merchants mentioned in the texts
shows that it could not be earlier than the 2nd Century A.D.
17. The Cullaniddesa is a canonical commentary on the Khaggavisana sutta and the parayana
group of 16 poems of the Sutta Nipata. At this time when Khaggavisana sutta still hangs on
the parayana vagga as an isolated poem, and not yet being included in the Uragavagga,
therefore we can conclude that this text is earlier than the Sutta Nikapata.
Buddhavajsa, Cariyapitaka and the Apadana are the three books which found recognition in the list of
the Majjhimabhanakas and were taken no notice of in the Dighabhanakas list. This shows that these 3
books were complied and received into the canon after the list was once known to have been completed
with 12 books. The Buddhavajsa and the Cariyapitaka present a systematic form of the Bodhisatta idea
which is of later developed concept; and the Apadana furnishing the previous birth stories of the Theras
and Theris cannot but regarded as a later supplement to the Thera-therigatha.
666HISTORY OF PALI LITERATURE12. 7. 2000
Pali means range, line and fence. And Pali was considered as the primary source of literature by the Theravada School. And
Pali belonged to two languages. They are:
1. Aryan language.
2. Anaryan language.
Anaryan languages are:
1. Dravidian language.
2. Tamil language. (doavida)
3. Kannada language.
4. Telugu language.

5.

Malayalam language.

Indo-Aryan languages can be divided into three languages.

1. Ancient Indo-Aryan languages (Vedic Sanskrit- 1500 B.C to 600 B.C).
2.

Medieval Indo-Aryan languages (600 B.C to 1000 A.D). Again it is divided into two parts. 1. Sanskrit (formal
language- language of high classes) and 2. Prakrit (Pali, Magadhi, Ardhamagadhi, Palisachi, and Saciraseni). They
(Prakrit languages) are the common languages according the time of the Buddha.
- The different between the two: Saj krta = well done, well-formed, defined.
Pra krta = common, general.
- Sanskrit for Brahmin literature, those who are grammarians, scholars etc, and for two noble castes.
- People or who works (slaves) for the noble people they speak common language.
- According to the discourses, there are two brahmins suggested the Buddha to convert the language into
Sanskrit.

3.

And modern Indo-Arayan languages (1000 A.D to modern times) such as Hindi, Bengali, Navari, Sinhalese and
so on.

Development of Pali
According to Wilhelm Geiger, in the development of Pali languages, there are 4 stages:

Verse portions of the Suttapitaka (represented as formal language.)

Prose portions of the canon.
Pali exegetical literature.(commentary and sub-commentary)
4.

Pali poetical compositions.

And there are another two Scholars classified the development of Pali languages into ten stages, i.e., the chronology of
Buddhist literature from the time of the Buddha to the time of king Asoka. They are:
1.

Mr. Rhys David has classified the Pali languages into ten stages. (In Buddhist India)

2.

B.C. Law also has classified Pali into ten stages. (In History of Pali Literature I)

References:
Pali language A.K warder.

There are 31 volumes in Pali canon. They are:

1.

Vinaya Pitaka- 5.

2.

Stta Pitaka- 19

3.

Abhidhamma Pitaka- 7.

Vinaya Pitaka

1.

Parajikapali

2.

Pacittiyapali

3.

Mahavaggapali

4.

Cullavaggapali

5.

Parivarapali. (this was written in Sri Lanka during the rein of king Vattagamibhaya).
-

Patimokkha was born at a later time, these rules were t aken from the two Vibhanga.
According to B.C. Law, Parivara was written during the time of 1st century B.C. in Sri Lanka.
Parivara is regarded as likhapesi, the last book of the 31 volumes.

Sutta Pitaka

1.
2.
3.

4.

5.

Dighanikaya (the later additions into D.N 1.Mahaparinibbana Sutta, 2.Sangati Sutta, 3. Dasutara Sutta).
Majjhimanikaya (Diyaddhasata suttanta, dve ca suttani yatha so, nikayo majjhimo panca dasavagga pariggaho-the
section on which 152 Sutta collected under 15 vaggas is called M.N.).
Samyuttanikaya (has classified according to the Vaggas. It has five volumes: 1. Sagathavagga, 2.Nidanavagga,
3.Khandhavagga, 4. Salayatanavagga, and 5. Mahavagga. Under each Vagga or volume sub-divided again as
Bhikkhusamyutta, Vanasamyutta, Yakkhasamyutta, Davasamyutta. It organized according to topics.
Sattasuttasahassani, sattasuta satanica dvasatthi ceva suttanta, eso samyutta samgaho- it is the S.N, which consists
of 7762 discourses). First sutta is Oghatarana.
They are classified according to the topics under different heading are the help of the preachers.
Anguttaranikaya (have 11 volumes: Ekakanipata (sabbe satta, aharatthitika), Dukanipata (namarupa, hiriottappa), Tikanipata (sukhavedana, dukkhavedana, adukkhamasukhavedana) etc. To remember easily they
organized these in number. Navasutta sahassani, panca suttasatanica, sattapannsa suttani sankha anguttareayamA.N consists of 9557 discourses). First sutta is Itthirupaparidana sutta.
Khuddakanikaya- thapetva caturo ete nikaye dhigaadike, tadannam buddhavacanam nikayo khuddako mato- all
the words of the Buddha except about four Nikayas come under Khuddakanikaya).

15 books of Khuddakanikaya (according to S.L tradition)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

Khuddakapatha
Dhammapada
Udana
Itivuttaka
Suttanipata
Theragatha
Therigatha
Petavatthu
Vimanavatthu
Jataka
Niddesa
Patisambhidamagga
Apadana
Buddhavajsa
Cariyapitaka.

Abhidhamma Pitaka
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Dhammasavganippakarana
Vibhavgappakarana
Puggalapabbattippakarana
Dhatukathappakarana
Kathavatthuppakarana
Yamakappakarana
Patthanappakarana.

- according to tradition, these (31) volumes of canonical literature were brought to Sri Lanka by Ven. Mahinda in the
3rd B.C.
- According to Rhys David, in his book called Buddhist India states the chronologies of Pali literature, from the
time of the Buddha to the Asokan period, were developed within these ten stages. They are:
1.

The simple statements of Buddhist doctrines now found, in identical words, in paragraphs or verses recurring in all
the books.
2. Episodes founds, in identical words, in two or more of the existing books.
3. The Sila, the Parayana, the Cctades and the Patimokkha.
4. Digha, Majjhima, Anguttara and Samyutta Nikayas.
5. The Suttanipata, Theragatha, Therigatha, Udana, and Khuddakapatha.
6. The Suttavibhanga and Khandhakas.
7. The Jatakas and Dhammapada.
8. Niddesa, Itivuttaka and patisambhidhamagga.
9. Peta, Vimana-Vatthus, Apadana, Cariyapitaka, Buddhavajsa.
10. Abhidhamm books. (the last of which is Kathavatthu and the earliest probably the Puggala-pabbatti.)
All Sutta are the words of:
1. the Buddha
2. the Savakas: the monks, human beings
3. the gods.

Chronology Pali literature from the time of the Buddha to the down of Christian era (rein of king Vattagaminiabhaya) in
which the Palit texts were converted into writing in Ceyoln (B.C Law vol-I, Pg-42).
1.

The simple statements of Buddhist doctrines now found in identical words in paragraphs or verses recurring in all
the books.
2. Episode found in identical words in two or more of the existing books.
3. The Silas, the Parayana group of 16 poems without the prologue, the Atthaka group of 4 or 16 poems, and
Sikkhapadas.
4. Dighanikaya Vol-I, M.N, S.N, A.N and earlier Patimokkha code of 152 rules.
5. D.N Vol-II, and III, then Theragatha and Therigatha, collection of 500 Jatakas, Suttavibhavga, Patisambhidamaga,
Puggalapabbatti, and Vibhavga.
6. The Mahavagga and Cullavagga, the Patimokkha code completing 227 rules, Vimanavtthu, and Petavatthu,
Dhammapada and Kathavatthu.
7. Cullaniddesa and Mahaniddesa, Udana, Itivuttaka, Suttanipata, Dhatukatha, Yamaka and Patthana.
8. Buddhavajsa, Cariyapitaka and Apadana.
9. Parivarapatha.
10. Khuddakapatha.

Regarding Pali literature we have historical record that showed the development of Pali literature, which preserved by
tradition. These records were the introduction to the commentaries of Buddhaghosa.
Read
A history of Pali literature, by B. C. Law (2nd chapter).
A textual and Historical Analysis of Khuddakanikaya, by Oliver Abeynayake.

Traditional classification of Buddhist teachings in Pali commentaries.

The commentators gave an introduction before writing down a commentary on any texts. In those introductions we can see
the traditional classification of Buddhist teaching as follows:
1.

Rasavasena ekvidhaj- all the teachings of the Buddha is one as far as its taste is considered (it is the taste of
liberation)
Seyyathapi bhikkhave mahasamuddo ekaraso, lonaraso evameva kho bhikkhave ayaj dhammo ekaraso
vimuttiraso
O. monks! as the ocean has only one taste, the taste of salt, the teaching has only one taste, i.e., the taste of
liberation.

2.

Dhammavinayavasena duvidhaj- the teachings of the Buddha are two-fold as doctrine and discipline
Maya dhammo ca vinayo ca desito pabbatto, so vo mamaccayena sattha
I have preached doctrine and promulgated the vinaya, they will be your teachers after me ( Mahaparinibbana
Sutta).

3.

Buddhavacanavasena tividham - the teachings of the Buddha are three-fold according to the words.
(a) The first, middle and last words:
Pathamabuddhavacana, Majjhimabuddhavacana and Pacchimabuddhavacana
(b) Pitakavasenatividham (three Pitaka) the teachings of the Buddha are three-fold according to the baskets, i.e.,
Vinaya, Sutta and Abhidhamma pitakas.
(c) Nikaya vasena pabcavidhaj- Five Nikayas
Digha Nikaya:
Catuttijseva suttanta, tivaggo yassa samgano, esa dighanikayoti, pathamo anulomiko.
According to the author the section in which 34 discourses are corrected under 3 sections is called D.N.
Majjhima Nikaya:
Diyaddhasata suttanta, dve ca suttani yattha so, nikayo majjhimo pabca, dasavagga pariggaho.
The section in which hundred fifty-two suttas collected under 15 vaggas is called Majjhima Nikaya.
Samyutta Nikaya:
Sattasuttasahassani, sattasuttasatanica, dvasatthi ce va suttanta, eso samyutta Samgaha.
It is the Samyutta Nikaya which consist of 7762 discourses.
Avguttara Nikaya:
Navasutta sahassani, pabca suttasatanica, sattapannasa suttani, savkha avguttare ayaj.
Avguttara Nikaya consists of 9557 suttas.
Khuddaka Nikaya:
Thapetva caturo ete, nikaye dhiga-adike, tadabbaj buddhavacanaj, nikayo kuddako mato.

All the words of the Buddha except above 4 nikayas come under Khuddaka Nikaya.
Buddhaghosa included the 15 texts of Khuddaka Nikaya, Vinaya and Abhdhamma into the Khuddaka Nikaya.

4. Nine limbs of teaching of the Buddha (navangasatthusasana)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)

Sutta- discourses
Geyya- what can be recited
Veyyakarana- explanation
Gatha- stanza or verses
Udana- joyful utterances
Itivuttaka- the teachings recorded as thus said
Jataka- birth stories
Abhutadhamma- wonderful teaching
Vedalla- subtle explanation

These nine terms are found in M.N, A.N, which are the oldest gathas in Buddhist teachings. But commentaries reinterpreted
the contents and meanings of each term.
Read

David Pali and English Dictionary.

Buddhist dictionary, by Nanaponika.

Pali literature in post-canonical pre-commentarial period

The Buddha was born in the 6th century B.C. In the 3rd century B.C, the 3rd Buddhist council was held and the Kathavatthu
was written. In this period the Pali canon was brought into Sri Lanka by Ven Mahinda. Then Ven. Buddhaghosa wrote his
work called Visuddhimagga in the 5th A.D.
Here between 3rd B.C and 5th B.C there are (800) years gap. The texts which existed during this period can be categorized
into categories as follows:

The first category: two texts are regarded as the texts of methodology to study the canon:
1. Nettippakarana
2. Petakopadesa
Second category: two texts of answering questions:
Milindapanha
Suttasangaha (in which 85 discourses were mentioned)
Regarding these texts the authors were not known but we know that they were prior to commentary.

Third category: texts come during this period is the summaries of the texts of canon:
1. Mulasikkha
2. Kuddakasikha

vinaya

3. Uttaravinicchaya
3. Vinayavinicchaya
4. Abhidhammavatara
5. Ruparupavibhavga

Abhidhamma

Fourth category: texts which analysing all the teachings as a philosophy:

1.Vimuttimagga (belong to Abhayagiri tradition- by Ven. Upatissa)

2.Visuddhimagga (by Ven. Buddhaghosa)
3.Banodaya (Buddhaghosa)
Fifth category: texts which came into existence during this period is the literature jof chronicle (Vajsakatha).]
1.Atthakathamahavajsa
2.Thupavajsa (sthupavamsa (sinhala)
3.Dathadhatuvajsa (dathavamsa)
4.Dipavajsa
Sixth category
The Pali poetical works:

1.Telakatahagatha (verses in cauldron)

2.Narasihagatha (in poems)
Seventh category
Pali grammar works:
In the present there are three traditions of grammarians:
1.Kacchayana (in S.L)
2.Moggalana ( in Sri Laka)
3.Saddhaniti (in Burma) (which came into existence after the Polonnaruwa period)
And there are four in post canonical pre-commentarial period:
Kacchayana
Mahanirutti
Cullanirutti
Sabbagunakara
Eighth category: there are some texts existed but not accepted as canonical text in Theravada:
Vavvapitaka
2.
Avgulimalipitaka
3.
Gulha-ummagga
4.
Gulhavessantara
5.
Alavakagajjita
6.
Ratthapalagajjita
Ninth category: There are some discourses which are not found in the present Tipitaka:
Kulumbasutta
Rajovadasutta
Catuparivattasutta

Nandopanandasutta
Tenth category: according to commentary, some texts are the exposition of dhamma exited before the commentary:
Maggakatha
Arammanakatha
Banavatthu

The (academic) services of sub-commentators for the development of Pali literature

Badaratitthavasi Dhammapala
Ananda vanaratana
Anomadassi
Buddhappiya
Sumangala

Read
1.

Introduction to Dighanikayatthakathatika editions by Lily de Silva P.T.S. 1970.

2.
3.

History of Pali literature in Ceylon

Pali Proper name, by Malalasekara

666CULTURAL BACKGROUND OF PALI LITERATURE OF INDIA

Briefly, Cultural background of Pali literature of India is old Arayan language, used or spoken in the
Indian subcontinent. And there are great evolutions of this language. In the traditional Pali it is called
Magadhi, but when we compare the Magadhi and Pali, we then can see these are different from each
other. Anyway, the approval of the historical evidences, we can have a clearer picture of nature of Pali
literature.
According to the history of the Indo-Arayan language there can be seen three stages of the development
of these languages:
Old indo-Arayan languages
Middle Indo-Arayan Languages
Modern Indo- Arayan Languages.
1)

To the first group, (1500BC-600BC) belonging to the languages Vedic,

Sanskrit.

2)

Pali, Magadhi, Ardhamagadhi, Sauraseni, Maharastri, Paisaci, Apabhramsa,

Asokan Prakrit and many other dialects are belonging to the second group of language, the Middle
Indo-Arayan languages (600BC-1000AD). The second group is again subdivided into three sections
between the first and the second sections. There comes another group called transitional stages,
there are as following:

3)

1)

600BC-200BC e.g. Palipitaka, Asoka Prakrit inscription.

2)

200AD- 600AD

3)

600AD-1000 AD

The Modern Indo-Arayan language from1000 AD up to present day such as

Hindi, Marati, Bangales, Gusarati and Sihalese etc belong to the third group.

Among these, above three stages, the middle Indo-Arayan stage is very important as far as the Pali
literature is concerned. That second stage is also called the Indra-Prakrit Language because many
Indian dialects developed in that Indra especially as the result of the introduction of Jainism and
Buddhism.
Unlike the other religious leaders at the time of the Buddha and Mahavihara used Indian dialects to
propagate their doctrines. The teachings of these teachers were very famous among the people.
In the Arayan culture, the first place was given to Vedic and Sanskrit language. As two teachers
belonging to the Samana tradition Mahavira and the Buddha used the Prakrit language in propagating
their doctrines. It seems that the Buddha has a liberal attitude toward the usage of the language.
All the Brahmanic teaching were respected to the Vedic and Sanskrit language but the Buddha always
encouraged His disciple to preach the Dhamma in various languages. Once two monks who belonged
to The Brahmanic culture namely: Yamelu and Tekula approached the Buddha and informed him that
the monks who came from various district and clans spoilt the Buddhas teaching with their various
languages. Therefore they asked the Buddhas permission to translate the Buddhas teachings into
Vedic language.
The Buddha has not only given permission to do this and he advised the monks to learn Buddhism in
any languages whatever they wish. As mentioned in the Visudhimagga the Niruttipatisambhida, one of
the four branches of knowledge of logical analysis means in a way the understanding of hundred
dialects. By this examples it is clear the Buddha encouraged His disciples to propagate the Dhamma in
various languages. Because of this reason at the end of first Buddhist Council the Buddhas teaching as
well as the disciples might have been in several languages.

After the Buddha passing a way the Vinaya rules laid down by him become the leader of the Sasana.
Therefore the disciples understood the importance of collecting and classifying the Buddhas teachings.
It seems that they also understood the importance of translating the Buddhas teaching into one
language form.
It was very easy for them because the similarity of all Indian dialects perhaps these tasks of translating
have been occurred during the period of the first Buddhist Council, which was held after three months
of the Buddhas demise. The Pali canon including three main sections as Sutta, Vinaya and
Abhidhamma can be considered as a result of the first, the second and the third Buddhist Councils.
When Ven. Mahinda introduced this Pali canon to Srilanka in the third century BC, its development
was further expanded. Ven. Mahinda brought Sinhalese Commentary on the Pali canon and these
Sihalese commentaries were traslated into the Pali in the fifth Century AD by the commentators such as
Ven. Buddhatta, Ven. Buddhaghosa, Ven. Upasena and Ven. Mahanama. Sri Lanka Pali literature
includes several stages such as Commentaries, sub-commentaries Poem and Compendium.
While the Pali literature of Srilanka was developing, there arose another kind of literature called Pali
traditional Grammar. In Sri Lanka we find two main groups of Pali traditional grammar books as
Kaccayanaand Moggallayana. In these texts, the noture of Pali language has been explained under
several headings, namely:
Nama, Sandhi, Samasa, Taddhita, Kitta, Akyata, Karana,Nipata, Upasaga, declension and
conjugation
Pali traditional grammarians consider this language as Magadhi, further more, they believe that this
Magadhi language is spoken by the Buddha, Brahmans, the original inhabitants on the earth and by the
people who have not heard any other languages. Because of this belief, they never compare this
language with the other Indian languages. They defined all terms of Pali language depending on their
wrong grammatical rule.

666ORIGIN OF PALI CANON AND PRESERVATION EFFORT

During the Buddhas long and successful career, he delivered many thousands of discourses using
diverse teaching style. Sometimes he simply delivered a talk, perhaps ending by summing up the talks
main theme in a verse, sometimes he used dialogue, employing striking analogies or simile to clarify
his point. these discourses, sayings and verses were remembered by those who heard them and passed
on to others, so that towards the end of the Buddhas career a huge body of oral teaching was in
circulation. Although writing was known at this time, no attempt was made to commit the Buddhas
discourse to writing because the ancient Indians considered memory to be more reliable than the
copyists pen and more durable than palm leaf books. In fact, long before the time of the Buddha, the

ancient Indians had developed and protected techniques of preserving literature in the memory to an
extraordinary degree.
When the Buddha attained final Nivirvana in Kusinara, one of his senior disciples, Mahakasapa, and a
group of other monks were on their way to Kusinara to meet the Buddha, not having as yet heard that
he had passed away. They met a wandering ascetic who told them that the Buddha had died some days
before. When they heard this some of the monks began to cry, but one, called Subbhada, who had
become a monk later in life, said:
Enough, friends, do not weep or cry! We are lucky to be rid of the Great recluse. He
was always bothering us by saying: it is fitting for you to do this, it is not fitting for
you to do that Now we can do or not do what we like.
Mahakasapa realized that if there were enough monks like Subhadda, disagreements about what the
Dhamma was would soon arise. So it was decided that three months latter, a great meeting would be
held where five hundred Arhants would discuss the Buddhas teachings, give them a structure, and then
recite them together and commit them to memory. This great meeting took place at the Sattapani Cave
in Rajagaha, and came to be know as the first Council. When the council convened, Mahakasaapa
addressed the five hundred assembled Araahants, saying:
Come, your reverences, let us recite the Dhamma and the Discipline before what is not
Dhamma shine out and what is Dhamma is obscured, before what is not discipline shine
out and what is Discipline is obscured, before those who speak what is not Dhamma
become strong and those who speak what is Dhamma become weak, before those who
speak what is not Discipline become strong and those who speak what is Discipline
become weak.
The assembly chose Upali to recite the rules for monks and nuns because it was a field
he was an expert in , and Ananda was chosen t recite the discourse because, having been
the Buddhas attendant and constant companion for twenty years, he has heard more
than anyone else. Parts of the discussion took the form of Mahakassapa putting
questions of Ananda.
Where, reverence Ananda, was the Brahmajala Sutta spoken?
Honorable sir, between Rajagaha and Nalanda in the royal rest house at Ambalatthika
With whom?
Suppiya the wanderer and Brahmadatta the Brahmin Youth
Then Mahakassapa questioned Ananda about the theme and details of the Samannaphala sutta.

Where, reverend Ananda, was the Samannaphala Sutta Spoken?

In Rajagaha, in Jivakas mango grove
With whom?
With Ajatasattu, the son of the Vidhan Lady.
In this way he questioned him about the Nikayas, and constantly questioned, Ananda answered,
Ananda answered. Ananda would commence answering the questions about each discourse by saying:
thus have I heard ( Evam me suttam), in the sense of this is what I remember hearing, and so most
discourses start with these words.
For the next few centuries, the Dhamma was carefully recited, remembered and passed on to others,
and although this was a task usually done by the monks and nuns, there is much evidence that both
laymen and lay women also knew the Dhamma by heart and played a part s other transmission. In the
scriptures, we read of a woman reciting parts of the Samyutta Nikayas 4. In the some Ancient
inscriptions dating from the 3rd century BC, the names of some lays persons are mentioned together
with their titles, which include reciter of Dhamma (Dhammakathika), a knower of a Basket
(betaken), a knower of a discourse( Suttantika) and a knower of the five Collections
(pancanekayika).
About a hundred years after the Buddha, there was another major council where seven concerning
leading monks met together, initially to discuss some disagreements concerning monastic rules, but
after this issue was resolved, they recited the whole of the Dhamma together. This was called the
Second Council, and took place in Vesali. Then about 230 years after the Buddha, King Asoka
convened a Third Council in his capital at Pataliputta, and once again the whole of the Dhamma was
recited. It was probably at this council that it was decided to include the books of the Abhidhamma as
the third part of the Buddhist scripture.
It is also probable that the Dhamma was committed to writing for the first time, although there is no
existing record of this being done until the year 50 BC in Sri Lanka where Buddhism had spread by
that time. From this time onwards, the Buddhist scripture were written in books made of palm leaves,
birch bark, silk, and finally in more recent times on paper. Thus have the words of the Buddha,
beautiful in the beginning, beautiful in the middle, and the beautiful at the end been carefully passed
down to us.

BUDDHIST COUNCIL
The Buddhist Councils took place in between the demise of the Buddha and the Asoka period. At the first
Buddhist Council, there was no Abhidhamma but they compiled the Vinaya and Sutta. Except the Vinaya and Sutta

what did they compile at the first Council for three months. In this Council, the work was approved that the collection
of the teaching, classification and agreement iin the teaching. We find in the Vinaya Piaka, mainly mentioned the
first and the 2nd Buddhist Councils.
The last sutta of the Dgha Nikya is very much doubtful, whether these suttas were really compiled in the
first council is still abstruse. In these two suttas, we find many technical terms and exaggeration of the discources.
Beside these two suttas, there is another sutta called Sampasdeniya Sutta of Dgha Nikya, the Brahmajla Sutta
rejects the two views, namely Sassatavda and Ucchedavda. While in the Sampasdaneya Sutta, Sriputta praised
the Buddha by saying anuttara, and further said sassatavda anuttaro. This is a very serious problem. We found,
in Brahmajla Sutta, the Buddha had completely rejected these two views. But in Sampasdaneya Sutta Sriputta
says the Buddha is excellent in the view of Sassatavda. In fact it doesnt mention of that Ucchedavda anuttaro...
How to prove that Clavasa is said by the Buddha, while it is made and recorded by his disciple. We have
to keep in mind that the cause led to hold the first Buddhist Council. The immediate cause was given the statement of
Subhadra. It relates thus some were very painful and grief of the passing away of the Buddha, whence Subhadra
while admonishing them to not to worry and they all are freed from bondages, earlier theywere bound under certain
rules and regulations, but now (they are) free to do anything they wish.

QUESTION: WHAT ARE THE TECHNIQUES OF THE LANGUAGE USED IN CANONICAL LITERATURE?
It is gradually believed that Pli arised from some spoken dialect of middle Indo-ryans. It belonged to the
first or early middle Indo-ryan stage. It has the characteristics of the middle Indo-ryan language. We can mention
here directly that it has never taken its origin from classical Sanskrit. Because there are some peculiarities, which
clearly signify that Vedas have some close relation with it.
With the help of the ancient Buddhists of the Hnayna school or the Theravda school, the Pli language and
its literature have developed in India. It has close connection with the Theravda school in India, because it was its
vehicle. So, we find the flourishing condition of Pli literature in India when the Theravda school played a great
role in the history of Buddhism.
But after arise of the Mahyna not only the Theravda school, but also the study of Pli gradually declined
in India. Pli and the Theravda school then took their home into Ceylon, they played a prominent part for more than
2000 years in the religious history of that country.
From Sri Lanka, Theravda Buddhism and Pli were introduced into Burma, Siam, Cambodia and Laos.
According to the orthodox theory, Pli is Mgadhi, Mgadhantrutti and Mgadhikabhasa. Pli scholars from Sri
Lanka, Siam, Cambodia belive, that Pli can be identified with the language of the Buddha. He used to stay in
Magadha most of his time.
It is quite natural that the language of Magadha was spoken by Him. For this reason Pli has been identified
with Magadhi. It is quite natural that the early Buddhist scriptures were composed in Magadhi in which the Buddha
spoke. It was the language of the place where the religion of the Buddha arose.
The Buddhist tradition says that the language of the Pli Tipiaka, which was the original canon, was the
language of the Buddha himself. Thus from the above facts it is clear that Magadhi was regarded as Mlabhasa or
the basic language. It was the language in which the words of the Buddha were originally fixed.
According to the Buddhists of the Hnayna or the Theravda school, the language of Magadha was the
speech of the Buddha. This was regarded as the Mlabhasa, the primary speech of all men. This was spoken by men
of the primeval epoch, by the Brahmins and by the Buddhas. The natural speech of many which alone would be
spoken if human beings were thought(?) no other language.

QUESTION: EXAMINE HOW ALL THE WORDS OF THE BUDDHA INCORPORATED INTO DHAMMA-VINAYA AT THE FIRST
COUNCIL.
The first council was held at Rjagha immediately after the passing away of the Buddha. Ven. Mahkassapa

presided over the assembly where ven. Upli and ven. nanda took an important part. The first council settled the
Dhamma-Vinaya:
Handa mayam avuso dhammaca vinyoca sanghayeymi.
Oh, monks, it is better to rehearse Dhamma and Vinaya preached by the Buddha.
There is no ground for the view that added the term Abbhi Abhidhamma and Abhivinaya.
In this council the Vinaya texts were settled under the leadership of ven. nanda.
Ven. Buddhaghosa have put the entire Vinaya Piaka into the first Aga in sutta saying in his definition
Upatovibhanga, Khandhaka, and Parivra at the first council. There was not Parivra Pi, because it is an appendix into
the Vinaya Piaka actually written in Sri Lanka. According to the tradition, five Vinaya books were rehearsed in the first
council, but relevant chapter of Clavagga Pi, Pacasatikhandhaka were rehearsed in the first council. Upatovinaya was
recited: Etena upayena upato vinaye pucchi. There are three main parts of Upatovinaya:
(1)
Upato vibhaga (Prjika and Pcittiya Pi)
(2)
Upato ptimokkha (Bhikkhu and Bhikkhun)
(3)
Pabbajita and Gahatthavinaya (for monks and laymen)
Ven. Mahkassapa asked question on Vinaya from ven. Upli:
(1)
Vatthu the reasons for acted Vinaya rules (?)
(2)
Nidna place where the particular principle took place (in Svatthi)
(3)
Puggala person who caused it
(4)
Paatti Vinaya rules
(5)
Anupaatti revised versions

(1)

(d)

There are five sections of Vinaya Piaka at this present time:

Vibhanga
(a)
4 Prjika
(b)
13 Saghdisesa
(c)
2 Aniyat
30 Nissaggiyapcittiya

(2)

Khandhaka
(a)
Mahvagga (contains 10 khandhakas)
(b)
Clavagga (contains 12 khandhakas)

(3)

Parivra Pi (an appendix of Vinaya Piaka)

(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)

92 Suddha pcittiya
4 Patidesaniya
75 Sekhiya
7 Adhikaranasamatha

The Dhamma or the Suttapiaka has five nikyas. There is a stanza in commentary:
Thapetv caturopete nikyedika adite dadanna budhavacana nikyo khuddako maggo.
Among the five nikyas the first four are very important because at the first council 4 nikyas were put in the Sutta
Piaka while the last one (Khuddaka nikya) was not considered as the Buddha's teaching, according to Theravda Pli
tradition.
There are 34 discourses in the Dgha nikya, 152 in the Majjhimanikya, 7762 in the Samyutta nikya and 9557 in
the Aguttara nikya. There are 64 bhanavra incorporated in the Dgha nikya, 80 in Majjhima nikya, 100 in the
Samyutta nikya and 120 in the Aguttara nikya.
At the beginning Khuddaka nikya had few books, Suttanipta, Thergth etc. But later many books
were added. After increasing books the Khuddaka nikya became a collection of 15 books.

QUESTION: GIVE THE MEANING OF THE TERM SUTTA AND VINAYA AND SHOW THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THEM.
(LECTURED BY VEN. PIYARATANA) (1)
Sutta
According to some scholars the term sutta is a string, threat, a powertion of the Buddhist scripture, a rule
etc. They mentioned further that a certain chapter or division of the Buddhist scriptures are known as suttas. The classical
meaning of the term sutta is discourses. They may either we found in verse or in clause and in lend they very from a few
lines to several thousands.(?) Some scholars say that the term sutta, in Vedic stra we state in history the path of the
Buddhist scripture which contained suttas or dialogues and it is the Sutta Piaka.(?) They state that it is reule-clause
dialogue of a Buddhist text, a discourse and ancient verse, a book or rule, text bobok, a sutta, a chapter of the scripture and
one of the division or the scripture. As we mentioned before, ven. Buddhaghosa explained the meaning of the term sutta:
ahna suttacana suttato svanato sdanato suttana sutta sabhgatoca.
According to some scholars sutta or stra is buddha vacana or the word of the Buddha. Some scholars believed
a sutta is complete in itself consisting of a connected narrative or collection of verses on one subject, some of them are
didactic and consist mainly or wholly of a discourse of Buddha in phrase or verse as most of the suttas of the Suttanipta.
Others are historical, like the Mahparinibbna Sutta, which relates the last day of Buddha. Thus the above fact gives an
account of the definition of the term sutta. From these we can conclude that the term sutta is a rule, a discourse, dialogue of
a Buddhist text. A chapter or one of the divisions of the scriptures the term Vinaya means putting away, subbing(?),
conversion, training, discipline of a portion of the Buddhist scripture.

Vinaya
Some scholars said that vinaya is law and it covers the Buddhist monks and it is mentioned in the Vinaya Piaka.
Ven. Buddhaghosa explained after passing away of the Buddha at the first council the Vinaya Piaka was rehearsed first
because Vinaya is the age of the Buddhist dispensation: Vinayonma ssansayo vinaye hite ssanaca hita hoti. It
steps further than savara and pahna are two sorts of Vinaya or discipline and they are discipline or restraint and
discipline of getting rid of evil state. He again described vinaya as removal of blame. Some scholars gave a description of
the term vinaya as the term vinaya in Sanskrit and Pli term vinaya translated into English discipline specially refers to
the prescribed move(?) of conduct in convent upon Buddhist monks and nuns. The word Vinaya is formed by combining the
prefix. Vinaya meaning different, distinction, apart, away from. The words root -ni means to lead, when combined
they(?) meaning to lead away(?) from vinaya is the reified(?) noun four(?) of this term and meaning that with separate or
that with removed.(?) Within the context of Buddhist monasticism, it refers to the code of behavioral discipline that at once
the life to the householder and that monks together into a comment(?) affective bond.(?) In this sense vinaya is that which
separates or leads away from the householders way of life.
It can also refer to the practice of mental discipline that removes unhealthy states of mind from the monks
disposition in either sense of the term. Vinaya is regarded as the effective expression or primitive implementation of the
Buddha's teaching. It is precept put into practice.

QUESTION: GIVE THE MEANING OF THE TERM SUTTA AND VINAYA AND SHOW THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THEM. (2)
According to some scholars, the term sutta is described as a string or thread. And also a part of the Buddhist
scripture, which treaded as flower(?) is known as sutta. They further mention that a certain chapters or divisions of the
Buddhist scripture, which contain verses, prose or dialogues, text book, are known as suttas. The classical meaning of the
term sutta is a discourse. But the term Vinaya is defined as discipline or training.
Ven. Buddhaghosa explained the meaning of the term sutta as ahna scanato, suvuttato savanatotha
sdananto, suttn suttasabhgato ca suttanti akkhta. According to some scholars, sutta is Buddhavacana or the word
of the Buddha. they believed that a sutta is complete in itself consisting of a connected narrative or collection of verse on
one subject. Some of them are didactic and consist mainly or wholly of a discourse of Buddha in prose r verse, as most of
the suttas of the Suttanipta, others are historical, as the Mahparinibbna Sutta, which relates the last days of Buddha etc.

The term Vinaya is derived from (Vi + n + aya), with the combining of prefix vi, the root ni and the suffix aya
form the word Vinaya. It means putting away, destruction, rule, conversation, training, norm of conduct, code of
ethics, monastic discipline, rules of morality or of canon law. In this sense applied to the large collection of rules which
grew up ion the monastic life and the habits of the bhikkhus and which forms the ecclesiastical introduction to the Dhamma,
or theoretical, philosophical part of the Buddhist canon.
Ven. Buddhaghosa explains: vividhavisesanayatt, vinayato ceva kyavcna, vinayatthavidhi aya vinayo
vinayoti kkhto. Because it shows precepts and principles, and governs both deeds and word, therefore, men called this
Vinaya. This was rehearsed first at the first council, because it is the age of the Buddhist dispensation - Vinayo nma
ssanassa yu vinaye hite ssanaca hita hoti. He explains further that Savara and Pahana are two sorts of
vinaya. The discipline of restraint and discipline of getting rid of evil states. He again describes Vinaya as removal of
blame.
Some scholars say that tem vinaya came from Sanskrit and Pli, and translated it into English as discipline. It is
specially regarded as the priestly code of law, the prescribed modes of conduct in convent upon Buddhist monks and nuns.
Vinaya is that which separates or leads away from the householders way of life. It can also refer to the practice of
mental discipline that removes unhealthy states of mind. In either sense of the term, Vinaya is regarded as the effective
expression or pragmatic implementation of the Buddha's teaching, that is precept put into practice.

666THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN DHAMMA AND VINAYA

Dhamma was there for the monks even before vinaya precepts were laid down.

During the early period of the formation of Buddhist Sangha, all the Bhikkhus were of high
moral standard, they were arahants. With these 60 arahant disciples went in all directions to preach the
Dhamma, the Sangha started to grow tremendously. Many people seek to enter the Order to lead the
holy life in order to put an end of their suffering. With their simple motivation and firm faith towards
the Buddha and Dhamma, no disciplinary rules were needed to regulate their conduct or to safeguard
the well-being of the Sangha. They were all genious Bhikkhus who lived a very simple life and strive
hard for their emancipation.

1.Dhamma and Vinaya

The basis teachings of the Buddha are Dhamma and Vinaya. Dhamma means doctrine and Vinaya
means discipline. These are the only two subjects of studies taught by the Buddha.
The primary concern of the Dhamma is intended for the disciples to understand and realize. It is

also a subject of study, argument and interpretation. On the other hand, Vinaya is a way of life, which
the disciples have to live up to. It is more on regulating the conduct and thus not so much literature
based.
All the doctrines can be grouped under Dhamma and all the

precepts, rules or regulations under Vinaya. The Buddha advises the disciples to treat his Dhamma and
Vinaya as their teacher after his parinibbana. This shows that the teachings of the Buddha are basically
classified in these two areas of studies.

In Dhamma there is no compulsory forcing, one can understand its value and encouragement
can be given. In the dhamma there is no orders to follows, there is only advise to abstain from bad and
to do good. For example, in the Dhamma stealing is not given punishment, in the Vinaya it is a
parajika. The following statements are important:
- The Dhammapada says thus: attanaj upamaj katva na haneyya na ghataya Dhamma.
- The Buddha advised the monks to take one meal for the sake of good health Dhamma.
- In the Vinaya there is order when the range is different: panaj na hene, musa na bhase.
- According to Dhamma, the language was not harsh, the dhamma is for the wise people and not
for the fool. Pabbavantassayaj dhammmo nayaj dhammo duppabbassa.
- Dhamma is loving in the beginning, loving in the middle and loving in the end. (adikalyanaj
magghekalyanaj pariyosana kalyanaj)
The Dhamma and Vinaya later became two fields. For example: dhammo ca dessito vinayo ca
pabbato. Therefore like that, they became 2 fields. In Vinaya no attention given to precepts e.g.,
parajika, paccittiya ect. Breaking these precepts punishment are given, then legal administration with 7
adhikaranasamatha.
Vinaya is for the whole community (sangha). Everything was considered as a unity, as a whole
and thereby monks became a united group. Because asavatthaniya dhamma appears, vinaya rules were
promulgated. Vinaya rules gradually change, some additional rules came in. With the development of
vinaya rules, vassa season and paravana ceremony was formed. Kathina rules came in, recitation of
patimokkha was introduced. The Khadhaka explains lot of vinaya rules with regard to monastic life as
connection between ukkhepaniyakamma, patisaraniyakamma, tajjaniyakamma, nissaggiyakamma.

The meaning of Vinaya in Buddhist context.

Buddhism is comprised of Dhamma and Vinaya. What is preached by the Buddha is known as
Dhamma. What he promulgated, namely sikkhapadas, is Vinaya. Both Dhamma and Vinaya are often
called the doctrine and the discipline respectively. In a boarder sense, Vinaya encompasses rules, which
regulate the outward conduct of both the Sangha and the laity. But in a strict sense, Vinaya refers to
rules regulating the external conduct of the Bhikkhus and the Bhikkhunis.
There are altogether 220 rules of Vinaya for every Bhikkhu to observe. They are categorized as:

Parajika 4, Savghdisesa 13, Aniyata 2, Nissaggiya 30, Pacittiya 92, Patidesaniya 4 and Sekhiya 75. All
these rules regulating the outward conduct of the Bhikkhus and thus helping them to gain full
emancipation from sufferings.
There are two types of patimokkha, namely:
1.

Ovada- patimokkha

2.

Ana- patimokkha

Ovada- patimokkha was prevailence in the Sasana before the Buddha laid down the
vinaya rules. Ovada- patimokkha means the way how monks were kept united. Anapatimokkha means the vinaya rules which were laid down later.
During the time of the previous Buddhas, there were three stanzas which were
called patimokkha (ovada- patimokkha) i.e.,
1.

Sabbapapassa akaranaj
kusalassa upasmpada
sacittapariyodapanaj
etaj buddhana sasanaj.
Not to do any evil,
To cultivate good,
To purify ones mind,
This is the teaching of the Buddhas.

2.

Khanti paramaj tapo titikkha

Nibbanaj paramaj vadanti buddha.
Na hi pabbajito parupaghati
samana hoti paraj vihothayanto.
Forbearing patience is the highest austerity.
Nibbana is supreme, Said the Buddha,
He, verily, is not a recluse who harms another,
Nor is he an asceticwho oppresses others.

3.

Anupavado anupaghato,
patimokkhe ca sajvaro
mattabbuta ca bhattasmij
panthab ca sayanasanaj.
Adhicitte ca ayogo
Etam buddhana sasanam
Not insulting, not harming,
restraint according topatimokkha,

moderaation in food, secluded abode,

intend in higher thoughts
This is the teaching of the Buddhas.
The monk now and then got together and recollected and
contemplated on these three stanzas. But later as the number of monks increased, this
was not enough, and vinaya rules came in. These vinaya rules were laid down by the
Buddha for various reasons, e.g.,
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

For the well-being of monks.

For the comfort of monks.
To insult those who are not controlled.
To praise those who are well controlled.
To suppress defilement already arisen.
To not allow the arising of defilement which are not arisen.
For the appealing of those without faith.
For the appealing of those already with faith.
For the stability of the doctrine.
For the favour of the Vinaya itself.

Therefore, at the first stage patimokkha was not meant vinaya rules. It was something
connected with unity and it forms the foundation. The aim was to do away with various
differences. It was a binding power among the monks and also between the teacher and the
pupils. It was not to be followed individually but to be followed as a group.
After the First Council, the place held by patimokkha was given over to the vinaya
rules. Hence thereafter, vinaya rules were known as patimokkha. The Bhikkhus had 227
rules and the Bhikkhunis had 311.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Parajika
Sanghidisesa
Aniyata
Nissagiya pacittiya
Pacittiya
Patidesaniya
Sekhiya
Abhikarana samatha
Total 227

Bhikkhu
4
13
2

Bhikkhuni
8
17
0

30

30
166

92
4
75
7

8
75
7

311

These vinaya rules are like the rules in a society, all the members of the Sangha are

bound by these rules. They have to undergo punishment if they break the rules.
Patimokkha is the original text of Vinaya. It depicts the essence of the Vinayapitaka. Not only the dispensation of the Sangha, but the Buddha Sasana also depends on
patimokkha. The Buddha had advised the monks to held patimokkha recitation
(patimokkhuddesa) once a forth-night (uposatha).
The teachers of the Atthakatha say thus:
Although the tipitaka disappear, since the vinaya is there the sasana will continue,
even though parivara disappear, the ubhato-vibhavga is there, although vinaya-topics
disppear, since upasampada is there, the sasana will exist.
According to the commentary, it is said that:
Vinaya nama Buddhasasanassa ayu
Vinaya indeed is the life of the Buddhasasana.
Therefore, patimokkha is very importance in Buddhism, as the Buddhasasana
depends on none other, but patimokkha.
Rev. Janaka Soikhamseng

666THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN DHAMMA AND VINAYA.

The definition of Dhamma and Vinaya is old and confirm by the Buddha. in the
Mahaparinibbana Sutta, Buddha says: dhammo ca dessito vinayo ca pabbato. In these words the
Buddha interpretation can be seen. After 20 years of enlightenment vinaya became precepts which
were enforced. Before 20 years of enlightenment dhamma and vinaya were taken together. After 20
years vinaya became precept. After the first parajika, vinaya precept became numerous. During the
early days dhamma was really vinaya. For example: ahaj svakate dhammavinaye pabbajjitva.
Is it suitable to use dhamma and vinaya side by side?

it is suitable because other religious teachers also had dhamma and vinaya and it is said so
according to Buddhist literature.
For example: icchamahaj avuso kalama imasmij dhammavinaye bramacariyaj carituj. I like
to practice this brahmacariiya in this dhamma and vinaya.
Therefore it is suitable to use dhamma and vinaya together because when you say dhamma it
includes vinaya also.
Then Buddha says teaching dhamma is twofold, namely, pariyatti and patipatti.

Early these two terms (dhamma and vinaya) were used in the sense of relativity and in the sense of
similarity. Dhamma means ethical background yet within this ethical background there is disciplinary

behaviour also.
Vinaya began after anadesana. It is for bhikkhus and bhikkhunis. Therefore vinaya became a new
interpretation with limited excluding layman. The aim of dhamma is reaching emancipation. In the path
the monks are quicked than the layman. Dhamma is different because it should be understood
individually being isolated from a group.
Difference of Dhamma from Vinaya

In Dhamma there is no compulsory forcing, one can understand its value and encouragement
can be given. In the dhamma there is no orders to follows, there is only advise to abstain from bad and
to do good. For example, in the Dhamma stealing is not given punishment, in the Vinaya it is a
parajika. The following statements are important:
- The Dhammapada says thus: attanaj upamaj katva na haneyya na ghataya Dhamma.
- The Buddha advised the monks to take one meal for the sake of good health Dhamma.
- In the Vinaya there is order when the range is different: panaj na hene, musa na bhase.
- According to Dhamma, the language was not harsh, the dhamma is for the wise people and not
for the fool. Pabbavantassayaj dhammmo nayaj dhammo duppabbassa.
- Dhamma is loving in the beginning, loving in the middle and loving in the end. (adikalyanaj
magghekalyanaj pariyosana kalyanaj)
Dhamma was there for the monks even before vinaya precepts were laid down. The Dhamma and
Vinaya later became two fields. For example: dhammo ca dessito vinayo ca pabbato. Therefore like
that, they became 2 fields. In Vinaya no attention given to precepts e.g., parajika, paccittiya ect.
Breaking these precepts punishment are given, then legal administration with 7 adhikaranasamatha.
Vinaya is for the whole community (sangha). Everything was considered as a unity, as a whole
and thereby monks became a united group. Because asavatthaniya dhamma appears, vinaya rules were
promulgated. Vinaya rules gradually change, some additional rules came in. With the development of
vinaya rules, vassa season and paravana ceremony was formed. Kathina rules came in, recitation of
patimokkha was introduced. The Khadhaka explains lot of vinaya rules with regard to monastic life as
connection between ukkhepaniyakamma, patisaraniyakamma, tajjaniyakamma, nissaggiyakamma.

666GIVE THE MEANING OF TERM SUTTA AND VINAYA SHOW THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THEM
1-According to some scholars, the term Sutta described as a string thread. And also a part of the
Buddhist scripture, which treaded as flower is known as Sutta. They further mention that a certain
chapters or divisions of the Buddhist scripture, which conations, verse prose or dialogues, text book,
are known as Sutta. The classical meaning of the term Sutta is a discourse.But the term Vinaya is
defined as discipline or training.
Ven. Buddhagosa explained the meaning of the term Sutta as atthanam sucanato suttan suttasabhagato
ca suttan ti akkhatam. According to some scholars, Sutta is Buddhavcana or the word of the
Buddha. Theybelieved that a Sutta is completed narrative or collection of verse on one subject. Some of

them are didactic and consist mainly of wholly of a discourse of Buddha in prose or verse others are
historical, as most of the sutta of the Suttanipata, others are historical, as the Mahaparinibban stta,
which relates the last days of Buddha etc.
3- The term Vinayaderived from (Vi + ni + aya), with the combining of prefix Vi the root Ni and
the suffix Ayaforms the word Vinaya. It means putting away, destruction, rule, conversation,
training,norm of conduct, code of ethics, monastic discipline, rules of morality or canon law. In these
sense applied to the large collection of rules which grew up in the monastic life and the habits of the
bhikkhus and which form the ecclesiastical introduction to the dhamma or theoretical. Philosophical
part of the Buddhist canon.
4-Ven. Buddhagosa explains that vividhavisesanayatta, vinayato ceva kayavacanam vinayatthaviduhi
ayam, vinayo Vinayoti akkhato. Because it shows precepts and principles, and governs both deeds
and word, therefore men called this Vinaya. This was reheard first at the first council, because it is the
age of the Buddhist dispensation vinayo nama sasasnassa ayu7 vinaye thite sasnancathitam hoti. He
explains further that Samvaram and Pahanam are two sorts of Vinaya. The discipline of restraint and
discipline of getting rid of evil states. He again describes Vinaya as removal of blame.
5- Some scholars say the term vinay came from a Sanskrit and Pali. And translated into English as
discipline, it is specially regarded as the priestly code of law, the prescribed of conduct incumbent
upon Buddhist monks and nuns.
6- Vinaya is that which separates or leads away from the householders way of life. It can also refer to
the practice of mental discipline that removes unhealthy states of mind. In either sense of the term,
Vinaya is regarded as the effective expression of pragmatic; implementation of the Buddhas teaching
that is precept put into practice.

Sutta pitaka
The sutta pitaka is a collection of all the discourses in their entirely delivered by the Buddha on
various occasions. A few discourses delivered by some of distinguish disciples of the Buddha,
such as the venerable Sariputta, Maha Mogallana, Anana, etc. as well as some narratives are also
included in the book of the Sutta pitaka. The discourses of the Buddha compiled together in the
Sutta pitaka were expound to suit different occasion, for various persons with different
temperaments.
Although the discourses were mostly intended for the benefit of bhikkhus, and deals with the
practice of the pure life and with the exposition of the teaching, there several other discourses
deal with the material and moral progress of the lay disciples. The Sutta pitaka brings out the
meaning of the Buddhas teaching, expresses them clearly, protect and guards them against
distortion and misconstruction, just like a string which senses as plumb-line to guide the
carpenters in their work, just like a thread which protects flowers from being scattered or
dispersed when strung together by it, likewise, by means of Sutta, the meaning of Buddhas

teaching may be brought out clearly, grasped and understood correctly and given perfect
protection from being misconstrued.
This Sutta pitaka is divided into five separate collections known as Nikaya, among are: 1Dighanikaya (collection of long discourses) 2- Majjhima nikaya (collection of middle, length
discourses) 3- Samyutta nikaya (collection of kindred sayings) 4Anguttara nikaya (collection of
discourses arranged in according with number) 5Khuddaka nikaya (small collection). In the Sutta
pitaka are also found not only fundamentals of the Dhamma meaningful applicable to daily life.
All observances and practices which practical steps in Buddhas noble path of eight constituents
lead to spiritual purification at three levels. they are: 1-Sila moral purity through right conduct 2Samadhi purity of mind through concentration(samatha) 3- Panna purity of insight through
vipassana meditation. To begin with, one must make the right resolution to take refuge in the
Buddha, to follow the buddhas teaching, and to be guided by the Sangha.
The first disciples who made the declaration of faith in the Buddha and committed themselves to
follow his teaching were the two merchant brothers, Tassa and Bhallika , they were traveling with
their follows in five hundred carts when they saw the Buddha in the vincinity of the Bodhi tree
after his enlightenment. The two merchants offered him honey-rice cakes. According to their
offering and thus breaking the fast he had imposed on himself for seven weeks, the Buddha made
them his disciples by letting them recite after him. Buddham saranam gacchami, dhammam
saranam gacchami.
This recitation became the formula of declaration of faith in the Buddha and his teaching. Later
when the Sangha become established, the formula was extended do include the third
commitment: Sangham saranam gacchami. 467

By ven santa

666ILLUSTRATE WITH EXAMPLES THE TRADITIONAL CLASSIFICATIONS OF THE EARLY BUDDHIST TEACHINGS. 689

Buddhaghosa gives several ways of classifying the Canon. He states in his Samantapasadika, a commentary of
Vinaya Pitaka that it is uniform in sentiment, twofold as regards the dhamma and the vinaya, threefold as regards the first,
middle and last words, and also as regards the Pitakas, fivefold as regards the Nikayas, ninefold as regards the avgas and
forming 84,000 divisions according to the units of the Dhamma.
Traditionally, the early Buddhist teachings can be classified into:
1.Dhamma and Vinaya
2.Tipitaka

3.Five Nikayas
4.Nine Avgas

1.Dhamma and Vinaya

The basis teachings of the Buddha are Dhamma and Vinaya. Dhamma means doctrine and Vinaya means discipline.
These are the only two subjects of studies taught by the Buddha.
The primary concern of the Dhamma is intended for the disciples to understand and realize. It is also a subject of
study, argument and interpretation. On the other hand, Vinaya is a way of life, which the disciples have to live up to. It is
more on regulating the conduct and thus not so much literature based.
All the doctrines can be grouped under Dhamma and all the precepts, rules or regulations under Vinaya. The Buddha
advises the disciples to treat his Dhamma and Vinaya as their teacher after his parinibbana. This shows that the teachings of
the Buddha are basically classified in these two areas of studies.

2.Tipitaka
After the first Buddhist Council, only Sutta-pitaka and Vinaya-pitaka were complied. Abhidhamma-pitaka only
came into being after the third Buddhist Council during the time of king Asoka. The contents of these three pitakas are:
1. Vinaya Pitaka. (1)

2. Sutta Pitaka
(2)

3. Abhidhamma Pitaka

Parajika
(2) Pacittiya
(3)
Mahavagga
(4)
Cullavagga
(5) Parivara

(1)
Digha Nikaya
Majjhima Nikaya
(3)
Sajyutta Nikaya
(4)
Avguttara Nikaya
(5)
Khuddaka Nikaya
(1) Dhammasavgani
(2) Vibhavga
(3) Dhatukatha
(4) Puggala-pabbatti
(5) Kathavatthu
(6) Yamaka
(7) Patthana

3.Five Nikayas
There are two references to the five nikayas found in later passages in the Vinaya-pitaka, they are pabca nikaye
pucchi (Vin. II, 28-28) and nikaye pabca vacesuj (Vin. V. 3, 5)

Although Buddhaghosa used the word nikaya in such a way that the term pabca nikaya can be used to include the
whole canon (i.e. Vinaya and Abhidhamma are grouped under Khuddaka Nikaya). The word is used in modern time only
for the five nikayas of the Sutta-pitaka. These five nikayas are;

(1) Digha Nikaya - 34 longer suttas in three volumes

(2) Majjhima Nikaya - 152suttas of middle length.
(3) Samyutta Nikaya - 7662 suttas grouped under 56 samyuttas.
(4) Anguttara Nikaya - 9557 suttas arranged in numerical order (from 1 to 11)
(5) Khuddaka Nikaya - contains 15 small books i.e.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)

khuddakapatha
dhammapada
Udana
Itivuttaka
Suttanipata
Vimanavatthu
Petavatthu
Theragatha
Therigatha
Jataka
Niddesas
Patisambhidamagga
Apadana
Buddhavamsa
Cariyapitaka

The Burmese tradition includes 4 other books

(1) Nettipakarana
(2) Petakopadesa
(3) Milindapabha
(4) Sutta-sangaha

4.The Nine Avgas

The earliest and the usual classification of the canon found in the canonical text (e.g. M.N. I. 133) is that of the nine
avgas. This is known as Navavga-satthu-sasana or Navavga-buddha-sasana the ninefold teaching of the Buddha,
they are,

1.

Sutta

prose

2.

Geyya

instruction in mixed prose and verse

3.

Veyyakarana

expositions commentaries

4.

Gatha

verses

5.

Udana

ecstatic utterances

6.

Itivuttaka

7.

Jataka

8.

Abbhutadhamma -

descriptions of supernatural power

9.

Vedalla

brief sayings

legends of Bodhisatta in his previous births.

Massage in the form of questions and answers.

This classification is merely a description of literary types and not a division of textual compartment. It does not refer
to 9 different groups of literature but to 9 types of composition to be found in the canonical text. In a single sutta, there may
be portions which can be described as a sutta, geyya, gatha, udana, veyyakarana, abbhutadhamma or jataka. Thus it is clear
that these 9 avgas are the different modes of expositions adopted by the Buddha in his preaching.
Finally, from quite a mechanical point of view, as what Wilhelm Geiger has put it, the canon is divided into 84,000
Dhammakkhandhas, i.e. individual pieces or lectures.

666WHAT ARE THE PRINCIPLES THAT HAVE BEEN CONSIDERED IN THE CLASSIFICATION OF PALI CANON? 744 (823)

The Theravada pali canon consists of three sections, namely Vinaya, Sutta and Abhidhamma Pitakas

1. Vinaya Pitaka
The Vinaya Pitaka is made up of rules of discipline laid down for regulating the conduct of the Buddhas disciples
who have been admitted as Bhikkhus and Bhikkhunis into the Order. These rules embody authoritative injunctions of the
Buddha on modes of conduct and restraints on both physical and verbal actions. It consists of 5 books:

(1) Parajika
(2) Pacittiya
(3) Mahavagga

(4) Culavagga
(5) parivara

2. Sutta Pitaka

Sutta Pitaka is a collection of all the discourses in their entirely delivered by the Buddha on
various occasions (some by the disciples). It is divided into five collections known as nikayas:

(1)

Digha Nikaya

- collection of long discourses (34 suttas)

(2)

Majjhima Nikaya collection of Middle length discourses

(3) Sajyutta Nikaya collection of Kindred Saying

(152 suttas)

(7762 suttas)

(4) Avguttara Nikaya collection of arragned in accordance with number

(9557 suttas)
(5)

Khuddaka Nikaya smaller collection (15 texts)

There are 15 books in the fifth collection according to Sri Lankan tradition. They are:
(1)

Khuddaka-patha

(2)

Dhammapada

(3)

Udana

(4)

Itivuttaka

(5)

Sutta-nipata

(6)

Vimana-vatthu

(7)

Peta-vatthu

(8)

Theragatha

(9)

Therigatha

(10) Jataka
(11) Niddesa
(12) Patisajbhida-magga
(13) Apadana
(14) Buddhavajsa
(15) Cariya-pitaka

3. Abhidhamma Pitaka
The Abhidhamma Pitaka is the third great section of the Canon. It deals with a system of classification, analytical
enumeration and definitions. The Abhidhamma resolved all phenomena into ultimate components analytically it aims as
synthesis by defining inter-relations between the various constituent factors.
The Abhidhamma Pitaka consists of 7 books:
1. Dhammasavgani
2. Vibhavga
3. Dhatuvatthu
4. Puggala-pabbatti
5. Kathavatthu
6. Yamaka
7. Patthana

There are several considerations of the classification of Vinaya and Dhamma during the 1st council. The main
principle that the Elders considered was the sizes of the Buddhas teaching. This consideration was made because at that
time the only method of preservation of the Buddhas teachings was memorizing by regular recitation. Therefore the Sutta
is classified according to their length into Digha, Majjhima, Sajyutta and Avguttara.
Another consideration is according to the characteristic of the teachings. Although Dhammacakkappavattana Sutta
is the first Sutta preached by the Buddha, but is not collected as the first sutta in the canon. Here the consideration is put on
the beginner and the preacher as well. It can be understood from the following characteristics of the Suttas:

(1) Digha Nikaya has the characteristic of promoting firmly faith, because it has its historical value. It discusses
social, political, philosophical, cultural and religious history of ancient India at the time of the Buddha. It also
includes the principle teachings of Sila, Samadhi and Pabba.

(2) Majjhima Nikaya, here we find discussion on almost all points of religion of the Buddha, on the Four Noble
Truths and kamma, on the reprehensibility of the belief in the soul etc. Thus, a brief characteristic is given, such
as destroyer of heretical opinions.

(3) Sajyutta Nikaya is mentioned as A compilation of suttas with their main bearings on psycho-ethical and
philosophical problems. Its characteristic is that it helps to analysis the doctrine intelligently and contributes to
our knowledge of the doctrine of the Buddha.

(4) Avguttara Nikaya constitutes an important source book on Buddhist psychology and ethics, which provides an
enumerated summary of all the essential features concerning the theory and practice of the Dhamma. Therefore,
its characteristic is helps to preach the interesting doctrines, and it is explained as filling with joy about the
explanation of all agamas.

According to another classification, mentioned by the Buddha himself, the whole teaching is ninefold known as
Navavga-satthu-sasana. This is the earliest and the usual classification of the canon. They are:

1.

Sutta

prose

2.

Geyya

instruction in mixed prose and verse

3.

Veyyakarana

expositions commentaries

4.

Gatha

verses

5.

Udana

ecstatic utterances

6.

Itivuttaka

7.

Jataka

8.

Abbhutadhamma -

descriptions of supernatural power

9.

Vedalla

brief sayings

legends of Bodhisatta in his previous births.

Massage in the form of questions and answers.

The traditional classifications of the pali canon. Buddhaghosa gives several ways of classification. He states in his
Samantapasadika that it is uniform in sentiment. Twofold as regards the dhamma and the vinaya. Threefold as regards the
first, middle and last words, and also as regards the Pitakas. Fivefold as regards the Nikayas. Ninefold as regards the avgas
and forming 84,000 divisions according to the units of the Dhamma.

666WHAT ARE THE PRINCIPLES THAT HAVE BEEN CONSIDERED IN THE CLASSIFICATION OF PALI CANON? 792

The Theravada pali canon consists of three sections, namely Vinaya, Sutta and Abhidhamma Pitakas
1. Vinaya Pitaka
The Vinaya Pitaka is made up of rules of discipline laid down for regulating the conduct of the Buddhas disciples.
It consists of 5 books:
(1) Parajika
(2) Pacittiya
(3) Mahavagga
(4) Culavagga
(5) parivara

2. Sutta Pitaka
Discussing the modern views on the chronology of the sutta pitaka. 693

According to Pali tradtion recorded in canonical and non-canonical literature, three Buddhist Councils were held to
draw up the canonical texts and the creed in their pure form.
The Tipitaka is a gradual process The evidences can be seen in the canon itself. The Cullavagga mentions the 1st and
2nd Councils as Vinaya or Dhamma vinaya councils; Abhidhamma is not mentioned. However, it is mentioned that
Kathavatthu is composed at time of the 3rd council.
According to Cullavagga, the five Nikayas were questioned during the 1st council. Thus, the Theravada has a belief
that Khuddaka Nikaya was rehearsed during the First Council. The existence of the Khuddaka Nikaya at the time of the
First Council still remains to be proved. It is obvious that the texts of the khuddaka Nikaya are not chronologically ordered
in the early sources.
It is mentioned in the Sumangalavilasini that both the Vinaya and the 4 nikayas were handed to their bhanakas during
the 1st Council, but the Khuddaka Nikaya has not been mentioned any such handing-over. Instead, there were Jataka-

bhanakas and Dhammapada-bhanakas, but no Khuddaka Nikaya bhanakas.

Besides the problem of the existence of the Khuddaka Nikaya during the First Council, there are also various views
regarding the number and the order of texts in the Khuddaka Nikaya.
The Samantapasadika states that Vinaya Pitaka and the Abhidhamma Pitaka and all the teachings of the Buddha not
included in the remaining 4 Nikayas are regarded as forming the Khuddaka Nikaya.
According to the Burmese tradition, there are 19 texts in the Khuddaka Nikaya, but in the Siamese tradition, there are
only 7 texts; in the Saddharmaratnakaraya, 12; the Dharmaguptika vinaya 13; and in the Saratthadipani 14. Thus the number
of the texts are obvious differ, so is the order.
It is quite obvious that the reference made to the order of Nikayas resulted in various opinions and has drawn much
attention of the scholars.
Therefore with regard to the views of the chronology of Sutta Pitaka, there are two arguments put forwards by 2
modern scholars: Rhys Davids and B.C. Law.
According to Rhys Davids the four Nikayas had been put together of older material at a period about halfway between
the death of the Buddha and the accession of Asoka. In his Buddhist India, he has given a chronological table of Buddhist
literature from the time of the Buddha to the time of Asoka which is as follows:

1.

The simple statements of Buddhist doctrine now found, in identical words, in paragraphs or verses recurring in all the
books.

2.

Episodes found, in identical words, in two or more of the existing books.

3.

The Silas, the Parayana, the Octades, the Patimokkha.

4.

The Digha, Majjhima, Avguttara, and Samyutta Nikayas.

5.

The Sutta Nipata, the Thera and Therigathas, the Udanas, and the Khuddakapatha.

6.

The Suttavibhavga and the Khandhakas.

7.

The Jatakas and the Dhammapadas.

8.

The Niddesa, the Itivuttakas, and the Patisambhida.

9.

The Peta and Vimana Vatthus, the Apadanas, the Cariya-pitaka, and the Buddhavajsa.

10.

The Abhidhamma books; the last of which is the Kathavatthu and the earliest probably the Puggala-pabbatti.

However, according to B.C. Law the chronology of Buddhist literature from the time of the Buddha to the time of
king Asoka which is as follows:

1.

The simple statements of Buddhist doctrine now found in identical works in paragraphs or verses recurring in all the
books.

2.

Episodes found in identical works in two or more of the existing books.

3.

The Silas, the Parayana group of sixteen poems without the prologue, the Atthaka group of four or sixteen poems, the
Sikkhapadas.

4.

Digha, Vol. I, the Majjhima, the Samyutta, the Avguttara, and earlier Patimokkha code of 152 rules.

5.

The Digha, Vols. II and III, the Thera-therigathas, the collection of 500 Jatakas, Suttavibhavga, Patisambhidamagga,
Puggalapabbatti and the Vibhanga.

6.

The Mahavagga and the Cullavagga, the Patimokkha code completing 227 rules, the Vimanavatthu and Petavatthu,
the Dhammapada and the Kathavatthu.

7.

The Cullaniddesa, the Mahaniddesa, the Udana, the Itivuttaka, the Sutta Nipata, the Dhatukatha, the Yamaka, and the
Patthana.

8.

The Buddhavajsa, the Cariya-pitaka, and the Apadana.

9.

The Parivarapatha

10.

The Khuddakapatha.

NAVGA SATTHU SSANA (LECTURED BY VEN. MAHINDARATANA, WRITTEN BY VEN. KEVALA) JUNE 2010
It is to be noted here that before the compilation of Tipiaka the Buddhist literature was divided
into nine agas or 'nine parts' which became known as 'Navgasatthussana'. This is also called 'the
ninefold teachings of the Buddha'. The ninefold division of the Buddhist scripture took place
according to their form and style. They are as follows:
1. Sutta

4. Gth

7. Jtaka

2. Geyy

5. Udna

8. Abbhtadhamma

3. Veyykaraa

6. Itivuttaka

9. Vedalla

It can be mentioned here that this ninefold division is not regarded as the ninefold classification
of the literature. It only refers to nine types of composition in the literature. These various forms were
found in the Buddhist literature when the Buddhist literature was compiled

Among the scholars, who gave account on Navgasatthussana, D. J. Kalupahana said, that
the division of the teachings of the Buddhist scripture date back to very early time.
Navgasatthussana is the term used synonymously with the term Buddhavacana, Pvacana,
Dhammavinaya, to denote the teachings of the Buddha collectively. A person who possesses great
learning (bahusuta) is said to be the one who has heard much of the ninefold division of the teaching.
At the very early stage the word of the Buddha was named by the term Navgasatthussana.

1. Sutta (prose of the Buddhist teaching)

According to the Buddhaghosa, all the words of the Vinaya Piaka, including even Parivra,
four suttas from Sutta Nipta (that is Mahmagala Sutta, Ratana Sutta, Nlaka Sutta and Tuvattaka
Sutta) and also the sayings of the Tathgata bearing the names of suttas should be included under this
category (all the Sutta Piaka).
While the better known suttas of the Dgha Nikya and Majjhima Nikya find no mention here,
four suttas from the Sutta Nipta are cited. The four suttas especially mentioned are composition,
hence they should strictly have been included under the 'Gth'.(?)

2. Geyya (mixture of prose and verse)

Similar explanation has been given to the term geyya by Buddhaghosa and Snskrit tradition.
Suttas containing stanzas, particularly like the entire Sagthvagga of Sayutta Nikya are called
'Geyya' by Buddhaghosa. The Snskrit tradition holds that it is a type of composition where the prose
is punctuated(?) in the middle or at the end of the stanza.
3. Veyykaraa (exposition)
According to the Buddhaghosa, the whole Abhidhamma Piaka pertains to this category. But, it
is more than doubtful, for the Abhidhamma as the separate piaka developed in a later period. On the
other hand, the Snskrit tradition made an effort to supply a clue to solve the problem. According to
this tradition, the exposition of the meaning of the suttas as given by the disciples of the Buddha
should be included (svaka bhsita) under the veyykaraa.

4. Gth (verse)
Buddhaghosa quite justifies designation of Dhammapada, Theragth and Thergth. But, in
the designation of Sutta are included some verses, as in composition of the Sutta Piaka. Here he states,
that compositions, which are purely in verse and which denote to bear the designation 'Sutta' could be
included herein. But they are said not to have a clear line of demarcation and limitation between Sutta

and Gth.

5. Udna (ecstatic utterances)

The extant collection of Udna is identified by Buddhaghosa with 'Aga'(?), being the same
name. The collection of 82 suttas that has come down to us as the separate works called 'Udna' is
considered as the authentic teaching of the Buddha.

6. Itivuttaka (brief sayings)

Here Buddhaghosa made an attempt to include under this term the collection of 112 suttas,
which appear in the Khuddaka Nikya.

7. Jtaka (legends of bodhisatta's previous lives)

Buddhaghosa tried to engage in a futile attempt denoting that about 500 jtaka stories were
included in this category. Those stories are preserved in the Jtaka Pi consisting of stanzas only.

8. Abbhtadhamma (compositions about super-natural powers)

Here Buddhaghosa also was in difficult position of finding a separate composition. There is not
available of an individual word among the text of canon.(?) Buddhaghosa said, that there are included
all the suttas connected with wonderful and marvelous phenomena, handed down with these words:
Oh monks! These for wonderful and marvelous quality are seeing in nanda should be known as
Abbhtadhamma.(?)

9. Vedalla (form of messages or questions and answers)

Both traditions of Pli and Snskrit fail to give a clear idea of Vedalla. It may have been known
at the time of the Buddha. The correct interpretation of the word have been forgotten.

NAVGASATTHUSSANA (LECTURED BY VEN. MAHINDARATANA) (ORIGINAL BY VEN. SAMNANG PHY) (2009)

(The Nine fold Teachings of the Buddha)
It is to be noted here that before the compilation of Tipiaka the Buddhist literature was divided
into nine Agas or parts which became known as Navgasatthussana; this also called
Navgabuddhassana the nine fold teachings of the Buddha. The nine divisions of the Buddhist

scripture took place according to their forms and styles, they are:
4)
Sutta (the teaching of the Buddha mostly in prose),
5)
Geyya (instruction in mixed prose and verse),
6)
Veyykaraa (expositions or commentary),
7)
Gth (verse),
8)
Udna (ecstatic utterance),
9)
Itivuttaka (brief saying),
10)
Jtaka (the legend of the Bodhisatta in previous births),
11)
Abbhtadhamma (description of supernatural power), and
12)
Vedalla (message in the form of questions and answers).
We can mention here that these nine fold divisions are not regarded as the nine fold
classifications of the literature. Those various forms were found in the Buddhist literature at that time
when the Buddhist scriptures were compiled.
Among the scholars who gave accounts of Navagasatthussana D.J. Kalupahana is very
special, he says that the division of the teachings of the Buddha is divided into agas or limbs, date
back to very early time. Navgasatthussana is a term used synonymously with the terms
Buddhavacana, Pvacana and Dhamma-Vinaya, to denote the teachings of the Buddha collectively
(commonly).
A person who possesses great learning (bahusutta - erudite) is said to be one who has heard
much of the Nine-fold-division of the Buddhas teachings. At very early stage, the word of the
Buddha which was committed to memory by his disciples was denoted by the Navgasatthussana.
1. Sutta (prose)
According to Buddhaghosa all the words of Vinaya Piaka including even Parivra, four
suttas from the Sutta Nipta, the Mahmagalla, Ratana, Nlaka and other sayings of the Tathgata
bearing of name Sutta Nipta should be included under this category, while the better known as suttas.
(?) The Dgha Nikya and Majjhima Nikya were found and mentioned here four suttas from the
Suttanipta; those are cited (quoted) from the four suttas, especially mentioned, are verse
compositions. Hence they should strictly have been included under gth.
2. Geyya (mixed prose and verse)
The similar explanations have been given to the term Geyya by Buddhaghosa and the Sanskrit
tradition, suttas containing stanzas particularly like the Sagthvagga of Sayutta Nikya are called
Geyya by Budhaghosa. The Sanskrit, too, holds that it is a type of composition where the prose is
functioned in middle or in the end by stanzas.
3. Veyykaraa (exposition or commentary)
According to Buddhaghosa the whole Abhidhamma Piaka falls into these categories but this is
more than doubtful for the Abhidhamma as separate Tipiaka developed only later. On the other hand,
the Sanskrit tradition afforded (provided) us with a clue to unravel (resolve) the problem. According to
this tradition the exposition of the meaning of the suttas, as given by the disciples, could be included
under Veyykaraa. The Vibhaga Vagga of Majjhima Nikya contains 10 discourses where we come

across analysis or enlargement of brief statements of the Buddha, in enlargement by eminent disciples
particularly by Mah Kaccyana.
4. Gth (verses)
These included verse found in the Dhammapada (way of truth), Theragth (psalms of the
brethren, Thergth (psalms of sisters) and these isolated verse which are not classed amongst the
suttas.
5. Udna (solemn or solemn utter)
The extend of other Udna it is identified with the Aga bearing the same name. The collection
82 suttas that has come down to us as a separated word. All Udnas are considered the authentic
teaching of the Buddha. The Udna included in nine fold divisions probably refers to some of the
inspired sayings found and scattered through out the Pli.
6. Itivuttaka (brief sayings)
These are the 112 discourses which commence with the phrase, thus the Blessed One has said,
Itivuttaka is one fifteen books that comprises the Khuddaka Nikya.
7. Jtaka (legends of Bodhisattva in previous birth)
These are the 547 birth stories related to the Buddha in connection with his previous birth.
8. Abbhtadhamma (description of supernormal power)
These are few discourses that deal with wonderful and marvelous things, as for example, the 3.
Acchariyaabbhutasutta of the Majjhima Nikya (Uparipasa Pi Suatavaggo).
9. Vedalla (the message in the form of questions and answers.)
Vedalla These are the pleasurable discourses, such as Culla Vedalla, Mah Vedalla
(Majjhima Nikya No. 43, 44), Samm Dihi Sutta (Majjhima Nikya No. 9), etc. in some of these
discourses, the answers given to certain questions were put with a feeling of joy.

NINE-FOLD DIVISION (NAVGASATTHUSSANA) (ORIGINAL BY VEN. TEZANIYA)

The term Navgasatthussana is found in the canonical texts and in the commentaries to indicate the entire
words of the Buddha. This term is not covered without giving elaboration. The early text referred to concept of the
Veranjakandha, Vinaya Piaka. Pli text in which Buddha preached the Dhamma was as follows:
1. Sutta
6. Itivuttaka
2. Geyya
7. Jtaka
3. Veyykarana
8. Abbhtadhamma
4. Gtha
9. Vedalla
5. Udna
Ven. Buddhaghosa explains these as follows:
The dual Suttavibhaga, the Niddesa, the Khandhakas and the Parivra, the Magala sutta, the Ratana sutta, the
Nlaka sutta. Tuvattaka sutta of the Sutta Nipta and any other words of the Tathgata bearing the name of 'sutta' should
be regarded as 'Suttas'. All the suttas with verses should be understood as 'Geyya'. In particular, all the chapters with verses
in the Sayutta Nikya form Geyya. The entire Abhidhamma Piaka, Sutta without verses and any other words of Buddha
that are not included in the eight parts should be understood as 'Veyykarana', exposition. Dhammapada, Thera gtha and
Ther gtha, those pieces of the Sutta Nipta are not called 'Suttas', and entirely in verse should be known as 'Gtha'.
Eighty-two suttas connected with verses due to knowledge and joy should be understood as 'Udna'. One hundred and
twelve suttantas finishing with this verse:
Ayampi attho vutto bhagavat, iti me sutanti. - Thus was it said by the Blessed One.
etc. should be understood as Itivuttaka (the 'Thus-said'). Five hundred and fifty birth stories beginning with the
Apannaka constituted the Jtaka. All suttantas connected with wonderful and marvelous things from ven. nanda, should
be understood as Abbhtadhamma. All suttantas in the form of questions asked through repeated attainment of delight and
understanding, such are suttas: Clavedalla, Mahvedalla, Sammdihi, Sakkapah, Sakhrbhajaniya, Mahpuma
should be understood as Vedalla.
In these statements we find some confusion. For instance, Magala sutta and Ratana sutta are related to Suttas,
while all suttas preached in verse are known as Gtha. Actually, Magala sutta and Ratana sutta are preached in verses. So,
it is likely to admit that Sutta and Geyya are the same each(?) other(?). In my opinion, as long as we look upon weakness of
someone, that will be endless. What is truth to him, what is not, what is truth or untruth, let it be. 1

QUESTION: EXAMINE THE NAVGA SATTHU SSANA

The Buddhist literature was divided into nine angas, or parts, which became known as Navga Satthu Ssana.
This is also called Navga Buddha Ssana, the nine-fold teaching of the Buddha, i.e. the nine divisions of the Buddhist
scriptures took place according to their form and style. They are:
1. Sutta (the teaching of the Buddha mostly in prose)
2. Gtha (verses)
3. Geyya (instruction in mixed prose and verse)
4. Itivuttaka (brief sayings)
5. Veyykarana (expositions, commentaries)
6. Udna (ecstatic utterances)
1 This reminds me the ascetic Bellahiputta ;-).

7. Jtaka (legends of Bodhisatta in his previous births)

8. Abbhtadhamma (description of supernatural power)
9. Vedalla (message in the form of questions and answers)
It can be mentioned here that this Nine-Fold-Division is not regarded as the nine-fold classification of the
literature. It only refers to nine types of composition in the literature. These various forms were compiled.
The division of the teachings of the Buddha into nine angas or limbs dates back to very early times. Navga
Sattu Ssana is a term used synonymously with the terms Buddha-vacana, P-vacana or Dhamma-vinaya to denote the
teachings of the Buddha collectively (Majjhima nikya), Alagadhupama sutta mentions this first division of the Buddhavacana portion Alagadhupama sutta.
The list of nine limbs of the Buddha-vacana is a mere description of literary types and not a division of textual
compartment. It does not refer to nine different groups or literature but to nine types of composition to be found in the
collections of the ancient Buddhism. In a single sutta or suttanta there may be portions, which can be described as these
nine parts. This list of works of a far later data is deviously inserted by the compilers. On the other hand, we see here a very
old tradition, going back to the time of the Buddha, with regard to the classification of the Buddha-vacana, meaning or
sense of which had gone into obscurity at the time of constitution of the canon in its present form.
The difficulty seems to come down to us within these nine categories of the various texts of the canon. Even
though the great commentator ven. Buddhaghosa seems to have met with the same difficulty in his attempt to do so. His
explanations of Navga show his difficulty in discriminating any particular section of the canon as corresponding to the
Navga. It is interesting to note in his exposition that for two of the nine angas, Vedalla and Abbhtadhamma, he could
not find any work or group of works which could be classified under these headings and so he named some suttas as coming
under them. This is because by the time ven. Buddhaghosa began to record the Theravda Dharmapravaracana
mentioned in the book of Abhidhamma samuccaya and Mahvyutpatti.
Mjj(?)-Idhekacco pulla putto, dhammanpariya punanti, sutta, geyya, veyyakarana,
itivuttaka, jtaka, abbhutadhamma, vedallanti...

gtha, udna,

THE BASIC MEANS OF NINE-FOLD DISPENSATION AND ITS COMMENTARIAL INTERPRETATION NAVGASATTHUSSANA (LECTURED BY VEN. UPARATANA) (ORIGINAL BY VEN. NAI SOMA)
It has been divided Buddha's teaching into nine as 'angas' in the commentary of Buddhaghosa;
Samantapsdika, Atthaslin and Sumagalavilsin. The list of nine-fold divisions has been mentioned in
several places of Pli canon. It is mentioned about these nine angas in Alagadpama sutta, in Aguttara nikya
and Veranjakanda of Prjika Pi, but it is not mentioned in any place that angas are nine in number. It is very
clearly mentioned about these nine angas in the canonical of Dpavamsa from Sri Lanka:
Sabbe pacasat ther navaga jinassana,
Uggahetvna vcesum buddhasetthassa santike.
Sutta geyya veyykarana gthdnitivuttaka,
Jtakabbhta vedalla navaga sattussana.
According to above mentioned verses of the report of first council, we can understand that Buddha's
ssan is ninefold. Those nine angas are:
(1)
Sutta (the teaching of the Buddha mostly in prose)
(2)
Geyya (instruction in mixed prose and verses)
(3)
Veyykarana (expositions, commentaries)
(4)
Gth (verses)
(5)
Udna (ecstatic utterances)
(6)
Itivuttaka (brief sayings)
(7)
Jtaka (legends about Bodhisatta's previous births)
(8)
Abbhtadhamma (description of supernatural power)

(9)

Vedalla (message in the form of questions and answers)

From the above definition is quite clear that the commentator have taken the nine limbs as representing
the entire word of the Buddha. However, the following observation should be surely taken into the extend of
exam definition. There are three elects in counting:
1. The Udna is defined as a text with complexes of 82 discourses, but actually Udna Pi consists of only 80
discourses.
2. The number of Itivuttaka is given as 110, but actually the number of discourses of Itivuttaka Pi is 120 but
there are 122 in Samantapsdik.
3. The Jtaka are given as 550, but actually there are only 547. The reason is not known, perhaps they may be in
as advent taintless entire into commentarial remarks.
The agas Udna, Itivuttaka and Jtaka have been definitely with the Khuddaka text. They are not
incorporated in the Udna Pi, Itivuttaka Pi and Jtaka Pi. The angas of sutta are defined as
Ubhatovibhaga, Khandhaka and Parivra with traditional texts Ubhatovibhaga, Khandhaka and Parivra
which are the source contents of the Vinaya Piaka.
The limb of Veyykarana is taken as represent duly the entire Abhidhamma Piaka. The Abhidhamma
Piaka was completed after the third council, but Buddhaghosa included the whole Abhidhamma Piaka comply
since seven books into Veyykarana. It is clear that two Piakas out of Tipiaka come under two agas (Sutta
and Veyykaraa), only very few remain for other seven angas. This remark is a good riving(?) that the
commentator was not sure of this classification and also there is no legal ground classification left out in the
Veyykarana. On the other hand, there are discourses which were recognized as Veyykarana in the discourses
themselves. Like for an example, the first sermon of the Buddha is Veyykarana as it is given in the
Mahvagga.

QUESTION: WRITE A CRITICAL NOTE ON NAVGA SATTU SSANA (NINE-FOLD DIVISION)

The Buddhist literature was divided into nine agas or parts, which became known as Navga Sattu Ssana.
This is also called Navga Buddha Ssana the Nine-fold Teaching of the Buddha. The Nine-fold Division of the
Buddhist scriptures took place according to their form and style. They are:
1. Sutta

4. Gth

7. Jtaka

2. Geyya

5. Udna

8. Abbhtadhamma

3. Vykarana

6. Itivuttaka

9. Vedalla

It can be mentioned here that this Nine-fold Division is not regarded as the nine-fold classification of the literature.
It only refers to nine types of composition in literature. This various forms were found in Buddhist literature at that time
when the Buddhist scriptures were compiled.
The division of the teachings of the Buddha into the nine agas or limbs dates back to very early time. Navga
Sattu Ssana is a term used synonymously with the term Buddhavacana, Pvacana or Dhamma-Vinaya to denote the
teachings of the Buddha collectively. Majjhima Nikya, Alagaddpama Sutta mentions this first division of the
Buddhavacana. While speaking about the method by which the Dhamma was learnt by the people and their purpose in
doing so, the Buddha himself stated as describing the Dhamma as consisting of the nine limbs, agas.
A person who possesses great learning(?) is said to be one who has heard much of the Nine-fold Division of the
teaching. In a single sutta or suttanta there may be portions, which can be described as these nine parts. This list of works of
a far later data is obviously inserted by the compilers. On the other hand, we see here a very old tradition, going back to
time of the Buddha, with regard to the classification of the Buddhavacana, meaning or sense of which has gone into
obscurity at the time of constitution of the canon in its present form.

The difficulty seems to lie in the attempt to include within these nine categories the various texts of the canon as
they have came down to us, some of which are compositions of the later date. Even the great commentator, ven.
Buddhaghosa, seems to have met with the same difficulty in his attempt to do so. It is interesting to note in
Buddhaghosas exposition that for two of the nine agas, vedalla and abhtadhamma he could not find any work or group
work, which could be classified under these headings and so he named some suttas as coming under them. This is because
by the time ven. Buddhaghosa began to record the Theravda commentarial tradition, the real significance of the early
Navga classification, whose existence is echoed even in the very words of the Tathgata, was lost.
With the intention of giving canonical and antique authority to their texts, Sanskrit schools of Buddhism even
added three more terms to these nine limbs. They are: nidna, avadna and upadesa, making a total of twelve, mentioned in
the book Abhidharma Samuccaya and in Mahvyutpatti.
In this way many other opinions have been formed from different angle concerning the Navga Sattu Ssana.

MENTION HOW THE NAVGASATTHUSSANA PLAYS AN IMPORTANT ROLE IN THE FIELD OF BUDDHIST LITERATURE
WITH THE IDEAS OF MANY SCHOLARS. (ORIGINAL BY VEN. NRASHA)
Navgasatthussana
It is to be noted that before the compilation of Tipiaka the Buddhist literature was divided into
nine vaggas known as Navgasatthussana, the nine-fold teaching of the Buddha. They are Sutta,
Geyya, Veyykaraa, Gth, Udna, Itivuttaka, Jtaka, Abbhtadhamma and Vedalla. It can be
mentioned that this nine-fold division was found in the Buddhist literature when the Buddhist scriptures
were compiled in the ancient time. Even though Navgasatthussana is not accounted in Tipiaka, all
of this texts of Navgasatthussana is still in use until on.2
One of the scholars who gave an account on Navgasatthussana, D.J Kalupahana, said that
the nine-fold division of the teaching of the Buddha dates back to very early time and its term is used
synonymously as the term Buddhavacana and Dhamma-Vinaya. A person, who possesses great
learning of Buddhist knowledge, heard of the nine-fold division of the Buddha's teaching too. After
studying this Navgasatthussana one can analyze and criticize the philosophy in the field of
Buddhist literature. But some information in the Navgasatthussana is to take part in the Tipiaka.(?)
The Sutta section of Navgasatthussana mentions the works of Vinaya Piaka, such as
Mahvagga as well as works of Suttanta Piaka, such as Dgha Nikya and so on. The Geyya section
also mentions the same what the Sutta section with similarity to the stanzas there. While Veyykaraa
section then starts to speak in terms of Abhidhamma Piaka, Gth section also explains the verses of
the Dhammapada, Suttanipta etc. Buddhaghosa also showed the different points between the Sutta
section and Gth section, hence it is very important to use the Pli word when writing(?). Udna,
moreover, identifies the separate 82 suttas of the Pali canon.3 Nevertheless, Itivuttaka section is said to
be a collection of 112 suttas which came from the verses of the teaching of the Buddha and it also
gives stories of the disciples of the Buddha such as their previous births and so on. When, Jtaka
section talks about 500 Jtaka stories as the category of the previous lives of the Buddha,
Abbhtadhamma also gets a difficult position when it is stated that there are all the suttas connected
with wonderful and marvelous phenomena and events. Apart from what was mentioned above, the last
2 The suttas either all of them or most of them are included in Tipiaka. The term 'Navgasatthussana' is known to the
Tipiaka as well, just for example see the Alagaddpama Sutta.
3 The Pli Canon's Udna consists of (exactly) 80 parts. It is to be remembered, that the Udna of Navgasatthussana
contains 82 parts.

one, Vedalla introduces how to make the correct words in corruption of the verses from the Sanskrit
words.(?)4 All of Navgasatthussana was compiled by the Buddhaghosa who made the reference
source from the original Buddha's teaching.

666NAVANGA SATTHU SASANA:

The Buddhist literature was divided into nine Angas or parts which became known as NavangaSutthu-Sasana. This is also called Navanga-Buddhasasana (the nine fold teaching of the Buddha),
i.e. the nine divisions of the Buddhist scriptures took place according to their form and style. They are:
1. sutta-(the teaching of the Buddha mostly in prose). The are the short, medium, and long
discourses expounded by the Buddha on various occasions, such as Mangala-Sutta(discourses
on blessings), Rattana-Sutta( the jewel discourses ), Metta-sutta( discourses on good will), etc.
according to the commentary the whole Vinaya Pitaka is all so included in this division.
2. Geyya( instruction in mixed prose and verse. These are discourses mixed with Gattha or verse,
such as the Sagatthavagga of the Samyutta Nikaya.
3. Veyyakarana ( exposition or commentaries. The whole Abbhidhamma-pitaka, discoursed
without verse, and everything that not included in the remaining eight divisions belong to this
class.
4. Gattha (verse ). These included verse found in the Dhammapada( way of truth ), Taragatha
(psalms of the brethren) Therigattha( psalms of sisters), and these isolated verses which are not
classed amongst the Sutta.
5. Udana ecstatic utterances, these are the paeans of joy, found in the Udana one of the divisions
of the Kuttanikaya .
6. Itivuttaka brief saying, these are the 112 discourses which commence with the phrase, thus the
blessed one has said, Itivuttaka is one fifteen books that comprise the Khuddakanikaya
7. Jataka-legends of Buddhisatva in previous births. These are the 547 birth-stories related by the
Buddha in connection with his previous birth.
8. Abhutadhamma- (description of supernatural power. These are the few discourses that deal
with wonderful and marvelous things, as for example the Acchariya-Abhuthadhamma sutta of
the majjhima nikaya(No. 123).
9. Vedalla- ( message in the form of questions and answers. It can be mentioned here that this
nine-fold division is not regarded as the nine- fold classification of the literature. It only referred to nine
types of composition in the literature. These various forms were found in the Buddhist literature at that
time when the Buddhist scripture were compiled.
The division of the teaching of the Buddha into nine angs or limbs dates back to very early
time. Navanga-sasann is a term used synonymously with the terms Buddha-vacana, pavacana or
dhamma vinaya to denote the teachings of the Buddha collectively (Majjhimanikaya). Alagadhupam
Sutta mentions this first division of the Buddha vacana portion Alagaddupama Sutta.
4 This is very strange explanation of what is Vedalla section. According to my knowledge, Vedalla is the message in the
form of questions and answers.These are the pleasurable discourses, such as Culla Vedalla, Mah Vedalla (Majjhima
Nikya No. 43, 44), Samm Dihi Sutta (Majjhima Nikya No. 9), etc. In some of these discourses, the answers given to
certain questions were put with a feeling of joy.

The list of nine limbs the Buddhavacana is a mere description of literary types and not a
division of textual compartment. It does not referent groups of literature but to nine types of
composition to be portions, which can be described as this nine parts this list of works of a far later
data is deviously inserted by the compilers. On the other hand, we see here a very old tradition, going
back to the time of the Buddha, with regarded to the classification of the buddhavacana, meaning or
sense of which had gone into obscurity at the time of constitution of the canon in its present form.
The difficulty seems to come down to us within these nine categories the various texts of the
canon. Even though the great commentator Ven. Buddhaghosa seems to have met with the some
difficulty in his attempt to do so. His explanation of Navanga show his difficulty in discriminating any
particular section of canon as corresponding to the Navanga. It is interesting to note in his explanation
that for two of the nine Angas, vedalla and Abhuttadhamma, he could not find any work or group of
works which could be classified under these headings and so named some Suttas as coming under
them. This is because by the time Ven. Buddhaghosa began to recorded the Theravada-dharmma
pravaracana, mention in the book of Abhidhamma Samuccaya and Mahavyutpatti.
635
by Ven. P.Santa
666WRITE A CRITICAL NOTE ON NAVANGA SATTUSANA{NINE FOLD DIVISION}?
The Buddhist literature was divided into nine angas or parts, which became known as
Navangasattu sasana. This is also called Navangabuddhasasana the nine-fold teaching of the Buddha.
The nine-fold division of the Buddhist scriptures took place according their form and style. They are:
1sutta 2geyya 3veyyakrana 4gatha 5udana 6itivutaka 7jataka 8abbhutadhamma 9vedalla.
It can be mentioned here that this nine-fold division is not regarded as the nine-fold classification of the
literature. It only refers to nine types of composition in literature.
This various forms were found in Buddhist literature at that time when the Buddhist scripture were
compiled. The division of the teaching of the Buddha into the nine angas or limps dates back to very
early time.
Navangasattusasana is a term used synonymously with the term Buddhavaccana,pavacana or
dhammavinaya to denote the teachings of the Buddha collectively.
MajjhimanikayaAlagaddupamasutta mentions this first division of the buddhavacana. While speaking
about the method by which the dhamma was learn by the people and their purpose in doing so, the
Buddha himself stated as describing the dhamma as consisting of the nine limps,angas.
A person who possesses great learning is said to be one who has heard much of the nine-fold division
of the teaching. In a single sutta or suttanta, there may be portions, which can be described as there nine
parts. This list of works of a far later data is obviously inserted by the compilers.
On the other hand we see here a very old tradition, going back to time of the Buddha with regard to the
classification of the duddhavacana, meaning or sense of which has gone into obscurity at the of
constitution of the canon in its present form. The difficulty seems to lie in the attempt to include within
these nine categories the various texts of the canon as they have came down to us, some of which are
composition of the later date. Even the great commentator,Ven buddhaghosa seems to have met with

the same difficulty in his attempt to do so.

It is interesting to note in buddhaghosas exposition that for two of the nine angas,vedalla and
abbhutadhamma, he could not find any work or group of work, which could be classified under these
headings and so he named some suttas as coming under them.
This is because by the time Ven buddhaghosa began to record the theravada commentarial tradition.
The real significance of the early navanga classification, whose existence is echoed even in the very
words of the Tathagata was lost. With the intention of giving canonical and antiquity and authority to
their texts sankrit schools of buddhism even added three more terms to these nine limbs.they
nidana,avadana and upadana making a total of twelve, mentioned in the books{abhidhamma..
in this way many other opinions have been formed from different angle concerning the
navangasattusasana.
S

666DISCUSS THE MODERN VIEWS ON THE CHRONOLOGY OF THE SUTTAPITAKA

Sutta pitaka is one of the three divisions of the Pali canon, the other two being the Vinaya pitaka and
the Abhidhamma pitaka. The Sutta pitaka consists of five Nikaya, the fifth generally held to be a later
collection. The five Nikayas are Dhiga, Majjhima, Samyutta, Anguttara and Khuddaka. These Nikayas
contain material belonging to different strata, early and late in time. Many scholars have attempted to
construct some kind of chronology for the suttapitaka. However, yet there is no consensus on this issue
among the modern scholars.
A.B.Keith considered this task impossibility. Then Franke is of that the Dighanikaya is a unitary
literary composition. Directly opposed to Frake's is that of P.V.Bapat who says that there are three
different literary strata in the Dighanikaya. This shows how diverse the views of modern scholars are
on this issue.
Regarding the whole of Sutta pitaka Herman Oldenberg says that the earliest expression of Dhamma
must have been in dogmatic paragraphs consisting of such formulae as the Four Noble Truths, Twelve
Nidanas etc. But scholars such as G.C. Pande consider this view untenable.
Two other views of two noteworthy modern scholars are that of T.W.Rlys Davids and B.C.Law. Rhys
Davids in his Buddhist India says that the four Nikayas had been put together out of older material at a
period about half-way between the death of the Buddha and the accession of Asoka. He goes on to give
the following order of evolution of the canon.
1. Simple statements of doctrine now found in identical words, n paragraphs or verses revering in
all the books
2. Episodes found in identical words in two or more of the existing books
3. The Silas, the Parayana, the octades, the Patimokkha

4. The Digha, Majjhima, Samyutta and Anguttara Nikayas.

5. The Suttanipata, the Thera-Their gathas, the Udanas and the Khuddaka Patha
6. Suttavibhaya and the Kandhakas
7. The Jatakas and the Dhamamapadas
8. The Niddesa, Itivuttakas and the Patisambhida
9. The Peta and the Vimanavatthu, the Apadanas, Cariya pitaka, and the Buddhavamsa
10. The Abhidhamma books, the last of which is Kathavatthu and the earliest probably the
Puggalapannatti
Thus according to his the four major Nikayas fall in to the middle period. B.C. Law, too, argues
similarly but his stratification shows important. Regarding the 3rd strata B.C. Law says that includes
Silas, the Parayana groups of (16) poem without prologue, the Atthaka group of (4) or (16) poems and
this Sikkhapadas.
With regard to the Sutta pitaka he groups the Dighanikaya Vol-I, with the other three Nikayas and
places volume-II and III along with Thera-Therigatha, Jatakas etc.
G.C. Pande in his monumental work Studies in the origin of Buddhism evaluates all these views and
attempt to present another stratification identify and arranging the Suttas in some chronological
order. However, more of these are final and therefore the question is still debated.
666DISCUSSING THE MODERN VIEWS ON THE CHRONOLOGY OF THE SUTTA PITAKA. 872

According to canonical and non-canonical literature, three Buddhist Councils were held after the demise of the
Buddha to draw up the canonical texts and the creed in their pure form.
The Pali canon is a gradual process, the evidence can be sought back in the canon itself. The Cullavagga of Vinaya
Pitaka mentions the 1st and 2nd Councils as Vinaya or Dhamma vinaya councils; Abhidhamma is not mentioned. However, it
is stated in the Mahavajsathat one of the text of Abhidhamma, the Kathavatthu, is mentioned at time of the 3 rd council.
Even the Nikayas itself is not fixed in an authentic form at the 1st council, some additions have been added in the later
time. For instance, the Subba Sutta (No. 10) of Digha Nikaya and Gopaka-moggallana Sutta (No. 108) of Majjhima Nikaya
state specifically in their introductory material that they took place not long after the Buddha s death. And there are
discourses such as the Madhura Sutta and Ghotamkha Sutta of Majjhima Nikaya (No. 84 & 94) involving monks other than
Ananda in which the text itself inform us that the conversation took place after the Buddhas demise. Another Sutta, the

Bakkula Sutta (No. 124) of Majjhima Nikaya in which Bakkula himself asserts that he has been a monk for eighty years. If
Bakkula becomes a monk just after the formation of the Sangha, thus this sutta might have took place 35 years after the
closing of the 1st council.
According to Cullavagga XI, the five Nikayas were questioned during the 1st council. Thus, the Theravada has a belief
that Khuddaka Nikaya was rehearsed during the First Council. However, the existence of the Khuddaka Nikaya at the time
of the First Council still remains to be proved.
It is mentioned in the Sumangalavilasini that both the Vinaya and the 4 nikayas were handed to their bhanakas during
the 1st Council, but the Khuddaka Nikaya has not been mentioned any such handing-over. Instead, there were Jatakabhanakas and Dhammapada-bhanakas, but no Khuddaka Nikaya bhanakas.
Besides the problem of the existence of the Khuddaka Nikaya during the First Council, there are also various views
regarding the number and the order of texts in the Khuddaka Nikaya.

The Samantapasadika states that Vinaya Pitaka and the Abhidhamma Pitaka and all the teachings of the Buddha not
included in the remaining 4 Nikayas are regarded as forming the Khuddaka Nikaya.
According to the Sri Lanka tradition, there are 15 texts in the Khuddaka Nikaya, in Burmese tradition there are 19
texts, but in the Siamese tradition, there are only 7 texts; in the Saddharmaratnakaraya, 12; the Dharmaguptika vinaya 13;
and in the Saratthadipani 14. Thus the number of the texts are obvious differ, so is the order. It is obvious that the texts of
the khuddaka Nikaya are not chronologically ordered in the early sources.
It is quite obvious that the reference made to the order of Nikayas resulted in various opinions and has drawn much
attention of the scholars.
Therefore with regard to the views of the chronology of Sutta Pitaka, there are two arguments put forwards by 2
modern scholars: T.W. Rhys Davids and Bimala Churn Law.
According to Rhys Davids the four Nikayas had been put together of older material at a period about halfway between
the death of the Buddha and the accession of Asoka. In his Buddhist India, he has given a chronological table of Buddhist
literature from the time of the Buddha to the time of Asoka which is as follows:

1.

The simple statements of Buddhist doctrine now found, in identical words, in paragraphs or verses recurring in all the
books.

2.

Episodes found, in identical words, in two or more of the existing books.

3.

The Silas, the Parayana, the Octades, the Patimokkha.

4.

The Digha, Majjhima, Avguttara, and Samyutta Nikayas.

5.

The Sutta Nipata, the Thera and Therigathas, the Udanas, and the Khuddakapatha.

6.

The Suttavibhavga and the Khandhakas.

7.

The Jatakas and the Dhammapadas.

8.

The Niddesa, the Itivuttakas, and the Patisambhida.

9.

The Peta and Vimana Vatthus, the Apadanas, the Cariya-pitaka, and the Buddhavajsa.

10.

The Abhidhamma books; the last of which is the Kathavatthu and the earliest probably the Puggala-pabbatti.

However, according to B.C. Law the chronology of Buddhist literature from the time of the Buddha to the time of
king Asoka which is as follows:

1.

The simple statements of Buddhist doctrine now found in identical works in paragraphs or verses recurring in all the
books.

2.

Episodes found in identical works in two or more of the existing books.

3.

The Silas, the Parayana group of sixteen poems without the prologue, the Atthaka group of four or sixteen poems, the
Sikkhapadas.

4.

Digha, Vol. I, the Majjhima, the Samyutta, the Avguttara, and earlier Patimokkha code of 152 rules.

5.

The Digha, Vols. II and III, the Thera-therigathas, the collection of 500 Jatakas, Suttavibhavga, Patisambhidamagga,
Puggalapabbatti and the Vibhanga.

6.

The Mahavagga and the Cullavagga, the Patimokkha code completing 227 rules, the Vimanavatthu and Petavatthu,
the Dhammapada and the Kathavatthu.

7.

The Cullaniddesa, the Mahaniddesa, the Udana, the Itivuttaka, the Sutta Nipata, the Dhatukatha, the Yamaka, and the
Patthana.

8.

The Buddhavajsa, the Cariya-pitaka, and the Apadana.

9.

The Parivarapatha

10.

The Khuddakapatha

SUTTA PIAKA (LECTURED BY VEN. MAHINDARATANA, GIVEN BY VEN. KEVALA) MAY 2010

In ancient India, recitation and memorizing were regarded as the only means for the preservation of the record.
From the Vedic period it is known that prescription was followed in early period in India.

Though the succession of the teachers (cariya parampar), the Buddha's speeches, sayings, discourses and
conversations were handed down orally. Considering the various problems arisen in the Order, the first Buddhist council
was arranged by the leading disciples after three months of the passing away of the Buddha.

In this council, the Dhamma and Vinaya were settled; at that time, there was no separate existence of the
Abhidhamma Piaka. It was considered as the part of the Dhamma. It is to be noted here that the traditional teachings of the
Buddha was then collected under the two principal divisions, which were then known as Dhamma and Vinaya.

Then, the second Buddhist council was held after hundred years. At this council, the rules of morality as well as the
violation of Vinaya were discussed. There was no mention of the Abhidhamma at this council either.

Then, the third Buddhist council was held about more than two hundred years after the Buddha's Mah
Parinibbna. At this council, the Abhidhamma was established in the Buddhist world as a separate piaka and is regarded as
a part of the canon. The Buddhist scriptures are called 'Tipiaka'. The Tipiaka is divided into three parts: Vinaya, Sutta and
Abhidhamma (or Discipline, Discourses and Metaphysics). The Vinaya Piaka contains the laws and regulations or the
Buddhist precepts, great code of monastic discipline.

The Sutta Piaka consists of sermons preached by the Buddha Himself and His disciples. In the Abhidhamma
Piaka we find various doctrines of Buddhism from the metaphysical point of view. It should be mentioned here that the
Buddhist literature of Hnayna or Theravda was in the language of Pli. And Pli Tipiaka of the Theravda was known
as the earliest and most complete selection of the Buddhist literature.

Like Theravda, Sarvstivda has its own canonical literature, but it is in mixed Snskrit or 'Buddhist Snskrit'.
The Sammtiyavda also had their own canonical literature in upper(?) braces(?). Mahsghikas' canonical literature was
in Prkrit. Mahsghika has five divisions in their canonical literature, and they are as follows:
1.

Sutta

4.

Prakraka

2.

Vinaya

5.

Dharni(?)

3.

Abhidhamma

The Sutta Piaka is the collection of the doctrinal expositions, which are large and small. It includes prose,

dialogues, legends, pty (joyful) sayings called Udna and verses. It is written in prose and verse. It has five Nikyas,
namely:
1.

Dgha Nikya

4.

Aguttara Nikya

2.

Majjhima Nikya

5.

Khuddaka Nikya

3.

Sayutta Nikya

Dgha Nikya

As many scholars believe that the suttas are the first doctrine of the Buddha, Discipline (Vinaya) and Higher
Dhamma (Abhidhamma) also have been included there.

According to five divisions of Sutta Piaka, the names given to those five Nikyas consider their surface
characteristic. The long discourses were placed in Dgha Nikya. The Blessed One paid his attention not only to supramundane life or prosperous mundane life, He spread His teachings in various ways, addressing various kinds of social
statuses of society.

In the Sumagalavilsin, commentary on Dgha Nikya of Buddhaghosa, is mentioned why it is called the Dgha
Nikya. There are many long discourses preached by the Buddha in the Dgha Nikya, hence it is called the Dgha Nikya.
We can see the suttas like the Smaphala Sutta, Mahparinibbna Sutta and so on as very long suttas.

The Dgha Nikya can mainly be divided into three divisions as vaggas or chapters:
a)

Slakkhandhavagga

b) Mahvagga
c)

Phikavagga

Out of 34 suttas in Dgha Nikya, 30 are in Slakkhandhavagga. In this chapter, the Buddha had taught lay people
and monks about morality. Here, the morality is again divided into few stages, gradually:
a)

Cla Sla

b) Majjhima Sla
c)

Mah Sla

When we examine this chapter carefully, it seems that it possesses teachings on morality, concentration and
wisdom. These qualities are the principal tenets of the Buddha's teaching.

Majjhima Nikya

The Majjhima Nikya, 'Middle Discourses' of the Buddha, is one of the major collections in the Sutta Piaka
(basket of discourses) belonging to the Pli canon. The title literally means 'the middle collection' and it is so called because
the suttas contained are generally of middle length, compared with the Dgha Nikya.

The Majjhima Nikya consists of 152 suttas, these are divided into three divisions called 'sets of fifty' (pasa) in
Pli language. The last set actually contains 52 suttas. Within each part, the suttas are further grouped into chapters or
divisions. Therein each group has ten suttas. But the next to the last division, called the Vibhaga Vagga, contains 12 suttas.
The names assigned to those divisions are often derived solely from the title of their opening suttas or in some case of pair
of suttas.

This nikya discusses all points of Buddhism. Its suttas refer to the life of Buddhist monks, the Brhmaa
sacrifices, various types of ascetic practices and the Buddha's relation with Jain people and social, political conditions
prevailing at that time. This nikya mentions the Four Noble Truths of Buddhism, the doctrines of forms of action,
refutation of the sould theory and different types of meditation instructions.

In the Majjhima Nikya we don't meet the Buddha, only in his role as head of the Order. Repeatedly, we see Him
engaged in dialogues with people from many different strata or groups of ancient Indian society: with kings and princesses,
with Brahmins and ascetics, with simple religious and erudite philosophers.

It is not the Buddha alone, who appears in the Majjhima Nikya in all the teachings. Among the 152 suttas, 9
suttas are spoken by ven. Sriputta, the general of the Dhamma. Ven. nanda, personal attendant of the Buddha, during
the last 25 years of his life, delivered 7 suttas out of those 152. Seven suttas participate in many more.(?) 4 suttas are
spoken by ven. Mah Kaccyana, 2 suttas by the second chief disciple, ven. Moggallna.

THE FIVE NIKYAS (DGHA, MAJJHIMA AND SAYUTTA ONLY)

As many scholars believe, the suttas were the first discourses of the Buddha and the discipline and the deep or the
highest Dhamma (Abhidhamma) also have been included there. According to the five divisions, the names were given to the
five nikyas considering their surface characteristic. The long formulas were included in the Dgha Nikya.

Dgha Nikya

In the Dgha Nikya we can see the suttas like Smaphala Sutta, Mahparinibbna Sutta,
which are very long. The Dgha Nikya can be divided into three divisions as chapters or vaggas:
1. Slakkhandha Vagga
2. Mah Vagga
3. Phika Vagga
Out of the 34 suttas there, 13 suttas are in Slakkhandha Vagga. In this vagga the Buddha
taught about morality for lay people and monks. The morality is also divided into few stages, gradually
a) Ca sla, b) Majjhima sla and c) Mah sla / Adhi sla.

Mah Vagga is the second chapter of Dgha Nikya. Mah means 'great' and vagga means
'chapter'. Many of the suttas begin with the name mah in this chapter. Mahnidna Sutta,
Mahparinibbna Sutta and Mahsatipahna Sutta are some of them.
The Phika Vagga begins with the Phika Sutta. Therefore, it was called as Phika Vagga.
The first sutta of Dgha Nikya is Brahmajla Sutta. The main purpose of this sutta is to give an
account on religious views which existed contemporary to the Buddha in India.

Majjhima Nikya

The Majjhima Nikya is mentioned as the second division of the Sutta Piaka. It is called
'Middle Collection'. Most of the suttas there refer to the refutation of others' views.5 This nikya has
three volumes:
1. Mlapasaka (50 suttas)
2. Majjhimapasaka (50 suttas)
3. Uparipasaka (52 suttas)
This nikya discusses all the points of Buddhism. Its suttas refer to the life of Buddhist monks,
the Brhmaic sacrifices, various types of ascetic practices, the Buddha's relationship with Jains and
the social and political condition during the Buddha's life. This nikya also mentions the Four Noble
Truths of Buddhism, the doctrine of Buddha's law of action (law of kamma-vipka), refutation of soul
theories and different types of meditation.

Sayutta Nikya
The Sutta Piaka's third nikya is Sayutta Nikya. The suttas of this collection are concise, prosaic discourses. It
deals with legends, fairies6, gods and devils. Sayutta Nikya consists of 56 groups or sayuttas and all these groups are
summarized into five vaggas:
1. Sagth Vagga
2. Nidna Vagga
3. Khandha Vagga

4. Sayatana Vagga
5. Mah Vagga

5 I would argue that it is rather Dgha Nikya which deals with other views.
6 I have never heard about fairies in connection to the Buddha or the Buddha's teaching.

SUTTANTA PIAKA (DISCOURSES) (LECTURED BY VEN. MAHINDARATANA) (ORIGINAL BY VEN. SAMNANG PHY)
(2009)
The Suttanta Piaka is a collection of the discourse in their entirety delivered by the Buddha on
various occasions. (A few discourses were delivered by some of the distinguished disciples of the
Buddha, such as the venerable Sriputta, Mah Moggallna, nanda, etc.. as well as some
narratives are also included in the books of the Suttanta Piaka.) The discourses of the Buddha
compiled together in the Suttanta Piaka were expounded to suit different occasions, for various
persons with different temperaments. Although the discourses were mostly intended for the benefit of
Bhikkhus, and deal with the practice of the pure life and with the exposition of the Teaching, there are
also several other discourses which deal with the material and moral progress of the lay disciples.
The Suttanta Piaka brings out the meaning of the Buddhas teachings, expresses them clearly,
protects, and guards them against distortion and misconstruction. Just like a string which serves as a
plume-line to guide the carpenters in their work, just like a thread which protects flowers from being
scattered or dispersed when strung together by it, likewise by means of suttas, the meaning of
Buddhas teachings may be brought out clearly, grasped and understood correctly and be given perfect
protection from being misconstrued.
The Suttanta Piaka is divided into five separate collections known as Nikya. They are Dgha
Nikya, Majjhima Nikya, Sayutta Nikya, Aguttara Nikya and Khuddaka Nikya.

SUTTA PIAKA (ORIGINAL BY VEN. HUNNY)7

The Sutta Piaka is a collection of all the discourses as they were entirely delivered by the Buddha on
various occasions. A few discourses delivered by some of distinguished disciples of the Buddha, such as ven.
Sriputta, ven. Mah Moggallna, ven. nanda etc. As well as some narratives were also included in the
book of the Sutta Piaka. The discourses of the Buddha compiled together in the Sutta Piaka were expounded
to suit different occasion, for various persons with different temperaments.
Although the discourses were mostly intended for the benefit of bhikkhus, and deals with the practice of
the pure life and with the exposition of the teaching, there several other discourses deal with the material and
moral progress of the lay disciples. The Sutta Piaka brings out the meaning of the Buddha's teaching,
expresses them clearly, protects and guards them against distortion and misconstruction, just like a string which
serves as plumb-line to guide the carpenters in their work, just like a thread which protects flowers from being
scattered or dispersed when strung together by it, likewise, by means of sutta, the meaning of Buddha's teaching
may be brought out clearly, grasped and understood correctly and given perfect protection from being
misconstrued.
This Sutta Piaka is divided into five separate collections known as nikya, among are:
1. Dgha nikya (collection of long discourses)
2. Majjhima nikya (collection of middle-length discourses)
3. Sayutta nikya (collection of kindred sayings)
4. Aguttara nikya (collection of discourses arranged in according with number)
5. Khuddaka nikya (small collection)
In the Sutta Piaka are also found not only fundamentals of the Dhamma meaningful applicable to daily
life. All observances and practices are practical steps in Buddha's noble path of eight constituents lead to
spiritual purification at three levels, they are:
1. Sla (moral purity through right conduct)
2. Samdhi (purity of mind through concentration samath)
3. Pa (purity of insight through vipassan meditation)
To begin with it, one must make the right resolution to take refuge in the Buddha, to follow the
Buddha's teaching and to be guided by the Sagha.
The first disciples who made the declaration of faith in the Buddha and committed themselves to follow
his teaching were the two merchant brothers, Tapussa and Bhallika, they were traveling followed by 500 carts,
when they saw the Buddha in the vicinity of the Bodhi tree after his enlightenment. The two merchants offered
him honey-rice cakes. According to their offering and thus breaking the fast he had imposed on himself for
seven weeks, the Buddha made them his disciples by letting them recite after him:
Buddha sarana gacchmi,
Dhamma sarana gacchmi.
This recitation became the formula of declaration of faith in the Buddha and his teaching. Later when
the Sagha became established, the formula was extended for the third commitment:
Sagha sarana gacchmi.
7 This lecture is actually an excerpt from the introduction to Suttanta Piaka in the book Guide to Tipiaka from
Burmese U Ko Lay. To be precise, this lecture is excerpt from pages 34 and 35 of that book.

SUTTANTA PIAKA (LECTURED BY VEN. UPARATANA) (ORIGINAL BY VEN. NAI SOMA)

Piaka means basket, which is contained in Tipiaka: Sutta Piaka, Vinaya Piaka and Abhidhamma Piaka. Of
these, Sutta Piaka is considered to consist of five Nikyas. These are:
1. Dgha nikya
4. Aguttara nikya
2. Majjhima nikya
5. Khuddaka nikya
3. Samyutta nikya
They are the collections of suttas or suttantas i.e. of speeches and dialogues of the Buddha.
The Sutta Piaka is the chief source of our knowledge of the Dhamma. It is therefore often directly called dhamma
as opposed to Vinaya. The Dgha nikya is 34; it is divided into three parts (vagga):
1. Slakkhandhavagga
2. Mahvagga
3. Patikavagga
The most important sutta of Dghanikya is the Mahparinibbna sutta which is a running description of the
events of the last weeks of the Buddha.
The Majjhima nikya middle collection contains suttas of middle length. Their value is very unequal; some
belong to the most beautiful pieces in the canon. The number of suttas in Majjhima nikya is 152, divided into three groups
of fifty:
1. Mlapasa
2. Majjhimapasa
3. Uparipasa
And the rest: there are 7762 discourses in Samyutta nikya and Aguttara nikya contains 9557 discourses. The
Khuddaka nikya is a collection of 15 books of texts.
The numbers of Baavara Dgha nikya are 64. The numbers of Baavara Majjhima Nikya are 80. The number
of Baavaras Samyutta Nikya and Aguttara Nikya are 100 and 120 respectively. The number of Baavaras of Khuddaka
Nikya is not mentioned in the Pli commentary. The number of Baavaras increased by 20 as mentioned above. The
division into Baavara is also done logically, because there are 120 Baavaras of Anguttara Nikya which has 9557 suttas.
When Dgha Nikya has only 34 discourses with 64 Baavara and the problem that had to look it.(?) The number of
discourses in Samyutta Nikya and Aguttara Nikya. These are 100 and 120 Baavara.
When these questions are examined one should not forget that the person/previous(?) versions of Sayutta Nikya
and Aguttara Nikya were accepted that were none to the commentated. The commentated do not speak of any elation or
any section that were lost as for as these two nikyas were concerned. The first group is called Catunekyika Bhikkhu. The
other group is called Pancanekyika Bhikkhu. This group that there were Bhikkhus who consider that the fifth nikyas did
not belong to authority as the other nikyas. The Khuddaka Nikya contains fifteen books that were defined as:
Pannarasappavdo Khuddaka nikya.
According to this definition Khuddaka nikya is 15-fold:
1. Khuddakapta
9. Theragth
2. Dhammapada
10. Thergth
3. Udna
11. Jtaka
4. Itivuttaka
12. Niddesa
5. Suttanipta
13. Apadna
6. Vimnavatthu
14. Buddhavasa
7. Petavatthu
15. Cariypiaka
8. Patisambhid Magga
This is Khuddaka nikya. In this figure the commentary said that there are 84000 units of the Dhammas in the
entire Tipiaka out of which 2000 units are of the disciples. But they were preached according to the guidelines provided by
the Buddha.

666SUTTA PITAKA
The sutta pitaka is a collection of all the discourses in their entirely delivered by the Buddha on
various occasions. A few discourses delivered by some of distinguish disciples of the Buddha,
such as the venerable Sariputta, Maha Mogallana, Anana, etc. as well as some narratives are also
included in the book of the Sutta pitaka. The discourses of the Buddha compiled together in the
Sutta pitaka were expound to suit different occasion, for various persons with different
temperaments.
Although the discourses were mostly intended for the benefit of bhikkhus, and deals with the
practice of the pure life and with the exposition of the teaching, there several other discourses
deal with the material and moral progress of the lay disciples. The Sutta pitaka brings out the
meaning of the Buddhas teaching, expresses them clearly, protect and guards them against
distortion and misconstruction, just like a string which senses as plumb-line to guide the
carpenters in their work, just like a thread which protects flowers from being scattered or
dispersed when strung together by it, likewise, by means of Sutta, the meaning of Buddhas
teaching may be brought out clearly, grasped and understood correctly and given perfect
protection from being misconstrued.
This Sutta pitaka is divided into five separate collections known as Nikaya, among are: 1Dighanikaya (collection of long discourses) 2- Majjhima nikaya (collection of middle, length
discourses) 3- Samyutta nikaya (collection of kindred sayings) 4Anguttara nikaya (collection of
discourses arranged in according with number) 5Khuddaka nikaya (small collection). In the Sutta
pitaka are also found not only fundamentals of the Dhamma meaningful applicable to daily life.
All observances and practices which practical steps in Buddhas noble path of eight constituents
lead to spiritual purification at three levels. they are: 1-Sila moral purity through right conduct 2Samadhi purity of mind through concentration(samatha) 3- Panna purity of insight through
vipassana meditation. To begin with, one must make the right resolution to take refuge in the
Buddha, to follow the buddhas teaching, and to be guided by the Sangha.
The first disciples who made the declaration of faith in the Buddha and committed themselves to
follow his teaching were the two merchant brothers, Tassa and Bhallika , they were traveling with
their follows in five hundred carts when they saw the Buddha in the vincinity of the Bodhi tree
after his enlightenment. The two merchants offered him honey-rice cakes. According to their
offering and thus breaking the fast he had imposed on himself for seven weeks, the Buddha made
them his disciples by letting them recite after him. Buddham saranam gacchami, dhammam
saranam gacchami.
This recitation became the formula of declaration of faith in the Buddha and his teaching. Later
when the Sangha become established, the formula was extended do include the third

commitment: Sangham saranam gacchami. 467

By ven santa

SUTTANTA PIAKA AND SAYINGS OF THE BUDDHA, SAYINGS OF THE DISCIPLES (LECTURED BY VEN. UPARATANA)
(ORIGINAL BY VEN. TEZANIYA)
According to commentator Sabbampi eta buddhavacana. That means that all doctrines in the Tipiaka were delivered by
Buddha himself. But when we discuss that idea with care of attention we can understand that there are teachings in Tipiaka not only by
the Buddha, but also by his famous great disciples. Also when we examine Sumagala Vilsin and Samantapsdika Ahakath we can
find as following what sayings of the Buddha and sayings of the disciples are:
Dvasiti buddhato gamhi dvesahassani bhikkhuto, saturasiti sahassani ye me dhama pavattita.
That means, that out of these 84 000 dhammakkhandha, 83(?) dhamms were delivered by Buddha and 2000 dhamms by his
disciples. While we examine nikyas, we can see that there are many sayings of other disciples, who associated with the Buddha very
closely and others such as kings, Devas and Brahms.
However, the Buddha's teachings and the disciples' have been accepted by the Theravda tradition. This is too difficult to
distinguish the Buddha's teachings from the disciple's. There are few, which can be recognized as teaching not belonging to the Buddha
Tipiaka. Parivra Pi is considered as not the Buddha's teaching. Almost all of Abhidhamma Piaka are accepted as teaching of
composition of Abhidhammika Thera/Theras(?).
Many schools try to show Kathvatthu Pakarana as a book of ven. Moggaliputtatissa Thera. They explain, that ven.
Moggaliputtatissa Thera composed Kathvatthu Pakarana by the method given by Buddha. We examine as we known there are 34
suttas or discourses in the Dgha Nikya at least five of them were discourses preached by the disciples in Dgha nikya, these are Subha
sutta by ven. nanda, Pysirjaa Sutta8 by ven. Kumrakassapa, Sampasdanya, Sagti, Dasuttara by ven. Sriputta, tnti
Sutta by four great gods approached to the Buddha.
There are 152 suttas of Majjhima Nikya, out of 25(?) were preached by disciples: Mah Hatthipadopama sutta, Ratha Vinta
sutta, Mahvedha, Anagana, Sammdihi were delivered by ven. Sriputta. Gopakamoggallna, Bhitaka, Sandaka, Sekka these were
delivered by ven. nanda. Matupiaka was delivered by ven. Mah Kaccyana, approved by Buddha. Maratajjaniya, Anumna by ven.
Moggallna, Bahuvedaniya by Udayi; Ghatamakha by Udena; Bhikkhu by bhikkhu Anuruddha (?) by ven. Anuruddha.
In the Khuddaka Nikya, Thera Gth and Ther Gth were all delivered by the men and female disciples. Vimnavatthu and
Petavatthu were composed by ven. Moggallna. The Niddesa was consented as a text composed by ven. Sriputta and
Paisabhidmagga is also assigned to ven. Sriputta. In fact, half of the Khuddaka Nikya text represented the verses of disciples.
Besides that there are many questions presented to the Bddha and Bhikkhus by various gods. But examined above examples we
have to accept the order-ships of many suttas go to disciples. The Theravda tradition has made a great effort to attribute all the Tipiaka.
Kathvatthu Pakarana also has considered as Buddha's teaching even what we usually know as svaka's teaching:
Moggaliputtatissa thera ida kathvatthu pakarana desento attano nanyena na desito, bhagavata dinnanayena
thapitamatikaya desitatta ida kathvatthu pakarana buddhabhsita nma jta.9
The disciples preached all complain/sermons(?) not according to their own knowledge, but according to the guide provided by
Buddha. The Madhupiika sutta in Majjhima Nikya is given as an example. It was preached by Buddha. When monks wanted to know
the details of what the Buddha taught they met ven. Mah Kaccyana and requested him to irrigate/interrogate(?). ven. Mah
Kaccyana explained it. So the present Madhupiika Sutta10 is(?) stands(?) nothing but the explanation of ven. Mah Kaccyana. But
commentator says it should be regarded explanation of the Buddha, the reason given for it is, that it was not ven. Mah Kaccyana's
explanation.
Therefore, Madhupiika Sutta is 'buddha vacana'. But in some places the Buddha has appreciated ven. Mah Kaccyana.
In the Madhupiika of Majjhima Nikya there is:

8 Dgha Nikya Mahvaggapi

9 I did not find this anywhere in my sources, but in Vinaya Piaka Sratthadpan k I have found this: Teneva hi
tatiyasagtiyaca moggaliputtatissattherena bhsitampi kathvatthuppakaraa buddhabhsita nma jta,
tatoyeva ca attan bhsitampi subhasuttdi sagti ropentena yasmat nandattherena eva me sutanti vutta.
10 Majjhima Nikya Shanda Vagga

Etadegha bhikkhave mama svakana bhasitassa vitharena attha vibhajana yadida mah kaccyano.
In the Ahasalni Nidnakath:
Bhantita kho bhikkhave mah kaccyano yadikareyya etamattha patiphujedya ahampi evameva bhyakaredya yadid
mah kaccyano.
But according to the tradition we have to accept that there was historical process by talking the sermon of the disciples and the
Dhamma of the Buddha.

SAYINGS OF THE BUDDHA AND SAYINGS OF THE DISCIPLES AS FOUND IN THE SUTTA PIAKA
(lectured by ven. Uparatana) (original by ven. Nai Soma)
It is believed that the whole Tipiaka was delivered by Buddha himself, and therefore the aim of
that concept is to give the historical importance to the Dhamma. According to the commentator:
Sabbampi eta buddhavacana eva caturstisahassamida buddhavacana.
The whole Buddha vacana; all 84000 Dhammakhandas were preached by Buddha himself but
when we examine Sumagalavilsin and Samantapsdik, we can recognize sayings of the disciples of
the Buddha.
Dvsti buddhato gahi dve sahassni bhikkhuto; catursti sahassni, ye me dhamm pavattino.
This means, that out of 84000 Dhammakhandhas 82000 Dhammakhandhas were delivered by the
Buddha and 2000 Dhammakhandhas by his disciples. But when we examine nikyas, there are many
sayings of others also. In addition to the words of disciples who associated with the Buddha very closely,
there are words of the king devas and brahmins also in the Sutta Piaka as we mentioned earlier.
It is very clearly seen that there are at least five discourses preached by the disciples in Dgha
nikya, these are Subha sutta by ven. nanda, Pysirjaa Sutta11 by ven. Kumrakassapa,
Sampasdanya, Sagti, Dasuttara by ven. Sriputta, tnti Sutta by four great gods approached to the
Buddha.
In Majjhima nikya, the Samm dihi, Gulissni, Dhanajni, Saccavibhaga, Mahgosinga,
Anthapindikovda, Channovda were delivered by ven. Sriputta. The Gopakamoggallna, Bhitika,
Sandaka, Sekha, Atthakangara, Anumna suttas were delivered by ven. nanda. Madhura,
Uddesavibhaga, Madhupindika suttas were delivered by ven. Mahkaccyana. Mratajjaniya, Anumna
were delivered by ven. Moggallna, Bahuvedaniya by ven. Udyi, Ghatamakkha by ven. Udena, Bakkula
by ven. Bakkula and Anuruddho by ven. Anuruddha.
Theragth and Thergth were delivered by male and female disciples, Vimnavatthu and
Petavatthu are supposed to have been delivered by ven. Moggallna and Patisambhidmagga is asigned to
ven. Sriputta. In fact, half of the Khuddaka nikya texts represent words of the disciples. The
Mundarjavagga of Aguttara nikya was preached by the disciples, because the Buddha had been
denied(?) when(?) this(?) chapter(?) delivered(?) to(?) ven. Sriputta.(?)
Nakulapitu chapter of Samyutta nikya was delivered by ven. Sriputta to the group of
Paccbhmaka bhikkhus. The suttara of Avijjvagga is a discussion of ven. Sriputta and Mahkohita.
The suttas of Salyatana chapter preached by Bindorabhradvja, nanda,(?) Kaccyana to the
householder of Udena Ghosita Lohicca respectively,(?) besides there were many questions from bhikkhus
and gods who inquired the Buddha.
The commentarial remark is based on the assumption of the Theravda tradition. It says that most of
11 Dgha Nikya Mahvaggapi

the words of the disciples could be attributed to the Buddha on the basis and they preached according to
the guidelines of Buddha. The examples of the Madhupiika sutta were preached by Buddha but the
details were explained by Mahkaccna to the monks and so it is the Buddha-vacana. But according to the
tradition we have to exist(?) that there was a historical process by taking the sermon of the disciples as the
sermon of the Buddha.

SUTTANTA PIAKA AND THE TEACHINGS OF DISCIPLES

When we consider the whole Tipiaka, almost all the doctrines are mentioned as the Buddha's teaching. The object
of this trail is to give authority to the Tipiaka. Normal texts also had been accepted. All doctrines in the Tipiaka are the
Buddha's teaching:
Sabbampi eta buddha vacana.
But when we discuss that idea in a critical manner, we can understand that there are teachings in Tipiaka not only
from the Buddha but also from his famous great disciples. this idea can be found in the Sumagalavilsin and
Samantapsdik Ahakath with the following words:
Dvsti buddhato gannho dvesahassni bhikkhuto,
Catursti sahassni ye me dhamm pavattito.
The meaning is: There are 82 000 dhammakkhandha from the Buddha and 2 000 dhammakkhandha belonging to
his disciples. The commentary shows that both together there are mixed 84 000 dhammakkhandha. there one of the
measurement had been used to measure the teaching in Tipiaka. Even though we cannot distinguish the kinds of the
dhammakkhandha, this problem was not solved in Buddhist literature. However, the Buddha's teaching and the disciples'
had been accepted in Theravda tradition. this is too different(?) to recognize the Buddha's teaching and his disciples'.
There are a few fields which can help us to recognize which teaching does not belong to the Buddha in Tipiaka
(Cullavagga Pi 11-12 Capta, Pacasattikakhandhaka and Sattasattikakhandhaka), Parivra Pi is not the Buddha's
teaching. Almost all of Abhidhamma Piaka are accepted as teachings of composition of Abhidhammika Theras.
They like to attribute this authorship of Abhidhamma to Katyayanitutra, Kautila, Wgusera, Devarma,
Prna, Sriputta and Moggallna etc. many schools try to show Kathvatthu Pakarana as a book of ven.
Moggallnaputtatissa Thera. They explained that ven. Moggallnaputtatissa Thera composed Kathvatthu Pakarana
with the method given by the Buddha:
Iti sattar dinayena hapitamtikya desitattL ima kathvatthu pakarana buddhabhsita nma jta.
There are a lot of disciples' teaching in Tipiaka, Majjhima Nikya and more than half of Khuddaka Nikya belongs
to the disciples. In Dgha Nikya there are 34 suttas. Subha sutta of ven. nanda Thera, Pysirjaa sutta of ven.
Kumrakassapa Thera, Sampasdanya sutta, Sagti sutta and the 3 suttas from ven. Sriputta Thera. Other discourses
were given authorship to the Buddha's disciple.(?) There are 152 suttas in Majjhima Nikya. Mah Hatthipadomapa sutta,
Rahavinta sutta, Mahvedalla sutta, Anthapiikovda sutta, Samdhi sutta, Channovda sutta, Cheka sutta were
preached by ven. Sriputta Thera. Gopakamoggalna sutta, Bhhitika sutta, Santdka(?), Cheka sutta and Ahakanagara
sutta are from ven. nanda and Madhura sutta and uddesa Vibhaga Madhupinika of ven. Mah Kaccyana. Some
other suttas were attributed to disciples.
According to the scholars Maratajjmiya sutta and Anumna sutta also belongs to one of the Buddha's disciples.
According to some Eastern scholars, Dgha and Majjhima Nikyas are from the Buddha. Commentary also have made a
strong effort to the Madhupidika sutta.(?) once, the Buddha started to preach on defilement and went back without
explaining. Monks wanted to know the meaning why the Buddha preached shortly. Then they went to ven. Mah
Kaccyana Thera and asked him to describe in detail. Ven. Mahkaccyana Thera described them something and he said

that they rather should go to the Buddha.This way some of the distiples' suttas are approved to be from the Buddha and
they are considered as the Buddha's teaching. There are a lot of suttas which are approved to be from the Buddha.
there are only a few svaka suttas in Aguttara Nikya. however, Mudarja Vagga of Aguttara Nikya is
considered to be a later development of the Dhamma, because Mudarja ruled in India after the Buddha's passing away.
The Theravda tradition has made a great effort to attribute all the Tipiaka.(?) Kathlvatthu Pakarana is also considered as
the Buddha's teaching even though we usually take it for svaka's teaching.
Moggaliputtatissa thero idi kathvatthu pakaraa deseto attano ena na desito bhagavat dinnanayena
hapitamtikya desitatt idi kathvatthu pakaraa buddha bhsita nma jta.

DGHA NIKYA (LECTURED BY VEN. MAHINDARATANA) (ORIGINAL BY VEN. SAMNANG PHY) (2009)
As among scholars believed that the suttas are the first discourse of the Buddha, Disciplines and deep
Dhamma or the highest Dhamma (AbhiDhamma) also have been included there. According to five divisions of
the Sutta Piaka, the names were given to those five Nikyas as considering their surface characteristics. The
long formula (sutta) was included to the Dgha Nikya. According to the Sumagallavilasin, the commentary of
Dgha Nikya of Buddhaghosa, it mentions there that why it is called the Dgha Nikya; there are many very
long suttas, which were preached by the Buddha in Dgha Nikya. So it is called the Dgha Nikya.
Yes, it is true, we can see the sutta like Smaaphala (the Fruits of the Life of a samaa) in the Dgha
Nikya and Mahparinibbna (the Great Passing) in the Mah Vagga, etc. are very long suttas. The Dgha
Nikya mainly can be divided into three divisions as chapters or vaggas. They are:
1) Slakkhanda Vagga (Division Concerning Morality)
2) Mah Vagga (the Large Division)
3) Pthika Vagga (the Division beginning with the discourse on the Pthika, the Naked Ascetic)
1) Out of 34 suttas, 13 suttas are in Slakkhanda Vagga. In this chapter the Buddha talks about the
morality of lay people and monks; the morality is also divided into three stages in gradually, Culla sla,
Majjhima sla and Upari or Mah sla. When we examine this chapter very carefully, it seems that it is expected
the morality (Sla), concentration (Samdhi) and wisdom (Pa); these three qualities are the principle teaching
of the Lord Buddha.
The first sutta in this vagga is called Brahmajla which can be explained into English as the The Net of
Perfect Wisdom or the Excellent Net. According to Rhys Davids, it is the Perfect Net; the Buddha himself, in
the sutta, refers to its others. Alternative titles which are Atthajla the Net of Advantages, Tamonajla the
Net of Doctrine and Dihijla the Net of Views. The main purpose of this sutta is given an account of
Religious heritage views, which were existed contemporary to the Buddha in India. The Brahmajla Sutta,
further, mentions various systems of life arts, handicraft, folklore, anthropology sports, and the pass time of
sacrifices which were different types of professions of the people. Anthropology, astrology, arithmetic,
accountancy, royal policy, medicine, architecture, and so on. The Blessed One has paid his attention on as super
life well as prosperous. He had spread his preaching in various directions representing several of social status of
society.
2) Mah Vagga is the second chapter of the Dgha Nikya, means Great and Vagga means Chapter.
The ten suttas in this division are some of the most important ones of the Tipiaka, dealing with historical and
biographical aspects as well as the doctrinal aspects of Buddhism. The most famous sutta is the
Mahparinibbna Sutta which gives an account of the last days and the passing away of the Buddha and the
distribution of his relics. Mahpadna Sutta (the Great Discourse on the Lineage) which deals with brief account
of the last seven Buddhas and the life story of the Vipass Buddha. Doctrinally important are the two suttas: the
Mahnidna Sutta which explains the Chain of Cause and Effect, and the Mahsatipahna Sutta (the Greater
Discourse on the Foundations of Mindfulness) dealing with the four Methods of Steadfast Mindfulness and

practical aspects of Buddhist meditation, etc. these are only some of them.
3) Pthika Vagga begins with Pthika likewise, it was called Pthika Vagga. This division is made up of
eleven shorter discourses of a miscellaneous nature. They deal with the Buddhas rejection of wrong and severe
asceticism practiced by followers of many sects; they deal also with the periodical evolution and dissolution of
the universe, the accounts of Universal Monarch and the thirty-two physiognomic characteristics of a great man.
There is one discourse, Sigti and Dasuttara, are discourses given by the Venerable Sriputta and they contain
lists of doctrinal terms classified according to subject matter and numerical units. The style of their composition
is different from the other nine suttas of the division.

DGHA NIKYA
The Pli canonical literature consists of three Piakas. The word Piaka means a basket containing manuscripts. It
is preserved in three systematic collections:
1. The Vinaya Piaka
2. The Sutta Piaka
3. The Abhidhamma Piaka

The Buddha's teachings are contained in the Sutta Piaka which consists of five nikyas or collections, namely:
Dgha Nikya, Majjhima Nikya, Sayutta Nikya, Aguttara Nikya and Khuddaka Nikya. Here an account of onyl the
Dgha Nikya is given.
Dgha Nikya is regarded as the first book of the five Sutta Piakas. The Dgha Nikya, which is a collection of
longer discourses deals with various subjects of Buddhism. It is divided into three sections, which are:
1. Slakkhandha
2. Mahvagga
3. Patheyya
It has thirty-four suttas.
The first sutta in the first book of Dgha Nikya is called the Brahmajla Sutta, which means Excellent Net. The
Brahmajla Sutta refers to sixty-two wrong views and the various doctrinal and philosophical speculations in vogue at that
time. The second, Smaaphala Sutta states the doctrines of the six heretical teachers and the benefits derived in an
ascending order by a monk of the Buddhist Sagha.
Some other suttas such as the 11th Kevaha Sutta discuss the practice of miracles and shows that the Buddha
was superior to the gods headed by Brahma in as such as he alone was able to answer a question which gods were not able
to. And the Kassapashanda Sutta speaks of various ascetic practices prevalent during the time of the Buddha while the
ninth introduced us to the type of discourses usually delivered to the wanderers etc.
The first sutta of the second volume is the Mahpadna, which discussed the lives of the seven Buddhas whose
aqrrival took place before Gautama Buddha. It mentions in detail the life of Vipass, who was the first of the seven
previous Buddhas. The mahparinibbna Sutta is the 16th sutta of the Dgha Nikya. It is regarded as the best sutta of the
Dgha Nikya. It deals with the Buddha's last days and his last speeches and sayings and gives an account of the past
greatness of Kusinagara etc. The Mah Satipahna Sutta deals with the path of mindfulness.
The 3rd volume contains eleven suttas, of which the first four deal mainly with non-Buddhist views and ascetic
practices etc. The last two suttas summarize the teachings of the Buddha as in the Aguttara Nikya. Of these, the
Dasuttara, which is the last, follows the catechetical method.

QUESTION: DISCUSS DISCOURSES OF THE DGHA NIKYA IN SUTTANTA PIAKA AND HOW BUDDHIST ASPECTS IN
THESE SUTTAS AS ESSENTIAL.
Dgha Nikya
As for the teachings of the Buddha, many scholars believed that the suttas were the first
discourses of the Buddha and that discipline or Vinaya and the deep Abhidhamma also have been
included in the sutta collection. According to five nikyas of the Suttanta Piaka, Dgha Nikya is the
long formula or discourse. The commentary of Dgha Nikya is named as 'Sumagalavilsin' compiled
by Buddhaghosa. In Dgha Nikya there are many long suttas, such as Smaaphala Sutta and
Mahparinibbna Sutta, which were preached by the Buddha. The Dgha Nikya can be divided into
three divisions, namely Slakkhandhavagga, Mahvagga and Phikavagga.
Of them, first is Slakkhandhavagga where 13 suttas out of the 34 are dealing with morality
(sla) of people and monks. The morality is also divided into three states as cla sla, majjhima sla and
mah sla. When we carefully examine the teachings on morality in this chapter, it seems to be
connected with concentration (samdhi) and wisdom (pa). These three qualities are the principle of
teaching of the Buddha. Again, in Bramajla Sutta of the same vagga, the Buddha explained to some
Samaas and Brhmaas who adhered to and asserted their wrong views in eighteen different ways.
Mahvagga as the second part consists of the longest discourses. Hence the word mah is used
in this vagga. Here mah means great, big and long, and vagga means chapter. After combining the
words mah and vagga, it comes as Mahvagga, the greatest, biggest and longest chapter. The suttas of
the Mahvagga are Mahpadna Sutta, Mahnidna Sutta and Mahparinibbna Sutta etc. and from
those suttas, we can learn about the life story of the Buddha, about the last days of the Buddha and
about the distribution of His relics. Mahsatipahna Sutta of this vagga deals with the four methods
of steadfast mindfulness and practical aspects of Buddhist meditation.
Beginning with Phika Sutta, the third vagga of Dgha Nikya is called Phikavagga. In
Phikavagga where are suttas such as Phika Sutta, Cakkavatti Sutta and Sig Sutta, the Buddha
shows the wrong views practiced by many followers from different sects, describes the thirty-two
physiognomic characteristics of the king Cakkavatti, the universal monarch, and addresses the duties of
the world between parents and son, teacher and pupil, monk and layman, owner and slave and so on.
MAJJHIMA NIKYA (LECTURED BY VEN. MAHINDARATANA) (ORIGINAL BY VEN. SAMNANG PHY) (2009)
The Majjhama Nikya is mentioned as the second book of the Sutta Piaka and also it is one of
the major parts of. It is called The Middle Collection or The Collection of Discourses of Medium
Length. It is so called because the suttas it contains are generally, of Middle Length, compared with
the longest suttas of the Dgha Nikya. Most of suttas of Majjhima Nikya refer to the refutation of the
views of others.
The Majjhima Nikya consists of 152 suttas; these are divided into three parts called Paasa sets of fifty though the last set actually contains 52 suttas within each part. The suttas are further
grouped into chapter or divisions vagga of 10 suttas each. The next to the last division Vibhaga

vagga contains 12 suttas. The name assigns to those divisions considering their title of opening suttas
or some cases, pair of sutta.
Naturally, the greatest number of these discourses in the Majjhima Nikya addresses to the
piaka. The monks since they lived in close proximity to the master. In the Majjhima Nikya we dont
meet the Buddha only in his rules as the head of the Order; repeatedly, we see him engaged in living
dialogue with people from many different strata (sing. stratum) of ancient India society like; kings,
princes, Brhmas, ascetics, simple inhabitants and erudite philosophers.
It is not the Buddha alone who appears in the Majjhima Nikya, the role of his teaching and
work also introduced as to the accomplish disciples who carried on the transmittance of his teachings.
Of 152 suttas in the connection are spoken by the ven. Sriputta, general of Dgha Nikya, by the
nanda, the Buddhas personal attendant, during the last 25 years of his life, delivered suttas and
participated in many more and four suttas were spoken by the ven. Mahkaccyna and two by the
Second Great chief disciples, the ven. Mahmoggallna.

666MAJJHIMA NIKYA
There are hundred fifty-two Suttas in the Majjhima Nik1ya. These Suttas are divided into three
groups. There are fifty Suttas in one group. There are many Suttas have been the same name with the
only difference as C3la and Mah1 for example:
Mah1 Gosinga
Mah1 Gopalaka - C3la
C3la Saccaka
C3la Vedalla

- C3la Gosinga
Gopalaka
- Mah1 Saccaka
- Mah1 Vedalla

In these manner, there are many Suttas arrange in pairs. The Mah1 vision it is usually longer
than a C3la but not always.
In the Majjhima Nik1ya there are some Suttas, which we called Ov1da Sutta. In this sutta we
observe advice given.
(1) An1thapintikov1da
(2) Cannav1da
(3) Nandokov1da
(4) CularAhulov1da
In these Suttas we observe advice given to various people. Once the Buddha gave advise to
An1thapindika who was the chief lay disciple of the Buddha. The Buddha once advised Canna who
was very stubborn not to commit suicide. The Buddha advised Nanda about the impermanence of
sensual pleasure. The Buddha also advised Rahul1 Thera, in this Sutta, C3lavagga. We observed the
Buddha given advise to give up defilement and to practice the path leading to Nibbana. All these

Ov1da Suttas are very important to make a person free from impurity.
In the Majjhima Nik1ya there are Suttas dealing with similes. These Suttas are called Upam1
Sutta1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Vatth3pam1 Sutta
Kakac3pama Sutta
Alagadd3pama Sutta
VaMmika Sutta
Ratavin2ta Sutta
C3lahathipadopam1 Sutta
Latthukikopama Sutta

In the Vatth3pam1 Sutta, the Buddha gave the parable of the cloth. The Buddha gave instruction
to the Buddhist monks to remain pure in mind and to destroy all mental impurity.
In the Kakac3pama Sutta, the parable of saw is given. Here it is said that to curb (stop) anger and
to act and to behave like a person free from anger. This Sutta is given.
In the Alagaddupam1 Sutta the parable of snake is given. Here in this instance, if one takes hold
of the snake, the snake should be held by the neck and not by the tail.
In the Vammika sutta, an anthill is used as a parable to show how a person can get rid of sensor
pleasures.
In the Ratavinita Sutta, the 7 stages of purification to go to Nibb1na are compared to a chariot.
In the C3hatthipadopama Sutta gives the parable of an elephant. It is meant the covering of the
most important teaching of the Buddha.
In Latukikopam1 sutta, according to this sutta it is said that foolish people do not give up when
asked to stop their wrong actions. Later whowever, they become a bond and they cannot get free. In
this way in the Majjhima Nik1ya there are Sutta in indicating various types of parables.
In the Majjhima Nik1ya there are suttas called Vibha8ga SuttasCUlakamma VibhaBga
Mah1VibhaBga
SalAyatana VibhaBga
4. Uddesa VibhaBga
5. Arana VibhaBga
6. Dh1tu VibhaBga
7. Sacc1 Vibhang
1.
2.
3.

These types of Sutta follow the Abhidhamma method.

In the Majjhima Nik1ya, there are also Suttas, which are important philosophically having
Psychological base.
1. Madupi8dika sutta
2. Mah1vetara sutta
3. C3lavedara sutta
4. Vima9asaka. sutta
Majjhima Nik1ya gives a picture of a social and religious condition during the time of the
Buddha. The life of the Buddha as well as the practices of monks are well illustrated. These Suttas also
give the religious views of the teachers who lived during the time of the Buddha.

The End

EXPLAIN THE MAJJHIMA NIKYA AND ITS SUTTAS SPOKEN BY THE BUDDHA AND HIS DISCIPLES WITH SPECIAL
FOCUSING ON IT. (ORIGINAL BY VEN. NRASHA)
Majjhima Nikya
The Majjhima Nikya is mentioned as the second division of the Suttanta Piaka and is a one of
major part of the Pli Canon. Majjima Nikya is called 'the Middle Collection' or 'the collection of
discourses of medium length' and it is so called because the suttas there are generally of medium length
if compared with the longer suttas of Dgha Nikya. Most of the suttas of Majjhima Nikya refer to the
refutation of other views.12
The Majjhima Nikya consists of one hundred and fifty-two suttas in three books known as
pasa. The first book, Mlapasa, deals with the first fifty suttas in five vaggas, the second book,
Majjhimapasa consists of the second fifty suttas in five vaggas too. And then the last fifty-two
suttas deal with another five vaggas of the book, Uparipasa, which means more than fifty. The
suttas in Majjhima Nikya throws much light on the social ideas and institutions of those days and also
provides general information on the economic and political life.
In suttas of Majjhima Nikya such as Mlapariyya Sutta, the Buddha explained the basis of
all phenomena, specifying twenty-four categories such as the four elements, namely earth, water, fire
and wind and so on. The uninstructed worldling cannot perceive the true nature of these phenomena but
only the enlightened ones can see them in true perspective. Again, in Dhammadyda Sutta, the
Buddha urged the Bhikkhus to receive (as their legacy from Him through Bodhipakkhiyadhamma) only
non-material things like the four requisites.13 Sriputta Thero also advised the Bhikkhus to lead a
solitary life for attainment of jhnas and to strive for the attainment of Nibbna by abandoning greed,
ill will, and delusion.
It is not the Buddha alone who appears in the Majjhima Nikya when teaching and working,
but also the act of accomplishing His teachings by His disciples who are responsible for transition of
12 I would argue that it is rather Dgha Nikya which deals with other views.
13 But the four requisites, that means the food, robes, shelter and medicine are material things

His teaching is introduced. Of the 152 suttas in the Majjhima Nikya, the collection of discourses of
medium length, nine suttas are spoken by Ven. Sriputta Thero and in general some Doctrine or the
Dhamma is expounded by Ven. nanda. Of the seven suttas delivered by the Buddha during the last
25 years of His life, in four suttas also Ven. Mahkaccyana participates. The two suttas are preached
by the second chief disciple, Ven. Mahmoggalna.

SAYUTTA NIKYA (LECTURED BY VEN. MAHINDARATANA) (ORIGINAL BY VEN. SAMNANG PHY) (2009)
The third division of the Sutta Piaka is Sayutta Nikya, according to Mrs. Rhys Davids it is
called Grouped Suttas or the Book of kindred sayings. The saying has 56 groups or Sayuttas; there
are five Vaggas; those are Sagth, Nidna, Khandha, Sayatana and Mah Vagga. The Sagth
Vagga has 12 suttas, Nidna Vagga consists of 10 suttas, the Khandha Vagga contains 13 suttas, there
are 10 in Sayatana Vagga, and Mah Vagga refers to 12 only.

QUESTION: WRITE A SHORT ACCOUNT ON THE TOPIC SAYUTTA NIKYA.

The Sutta Piaka's third nikya is the Samutta nikya. After the first Buddhist council the Dgha nikya was
submitted to ven. nanda and his disciples in order to preserve it and Majjhima nikya was submitted to the disciples
of ven. Sriputta as well as this Sayutta nikya was submitted to the leader monk, ven. Mahkassapa and to his
disciples. According to Mrs. C. A. F. Rhys Davids, it is grouped suttas or the book of the kindred sayings. It is
mentioned as a compilation of suttas with their main bearing on psycho-ethical and philosophical problems. She
describes that the suttas of these collections are concise prose-discourses. She mentions further that the mass of these
little suttas, slight and concise sketches, with the verses which sum them up, or which they, the suttas, explain many
of them very poor poetry as such dealing with legends of fairies, gods and devils, with royal and priestly
interviewers of the sublime teacher, may seem tantalizing jungle to the traveler bound for the hills of thought more
austere. But let him enter with open mind and sympathetic imagination awake. So, will he wander not unrewarded. He
will find himself for the most part in the woodland of faerie, opening out here on a settlement of religious brethren,
there on scenes of life in rural communities such as might well be met in India of today or indeed in other countries.
Mythical and folklore drapery are wrapped about many of the sayings here ascribed to the Buddha. Nevertheless, the
matter of them is of the stamp of the oldest doctrine known to us, and from them a fairly complete synopsis of the
ancient Dhamma might be compiled. And, short and terse as are the presentations of both sayings and episode, they

contribute not a little to body out our somewhat vague outline of India's greatest son, so that we receive successive
impressions of his great good sense, his willingness to adapt his sayings to the individual inquirer, his keen intuition,
his humor and smiling irony, his courage and dignity, his catholic and tender compassion for all creatures.
The Sayutta nikya has 56 groups or sayuttas. There are five vaggas, which are divided into these
sayuttas. These five vaggas are:
1. Sagathavagga (has 11 sayuttas)
2. Nidanavagga (has 10 sayuttas)
3. Khandhavagga (has 13 sayuttas)
4. Salyatanavagga (has 10 sayuttas)
5. Mahvagga (has 12 sayuttas)
The vaggas are so called after the name of the first in the group or interlocutor's name. The Sagathavagga has
eleven sayuttas, the Nidnavagga consists of ten, next has thirteen, next has ten and the last one has twelve. Mra
and Bhikkhun sayuttas which are mentioned as ballads in mixed prose and verses have occupied an important place
in the Sayutta nikya, because they are work of great poetical merit. They are but sacred ballads, counterpart of
those Akhyanas, with which the epic poetry the Indian originated.
It is known that on the basic of three principles:
1. those that mention Buddhist doctrine,
2. those that give an account of gods, men and demons,
3. those that describe very famous persons,
the arrangement of the suttas of Sayutta nikya has taken place. The first vagga deals with ethics and the
Buddhist monk's ideal like, but remaining vaggas speak out metaphysics and epistemology. It is to be noted here
that, the Sayutta nikya describes subjects which mention ethical, moral and philosophical matters.

AGUTTARA NIKYA (NUMERICAL SAYINGS OR GRADUAL SAYINGS) (LECTURED BY VEN. MAHINDARATANA)

(ORIGINAL BY VEN. SAMNANG PHY) (2009)
The Aguttara Nikya is the fourth division of the five groups of Sutta Piaka. In Encyclopedia
of Buddhism we find an account of the Aguttara Nikya; it described in this division, the suttas are
grouped in Uttara High and Aga Part that is in groups of numerical ascendancy. It is translated
into English as numerical Saying or Gradual Saying. This particular way of grouping is an additional
assistant for memorizing to contents; it is very clear that when we compare and contrast with long
suttas, which were existed in Dgha Nikya. It is easy to commit to memory; the suttas are short and
numerical in Aguttara Nikya.
There are many translations for Aguttara Nikya for instance, numerical saying and gradual
saying in Sanskrit canon; it was mentioned to be Ekutargama and also Milindapah mentions that it
is named as Ekutar Nikya.
The suttas of Aguttara Nikya are divided into 11 divisions known as nipta or 'collection'.
Each nipta is divided again into groups called vagga which usually contains 10 suttas, 11 niptas
named Ekaka Nipta and Dukkha Nipta and so on. In Ekaka Nipta it contains one item of Dhamma;

it is increased up to eleven. Item of Dhamma, it is said that collections of discourses of Aguttara

Nikya is containing 9557 short suttas. There are many ideas about this number. Among scholars they
denoted various numbers according to their own thoughts. This collection is very famous amongst
students as well as teachers.
We can find much information about the great disciples of the Buddha like; ven. Sriputta in
Intuitive Wisdom and Knowledge (pa), Mah Nogallna in supernormal power (Iddhi), etc.
through this source or suttas specially visitors who came to visit the Buddha and queried the questions.
the Buddha had dwelled and Buddhas answers all these questions are available in Aguttara Nikya.
The Aguttara Nikya has following nipta;
4) Ekaka Nipka contains 21 chapters in A.N. I. 1 to 46.
5) Duka Nipta contains 16 chapters in A.N. I. 46 to 100.
6) Tika Nipta contains 16 chapters in A.N. I. 101 to 304.
7) Catuka Nipta contains 26 chapters in A.N. II. 1 to 257.
8) Pacaka Nipta contains 26 chapters in A.N. III. 1 to 278.
9) Chakka Nipta contains 12 chapters in A.N. III. 279 to 452.
10) Sattaka Nipta contains 9 chapters in A.N. V. 1 to 149.
11) Ahaka Nipta contains 9 chapters in A.N. V. 150 to 350.
12) Navaka Nipta contains 9 chapters in A.N. V. 351 to 466.
13) Dasaka Nipta contains 22 chapters in A.N. IV. 1 to 310.
14) Ekdasaka Nipta contains 3 chapters in A.N. IV. 311 to 361.

QUESTION: EXPLAIN HOW TO STUDY THE AGUTTARA NIKYA AS A SEPARATE SECTION IN THE SUTTANTA PIAKA.
The Aguttara Nikya is the fourth division of the five groups of Suttanta Piaka. Regarding the
Aguttara Nikya, in encyclopedia of Buddhism it is described by the words aga, uttara and nikya.
In its meaning, aga is a 'part' or 'numeral', uttara is higher and nikya is 'group'. It is translated into
English as 'the book of the numerical or gradual sayings' as the meaning of Aguttara Nikya. As for
the Aguttara Nikya, memorization of its contents is shorter and easier than of Dghanikya.14 There
are many translations for Aguttara Nikya. For instance, in Sanskrit Canon it is mentioned
Egutargama15 as numerical or gradual sayings and in Milida Pah its name is also mentioned as
Egutara Nikya.16
14 According to my knowledge Dgha Nikya is much shorter than Aguttara Nikya.
15 This term is extremely rarely used. The popular term for Sanskrit Aguttara Nikaya is 'Ekottargama'. You can see more
information in http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ekottara_Agama .
16 Word 'Egutara' does not appear in Tipiaka at all. In Milindapah we can see these two statements: Bhagavat
devtidevena aguttaranikyavare kathambhtassa me rattindiv vtivattantti pabbajitena abhiha
paccavekkhitabba'nti. (6. Opammakathpaho - 10. Cakkavattigapaho) And also Bhsitampeta, mahrja,
bhagavat devtidevena ekaguttaranikyavaralachake "nha, bhikkhave, aa ekapuggalampi samanupassmi,

The Aguttara Nikya is divided into eleven divisions known as nipta (collection). Each
nipta is divided again into groups called vagga and each vagga usually contains ten suttas. Of them,
the eleven divisions or niptas are named as Ekakanipta, Dukanipta Tikanipta and so on.
Ekakanipta contains 100 Dhammas and it increased up to eleven hundred of Dhammas.(?) Thus it is
said that the collection of discourses in Aguttara Nikya is counting to 9557 suttas. In theses suttas
there are many ideas about Buddhist philosophy. However, some scholars denoted various numbers
due to their wrong counting.
The eleven niptas in the Aguttara Nikya are separated into sectors as follows:17
Ekaka Nipta contains 21 chapters; Aguttara Nikya part one: pages 1-46
Duka Nipta contains 16 chapters; Aguttara Nikya part one: pages 46-100
Tika Nipta contains 16 chapters; Aguttara Nikya part one: pages 101-304
Catukka Nipta contains 26 chapters; Aguttara Nikya part two: pages 1-257
Pacaka Nipta contains 26 chapters; Aguttara Nikya part three: pages 1-278
Chakka Nipta contains 12 chapters; Aguttara Nikya part three: pages 279-452
Sattaka Nipta contains 9 chapters; Aguttara Nikya part four: pages 1-149
Aaka Nipta contains 8 chapters; Aguttara Nikya part four: pages 150-350
Navaka Nipta contains 9 chapters; Aguttara Nikya part four: pages 351-466
Dasaka Nipta contains 22 chapters; Aguttara Nikya part five: pages 1-310
Ekdasaka Nipta contains 3 chapters; Aguttara Nikya part five: pages 311-361
This Aguttara Nikya is very famous among the students as well as teachers who search and
study the Buddhist subject. Moreover, we can find there much information about the great disciples of
the Buddha like Sriputta, Moggallna, nanda, Mah Kassapa etc. Through discourses or suttas
the persons who came to visit the Buddha, raised the questions to Him and the answers that Buddha
gave them are available in Aguttara Nikya.

KHUDDAKA NIKYA (LECTURED BY VEN. MAHINDARATANA, GIVEN BY VEN. KEVALA) JULY 2010
The Khuddaka Nikya is the fifth division of Sutta Piaka. There are 16 independent treatises in
this nikya, but Buddhaghosa enumerated them as 15. It is known as collection of miscellanies or
collection of variety of short pieces. According to some scholars, the text of Khuddaka Nikya was
compiled after the four nikyas. And also, beside Ahaka Vagga and Paryana Vagga of Suttanipta,
other pieces were considered to be compiled after the first council.
It is known that some of the parts belong to the earliest period, but other parts belong to the
yo eva tathgatena anuttara dhammacakka pavattita sammadeva anuppavatteti, yathayida bhikkhave,
sriputto, sriputto. bhikkhave, tathgatena anuttara dhammacakka pavattita sammadeva anuppavattet'ti. (5.
Anumnapaho - 2. Dhutagapaho)

17 There is also an extra information, and that is the exact pages where the certain niptas appear. It seems, that those page
numbers apply to this five volumed edition of Aguttara Nikya: "The Book of the Gradual Sayings", from Pli
translated by F. L. Woodward & E. M. Hare, 1932-6, Bristol.

latest stratum of the Pli canon. It is to be noted here that when we judge the subject matter of this
nikya, we see that among the different texts, there was no similarity and they can be mentioned as
independent texts. And also, we can see considerably diverse characteristic there. It is significant that
among the Buddhist Ceylon, Burma and Siam there is no satisfactory agreement as to the pieces
belonging to it. It was written in verse. The 15 texts are as follows:18
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Khuddakapha Pi
Dhammapada Pi
Udna Pi
Itivuttaka Pi
Suttanipta Pi

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Vimnavatthu Pi
Petavatthu Pi
Theragth Pi
Thergth Pi
Jtaka Pi

11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

Niddesa Pi
Paisambhimagga Pi
Apadna Pi
Buddhavasa Pi
Cariypiaka Pi

1. Khuddakapha Pi
Khuddakapha is mentioned as first text of Khuddaka Nikya. It was called 'lesser'. According
to some English scholars, it is the text of the minor sayings. It has 9 short texts. They are:
1.
Tisaraa
Pah)
8.
Nidhikaa Sutta
2.
Dasasikkhpada
5.
Magala Sutta
9.
Mett Sutta
3.
Dvattiskro
6.
Ratana Sutta
(Karayamett Sutta)
4.
Kumrapah (Smanera 7.
Tirokua Sutta
There are many facts which are useful for a novice or a smanera. Therefore, we can believe,
that some of Theras must have composed this for the convenience of smaneras. The Khuddakapha
received its name from its four texts, which are no doubt very short, compared to the other five texts or
five suttas. It can be mentioned as a manual of the Buddhist life. It is evidently a devotional book of
daily life.
2. Dhammapada Pi
Dhammapada is the second book of Khuddaka Nikya. It deals with the sublime teachings of
the Buddha. It is a short manual of Buddhist teachings. It has 423 verses, which are sorted to 26
chapters according to the contents eg. Yamaka Vagga, Appamda Vagga, Citta Vagga, Pubba Vagga,
Bla Vagga, Paita Vagga, Arahanta Vagga, Sahassa Vagga, Ppa Vagga etc.
Dhammapada means 'religious words' or 'religious sayings'. According to Buddhists it contains
the teachings of the Buddha and mentions essential principles of Buddhist philosophy and the
Buddhist way of life. But, the compiler of the Dhammapada did not rely on canonical literature. He
quoted some joyful (pti) sayings in India literature.
3. Udna Pi
Udna is the third division of Khuddaka Nikya. It is the joyful utterances of the Buddha on
18 Note given by ven. Kevala: According to Burmese tradition, Khuddaka Nikya has 19 texts. It comprises also of
Nettippakaraa Pi, Petakopadesa Pi, Milindapah Pi and Suttasagaha Pi.

special occasions. It is collection of 80 Buddhist stories in 8 chapters or vaggas, eg. Bodhi Vagga,
Mucalia Vagga, Nanda Vagga and so on. It is written mostly in verses and hardly ever in prose. It is
rhymed, simple, most of Udna gives an account on the Buddhist idea of life and Nibbna, the perfect
state of bliss or happiness.
4. Itivuttaka Pi ('Thus said')
Itivuttaka is the fourth book of Khuddaka Nikya. It is written in prose and verse. It is a book of
quotation of authoritative teachings of the Buddha. It has 122 short suttas, divided into 4 sections or
niptas. Each of the suttas begins with these words: This has been said by the Buddha. Thus have I
heard. By words this meaning was told by the Buddha and thus have I heard.
5. Suttanipta (collection of suttas)
Suttanipta is the fifth book of Khuddaka Nikya. It is collection of 71 suttas, which are written
in verses. It has five vaggas, eg. Uraga Vagga, Cla Vagga, Mah Vagga, Ahaka Vagga and
Paryana Vagga. The last two vaggas are considered to be earlier teaching of the Buddha.
6. Vimnavatthu Pi (stories of the mansions)
It is the sixth book of Khuddaka Nikya. It has 85 stories, and it is divided into 7 chapters. It
describes various celestial abodes which were inhabited by the devas as a result of their meritorious
deeds performed in their previous lives.
7. Petavatthu Pi (stories of departed ones)
It is the seventh book of Khuddaka Nikya. It has 51 stories in verses, divided into 4 vaggas.
There are mentioned stories of petas who were born in hell, because they had done evil deeds while on
earth. The main aims of Petavatthu and Vimnavatthu are to remind and reveal the doctrine of kamma.
8. Theragth Pi (verses of male elders)
This can be mentioned as the collection of poems. These pomes were ascribed and attributed to
the Theras. It is said that some of the poems were uttered by Theras during the Buddha's time. It has
1360 gth, which are attributed to 264 monks.
9. Thergth Pi (verses of female elders)
It is also a collection of poems and it contains 522 gth, which are attributed to 73 nuns, sisters
of Sagha.

10. Jtaka Pi (birth stories)

It is the tenth book of Khuddaka Nikya. The main aim of Jtaka Pi is to inspire the minds of
people, to create faith in Buddhism, to popularize the religion of the Buddha. It gives us an account on
economic, political and religious life and social customs of ancient India at the time of Buddha. The
Jtaka Pi refers to the tales of the previous existences or the former births of the Buddha.
11. Niddesa Pi (exposition)
It has two parts, Mahniddesa and Claniddesa. It is a commentarial work, it is described by
and ascribed to ven. Sriputta. It has detailed explanation of 32 suttas of Ahaka Vagga and
Paryana Vagga of Suttanipta Pi.
12. Paisambhimagga Pi (path of discrimination)
It actually belongs to the literature of Abhidhamma type. It describes the nature of analytical
knowledge of an Arahant. It discusses 30 doctrinal problems in the form of question and answer.
13. Apadna Pi (stories of Arahants)
It deals with stories in verse which mention pious Buddhist monks and nuns. It is a narrative
work. The title of the book signifies that it is a collection of tales of the pious work of Arahants.
Apadna Pi has four main sections, such as Buddhpadna, Paccekabuddhpadna, Therpadna
and Therpadna.
14. Buddhavasa Pi (chronicles of Buddhas)
There are poetical legends of the 24 Buddhas who are supposed to precede the Gotama
Buddha.
15. Cariypiaka Pi (basket of conduct)
It is the last book of Khuddaka Nikya. It belongs to the post-Asokan period. The meaning of
the word 'cariya' is 'conduct' 'cariypiaka' thus means 'canonical collection of the stories with
reference to the incidents of the Bodhisatta practice.' It is divided into three parts. This treatise contains
35 stories of the Buddha's previous lives.

KHUDDAKA NIKYA (SMALLER COLLECTIONS) (LECTURED BY VEN. MAHINDARATANA) (ORIGINAL BY VEN. SAMNANG
PHY) (2009)
According to the source of the Theravda tradition in Sri Lanka states that the Sutta Piaka which

consists of five nikyas were completed at the first council held at Rjagaha immediately after the passing away
of the Buddha. But according to other traditions and some chronicles of Sri Lanka it is said that in the first
council only the First Four nikyas have been composed. Having completed the rehearsal of the Dgha Nikya
which consisted of 34 discourses and 64 Pavra; it was entrusted to the ven. nanda after recital of Dgha
Nikya, the Majjhima Nikya. which consists 152 suttas and 80 Paavras was rehearsed and entrusted to
pupils of ven. Sriputta. The Sayutta Nikya which consists of 100 paavra was rehearsed and entrusted to
ven. Mahkassapa; finally the Aguttara Nikya which contains 120 paavra was recited and entrusted to
ven. nurudha.
It should be noted that the Mahbodhivasa, a work written in Pli, in the 1st century BC in Sri Lanka,
also informs us about the prosperity of the first council. the account found in the Mahbodhivasa more or less
corresponds to the account of Sumagalavislin - in this account also the Khuddaka Nikya is not mentioned.
Each group who was entrusted in the four nikyas known as Pavra; the monk who continued the
Dgha Nikya was known as Dipkassa, Majjhima Nikya in the same way but there are not references to
reciters of Khuddaka Nikya Pvra in Pli commentaries.
The Khuddaka Nikya is the fifth division of the Sutta Piaka; it has 16 independent treatises but Ven.
Buddhaghosa enumerated them as 15. It is known as collection of miscellaneous or collection of short pieces.
According to some scholars the texts of Khuddaka Nikya were compiled after the four nikyas and also besides
Attakapra Vagga of Sutta Nipta; other pieces were considered as compiled after the first council. It is known
that some of the parts belonged to the earliest period but other parts belonged to the last stratum of the Pli
canon. It is to be noted here that when we judge the subject matter of this nikya we see that among the different
texts there was similarity and they can be mentioned as independent texts and also we can see most diverse
characteristics and it is significant that among the Buddhist of Ceylon, Burma, Cambodia and Siam there is no
completed agreement as to which pieces belong to it. The 15 texts are;
1.
Khuddaka Ptha (Shorter Texts)
2.
Dhammapada (The Way of Truth)
3.
Udna (Paeans of Joy)
4.
Itivuttaka (thus said Discourse)
5.
Suttanipta (Collected Discourses)
6.
Vimnavatthu (Stories of Celestial Mansions)
7.
Petavatthu (Stories of Petas)
8.
Theragth (Psalms of the Brethren )
9.
Thergth (Psalms of Sisters)
10.
Jtaka (Birth stories of Bodhisattva)
11.
Niddesa (Expositions)
12.
Paisambhid Magga (Book of Analytical Knowledge )
13.
Apadna (Lives of Arahants)
14.
Buddhavasa (History of the Buddha)
15.
Cariy Piaka (Modes of Conducts)

KHUDDAKA NIKYA
The Khuddaka nikya is the fifth division of the Sutta Piaka. It has sixteen independent treatises, but

Buddhaghosa enumerated them as fifteen. Some of its parts belong to earliest period while other parts belonged to the later
stratum of the Pli canon. It is composed for the most part in verses and contains almost all the important words of Buddhist
poetry. The sixteen books included in Khuddaka nikyas are as follows:
1. Khuddakaptha
9. Thergtha
2. Dhammapada
10. Jtakas
3. Udna
11. Mahniddesa
4. Itivuttaka
12. Cullaniddesa
5. Suttanipta
13. Paisambhidmagga
6. Vimnavatthu
14. Apadna
7. Petavatthu
15. Buddhavasa
8. Theragtha
16. Cariypiaka
According to Burmese tradition, there are four other works besides above mentioned texts, namely:
17. Milindapah
18. Suttasagaha
19. Petakopadesa
20. Nettippakarana

QUESTION: WRITE INFORMATION TO ONE OF FIVE NIKYAS.

Khuddaka Nikya
Of the five Nikyas, Khuddakanikya contains the largest number of treatises (as listed below) and the most
numerous categories of Dhamma. Although the word khuddaka literally means minor or small the actual content of
this collection can by no means be regarded as minor including as it does the two major divisions of the piaka, namely, the
Vinaya Piaka and the Abhidhamma Piaka according to one system of classification. The miscellaneous nature of this
collection containing not only the discourses by the Buddha but compilations of brief doctrinal notes mostly in verse,
accounts of personal struggles and achievements by Theras and Thers also in verses, the birth stories, the history of the
Buddha etc. may account for it as 'a Bible'.
The following is the list of treatises as approved by the International Buddhist Synod:

Khuddaka nikya
1. Khuddakaptha
2. Dhammapada
3. Udna
4. Itivuttaka
5. Suttanipta
6. Vimnavatthu
7. Petavatthu
8. Theragth
9. Thergth

10. Jtaka
11. Niddesa
12. Paisambhidmagga
13. Apadna
14. Buddhavasa
15. Cariypiaka
16. Nettippakaraa
17. Petakopadesa
18. Milindapah

EXPLAIN THE KHUDDAKANIKYA FROM THE CONTROVERSY AMONG MANY SCHOLARS' POINTS OF VIEWS.
(ORIGINAL FROM VEN. NRASHA)
Khuddaka Nikya
There are so many concepts regarding Khuddaka Nikya among different scholars. According to the Theravda
tradition, it is stated that the Sutta Piaka, which consists of five nikyas, was completed at the First Buddhist Council in
Rjagaha after passing away of the Buddha. During the First Buddhist Council, each group of those who recited (by heart)
the four nikyas, was known as bhnaka. For example, the monks who preserved (by memorizing) the Dgha Nikya were
known as Dgha Bhnaka, Majjhima Bhnaka, Sayutta Bhnaka and Aguttara Bhnaka. But because of not reciting the
Khuddaka Nikya yet, there were no Khudaka Bhnakas in the Pali tradition at that time.
Moreover, according to another traditions and some Sri Lankan chronicles, it is said that in the First Council only
first four Nikyas have been composed and completed. Of them, after reciting the Dgha Nikya, which consisted of 34
discourses and 64 bhaavaras by nanda, the Majjima Nikya which consisted of 152 suttas, 80 bhaavaras was rehearsed
by the pupils of Sriputta. And then, the Sayutta Nikya, which consisted of 100 bhaavaras was preserved by Mah
Kassapa and finally, the Aguttara Nikya, which consisted of 120 Bhaavaras, was recited by Anuruddha. There is no
mention about the Khuddaka Nikya in the First Sagyan regarding these points.
In the same way, in the famous chronicles of Sri Lanka named Mahbodhivasa, which is dated to be written in
Pli in the 1st century also informs us as saying above. Similarity in the Sumangalavilsin written by Buddhaghosa also
tells that there was no account on Khuddaka Nikya in the First Buddhist council. Both Mahbodhivasa and
Sumagalavilsin say the same point as for the Khuddaka Nikya.

The Khuddaka Nikya of Suttanta Piaka had 16 independent treatises at the beginning but Buddhaghosa
enumerated them as only 15. According to some scholars accepting, the texts of Khuddaka Nikya were compiled after the
first four nikyas but not whole, only some parts. They said that some parts belong to the earliest period but other parts
belong to the latest stratum of the Pali Canon. It is to be noted here that when we study about the Khuddaka Nikya, we can
see that the parts can be mentioned as independent texts and this book has the most diverse characteristics among the
Buddhist countries as Ceylon, Burma and Siam. The 15 texts of Khuddaka Nikya are as follows:
1. Khuddakaptha
2. Dhammapada
3. Udna
4. Itivuttaka
5. Suttanipta
6. Vimnavatthu
7. Petavatthu
8. Theragth

666D ISCUSS

9. Thergth
10. Jtaka
11. Niddesa
12. Paisambhidmagga
13. Apadna
14. Buddhavasa
15. Cariypiaka

THE VARIOUS VIEWS REGARDING THE AUTHENTICITY OF THE

K HUDDAKA N IKAYA .

Khuddaka Nikaya is the fifth section of the Sutta Pitaka. It contains the largest number of treatises
and the most numerous categories of Dhamma. According to the Sri Lankan tradition, Khuddaka
Nikaya consists of 15 texts:
(1) Khuddaka-patha
(2) Dhammapada
(3) Udana
(4) Itivuttaka
(5) Sutta-nipata
(6) Vimana-vatthu
(7) Peta-vatthu
(8) Theragatha
(9) Therigatha
(10)
Jataka
(11)
Niddesa
(12)
Patisajbhida-magga
(13)
Apadana
(14)
Buddhavajsa
(15)
Cariya-pitaka
The Niddesa, lists number 11, consists of two parts: Mahaniddesa and Culaniddesa. However,

according to the Burmese tradition, there are 19 books in Khuddaka Nikaya, i.e., 4 others works
besides the above mentioned texts, they are:
(1) Nettipakarana
(2) Petakopadesa
(3) Milindapabha
(4) Sutta-savgaha
Within these 15 texts, there are several texts are of all verse, namely:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

Dhammapada
Vimanavatthu
Petavatthu
Theragatha
Therigatha
Buddhavajsa
Jataka
Cariya-pitaka

According to Cullavagga, the five Nikayas were questioned during the 1 st council.
Thus, the Theravada has a belief that Khuddaka Nikaya was rehearsed during the First
Council. But yet, there are various contrary views even among the Theravadins regarding
the authenticity of the Khuddaka Nikaya.
The existence of the Khuddaka Nikaya at the time of the First Council still remains
to be proved. It is obvious that the texts of the khuddaka Nikaya are not chronologically
ordered in the early sources. Actually, the various texts have undergone a certain period of
development and there are many interpolations into them. It becomes clear that these
individual texts have already existed during the early time prior to the Khuddaka Nikaya.
It is mentioned in the Sumangalavilasini that both the Vinaya and the 4 nikayas
were handed to their bhanakas during the 1 st Council, but the Khuddaka Nikaya has not
been mentioned any such handing-over. Instead, there were Jataka-bhanakas and
Dhammapada-bhanakas, but no Khuddaka Nikaya bhanakas. Therefore it is clear that the
Khuddaka Nikaya was not rehearsed during the 1 st Council.
According to the Dhammaguptika Vinaya, there are also facts as to the holding of

the First Council as well as the rehearsed of the first 4 Nikayas. There is no mention of
the Khuddaka Nikaya been rehearsed. At the end of the Council, the rehearsal took place
with regard to some suttas such as Jatakasuttas, nidanasuttas etc. This view is very similar
to that of the Sumangalavilasini. Even the Chinese translation of the Mahaparinibbana
sutta and in the Mulasarvastivada, only 4 Agamas are mentioned, but not the Khuddaka
Nikaya.
Besides the problem of the existence of the Khuddaka Nikaya during the First
Council, there are also various views regarding the number and the order of texts in the
Khuddaka Nikaya.
Buddhaghosa has given one and only definition to each of the first 4 Nikayas in his
famous Samantapasadika. But he gives two definitions for the Khuddaka Nikaya, i.e.;
1.Pavvarasappabhado kuddakanikayo
(The Khuddaka Nikaya consits of 15 books)
2.Thapetva caturopete nikaye dighamadika tadabbaj
buddhavacanaj nikayo khuddako mato.
(All the words of the Buddha other than the 4 nikayas are considered as the Khuddaka
Nikaya)
In the second definition, it is clear that the whole of the Vinaya Pitaka and the
Abhidhamma Pitaka and all the teachings of the Buddha not included in the remaining 4
Nikayas are regarded as forming the Khuddaka Nikaya. Here, even Buddhaghosa does not
have definite view regarding the number of texts in the Khuddaka Nikaya.
With regard to the term pavvrasappabhado, the Chinese Samantapasadika gives
Cuddasabheda (i.e. 14 books). Here one book is lacking, some scholars such as Oliver
Abeynayaka thought that it is the Khuddakapatha. The evidence is that, both before and
after the time of commentary, the name of the Khuddakapatha has been omitted from the
Khuddaka Nikaya in the lists of the Dighabhanakas, Majjhimabhanakas, Mahabodhivajsa,
Saddhamaratnakaraya and the Sinhala Milinda Prasnaya.

According to the Burmese tradition, there are 19 texts in the Khuddaka Nikaya, but in
the Siamese tradition, there are only 7 texts; in the Saddharmaratnakaraya, 12; the
Dharmaguptika vinaya 13; and in the Saratthadipani 14. Thus the number of the texts are
obvious differ, so is the order.
According to the Dipavajsa, a portion of the Jataka and the whole of the
Patisambhidamagga and Niddesa have been refused by the Mahasanghikas, though they
accepted the first 4 Nikayas. It also seems that the Dharmaguptika vinaya does not accept
the existence of the Suttanipata, only two vaggas, i.e. Atthaka and Parayana have been
recorded in their list.
The Sumangalavilasini as well as the Manorathapurani inform us that a Thera named
Sudinna rejected 11 texts which are found in the Khuddaka Nikaya, on the view that they
cannot be named sutta, assuttanamakaj Buddhavacana nama nathi. These texts are
Dhammapada, Jataka, Patisambhidhamagga, Theragatha, Therigatha etc. These texts do
not have suttas name, and they are the works of the disciples. Therefore the statement of
Thera Sudinna does confirm some sort of truth. Hence under this criteria, even the
Theravadins found it difficult to give authenticity to the Khuddaka Nikaya.
There is a reference found in the Samantapasadika which speaks of a Jataka Nikaya along
with the 4 Nikayas. This fact has drawn much attention of the scholars which resulted in
various opinions. However, it is quite obvious that the reference made to the order of
Nikayas as Digha, Majjhama, Sajyutta, Avguttara and Jataka, has shaken the traditional
theory of the five Nikayas and the authenticity of the Khudakka Nikaya.
KHUDDAKAPTHA
Khuddakaptha or the short lesson is mentioned as the first text of the Khuddaka nikya. It is also known as
lesson heading. Mr. Rhys Davids called it the text of minor sayings. The Khuddakaptha consists of nine texts according to
commentary. The book divides its names from the first four passages which are shorter in compilation with the remaining
five passages of suttas.
1. Sarangamana (taking the refuge of Triple Gem)
2. Dasa Sikhpada (ten precepts to be observed by the novices to enter the order)
3. Dvattimsakara (the list of 32 parts of the body)
4. Smanera Pah (a set of questions given to a smanera)
5. Mahmagala Sutta (38 auspicious to anyone)
6. Rataa Sutta (it is said to have been preached by the Buddha in the place of Vesl to preaching Triple Gem and
blessing)
7. Tirokuddha Sutta (about petas (departed spirits), transferring merits to one's kinsmen)
8. Nidhikanda Sutta (the result of good deeds)
9. Karanyamett Sutta (mett meditation)

Mahmangala sutta
Mahmangala sutta was preached at Jetavana in answering the questions asked by a deva as to which are the
auspicious things in the world. This sutta describes 38 auspicious things including such things as the evident of four
associations with wise, honoring those worthy human etc. This commentary explains that at the time this sutta was
preached, there was a great discussion over the whole of Jambudpa regarding the constitution of mangala. The deva heard
the discussion and argued among themselves till the matters spread to the pious Brahma world. Then it was Sakka's
suggestion, that a devaputta should visit the Buddha and ask him about it. In the Sutta Nipta some sutta called
Mahmangala was discussed. It is one of the suttas at the preaching of which countless deva were present and countless
beings realized the truth. This sutta is often recited and formed one of the commons of paritta. To have it written down in a
book is considered an act of great of merit. It is said, that one king Duugemunu intended to preach this sutta at the
Lohabhasada, but he was too nervous.

Ratana sutta
This sutta is one of the precious in early Pli poetry. A charming hymn of praise of the Buddhist holy triple Gem is
recited to ward off dangers and secure prosperity. The poem as we, now have it consists of two separate groups of stanza.
The one of the five stanzas (first two and the last three) has been traditionally known as the original structure (atte paca
gtha). The remaining stanzas of poem are to have been inserted into the original a scheme of five. Whatever treasure there
is in the world or in the next and whatever excellent jewels there were in heaven, there is none equal to the Buddha. There is
nothing equal to unceasing meditation preached by the Buddha. Those being free from desire with a steadfast mind are
firmly established in the religion of Gautama. He who obtains Arahantship as the pillar of a city gate standing on the earth
is immovable by the wind from the four directions. So, I call him a righteous man who realized the Four Noble Truths.
They, who clearly meditated on the Four Noble Truths laid down by the Wise One, however much they may be lead to
Nibbna cannot obtain the rebirth in the Niraya (hell) but they finally obtain blessing of the Triple Gem.

Tirokuddha sutta
One of the five suttas included in the Khuddakaptha. Petas (departed spirits), having their old dwelling places and
their compassionate kinsmen should feed on them in due time food, charring etc. and also give gifts to monks in their
names. Thus will they be happy. This sutta was preached on the third day of the Buddha's visit to Rjagaha, because on the
previous night petas made a great uproar in the king Bimbisra's palace.

NIDDESA
The Niddesa is the eleventh book of Khuddaka Nikya. It has two parts the Mah Niddesa and Culla Niddesa.
These two books are considered as commentaries belonging to the canon. The Mah Niddesa is mentioned as a collection of
word-by-word annotations of 210 verses of 16 suttas in the Ahakavagga of the Suttanipta. The Culla Niddesa caontains
comments on 118 verses of 18 suttas of Paryana Vagga and 41 verses of one sutta in the same Suttanipta.
The Niddesa is commentarial work and is ascribed to ven. Sriputta. It has a detailed explanation by ven.
Sriputta of 32 suttas of Ahaka and Paryana vaggas of Suttanipta, and the Khaggavisana Sutta of the Uraga Vagga of
the Suttanipta. It contains no coments on the 56 Vatthugtha introductory stanzas with preface. The Paryana Vagga is
presently found in the Sutta Nipta.
This lends support to the suggestion, that at the time when Cla Niddesa was written the Paryana Vagga was a
spread(?) and anthology(?), and that the Khaggavisana Sutta did not belong to any particular group, similarly with the
Mah Niddesa and Ahaka Vagga. The comments in the Niddesa seem to have been methodical, exegetical explanations
such as are attributed here and there in the Piakas to Mah Kaccyana and ven. Sriputta. The Niddesa refers to several
schedules of the mind-qualities which are based on the three divisions action, speech and thought.

DHAMMAPADA
The Dhammapada is the second book of the Khuddaka nikya. It deals with the sublime teachings of the Buddha.
It is a short manual of Buddhist teaching. It has 423 verses and is arranged according to topics into 26 vaggas or chapters.
They are:
1. Yamaka vagga
2. Appamda vagga
3. Citta vagga
4. Puppha vagga
5. Bla vagga
6. Paita vagga
7. Arahanta vagga
8. Sahassa vagga
9. Ppa vagga
10. Daa vagga
11. Jar vagga
12. Atta vagga
13. Loka vagga

14. Buddha vagga

15. Sukha vagga
16. Piya vagga
17. Kodha vagga
18. Mala vagga
19. Dhammaha vagga
20. Magga vagga
21. Pakiaka vagga
22. Niraya vagga
23. Nga vagga
24. Tah vagga
25. Bhikkhu vagga
26. Brhmaa vagga

The meaning of the Dhammapada is the religious words or saying according to Buddhism. It contains the
teachings of the Buddha and mentions the essential principles of Buddhist philosophy and the Buddhist way of life.

QUESTION: WRITE A SHORT ACCOUNT ON DHAMMAPADA

All these characteristics are featured in the Dhammapada, one of the thirty-one books that comprise the Tipiaka,
the three baskets which contain the quintessence of the Buddha's teachings.
The Dhammapada is not a book to be read superficially like a novel and shelved aside. It should be read and reread so that it may serve as a constant companion for inspiration, solace, and edification in times of need.
The Dhammapada was not preached by the Buddha in the present form. Three months after the passing away of
the Buddha, the Arahants, who assembled at the first convocation to rehearse the teachings of the Buddha, collected some
of the poetic utterances of the Buddha, which he expounded on different occasions, arranged and classified the treatise in
its present form, naming it the Dhammapada.
The Pli term Dhamma, in Sanskrit Dharma, is one of the most difficult words to be translated into English as
it has many meanings. It has to be understood according to the context. Were it is used in the sense of saying or Teachings
of the Buddha. Pada implies sections, portions, parts, or way. Dhammapada may be rendered sections or
portions of the Dhamma. The way of the Dhamma. It is somewhat difficult to offer a graceful English equivalent
according to its literal meaning. The way of Truth The way of righteousness, The path of virtue, are renderings that
have been suggested by various scholars.
The Dhammapada consists of 423 melodious Pli verses uttered by the Buddha on about 300 occasions to suit the
temperaments of the listeners in the course of His preaching tours during His ministry of forty-five years. Circumstances
that led to these noble utterances are presented in the form of long or short stories, together with traditional interpretations
of the Pli verses and technical terms, in the voluminous commentary written by ven. Buddhaghosa. This valuable
commentary has been ably translated by E. W. Burlighame for the Harvard Oriental Series. It may be remarked that most
of these verses are better understood when read with the context.
The gems of truth embodied in these texts aptly illustrate the moral and philosophical teachings of the Buddha.

DHAMMAPADA
From ancient times to the present, the Dhammapada has been regarded as the most concise expression of the
Buddha's teching found in the Pli canon and the chief spiritual evidence of early Buddhism.
In the countries following Theravda Buddhism, such as Sri Lanka, Burma and Thailand, the influence of the
Dhammapada is continual. It is an ever-fruitful source of themes for sermons and discussions, a guidebook for resolving the
countless problems of everyday life, a primer for the instruction of novices in the monasteries. Even the experienced,
contemplative, withdrawn to forest hermitage or mountainside cave for a life of meditation, can be expected to count a copy
of the book among his few material possessions. Yet the admiration the Dhammapada has obtained has not been confined to
avowed followers of Buddhism. Wherever it has become known its moral earnestness, realistic understanding of human life,
aphoristic wisdom and stirring message of a way to freedom from suffering have won for it the devotion and veneration of
those responsive to the good and the true.
The expounder of the verses that comprise the Dhammapada is the Indian sage called the Budda, an honorific title
meaning the Enlightened One or the Awakened One. The title Dhammapada which the ancient compilers of the
Buddhist scriptures attached to our anthology, means portions, aspects or sections of Dhamma. The work has been given
this title because, in its twenty-six chapters, it spans the multiple aspects of the Buddha's teaching, offering a variety of
standpoints from which to gain a glimpse into its heart.
The work is simply a collection of inspirational or pedagogical verses on the fundamentals of the Dhamma, to be
used as a basis for personal edification and instruction. In any given chapter several successive verses may have been
spoken by the Budda on a single occasion, and thus among themselves will exhibit a meaningful development or a set of
variations on a theme. But by a large, the logic behind the grouping together of verses into a chapter is merely the concern
with a common topic. The twenty-six chapter headings thus function as a kind of rubric for classifying the diverse poetic
utterances of the Master, and the reason behind the inclusion of any given verse in a particular chapter is its mention of the
subject indicated in the chapters heading.
As a great releigious classic and the chief spiritual testament of early Buddhism, the Dhammapada cannot be
judged in its true value by a single reading, even if that reading is done carefully and reverentially. The reader should reflect
on the meaning of each verse deeply and thoroughly, investigate its relevance to his life, and apply it as a guide to conduct.
If this is done repeatedly, with patience and perseverance, it is certain that the Dhammapada will confer upon his life and
new meaning and sense of purpose. Infusing him with hope and inspiration, gradually it will lead him to discover a freedom
and happiness far greater than anything the world can offer.

666UDANA
The Pali canon consists of three pitakas:
1. Sutta Pitaka
2. Vinaya Pitaka
3. Abhidhamma Pitaka
Sutta Pitaka again has been divided into five sections:
1. Digha Nikaya
2. Majjhima Nikaya
3. Sajyutta Nikaya
4. Avguttara Nikaya
5. Khuddaka Nikaya
The former 4 sections are separate texts and the 5th one consists of 15 texts. The Buddhas
teaching have been introduced by the following names during the Buddhas time:
1. Dhamma
2. Dhamma-vinaya
3. Pabcanikaya
4. Sahita
5. Navavga
6. Pavacana
Of these names, navavga refers to nine sections or style of Buddhas teaching, it can be considered
as distinctive characteristic of Buddhas teaching.
1. Sutta
2. Geyya
3. Veyyakarana
4. Gatha
5. Udana

6. Itivuttaka
7. Jataka
8. Abhutadhamma
9. vedalla

The term udana appears even in this early classification of Buddhas teaching. It is good
evidence to support the antiquity of the Udana Pali. The term Udana is defined as UD + AN + A =
Udana. Etymologically, it means the air going up. According to vedic literature, there are five kinds
of life-air (prana-vayu):
1.
2.

prana
vyana

3.
4.
5.

apana
udana
samana

In this list of prana-vayu, number 4 refer to Udana. The term Udana generally refers to the
expression connected with enjoyment. In the Buddhist context, not only the enjoyment but also insight
or understanding is combine with the term, when it was used in connection with the Pali text it means
eighty-two discourses of the Buddha which have the characteristic of enjoyment and insight.
The Udana is the third book of the Khuddaka Nikaya, found between the Dhammapada and
Itivuttaka. It is a collection of 80 udana in 8 vaggas, each containing 10 suttas which end with a solemn
utterance. Each utterance is preceded by an introduction explaining the circumstances leading to the
event. The 8 vaggas are:
(1) Bodhivagga
(2) Mucalindavagga
(3) Nandavagga
(4) Meghiyavagga
(5) Sonatherassavagga
(6) Jaccandhavagga
(7) Culavagga
(8) Pataligamiyavagga

666WHAT ARE THE OPENING SUTTAS IN THE FOUR NIKAYAS?

Digha-nikaya, Majjhima-nikaya, Sajyutta-nikaya and Avguttara-nikaya are the first four
Nikayas of the Sutta Pitaka.
These suttas are for the most part in prose, with some verse included. They usually have a short
introduction giving the circumstances in which the suttas was delivered.
The number of the suttas and the opening suttas in the four Nikayas are as below:
1. Digha Nikaya (34 suttas)
2. Majjhima Nikaya (152 suttas)
3. Sajyutta Nikaya
(7762 suttas in 56 sajyuttas) ---4. Avgutta Nikaya (9557 suttas in 11 nipatas)
----

---Brahmajala sutta
---Mulapariyaya sutta
Oghatarana sutta
Cittapariyadana sutta

Brahmajala sutta

The incidents to which this sutta owns its origin from the conversation held between suppiya and
his pupil, Brahmadatta gave rise to the occasion for the entire discourse.
The Brahmajala sutta tells how the Buddha knows, like a good fisherman, how to catch in his net
of views all sophists and philosophers, and to prove their doctrines and speculations to be worthless
and obstacles to true salvation. In the course of this, he enumerates 62 different philosophical views,

from which the followers of the Buddha is to keep away. In these 62 wrong views, 18 views regarding
the Pubbantakappika and 44 views regarding the Aparantakappika.
The sutta is important, not only for the information it gives about Buddhism, but also for the
contribution it makes to the history of early religion and philosophy in India. There is also much
dealing with social conditions, for as part of his rules for his followers the Buddha lists many activities
and professions which they much avoid.
The Buddha himself in the end of this sutta refers to its other alternative titles which are Atthajala,
Dhammajala, Ditthijala and Anuttarasajgamavijaya. And this in the only sutta in Digha Nikaya deals
with the three morality:
(a) Minor Morality
(b) Middle Morality

---

Basic morality applicable to all.

Which are mostly practised by Samanas and Brahmanas.

(c) Major Morality
1. MULAPARIYAYA SUTTA
The Majjhima-nikaya begins with the Mulapariyaya sutta which lays the scene of the discourse at
the pleasure grove of Ukkattha. The Buddha uttered these words sabba-dhamma-mulapariyayaj vo
bhikkhave desessami (Bhikkhu, I shall expound the main procedure of all religious beliefs).
In this sutta the Buddha gave the real position of the contemporary systems of the philosophy and
his own. From this sutta we learn that many philosophical and theological ideas existed then in India. It
informs us that there was a difference between the Brahmanical conception of Nirvana and the
Buddhas conception of Nibbana.
Here, the Buddha explained the basis of all phenomena, specifying 24 categories such as the 4
elements; sentient being, devas; the seen, the heard, the thought of, the known; the oneness, the
multiplicity, the whole; and the reality of Nibbana. The uninstructed worldling cannot perceive the true
nature of these phenomena; only the enlightened ones can see them in true perspective.
3. Oghatarana sutta

The Sajyutta Nikaya gains its title from the fact that its suttas are grouped together (sajyutta)
according to their contents. There are 56 sajyuttas, arranged in 5 vaggas. They contains 7762 suttas.
The first vagga is called Sagathavagga, again contains 11 sajyutta, the first sajyutta is Devatasajyutta.
The first sutta of the Devata-sajyutta is Oghatarana sutta, it has a short introduction describing
how a devata visited the Buddha and asked a question.
Cittapariyadana sutta

Avguttara Nikaya is divided into 11 nipatas, arranged in about 160 vaggas and consists of 9557
suttas. Ekanipata is the first nipatas and has 19 vaggas, the first vagga is called Rupavagga. Thus, the
first sutta of Avgutta Nikaya is in the first vagga of the Rupavagga.

VINAYA PIAKA WITH SHORT INTRODUCTION TO PLI CANONICAL LITERATURE

(LECTURED BY VEN. MAHINDARATANA, WRITTEN BY VEN. KEVALA) 2010
There are three piakas in the Pli canon. Here, canon means Pli text-books. They are as follows:
1.

Sutta Piaka (the basket of discourses)

2.

Vinaya Piaka (the basket of disciplinary rules and regulations)

3.

Abhidhamma Piaka (Buddhist philosophical thoughts)

Originally, there have been only two works in the Pli canon, that is 'Dhamma' and 'Vinaya'. In the earliest
Buddhist works, we meet the word 'Vinaya' together with the work 'Dhamma' as Dhamma-Vinaya in the canon itself. But
when we compare and contrast with the work Dhamma, it came into being as Vinaya Piaka in the Pli literature. In this
respect, Vinaya means monastic rules and regulations. In other words, Vinaya means discipline in thought, words and deeds.

According to the Theravda Pli commentaries, it is said, that there were three piakas that have been collected in
the first Buddhist Council, which was held at Rjagaha in India. But when we investigate deeply, we can realize that there
have been arranged only two collections of suttas (as piakas) at the first Buddhist Council.

The Buddha also said: May dhammoca vinayoca desito paatto. In this stanza we can see just only two words
Dhamma and Vinaya, but actually it is merely one word 'dhammavinaya'. Vinaya, however, was a special piaka
(basket) in the Pali scripture.

It contains monastic rules of discipline for Buddhist monks and nuns and others, that are included into the
Dhamma section. The Vinaya was developed as a piaka in the first Buddhist Council, but strictly, before the first Buddhist
Council, there was a plenty of rules and regulations by name Vinaya (discipline of the Order).

Ven. Upli was specialized in Vinaya. He answered whatever questions were asked by Ven. Mah Kassapa at the
first Buddhist Council. Vinaya Piaka is nothing but discipline laid down by the Lord Buddha Himself for ones who enter
into the Order as Bhikkhus and Bhikkhuns.

These disciplines embody authoritative injunction of the Buddha to control the disciples on both physical and
verbal actions in the daily activities.19 The Buddhist monastic community always depends on Vinaya Piaka mainly. It is
said: Vinayo nma ssanassa yu. in the Vinaya commentaries.

If the discipline is deeply rooted in Bhikkhus, the Order would be established very well, otherwise the discipleship
would perish. There would be no more Ssana - Vinaye hite ssana hita, vinayonma ssanassa yu. The Blessed
One's expectation was that His disciples would succeed to develop their lives as well as help others to succeed in it also.
19 I feel that the rules were given with the purpose that the monks control themselves, not that the Buddha would control
them.

They would do so according to His teaching. Thus the Bhikkhus were meant to follow the way which was described by the
Buddha.

We are provided through information of early disciples by the Theragth and Thergth. In the first twenty years
after the Buddha's enlightenment, there have been no problems in the Order. The disciples who entered the life of
brahmacariya tried to understand the truth of the world and finally they succeeded in reaching the final goal, the Nibbna.

They had gone to the various religious leaders who were in India contemporary to the Buddha. Therefore, they did
not want to do any offenses against the order of Bhikkhus. Then, they were supposed to know what were suitable things and
what were the unsuitable things for monks. Still, they wanted to finish the cycle of rebirth, the Sasra, through the
Dhamma and advice given by the Buddha.

Although there were no rules and regulations in the Order at that time, they proceeded to live in purity throughout
their lives according to the Dhamma. We can see that the earliest disciples also followed similar sikkhpadas. It was
denoted by the Sutta Piaka given by the Buddha. We can see this evidence in the chapter of Khandhaka.

According to the commentaries, it was through Bhikkhu named Sudina, a native of Kalandha village near Vesl
who committed sexual intercourse with his ex-wife. That was first Prjika rule that came to be promulgated. It was laid
down to control Bhikkhus from indulgence in sexual intercourse. This kind of rule was not given because it would be the
first time when monks would commit an offense. But those offenses were not as great, therefore, the Buddha did not lay
down any rules of disciplines those times. In fact, He only blamed the offenders and encouraged them not to commit the
offenses again.

Once Arahant Sriputta have shown the situation of the Order and he wanted to protect the Order systematically.
But the Buddha answered that it was not the time to promulgate the Vinaya discipline to the Sagha Order. The Buddha
did not want to bind the disciples in the Order with rules and regulations. But after the first Prjika commited by Bhikkhu
Sudinna, the Buddha understood that it was time to lay down the Vinaya rules of the discipline in the Sagha.
Commentators said, that there are facts in the Sutta Piaka which were reasons to promulgate the Vinaya rules. In the
Bhaddli Sutta it is denoted that there are five items as causes of corruptions in the monastic Order. The five causes
according to how the Lord Buddha laid down the Vinaya rules are as follows:20
1.
2.
3.
4.

Lbhagga patto hoti (is subjected to gain)

Yasagga patto hoti (is subjected to fame)
Bhusaccamahatta patto hoti (is subjected to learning)
Ratta patto hoti (is subjected to security)

5.

Vepulla patto hoti (is subjected to expansion in number of monks)

Yato ca kho, bhaddli, idhekacce savahny dhamm saghe ptubhavanti, atha satth svakna
sikkhpada papeti tesayeva savahnyna dhammna paightya. na tva, bhaddli, idhekacce
savahny dhamm saghe ptubhavanti yva na sagho mahatta patto hoti. yato ca kho, bhaddli, sagho mahatta
patto hoti, atha idhekacce savahny dhamm saghe ptubhavanti. atha satth svakna sikkhpada papeti
tesayeva savahnyna dhammna paightya. na tva, bhaddli, idhekacce savahny dhamm saghe
ptubhavanti yva na sagho lbhagga patto hoti, yasagga patto hoti, bhusacca patto hoti, rattauta patto hoti.
yato ca kho, bhaddli, sagho rattauta patto hoti, atha idhekacce savahny dhamm saghe ptubhavanti, atha
20 Only the first four aspects can be found in the Bhaddli Sutta, the vepulla patto hoti aspect is missing. There is
another sutta Vinayapaattiycanakathvaan (Vinaya Piaka Prjika Pi - Verajakaa) and there are also
four aspects from this list. However, there the yasagga patto hoti aspect is missing.

satth svakna sikkhpada papeti tesayeva savahnyna dhammna paightya.

(Majjhima Nikya Majjhimapasapi - 2. Bhikkhuvaggo - 5. Bhaddlisutta)
And then, there are four reasons excluding above vepullamahatta patto hoti which is mentioned in the Vinaya
Piaka in the Suttavibhaga.21 In the earliest period of time there was a few members in the Sagha Order, but later it
numerically increased. It is said: Bhuznanvacanattni aphlsukha nma bhavati.22 All of them entered the Order to
become Arahants and some of them were learned people in regards to Vedas and other texts as well. They tried to argue
with each other about the Buddha and His teachings. When the Sagha Orderbecame famous, numbers of people visited
various gifts. So, some of monks entered the Buddha's Order in order to gain such gifts. The Buddha laid down the
Vinaya rules for the sake of Sagha Order not for confining the Bhikkhus and Bhikkhuns. There are ten reasons for the
Vinaya rules preached by the Buddha Himself. They are as follows:23
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Saghasuhutya for the welfare of the monks

Saghaphsutya for the comfort of the monks
Dumakna puggalna niggahya for the control of unsteady monks
Pesalna bhikkhna phsuvihrya for the well-being of well behaved monks
Dihadhammikna savna savarya for the restraint of the present defilement
Samparyikna savna paightya for the regarding against pollution liable to arise in a future life
Appasannna pasdya for pleasing of those not yet pleased with Dhamma
Pasannna Bhiyobhvya for the development of these pleased with Dhamma
Saddhammahitiy for the preservation of the Dhamma
Vinaynuggahya for the favor of the Vinaya

According to the commentators the Blessed One could not control the Order at the time when the Sagha Order spread all over
the India. Among the monks some had seen the Buddha but some monks had never seen the Buddha personally. Then they behave
monastic order how they wanted with the previous habits.(?) Therefore, the Buddha had to lay down the Vinaya rules and discipline
involving the whole Order. There are eight divisions of Vinaya, namely:

Section
1. Prjika
2. Sagdisesa
3. Aniyata
4. Nissaggiya
5. Suddha pcittiya
6. Patidesaniya
7. Sekhiya
8. Adhikaranasamatha

Bhikkhu
4
13
2
30
92
4
75
7

(all together)

(227)

Bhikkhun
8
17
30
166
8
75
7
(311)

According to classification of Pli commentaries we can see that the Vinaya Piaka has been divided into five divisions:

1. Prjika Pi (in Suttavibhaga)

2. Pcittiya Pi (in Suttavibhaga)
3. Mahvagga Pi (in Khandaka)
4. Cullavagga Pi (in Khandaka)
5. Parivra Pi (Parivra)
Here Vibhaga is based on Ptimokkha text; it contains the rules of Bhikkhus and Bhikkhuns which is included in Prjika Pi
and Pcittiya Pi. Ptimokkha means 'the code for monks and nuns'. This is probably one of the oldest texts formulated at the ceremony
of confession which was performed on Uposatha day by the monastic Order. The text is called Suttavibhaga, the commentary on
Vibhaga Pi.(?) The transgressions that may be committed by individual are systematically divided in Vinaya Piaka into categories
according to their seriousness. Transgression is an offense committed by a monk:

21 It is Prjika Pi in Suttavibhaga.
22 This is completely nonsense. It does neither appear in Tipiaka nor in notes from the other years and other subjects.
Moreover, it is completely irrelevant in regards to the discussed topic.
23 For example at Aguttara Nikya Dasakaniptapi 4. Uplivaggo 1. Uplisutta

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Cattro Prjikadhamm
Terassa Saghdisesadhamm
Tisa Nissaggiyadhamm
Dvenanuti Pcittiyadhamm
Dve Aniyatadhamm
Cattro Pidesanyadhamm
Satta Adhikarasamathadhamm
Pacasatti Sekhiyadhamm

There are 227 such rules in Bhikkhu Ptimokkha. This Ptimokkha is called ' Ptimokkha' by technical term. There is
another Ptimokkha called 'Ovda Ptimokkha'. Blessed Ones who lived in the long period of the world did not establish rules and
regulations for the Order of their disciples. They just advised their disciples verbally. It is named 'Ovda Ptimokkha' presented by the
Perfected Buddhas. However, some of the Blessed Ones who lived for a short time in the world laid down the Vinaya rules. For example
Gotama Buddha. Actually, all Blessed Ones who lived for a short period of the world laid down the Vinaya discipline twenty years after
their enlightenment (see Sumagalavilsin). 'Ovda Ptimokkha' could be preached only by the Blessed One, but Ptimokkha can
be preached by the disciples either. Regarding the Ovda Ptimokkha there are three verses in the Vinaya Piaka as follows:24

Sabbappassa akaraa
Kusalassa upasapad;
Sacittapariyodapana,
Eta buddhnassana.

To do well,
Not to do evil,
To purify the mind,
This is the teaching of all the Buddhas.

Khant parama tapo titikkh,

Nibbna parama vadanti buddh;
Na hi pabbajito parpaght,
Na samao hoti para vihehayanto.

Forbearing patience is the highest austerity.

Nibbna is supreme, said the Buddha, He, verily,
is not a recluse who harms another,
Nor is he an ascetic who oppresses others.

Anpavdo anpaghto,
Ptimokkhe ca savaro,
Mattaut ca bhattasmi,
Pantaca sayansa
adhicitte ca yogo,
eta buddhnassana'nti.

Not insulting, not harming,

restraint according to ptimokkha,
moderation in food,
secluded abode,
intend in higher thoughts
This is the teaching of all the Buddhas.

666WHAT IS VINAYA (VEN. SANTA)

Vinaya is the disciplinary code for self training laid down by the Buddha for monks and nuns to
observe. Vinaya plays a pivotal role in their monastic way of life. The Buddha did not formulate the
code of discipline in single exercise. However, he instituted certain rules as and when the need arose.
Vinaya pitaka and its commentary contain many significant stories about how and certain rule were
laid down by the Buddha. According to the Buddha the best form of vinaya was to discipline the
mind,words and action. The early disciples of the Buddha were highly developed spiritually and they
had little need for a set of rules to be imposes upon them. However, as monastic order (the sangha)
grew in numbers, it attracted many others, some of whom were not so highly developed spiritually.
There arose some problems regarding their conduct and way of life such as taking part in lay
activities for their livelihood and yielding to temptation for sense pleasure. Owing to this situation, the
24 These three Pli paragraphs can be found for example in Dgha Nikya - Mahvaggapi Mahpadnasutta
paragraph 90

Buddha had to lay down guidelines for the monks and nuns to follow so that they could distinguish the
different between the life of monks and laymen. Holy order when compared with other existing ascetic
practices at that time. During the early period the Buddha himself introduced these rules and regulation
for the progress and development of his religion. The vinaya pitaka deals meaning with moral
practices. Sila is a code of morality, important subject matter.
Ven. Buddhaghosa explained after passing away of the Buddha at first council the vinaya pitaka
was rehearsed first because vinaya is the age of the Buddhist dispensation. Vinayo nama sasanasa ayu
vinaye thite sasananca thitam hoti. The rules of discipline first laid down by the Buddha are called
Mulla- pannatti; those supplemented later are known as Anupannatti. Together they are known as
Sikkhapada, rules of discipline. The vinaya pitaka has three texts: 1 Suttavibhanga, 2 the khandhaka,
and 3 the parivara as much Theravada vinaya has. But R. C. Childers describes that the Vinaya pitaka
has five books; they are: Parajika, Pacittiya, Maha vagga, Culla vagga, and Parivara. The
Suttavibhanga discusses all the rules, which are given in Patimokkhasutta. The Suttavibhanga the
Buddhist thinks that the word means a division of discourses or a chapter. It mentions firstly how,
when and why the particular rule in question came to be laid down. The khandhakas is divided into two
parts: the Mahavagga consists of ten chapters, the Cullavagga twelve. The Mahavagga is known as the
greater division and Cullavagga means the small division.
The Parivara is known as the concluding text of the Vinaya pitaka. It was written much later
than the Suttavibhanga and Khaddhakas. It is a digest of other parts of the vinaya, which has 19
chapters. In the Theravada vinaya, Patimokkha has two parts Bhikkhu- Patimokkha has eight sections,
whereas Bhikkhuni- Patimokkha has seven sections. The monks are expected to follow 227 precepts,
while the nuns 311 precepts. The precepts for monks are divided categories: four parajika offence,
thirteen sanghadisesa offence, two aniyata offence, thirty nissagiya-pacittiya offence, ninety two
suddha-pacittiya offence, four patidesaniya offence, seventy- five sikkheyya-dharmma offence, and
seven adhikaranasamatha offences. The precepts for the nuns are categorized: eight parajika offences,
seventeen sanghadisesa offence, thirty nissagiya offences,166 suddha pacittaya offences, eight
padesaniya offences, seventy five sikheya offences and seven Adhikaranasamatha offences.
The offences for which penalities are laid down may be classified under seven categories
depending on their nature: 1 Parajika, 2 Sanghadisesa, 3 Thullaccaya, 4 Pacittiya, 5 Patidesaniya, 6
Dukkata, 7 Dubbhasita. Originally, the Patimokkha had 152 rules, but they were extended to 227 rules
of conduct were recited by the monks in the Uposatha ceremony. In Sanskrit there are 263 rules, but in
Tibetan we find 258 rules
631.

VINAYA PIAKA (BASKET OF DISCIPLINE) (LECTURED BY VEN. MAHINDARATANA) (ORIGINAL BY VEN. SAMNANG
PHY) (2009)
The Pli canon is known under the term Tipiaka, three fold baskets, because it consists of three main parts;
those are:
1) Vinaya Piaka
(Basket of Discipline)
2) Sutta Piaka (Basket of Discourse)

3) Abhidhamma Piaka (Basket of Ultimate Doctrine).

In the early Buddhist works we met the word Vinaya with the word Dhamma when the Vinaya was being
compared and contrasted; the word Dhamma came first and the Vinaya is second. According to Theravda
commentaries it said that there were three Piakas have been collected in the first Buddhist council, which was held at
Rjagaha but when we investigate deeply we realized that there were only two collections of Piaka in the first
council. The Buddha also said that May dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paatto.25 However, Vinaya was a special
basket it contains monastic rules of disciples of the Buddhist monks and nuns but others are included to Dhamma. The
Vinaya was developed as the Piaka in the first Buddhist council but before that there were plenty rules by the name
Siks amongst the eighty of great monks. Arahanta Upli was the specialized in the Vinaya. At the first council
Arahanta Upli answered every questions asked by Arahanta Mahkassapa like;
Ye venerable men, let the congregation hear me if the congregation ready I will question Upli in respect of
the Vinaya.
Ye venerable men, let the congregation hear me if the congregation is ready I will answer all the questions
asked by Ven. Mahkassapa, etc...
Vinaya (Discipline)
There are five contents of Vinaya Piaka,
1). Prjika Pli
(Major offenses)
2). Pcittiya Pli
(Minor offenses)
3). Mahvagga Pli
(Greater sections)
4). Cullavagga Pli
(Lesser sections)
5). Parivra Pli (Epitome of Vinaya)
These are known as desn26.
The Vinaya Pitaka is made up of rules of disciplines laid down for regulating the conduct of the Buddhas
disciples who have been admitted as Bhikkhus and Bhikkuns into the Order. These rules embody authoritative
injunctions of the Buddha on modes of conduct and restrains on both physical and verbal actions. They deal with
various categories of restrains and admonitions in accordance with the nature of the offense.
The Buddhist monastic community always have been depended on Vinaya Vinayo nma ssanassa yu.27 If
the developments are story of disciples; is there the order would establish very well? Other, the disciplines, could be
perished then there is no more called Ssana. According to classification of Pli commentators we can see the Vinaya
Pitaka has been divided into five divisions as mentions above; those five categories are summarized again into three
divisions as following;
a) Prjika Pli
1. Sutta Vibhaga
b) Pcittaya Pli

a) Cullavagga Pli
2. Khandhaka
b) Mahvagga Pli
25 This is for example at Mahparinibbna Sutta in Dgha Nikya.
26 This word appears only in Ahakath and its meaning is 'orders-preaching' or 'preaching orders'.
27 For example Tk Vinayapiaka Vinayavinicchaya Tk Ekuttaranayakathvaan - Catukkakathvaan

3. Parivra

Parivra Pli

Here, Vibhaga is based on the Ptimokkha; it contains the rules of disciplines of Bhikkhus and Bhikkhuns,
which included in Prjika and Pcittiya Pli. This is very probably one of the orders texts. The formula for
ceremony of confession as it was a performance in the Uposatha day in the monastic order. The Sutta Vibhaga is the
commentary on the texts (Ptimokkha). In the individual transgression are divided into following categories in the
order of their seriousness,
Bhikkhu
Bhikkhun
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Prjika
Saghdisesa
Aniyata
Nissaggiya
Suddha Pcittiya
Ptidesanya
Sekkhya vatta
Adhikaraa samaha

4
13
2
30
92
4
75
7
227

8*
17
30
166
8
75
7
311

These rules are numerical 227 in Bhikkhu Ptimokkha. This Ptimokkha is called nptimokkha; there are
other Ptimokkha named Ovdaptimokkha. Some Blessed Ones who lived long period in the world didnt establish
the rules of discipline for their disciples. They only advised their disciples in verbal action at the present time, this is
called or known as Ovdaptimokkha. This Ptimokkha was preached only by the Perfect Ones. Some Blessed Ones
who lived nor(?) longer period laid down the rules of disciplines after 20 years from their Enlightenment, their
disciples also could preach this ptimokkha; those stanzas are:28
Sabbappassa akaraa
Kusalassa upasapad;
Sacittapariyodapana,
Eta buddhnassana.

To do well,
Not to do evil,
To purify the mind,
This is the teaching of all the Buddhas

Khant parama tapo titikkh,

Nibbna parama vadanti buddh;
Na hi pabbajito parpaght,
Na samao hoti para vihehayanto.

Forbearing patience is the highest austerity.

Nibbna is supreme, said the Buddha, He, verily,
is not a recluse who harms another,
Nor is he an ascetic who oppresses others.

Anpavdo anpaghto,
Ptimokkhe ca savaro,
Mattaut ca bhattasmi,
Pantaca sayansa
adhicitte ca yogo,
eta buddhnassana'nti.

Not insulting, not harming,

restraint according to ptimokkha,
moderation in food,
secluded abode,
intend in higher thoughts
This is the teaching of all the Buddhas.

* For more detail please read Guide to Tipiaka, written by Uko Lay, page 12.

28 These three Pli paragraphs can be found for example in Dgha Nikya - Mahvaggapi Mahpadnasutta
paragraph 90

THE BASKET OF DISCIPLINE (SHORT VERSION OF VINAYA PIAKA WITH SHORT INTRODUCTION TO PLI

CANONICAL LITERATURE (LECTURED BY VEN. MAHINDARATANA, WRITTEN BY VEN. KEVALA) )

2010
In the Pli canon there are three piakas, namely Vinaya Piaka, Sutta Piaka and Abhidhamma Piaka. In earliest
Buddhist works we meet 'Vinaya' with the 'Dhamma' when the word 'Dhamma' comes first and the word 'Vinaya' is second.
According to commentaries, it is said that these three piakas have been collected in the First Buddhist Council. But when
we investigate deeply we realize that there had been collected only two piakas at the First Council.
The Buddha also had said: Dhammo ca Vinayo ca paatto. However, Vinaya Piaka contains monastic
discipline of the Buddhist monks, all other is included in Dhamma.
The Vinaya Piaka was developed as a piaka in the First Buddhist Council. But before that there were twenty of
systems of rules by name 'discipline'. Among those twenty was the system of rules for Buddhist monks.
The Vinaya Piaka is made up of rules for disciples who entered the Order as Bhikkhus. Those rules embody
authoritative injunctions of the Buddha. The Buddhist monastic communities always have depended on Vinaya Vinayonma ssanassa yu.
According to the classification of Pli commentators, Vinaya Piaka is divided into five divisions:
1. Prjika Pi (in Suttavibhaga)
2. Pcittiya Pi (in Suttavibhaga)
3. Mahvagga Pi (in Khandaka)
4. Cullavagga Pi (in Khandaka)
5. Parivra Pi (Parivra)
Here Suttavibhaga is based on the Ptimokkha. It contains the rules of discipline of Bhikkhus and Bhikkhuns. It
also consists of formulas for the ceremony of confession as it was performed on Uposatha day in the monasteries.29
There are 227 rules in the Bhikkhu Ptimokkha. It is called '-Ptimokkha'. There were another Buddhas who
lived long ago before the Gotama Buddha. They didn't establish rules of discipline, they advised their disciples in regards
to their verbal and bodily action. That is known as 'Ovda-Ptimokkha'. This Ptimokkha was preached only by the
Buddha.

VINAYA PIAKA
Vinaya means discipline. The Vinaya Piaka really means a basket containing manuscripts, vinaya or the
rules of discipline. It contains rules and regulations for the management of the Buddhist Sagha and for the conduct of the
daily life of monks and nuns, rules for reception into the order, for the periodical confession of sins, for life during the rainy
season, for house and clothing, medicine, creeds and legal Procter(?) in case of schism are also included in it.
These rules are support which has been laid down by the Buddha himself as ovation. There is strong having also
found place in it.(?) Some of them give us fragment of the Buddha-legend, while other through(?) of life on the daily life of
ancient idea there strops(?) are olestra(?) live of the occasion when the Buddha was constrained to have recourse to his
pupil.(?) The greater portion of the Vinaya Piaka appears to be dry and technical. Therein have rendered the work and
unpleasant reading in spite of the narrative of events in life of the Buddha. The Vinaya Piaka is in one word on account of
the Buddhist Sagha. Vinaya as known as known in middle Burma is the monastic code handed down by the Theravda
sent in Sri Lanka.
According to ven. Buddhaghosa all the text of Vinaya Piaka was rehearsed ??? in the first chanting. He
deskilled(?) Vinaya Piaka and Pacittiya Pli belong to Khandaka means 22 chapters, Cllavagga Pli 12 chapters and
Mahvagga Pli 10 chapters.
29 Although the teacher evidently doesn't participate at the Uposatha ceremony, today most of the virtuous Bhikkhus
participate at it regularly.

VINAYA PIAKA
The Vinaya Piaka clearly means a basket containing manuscripts of Vinaya or rule of discipline. It is containing
rules and regulations for the Bhikkhu Sagha and Bhikkhun Sagha. Ven. Buddhaghosa explained that Vinaya by them(?)
Suttavibhaga, Khandaka and Parivra.
These are containing:
1. Prjika Pi (in Suttavibhaga)
2. Pcittiya Pi (in Suttavibhaga)
3. Mahvagga Pi (in Khandaka)
4. Cullavagga Pi (in Khandaka)
5. Parivra Pi (Parivra)
Here Sutta Vibhaga means Prjika Pi and Pcittiya Pi. Khandaka means Cullavagga Pi and Mahvagga
Pi. Parivra means Parivra Pi. Here Suttavibhaga means 'the explanation of the sutta'. The sutta means the precepts
laid down by the Buddha for Bhikkhus and Bhikkhuns. The Suttavibhaga lays down and explains all the Vinaya rules
which are contained in the Ptimokkha. It is divided into two books Prjika Pi and Pcittiya Pi. Prjika and
Pcittiya contain rules for guidance of the Bhikkhu (227 Vinaya rules) and Bhikkhun (311 Vinaya rules) Sagha.
Ptimokkha is divided in 8 sections:
Section
1. Prjika
2. Sagdisesa
3. Aniyata
4. Nissaggiya
5. Suddha pcittiya
6. Patidesaniya
7. Sekhiya
8. Adhikaranasamatha
(all together)

Bhikkhu

Bhikkhun
4

13

8
17

2
30
92
4

30
166
8

75
7

75
7

(227)

(311)

The Ptimokkha seems to existence to the India custom of holding secret(?) two periods each month, on the full
moon and fourteenth or fifteenth day, the new moon day. The Bhikkhus and Bhikkhuns used to gather and meet to confess
their sins and faults which they committed towards their Vinaya. Bhikkhu Sagha are towards one another and exclusion
form the Ptimokkha ceremony.(?)
The Cullavagga deals with 12 cases of the peocceding(?) kamma, that which is against the law, act of superstition,
who speaks in disprove of the Buddha, the Dhamma and the Sagha. Ukkepaniya kamma and formal acts of
superstition(?) to be taken against those who have committed an offense do not want to admit.
The Parivra Pi is the biggest part of the Vinaya Piaka. It explaines how rules of the Order (Sagha) are drawn
up to regulate the conduct of the Bhikkhus as well as administrative affairs of the Order. The Parivra Pi provides general
principles and guidance in the spirit of which all the Sagha Vinicchaya.

QUESTION: GIVE AN ACCOUNT OF THE VINAYA PIAKA

The Vinaya Piaka is the basket of the discipline of the order. That means the basket, which contains manuscripts
of the rules of the discipline. It mentions the rules and regulations, which not only guide the Buddhist Sagha, but also
mentions the conduct of the daily life of monks and nuns.
During the early period the Buddha himself introduced these rules and regulations for the progress and

development of his religion. The Vinaya Piaka deals mainly with moral practices, sla is the code of morality, it is
important subject matter. Ven. Buddhaghosa explained after passing away of the Buddha at the first council the Vinaya
Piaka was rehearsed first, because Vinaya is the age of the Buddha's dispensation. Vinayonama ssana sayo. Vinaye
thite sasanaca thitam hoti.
The rules of discipline first laid down by the Buddha are called Mulapaatti. Those supplemented later are
known as Anupaatti. Together they are known as sikkhpadas (rules of discipline). The Vinaya Piaka has three texts:
1. Suttavibhaga
2. Khandhakas (has two parts)
3. Parivra (has ten parts) (as much as Theravda has)
But R. C. Childers describes, that the Vinaya Piaka has five books:
1. Prjika
4. Cullavagga (the smaller division, has 12 chapters)
2. Pcittiya
5. Parivra (the concluding text of Vinaya Piaka)
3. Mahvagga (the greater division)
The Sutta Vibhaga discusses all the rules which are given in Ptimokkha sutta. The Suttavibhaga Buddhists
understand this word as division of discourse or a chapter. It mentions first how, when and the particular rule in
question came to be laid down. The Khandakas is divided into two parts; the Mahvagga consists of ten chapters. The
Cullavagga twelve, the Mahvagga is known as the greater division and the Cullavagga means the smaller division.
The Parivra is known as the concluding text of the Vinaya Piaka. It was written much later than the Suttavibhaga and
Khandakas. It is a digest of other parts of the Vinaya, which has 19 chapters.
In the Theravda Vinaya, Ptimokkha has two parts. Bhikkhu Ptimokkha has eight sections, whereas Bhikkhun
Ptimokkha has seven sections. The monks are expected to follow 227 precepts, while nuns 311 precepts. The precepts for
monks are divided into categories:
1. Prjika offences (4)
4. Sekhiya-dhamma offences (75)
2. Suddha Pcittiya offences (9)
5. Adhikarana samatha offences (7)
3. Pidesanya offences (4)
The precepts for the nuns are also categorized:
1. Prjika offences (8)
2. Sanghdisesa offences (17)
3. Nissaggiya-pcittiya offences (30)
4. Suddha pcittiya offences (166)

5. Pidesanya offences (8)

6. Sekhiya dhamma offences (75)
7. Adhikaranasamatha offences (7)

The offenses for which penalties are laid down may be classified under seven categories depending on their nature:
1. Prjika
5. Pidesanya
2. Sanghdisesa
6. Dukkaa and Dubbhsita
3. Thullaccaya
4. Pcittiya
Originally, the Ptimokkha had 152 rules, but they were extended to 227, and these 227 rules of conduct were
recited by the monks during the uposatha ceremonies. In Sanskrit there are 263 rules and in the Tibetan tradition we find
258 rules.

THE VINAYA PIAKA (ORIGINAL BY VEN. HUNNY)

The Vinaya Piaka is the basket of discipline of the order, it means a basket which contains manuscripts of the rules
of discipline. It mentions the rules and regulations which not only guide the Buddhist Sagha but also mentions the conduct
of the daily life of monks and nuns. During the early period the Buddha himself introduced these rules and regulations for
the progress and development of his religion. The Vinaya Piaka deals mainly with moral practices. Sla is the code of

morality, important subject matter.

Ven. Buddhaghosa explained after passing away of the Buddha at the first council the Vinaya Piaka was
rehearsed first, because Vinaya is the age of the Buddhist dispensation.
Vinayo nma slsanasayo vinaye hite ssanaca hita hoti.
The rules of discipline first laid down by the Buddha are called mla paati. Together they are known as
sikkhpadas, rules of discipline.
The Vinaya Piaka has three texts:
1. Suttavibhaga
2. Khandhaka
3. Parivra
as much as Theravda Vinaya has. But R. C. Childer describes that the Vinaya Piaka has five books, they are:
1. Prjika
4. Cullavagga
2. Pcittiya
5. Parivra
3. Mahvagga
The Suttavibhaga discusses all the rules, which are given in the Ptimokkha sutta. The word Suttavibhaga is
by Buddhists understood as a division of discourse or a chapter. It mentions firstly how, when and why the particular rule in
question came to be laid down.
The Khandhaka is divided into two parts:
1. Mahvagga (consists of 10 chapters, known also as 'the greater division')
2. Cullavagga (consists of 12 chapters, known also as 'the smaller division')
The Parivra is known as the concluding text of the Vinaya Piaka, it was written much later than the
Suttavibhaga and Khandhaka. It is a biggest of all other parts of the Vinaya, which has 19 chapters.
In the Theravda, Vinaya Ptimokkha has two parts:
(a)
Bhikkhu Ptimokkha (has 8 sections)
(b)
Bhikkhun Ptimokkha (has 7 sections)
The monks are expected to follow 227 precepts, while the nuns 311 precepts. The precepts for monks are divided
in 8 categories of offenses:
1. 4 Prjika
5. 92 Sutthika Pcittiya
2. 13 Saghdisesa
6. 4 Pidesanya
3. 2 Aniyas
7. 75 Sekhia Dhamma
4. 30 Nissaggiya Pcittiya
8. 7 Adhikaranasamatha
The offenses for which penalties are laid down may be classified under seven categories depending on their nature:
1. Prjika
5. Pidesaniya
2. Sanghdisesa
6. Dukkhat
3. Thullaccaya
7. Dubbhasita
4. Pcittiya
Original Ptimokkha had 152 rules, but they were extended to 227, and these 227 rules of conduct were recited by
monks during Uposata ceremony. In Sanskrit there are 263 rules, but in Tibetan we find 258 rules.

THE STRUCTURE AND CONTENTS OF VINAYA (LECTURED BY VEN. UPARATANA) (ORIGINAL BY VEN. NAI SOMA)
Even though there were no Vinaya rules at the beginning in the Buddha-Ssana, there should have been rules when ven.
Sriputta asked about the Vinaya rules. But the Buddha said When time comes to be, Buddha will promulgate the Vinaya rules for the
well behavior of monks and stability of the Ssana. Dhamma is the foundation of Vinaya rules and monks in the Buddha-Ssana,

followed Dhamma in the early period. Therefore, the Buddha didn't impose Vinaya rules at the beginning. Vinaya rules marks represent
spirit or essence of the Dhamma, connecting with Dhamma.
When the time has come, Buddha started to promulgate Vinaya rules in his 20th vassa and gradually these were developed. It is
the fact, that on the first Buddhist council:
Vinayo nama ssanassa yu.
Vinaya is the life of Buddha-Ssana, without the Vinaya rules it is difficult to maintain a monastic organization. There are two
divisions of sikkhpada (rules):
1. dibrahmacariyaka
2. bhisamcarika
bhisamcariyaka sikkhpada is built for the day-to-day's behavior of the monks. This asked two different things in the Vinaya
reproaches Prjika Pi and Pcittiya Pi bring with dibrahmacariyakasla. Mahvagga Pi and Clavagga Pi bring with
bhisamcarikasla. bhisamcarikasla is more delighted to well behavior. dibrahmacariyakasla is more dedicated to ethical and
proper behavior.
Use of Vinaya rules:30
1. Saghasuhutya for the welfare of the monks
2. Saghaphsutya for the comfort of the monks
3. Dumakna puggalna niggahya for the control of unsteady monks
4. Pesalna bhikkhna phsuvihrya for the well-being of well behaved monks
5. Dihadhammikna savna savarya for the restraint of the present defilement
6. Samparyikna savna paightya for the regarding against pollution liable to arise in a future life
7. Appasannna pasdya for pleasing of those not yet pleased with Dhamma
8. Pasannna Bhiyobhvya for the development of these pleased with Dhamma
9. Saddhammahitiy for the preservation of the Dhamma
10. Vinaynuggahya for the favor of the Vinaya
The Buddha taught Vinaya as the utmost important thing for monks to lead their holy life. That is the system of residing in
Ptimokkha, embodying formal draft lection(?) and as unseemly(?) behavior in the uphold ceremony had fourth night in a select side of a
monastery.(?) 31 These rules state that they were to compact draft lection(?) if any in the ceremony and punishment also over there as the
granite of offense.(?) These rules indicate that Buddha lead great emphasis on refinement in conduct and gentlemanliness in personal
behavior including the splice of seven of good paleness.(?)
The Vinaya Piaka is made up of five books:
1. Prjika Pi (in Vibhaga)
2. Pcittiya Pi (in Vibhaga)
3. Mahvagga Pi (in Khandaka)

4. Clavagga Pli (in Khandaka)

5. Salasa Parivra (in Parivra)

Although Buddhaghosa mentioned five books of Vinaya, according to the report of Pacasattikakkhanda of Clavagga Pi
that idea is not acceptable. According to the Pacansattikakkhanda Vinaya Piaka means that this place of reheard and none reheard
everything was considered as Vinaya Piaka here it is not mentioned which were not rehearsed. According to sub-commentary of
Sratthadpan non-rehearsed parts are: Pacasattikakkhanda and Sattikakkhanda of Clavagga Pi, but in Clavagga Pi:
Etena upyena ubhato vibhage pucchi.
According to this, Ubhato Vibhaga means Prjika Pi and Pcittiya Pi. If so, we have accepted that Mahvagga Pi,
Clavagga Pi and Parivra Pi were not rehearsed.

666WHAT IS VINAYA
Vinaya is the disciplinary code for self training laid down by the Buddha for monks and
30 For example at Aguttara Nikya Dasakaniptapi 4. Uplivaggo 1. Uplisutta
31 I really do not understand this nonsense. Anyway, here is my version: Ptimokkha was told to be recited every fourteen
days in a selected place of monastery (called sma).

nuns to observe. Vinaya plays a pivotal role in their monastic way of life. The Buddha did
not formulate the code of discipline in single exercise. However, he instituted certain rules
as and when the need arose. Vinaya pitaka and its commentary contain many significant
stories about how and certain rule were laid down by the Buddha. According to the
Buddha the best form of vinaya was to discipline the mind,words and action. The early
disciples of the Buddha were highly developed spiritually and they had little need for a
set of rules to be imposes upon them. However, as monastic order (the sangha) grew in
numbers, it attracted many others, some of whom were not so highly developed
spiritually.
There arose some problems regarding their conduct and way of life such as taking
part in lay activities for their livelihood and yielding to temptation for sense pleasure.
Owing to this situation, the Buddha had to lay down guidelines for the monks and nuns to
follow so that they could distinguish the different between the life of monks and laymen.
Holy order when compared with other existing ascetic practices at that time. During the
early period the Buddha himself introduced these rules and regulation for the progress and
development of his religion. The vinaya pitaka deals meaning with moral practices. Sila is
a code of morality, important subject matter.
Ven. Buddhaghosa explained after passing away of the Buddha at first council the
vinaya pitaka was rehearsed first because vinaya is the age of the Buddhist dispensation.
Vinayo nama sasanasa ayu vinaye thite sasananca thitam hoti. The rules of discipline first
laid down by the Buddha are called Mulla- pannatti; those supplemented later are known
as Anupannatti. Together they are known as Sikkhapada, rules of discipline. The vinaya
pitaka has three texts: 1 Suttavibhanga, 2 the khandhaka, and 3 the parivara as much
Theravada vinaya has. But R. C. Childers describes that the Vinaya pitaka has five books;
they are: Parajika, Pacittiya, Maha vagga, Culla vagga, and Parivara. The Suttavibhanga
discusses all the rules, which are given in Patimokkhasutta. The Suttavibhanga the
Buddhist thinks that the word means a division of discourses or a chapter. It mentions
firstly how, when and why the particular rule in question came to be laid down. The
khandhakas is divided into two parts: the Mahavagga consists of ten chapters, the
Cullavagga twelve. The Mahavagga is known as the greater division and Cullavagga
means the small division.
The Parivara is known as the concluding text of the Vinaya pitaka. It was written
much later than the Suttavibhanga and Khaddhakas. It is a digest of other parts of the
vinaya, which has 19 chapters. In the Theravada vinaya, Patimokkha has two parts
Bhikkhu- Patimokkha has eight sections, whereas Bhikkhuni- Patimokkha has seven
sections. The monks are expected to follow 227 precepts, while the nuns 311 precepts.
The precepts for monks are divided categories: four parajika offence, thirteen
sanghadisesa offence, two aniyata offence, thirty nissagiya-pacittiya offence, ninety two
suddha-pacittiya offence, four patidesaniya offence, seventy- five sikkheyya-dharmma
offence, and seven adhikaranasamatha offences. The precepts for the nuns are categorized:
eight parajika offences, seventeen sanghadisesa offence, thirty nissagiya offences,166
suddha pacittaya offences, eight padesaniya offences, seventy five sikheya offences and

seven Adhikaranasamatha offences.

The offences for which penalities are laid down may be classified under seven
categories depending on their nature: 1 Parajika, 2 Sanghadisesa, 3 Thullaccaya, 4
Pacittiya, 5 Patidesaniya, 6 Dukkata, 7 Dubbhasita. Originally, the Patimokkha had 152
rules, but they were extended to 227 rules of conduct were recited by the monks in the
Uposatha ceremony. In Sanskrit there are 263 rules, but in Tibetan we find 258 rules
631.
By ven santa
11/10/2001
666VINAYA
Vinaya means discipline. To classify it further it is sila. For 20 years after the Buddhas
enlightenment, there were no vinaya precepts. There was no necessity to introduce vinaya precepts
because the monks were behaving well. Later, as asavatthaniya dhamma (those leading to desires)
arose. They are classified thus:
1. The number of the monks increasing.
2. The number of learned monks increasing.
3. Monks getting profit.
4. Monks getting fame.
Because of the above reasons vinaya precepts were promulgates. The Buddha spoke to Sariputta to
inform him that the time has come to lay down Vinaya rules In this manner: Sariputta, I know the time
to lay down vinaya precepts. It is the Buddha who will do it and it is not the task of the disciple.
Before vinaya precepts were promulgated the monks followed Cullasila, Majjhima sila and Mahasila.
The Patimokkha rules were there for the monks to follow. At that time the monks free to do what is
good. Later on the Buddha promulgated vinaya precepts. They were categorized as:
Parajika, Sangasisesa, Pacittiya, Aniyata, Adhikaranasamatha and Sekhiya. The monks had to follow
them and if they break these precepts, they had to face punishment. For the Bhikkhus there were
4 Parajika rules,
13 Sanghasisesa,
2 Aniyata,
30 Nisagiya Pacittiya,
92 Pacittiya,
4 Patidesaniya,
75 Sekhiya,
7 Adhikaranasamatha.

According to these rules the parajika stands prominent. There are 4 parajika rules. The violation of
parajika rules will lead to expulsion:
1. Sexual intercourse of any kind,
2. Taking what is not given,
3. Taking of human life or conspiring to do so,
4. Claiming falsely to have achieved a superior state.
The 1st parajika rule was laid down by the Buddha with regard to Sudina the son of wealthy merchant.
He became a monk with the consent of his parents. But later Sudinas mother together with his wife to
make him disrobe and come back home. Sudina was unbelieved to come back home. Later they
somehow made him agree to give a son to continue the generation. Sudina finally consented and
impregnated his wife who hears in a son. Sudina became physically sick and confessed his sin to the
Bhikkhus. The monks rebuked him and the matter was reported to the Buddha and Sudina was expelled
from the order.
The Parajikapali several stories are given to illustrate this great offence. Once a monk kept a female
monkey. The other monk who visited his vihara suspected the behaviour of this female monkey. They
rebuked that monk for that behaviour. Then he said: Buddha refers to the human women, not the
female animal. Later the matter was reported to the Buddha and the monk who was expelled.
This is a 3rd story concerning a group of monks who live by drinking, eating and bathing, as they desire.
According to their life, they frequently engaged in sexual intercourse. The matter was reported to the
Buddha by Ananda. The Buddha rebuked those monks and they were expelled.
Apart from these 3 stories, there are many instances where the monks were rather suspicion about their
behaviour. When they had a doubt whether they had committed a parajika offence. Some cases were
innocent and some cases were guilty.
With regard to the 2nd parajika stealing or taking what is not given is considered as an offence. Theft or
taking what is not given arises due to the ignorance or confusion about what can be properly
propagated. According to this offence once a monk stole some wood from the kings possession. His
act was rebuked and the 2nd parajika offence was laid down.
In the same manner when the occasion arose where monks were committing homicide, the 3rd parajika
had been laid down. In the case of committing the false of pretending superior state the 4th parajika
offence had been committed. All these offences arise from a motivation of raga, dosa and moha, and
means of expression is by means of body, speech and thought. They were grouped as grave offences
leading to expulsion.

EXPLAIN HOW THE VINAYA PIAKA AND ITS DISCIPLINE PLAYS VERY IMPORTANT ROLE IN THE TEACHING OF THE
BUDDHA. (ORIGINAL BY VEN. NRASHA)

The Vinaya Piaka speaks about the rules for Bhikkhus and Bhikkhuns that should be followed.
The rules not only guide the Buddhist Sagha, but also mention the conduct of the daily life of Sagha.
These rules are to control the disciples on physical and verbal action. If there are no rules (Vinaya) in
the Buddhist teaching, there is no essence in the teaching of the Buddha as the Buddha said:
Vinayonma ssanassa yu. Of the rules, the first laid down by the Buddha is called mlapaatti
and the supplement rules later are known as anupaatti.
In the Vinaya Piaka, the rules have been divided into the five divisions, namely:
1. Parjika Pi
2. Pcittiya Pi
3. Clavagga Pi

4. Mahvagga Pi
5. Parivra Pi

Those categories are summarized again into three divisions as Suttavibhaga, Khandhaka and
Parivra. The Suttavibhaga is based on the Ptimokkha. Patimokkha includes 4 Prjikas, 13
Saghdisesas, 30 Nissaggiyas, 2 Aniyatas, 92 Pcittiyas, 4 Pidesaniyas, 7 Adhikaraas and 75
Sekhiyas. These 227 rules are for the Bhikkhus.
Again, 8 Prjikas, 17 Saghdisesas, 30 Nissaggiyas, 166 Pcittiyas, 8 Pidesaniyas, 75
Sekhiyas and 7 Adhikaraa. These 311 rules are the Bhikkun Ptimokkha.
Then, the Khandhaka is divided into two parts: 1. Mhavagga, which consists of ten chapters
and 2. Clavagga, which contains twelve chapters. The Parivra parts in nineteen chapters.
During the first 20 years after the Buddha's enlightenment, there was no problem in the
Sagha (the Order). During this period, the disciples of the Buddha knew what was suitable and
unsuitable to do and to practice for them. According to Parjikakaa-Ahakath, because of
Sudinna, who committed the offense of prjika (sexual intercourse) with his ex-wife, the first
prjika rule came to be promulgated.
On one occasion, the chief disciple, Sriputta Thero requested the Buddha to promulgate the
rules but Buddha answered him that it was not the time to lay down the Vinaya. In this point,
Sriputta Thero showed the situation of the Order and wanted to protect Sagha (the Order) before
committing an offense. But the Buddha didnt want to control His disciples without reasoning. After
the first parjika patti came out, the Buddha understood that it was the time to lay down the rules.
Hence the Vinaya Piaka and its discipline play very important role in the teaching of the Buddha.

666THE TEACHER-PUPIL RELATIONSHIP IN VINAYA

The young monks who had entered the order from various families should have some protection
which they are living in a monastery. Since they have ordained from various families they are deprived
of their close relations. When they are sick, when they have some problems, they should have
somebody to fulfill their need. In the vinaya we observe the connection between the teacher and pupil.
This connection has a psychological importance.
The Upajjhaya and Acariya are 2 important concepts in Buddhism. Out of these concepts first
evolved the Upajjhaya. This is the 1st position given to monks. When the monks were living untrained.
In order to train them the post of Upajjhaya was given. In this manner the young monks who newly

entered the order was trained by the Upajjhaya (preceptor).

Then came the position of Acariya. Sometimes when the Upajjhaya was not there. in the case
where he is dead or disrobed, there was no one for the students to approach to receive some advice.
Because of the situation the Acariya was appointed. Some who are under the Upajjhaya are called
Saddhiviharika. Those under Acariya are called Antevasika. The relation between the teachers and
pupils of both categories were just like the relation between the fathers and sons. The teachers and
preceptors considered their pupils as sons. And always look after them when they are in trouble or sick.
When they need something, they always provided whatever necessary just as a father may look after
the son. The pupils also look after their teachers, preceptors with great respect. As they look after their
own fathers. They did their duties to the teachers and preceptors. When they are sick the pupils
attendant on the. When they need something they provided.
There is a difference in these 2 positions of teachers and preceptors. Upajjhaya means a teacher
who makes a very sharp examination. (Vajja vajjam upanijjhayati apapajjhayo). He is a teacher who
examines the wrong actions of the pupil whether the wrong done is very small or very big. The Pali
English dictionary gives the meaning for upajjhaya the teacher of inner.
Acariya means the teacher. The term is defined thus:
Evam sajjhayitabbam evam abhikkhami tabbam adina sikkhapana kho acariya.
He is the one who gives education, a teacher of politeness and etiquette.
In the Buddhist educational theory, the Upajjhaya gets high place or superiority while the Acariya
gets the 2nd place. If a person is to be trained well, the duties of the teacher and preceptor are both very
important because of this type of training given to the monks. In the monasteries The Buddhist
ordination was always successful. The environment in the monastery at the very beginning led to the
appointing of teachers and preceptors by the Buddha. At the beginning, the monks who were ordained
even after receiving exhibited certain drawback. Some monks didnt wear the robe properly. Some
didnt go for alms in an orderly way. Some used to stretch out of bowl approaching those who are
eating food. Some beg for alms going here and there, and the people were discussed with their
behavior. Thereafter the need arose to appoint a new monk, the position of Upajjhaya was given. It was
custom in Buddhist vinaya that the pupil should accept the Upajjhaya saying thus: Sir, please be good
enough to become my Upajjhaya. Then the teacher by body and word make an expression to accept
the request. Thereafter both of them were expected to have the regard of parents and teachers. The
pupils thus received what they expected from their parents and teachers. Both parties honoured and
respected each other. This connection was enforced by the Buddha in favor of the welfare of dhamma
and vinaya.
When the Saddhiviharika is ill, all the necessary attention should be paid by the Upajjhaya. This type of
connection is ethical appreciated and it combined their connection. It was a duggata offence if one does
not honor and attend on his Upajjhaya. The Buddha ordered to quit those Saddhiviharikas to behave
badly. Sometimes Saddhiviarikas were behaving badly. Then the Buddha laid down a vinaya rule to
alarm the saddhiviharika to beg pardon. Sometimes tough-minded upajjhaya did not give pardon. Then
the Buddha said the upajjhaya who does not beg pardon will be facing the offence duggata. Some
upajjhaya wanted to quit good manner Saddhiviharika. That was very unfair. Then the Buddha said, It
is a duggata offence for an upajjhaya to quit a polite Saddhiviharika. With regard to this, the Buddha
pointed out the type of Saddhiviharika who is suitable to be sent away.
1. Those who have no great love for the Upajjhaya.

2. Those who have no great pleasing for the Upajjhaya.

3. Those who have no great shame for the Upajjhaya.
4. Those who have no great honor for the Upajjhaya.
5. Those who have no loving-kindness for the Upajjhaya.
In this manner the teacher pupil relationship in the Buddhist vinaya was based on ethics and it was
psychologically very sound for the young monk who enter the order. They have protection and selfsatisfaction in the order. It was some sort of mutual understanding between 2 parties, and finally we
observe the essence of Buddhist ethical background.

THE IMPORTANT OF THE VINAYA PITAKA FOR THE WELFARE OF SANGHA

Vinaya means to control that is discipline. According to the Buddhism, it means to control, word and
action. in the early period there was no Vinaya rule was laid down . Later this rule was necessary for
various reason.
Vinaya rule was necessary for the well being, for their comfort and to suppress defilement. They were
also helpful for the stability of the doctrine.
Vinaya is Sila. Sila is the foundation of concentration. Concentration is the foundation of Wisdom.
Wisdom is lead to Nibbana. Therefore Vinaya is important as the foundation; this Pitaka so came first.
Vinaya is something to be followed and it is not what should be expounded. It should be taken as an
example and put into practice. Because it can make anyone (monk) to give up Raga, Dosa and Moha.
Practice Vinaya in a wrong way will induced us evil.
There are Vinaya rules for the monks in the five books of the Vinaya pitaka and for laymen the
sigalovada sutta gives details of responsibilities.
There is a very close connection between the Buddha and the Vinaya. Unlike the Abhidhamma and the
Suttapitaka, Buddha alone was authority not even Rev. Ananda had the opportunity to request the
Buddha to expound Vinaya rule. When the monks were unable to make a decision with regard to
Khuddanukhuddaka. They recited it is left to us to follow what is laid down and not to lay down new
rule.
Sometime the Buddha changed Vinaya rule according to necessity. At one time, the monks were not
expected to wear shoes with traps. At that time Ven. Mahakasdyna lived in Avanti. He told the Buddha
that the Monks in Avanti are very delicate and requested the Buddha to allow wearing shoes more than
one strap. So Buddha change the rule put its into four to all places. The Buddha did not allow the
monks to change Vinaya rules with the changing the society. Therefore during the second Council the
Theravada Monks did not like to accept the ten unlawful points.

During the lifetime of Buddha, Devatta made five requests, but the Buddha did not accept it. The
Buddha agreed on the establishment of Bhikkhuni Order at the request of Rev. Ananda but he had his
authority. The Bhikkhuni had to follow 8 Garu Dhammas. The Buddha acted as the superior with
regard to Vinaya rules. Vinaya rule was considered to be the pure teaching of the Buddha according to
the Theravadins. Therefore according to the Theravada Buddhism, one must always protect Vinaya.
Because it is something to hold e.g. Vinayadhara, the Buddha said this after my passing away the
Dhamma and the Vinaya will be the teacher.
666THE REASONS FOR THE PROMULGATION OF VINAYA PRECEPTS.
In the Kakacupamasutta of Majjhima Nikaya, Buddha has explained that the monks early days
were very good. The Buddha says:
Bhikkhu at one time the monks made my mind pleasing, there was no necessity for me to give
any advise. It was enough if I only remind them to do something.
Once Sariputta told the Buddha now it is time to enforce vinaya precepts. The Buddha said:
You do not request, I know the correct time to enforce vinaya rules. For the long standing of sasana, 3
things are necessary:
(1) To have lot of religious literatures
(2) To have enforced vinaya rules
(3) To have admonished patimokkha
In the promulgation of vinaya precepts, Buddha had the authority. According to Parajikapali, there
are 10 reasons for the enforcement of vinaya rules. (See notes provided). When asavatthaniya dhamma
appears there will be a downfall in the sasana, therefore Buddha enforced vinaya rules. According to
Parajikapali, there are 4 and according to Bhaddaliya Sutta there are 5. (See notes provided).

666THE REASON FOR THE PROMULGATION OF VINAYA PRECEPTS

The term Vinaya can be defined as control, i.e, to depress defilement by means of controlling
ones actions and words. It was only after 20 years of the formation of the Sangha that the Buddha
promulgated vinaya rules. At the beginning, the Dhamma preached by the Buddha was sufficient to
regulate the conduct of the monks. All the earliest members of the Sangha were highly devoted to the
Dhamma.
The discourses delivered by the Buddha contains instruction on disciplinary matters. The good
example is this is the Kakacupama sutta of Majjhima Nikaya where the Buddha merely make a hint
about the disciplined behaviour and the monk take the Buddhas suggestion seriously and act
accordingly.
Later, with the emergence of organized communal life, and with the expansion of the Order,

corruption appeared in the Order and the Buddha was compelled to set up a body of regulations to
arrest the deterioration of the Order.
At the outset that the Buddha was not in hurry to promulgate rules to govern the Order, he waited
till the necessity arose and when the occasion demanded it. In Bhaddali Sutta of Majjhima Nikaya, the
Buddha says:

When beings are deteriorating, when true dhamma is vanishing away Not until some
conditions which cause cankers appear in the Order, then the Teacher makes order the training
rule for disciples
In Suttavibhavga of Vinaya Pitaka, even when Sariputta requested the Buddha to promulgate rules
when he felt the right time had come for it, but the Buddha replied:
Wait Sariputta, the Tathagata will know the right time for that.As soon as some conditions
causing the cankers appear in the Order, then the Teacher makes order the course of training for
disciples
It becomes abundantly clear that the Buddha promulgated vinaya rules to govern the monks
only when asavatthaniyadhamma began to appear in the Order. Both Bhaddali Sutta and Suttavibhavga
reveal the causes of corruption in the Order. According to Bhaddali Sutta such causes are 5 in number,
they are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

sangha has reached greatness. (mahattaj)

sangha has reached acme of worldly gain. (labhaggaj)
sangha has reached the acme of fame. (yasaggaj)
sangha has reached the acme of great learning. (bahusaccaj)
sangha has reached the acme of long-standing renown. (ratabbutaj)

Apart from the above reasons, Suttavibhavga also mentions that there were other factors that
prompted the Buddha to makes such rules. They are:
(1) Traditions and customs at the time of the Buddha, other religions had various practices based
on traditions and customs. The Buddha discarded what was inappropriate for Him or His
disciples to follow, but adopted what was regarded as wholesome traditions and customs and
made rules accordingly.
(2) Popular opinion The Buddha had been very much sensitive to public opinion if they were
constructive. For instance, the second Parajika rule against theft was promulgated due to the
public criticism that Bhikkhu Dhaniya had removed some timber belonging to Bimbisara.
(3) Suggestions of Bhikkhus The Mahavagga also reveals that suggestions made by moderate
Bhikkhu were well considered by the Buddha, and rules were made and sometimes the
existing rules were amended according to such suggestions.
(4) Requirements of the State At that time some people stealthily left the forces and joined the

Order in order to lead an easy and comfortable life without any desire for spiritual
development. Bimbisara respectfully requested the Buddha not to allow soldiers to enter the
Order, then the Buddha considered Bimbisaras request and made a rule, not to admit an army
personnel to the Order.
It is clear that the Buddha had been very reasonable, far-sighted, broad-minded and enthusiastic in
the promulgation of the Vinaya rules. According to Suttavibhanga of Vinaya Pitaka (III, 21), Buddha
makes known the course of training for monks, founded on ten reasons:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

For the well-being of monks.

For the comfort of monks.
For the restraint of evil-minded ones.
For the ease of well-behaved monks.
For the eradication of cankers in this life.
For the non-arising of defilements in the future.
For the benefit of non-believers.
For the increase in the number of believers.
For the establishment of the doctrine.
For the establishment of good discipline.

The existence of Dhamma has to depend on well disciplined Bhikkhus. Only well disciplined Bhikkhus
can be the proper guardians and propagators of the Dhamma. In conclusion, the vinaya rules, is
indeed, directed towards self-emancipation, communal co-existence and the lasting of the Buddhas
dispensation.
666NAME THE VINAYA TEXTS AND DISCUSS THE IMPORTANT OF THE VINAYA PITAKA FOR THE WELFARE OF SANGHA.
(REV. JANAKA SOIKAHAMSENG)

The Vinaya Pitaka mainly deals with rules and regulations, which the Buddha promulgated, as occasion
arose, for the future discipline of the Order of Monks and Nuns. It describes in detail the gradual
development of the Sasana, dispensation. An account of the life and Ministry of the Buddha is also
given. Indirectly, it reveals some important and interesting information about ancient history, Indian
custom, arts, science, etc. There are five books regarding Vinaya texts. They are as followings:
I.
Parajika
Major offences
II.
Pacittiya
Minor offences
III.
Mahavagga
great section
Cullavagga

IV.

shorter section

Parivara

In the Vinaya, there are three parts, such as 1 and 2 is the group of Vibhanga, 3 and 4 is the group of
Khandaka and one is Privara.

666MAHAVAGGA PALI:
The Mavagga pali which is book three and Cullavagga pali which is book four of the vinaya pitaka, deal with
all those matters relating to the samgha which have not been dealt within the two books.

Mahavagga pali, made up of ten sections known as khandhakas, opens with an historical account of how the
Buddha attain supreme enlightenment at the food of bodhi tree, ho he discovered the famous law of the dependent
origination, how he gave his sermon to the group of five bhikkhus on the discovery of the four Noble truths, namely, the
great discourses on the turning of wheel of dhamma (Dhammacakkappavattana sutta). This was followed by another great
discourses, the Anattalakkhana sutta. These two suttas may be described as the compendium of the Buddha.
The first section continues to describe how young man of good families like Yasa sought refuge in him as a
Buddha embarked open the unique mission of spreading the dhamma for the welfare and happiness of the many, when had
collected round him sixty disciples who were well established in the order of the dhamma and had became Arahats, how he
began to established the order sangha to as a living example the truth he preached, and how his famous disciples like
Sariputta, Moggallana, Maha kassapa, Ananda, Upali, Angulimala, became members of the order. The section then deals
with the rule for formal admission to the order( upasampada), giving precise condition to be fulfilled before any person can
gain admission to the order and the procedure to be followed for each admission.

Mahavagga further deals with procedures for Uposattha meting, the assembly of the sangha on every full moon
day and on the fourteenth or fifteenth waning day of the lunar month when the Patimkkha, a summary of the Vinaya rule, is
recited. Then there rules to be observed for rains retreat(vassa) during rainy season as well as those for the formal
ceremony of pavarana concluding the rains retreat, in respect of what has been seen, heard or suspected about his conduct.
There are also rules concerning sick bhikkhus, the use of leather for footwear and furniture, materials for robes,
and those concerning medicine and food. A separate section deals with the Kathina ceremonies where annual making and
offering of robes take place. (381)

By P. Santa

666CULAVAGGA PALI:
Culavagga Pali which is book IV of the Vinaya Pitaka, continues to deal with more rules and procedures for
institutional acts or functions known as Samghakamma. The twelve sections in this book deal with rules for offence such as
Samghadisesa that come before the Samgha, rules for observance of penances such as Parivasa and Manatta and rules for
reinstatement of a bhikkhu.
There are also miscellaneous rules concerning bathing, dress, dwellings and furniture and those dealing with
treatment of visiting bhikkhu, and duties of tutors and novices. Some of the important enactments are concerned with
Tajjaniya Kamma, formal act of censure by the Samgha taken against those bhikkhus who cause strife, quarrels, disputes,

who associate familiarly with lay people and who speak in dispraise of the Buddha, the Dhamma and the Sangha,
Ukkepaniya Kamma formal act of suspension to be taken against those who having committed an offence do not one to
admit it, and pakasaniya kamma taken against Devadatta announcing publicly that Whatever Devadatta does by deed or
word, should be seen as Devadattas own and has nothing to do with the Buddha, the Dhamma and the Samgha The
account of this action is followed by the story of Devadattas three attempts on the life of the Buddha and the schism caused
by Devadatta among the Samgha.
There is, in section ten, the story of how Mahapajapati, the Buddhas foster mother, requested admission into
the Order, how the Buddha refused permission at first, and how he finally acceded to the request because of Anandas
entreaties on her behalf.
The last two sections describe two important events of historical interest, namely, the holding of the first Synod at Rajagaha
and of the second Synod at Vesali.
(286)

By P.Santa

666PARIVARA PALI
Parivara pali which is book V and the last book of the vinaya pitaka serves as a kind of manual. It is
compiled in the form of a catechism, enabling the reader to make an analytical survey of the vinaya pitaka. All the rule,
official acts, and other matters of the vinaya are classified under separate categories according to subjects deal with.
Parivara explain how rules of the order are drawn up to regulate the conduct of the bhikkhus as well as the
administrative affairs of the order. Precise procedures are prescribed for setting of disputes and handling matters of
jurisprudence, for formation of the Sangha courts and appointment of well qualified, the Sanghsa judges. It lay down how
Sanghas Vinicchaya committee, the Sangha court, is to be constituted with a body of learned vinayadharas, experts in
Vinaya rules, to hear and decide all kinds of monastic disputes.
The parivara pali provides general principle and guidance in the spirit of which all the Sangha Vinicchaya
proceedings are to be conducted for settlement of monastic disputes.
175
by p santa

PARIVRA PLI
Ven. Buddhaghosa has used a term sutta vibhaga to introduce the Ubatovibhaga. There sutta
vibhaga means the explanation of a sutta. There sutta means rules laid down by the Buddha. Vibhaga means
commentaries. We can see this patent (obvious?) of preaching in Prjika Pli and Pcittiya Pli. The Vinaya as
known in Burma is the monastic code handed down by the Theravda seat(?) in Sri Lanka. Sutta Vinaya means
Prjika Pli and Pcittiya Pli. It explains the rules the display the word sutta correct pounds to the Sanskrit sutta
and literary mean the text it is apply to kind of book the contain of which are as if were attired (clothed?) given the
summary of subtend (opposite?) of more than is expressed in them in word.(?) This short(?) of book was the letters
development in wides leverage (impact?) set before and after the rise of Buddhism. The Buddhists use this word
sutta with the meaning of discourse or a chapter and sutta gtha means Vinaya. The Sutta Vibhaga tells us
precisely how and when and why the particular rules in question(?) come(?) to be laid down. This historical
interdiction always closes with the word of the rule in sutta. Then follows a very action(?) word for word coming so
old that it was already about before Christ too the probably app(?) rot(?) mate(?) date of the sutta.
Vibhaga was considered so sacred, that it was included in the command. The old commentary as succeeded
here necessary by fare(?) the explanation and discourses on dutiful words. These are some time of very good historical
value. The discourses for intent in the rule. As to molder(?) and tempt(?) of what Constatia(?) to molder(?) and what
constitute(?) theft(?) antis(?) per(?) and very removable(?) degree the kind of send(?) throw(?) distinction found in
modern low(?) book(?) the peerages(?) when made easylink(?) translate to Western scholars must be great as to
interest to student history a low(?) as they are Quit(?) the older(?) document of that pedicle(?) kind in the world.(?)
The Sutta Vinaya let down(?) and explain all the Vinaya rules which are contained in Ptimokkha. Ptimokkha has
divided two parts Bhikkhu Vibhaga and Bhikkhuni Vibhaga, while there were 227 rules of Bhikkhu Vibhaga
and 311 of Bhikkhun Vibhaga. Prjika Pli and Pcittiya Pli explain these rules. Then there are explained
Prjikas, for which there was expulsion from the order, and Pcittiya where some pardon could be given. Both the
Prjika and Pcittiya deal with 227 rules. Vinaya for the guidance of Bhikkhus in determining the offenses and the
disputes of the Bhikkhus and formulating punishment. These rules are divided again into 8 section gizzard(?) first one.
1. Prjika dhamma (for rule concerning those acts which bring about defeat)
2. Sanghdisesa dhamma (rules which resaved/reserved(?) formal meeting of the order)
3. Aniyata dhamma (rules regarding auditor mind matters)
4. Nissaggiya pcittiya dhamma (rules involving for gilding Pcittiya Dhamma)
5. Pcittiya dhamma 92 (rules recreating repentant worry)
6. Patidesaniya dhamma (rules regarding matters which ought to be compost(?))
7. Sekhiya dhamma 75 (rules of soles manners)
8. Adikarana dhamma 7 (rules regarding the gentlemen(?) of cases(?) which(?) from (?) )
What is known as the Ptimokkha codes of the Vinaya Piaka? This Ptimokkha seems to have owed its
existence to the ancient India custom of holding sacred two periods each month. The time of the full moon the
Bhikkhus and Bhikkhuns used to meet together twice each month catuddassa parassa on the 14th and 15th day to
campest(?) to assembly the Sims(?) and smalls(?) which they had committed. The object of the compaction(?) was to
take and poem(?) themselves the punishing which they believed give pardon there.(?)
The Ptimokkha contents the following sections:
1. Pucchavissajjana (infer adaptation relation to the react visits for capture (?) )
2. Nidna (interferon)

QUESTION: EXAMINE THE HISTORY OF PARIVRA PI

The Parivra Pi is known as the concluding text of the Vinaya Piaka. It was written much later than
the Suttavibhaga and the Khandhakas. It has nineteen chapters. It can be mentioned as a manual of instruction
in the Vinaya Piaka. It is regarded as a short manual comprising a short of catechism on the whole Vinaya
arranged for the instruction.
But it occupies an important place in the history of Pli literature. Because it contributes much to the
study of the Vinaya literature, it is like a key which unlocks the subject-matter of the Suttavibhaga and the
Khandhakas. Most probably it was composed in Ceylon (Sri Lanka) by a monk Dpa. The Paravarapatha
describes that it was composed by the highly wise, learned and skillful Dpa, after he had inquired here and
there into the methods followed by former teachers.
Pubbacriyamaggaca pucchitv va tahi dpa nma maha sutadhara vicakkhane ima
vitthrassa khepa sajjhmaggena majjhime cintayitv likhposi sissapna sukhvaha.
In a verse towards the close of the Parivra it is mentioned that Dpa composed it after making
investigations about the path followed by the respectable persons who belonged to the earlier period. In an
introductory verse of the Parivarapatha there is a description of Mahinda in Sri Lanka. It also refers to certain
noted Theras like Arittha, who was the sister's son of Devnampiya Tissa, the king of Sri Lanka.. Its first
chapter gives an account of the Vinayadhara. This list is important no doubt in the history of the Buddhist
Saghas of India and Sri Lanka.
M. Winternitz says: It is very similar to the Anukramanis and Parisistasof and Veda and the Vedga texts.
I. B. Horner mentions the Parivarapatha. He says he has seen the Parivra called a digest of the entire Vinaya
Piaka, setting forth the method of teaching the Vinaya.
The word Pari is all round, surrounding and the word vara means time, opportunity. In
Sanskrit the word vara means anything which covers or surrounds, a cover, a multitude, quantity and
covering, surroundings. Thus the Parivara covers, surrounds, encircles and encompasses the various matters
mentioned in the Suttavibhaga and the Khandhakas.

PARIVRA PI
Parivra Pi which is Book V and the last book of the Vinaya Piaka serves as a kind of manual. It is
compiled in the form of a catechism, enabling the reader to make an analytical survey of the Vinaya Piaka. All
the rules, official acts, and other matters of the Vinaya are classified under separate categories according to
subjects dealt with.
Parivra explains how rules of the Order are drawn up to regulate the conduct of the bhikkhus as well as
the administrative affairs of the Order. Precise procedures are prescribed for settling of disputes and handling
matters of jurisprudence, for formation of Sagha courts and appointment of well-qualified Sagha judges. It
lays down how Sagha Vinicchaya Committee, the Sagha court, is to be constituted with a body of learned
Vinayadharas, experts in Vinaya rules, to hear and decide all kinds of monastic disputes.
The Parivra Pi provides principles and guidance in the spirit of which all the Sagha Vinicchaya
proceedings are to be conducted for settlement of monastic disputes.

666ADHIKARANASAMATHA
The Buddhist monastic legislation comes in the Khandhakas under the section Samathakhandhaka.
There are seven Adhikaranasamatha. They were very important for the purpose of maintaining unity
and peace among the monks in the monastery. When a large number of monks are living in the
monastery various problems naturally arise. There should be some method or some persons responsible
to settle such problems. By this (7) kinks of Adhikaranasamatha, it was able to find out who is guilty
and who is in innocent accordingly the gravity of the offence being considered the cases are duly
settled. The following are (7) Adhikaranasamatha.
1. SammukhAvinaya- verdict in the presence of
2. Sativinay- verdict in innocence
3. AmUlhavinaya- verdict of past insanity
4. PatiGGatakarana- carrying out the acknowledgement
5. YebhuyyasikA- by the decision of the majority
6. TassapApiyyasikA- an act of condemnation for shameless behaviour
7. TinavatthAraka- by the covering up of grass

SammukhAvinaya: according to this method recognizing is done by realizing the offence and no
penalties should be done on the offender in his absence. The verdict should be given in the presence of
one who has done the false. In the Vinaya text it is said that, it is a Dukkata offence to give a
punishment when the offender is absent. This is very important and considered as pre-requisite in forms
of Adhikaranasamatha.
Sativinaya and Amulhavinaya: these two provide against possible discourage of justice in monastic
administration. The law is to be carried on with human consideration and not be done through malice,
jealousy, or prejudice.
The Sativinaya is intended for the exoneration of a guiltless monks falsely accused by malice party.
Therefore, Sativinaya is actually for verdict of innocence.
The Amulhavinaya seeks exception for offences committed in a state of unsound mind. Vinaya is
always against offenders who claimed falsely, pretending to be unsound.

PatiGGatakarana: It means the disciplinary action should be done with acknowledgement of the guilty
monk. The monk who had committed the offence should understand his offence and he should accept
the disciplinary action imposed on him.
Yebhuyyasika and Tinavattharaka: These two are different from the rest of the Adhikaranasamathas.
They are not only interested in safeguarding the character of individual. But the y are also concerned
with settling their dispute. By the decision of majority disputer are settled. The covering up of grass
means collective disciplinary measure carried on safeguarding the character. In this case the offences
treated are minor in character. They excluded major offences as Parajika and Sanghadisesa.
Tassapapiyyasika: It has a great deal more in common with the Danda Kammas as a means of
maintaining order in the community. According to Samantabhasatika, it is the same as
Tajjaniyakamma. It is possible to punish and an offender who refuses to accept the judgement of the
Sangha. It is carried out on one who deliberately lies and attempt to evade a charge laid upon him.
According to Kankhavitarani, it would result in complete elimination from the monastic community, if
a Parajika offence is committed or else a possible correction of a lesser offence.
Out of these (7) Adhikaranasamatha, the Yebhuyyasika is supposed to be the most complex when it is
not possible to settle a monastic dispute. Within the monastery the Bhikkhu connected with it, should
take the method to the member of another monastery who are greater in number by mutual agreement
the monks would settle the dispute. Then the monk refers the method to select committee for
settlement. For the membership of the community not only good virtuous conduct was necessary. It
was essential to have a through knowledge of Dhamma and Vinaya. If they still cannot solve the
problems it should be refer to the Mahasangha. By method of direct and indirect canvassing the Sangha
must assure itself of a majority for a righteous cause. The three forms of voting are recommended.
They are secret ballot, whispering in the ear and open ballot.
All these methods are carried on for the welfare of the community. It was necessary to preserve unity
and harmony among the fellow monks. It is also very important to note that under the Patinnatakarana
no punishment of penalty should be imposed without offender admitting his false. A monk who has
committed on offence whether urged by others or not should recognise and confess it. He is then asked
to address himself to a senior member of another and owning and admitting his offence under taken to
guard himself in the future. In this manner each individual should be responsible to be free from
offences in order to protect a purity of the community.
In this manner Adhikaranasamatha as part of the missionary for the maintenance of monastic
discipline, embrace a wider field of activity than the Patimokkha. They are not offences but are only
methods and ways by means of which the collective organization of the Sangha may arrive at a

settlement of monastic dispute.

Penalties

According to judicial procedure laid down in the Pali texts to deal with offences committed by monks
consist of an elaborated procedure for the hearing of case as well as execution of judgement. There are
four forms of rules:
1. Vinaya rules formulated by the Buddha himself
2. SuttAnuloma- other relevant rules
3. Acariyavada- convention established by acknowledged teachers
4. Attanomati-personal view of Vinayadhamma
The Buddha prescribes the Vinaya rules with the view to achieving the follow ten purposes:
1. To establish the Sangha in a sound footing
2. To keep the Sangha free from trouble
3. To punish those who do not obey even after being punished
4. To guarantee the freedom of those who are peaceful
5. To keep member of the Sangha free from worldly defilement
6. To keep them free from of defilement, which may result in the future
7. To make non-believers, believe
8. To make believers double their faith
9. To establish the law
10. To strengthen the course of discipline
The primary purpose to guarantee the liberty of individual bhikkhu was to create a pleasant social
atmosphere within and without the organization of Sangha. An attempt is made to ensure that
punishment is given only to the person who is guilty. The philosophy behind the method of punishment
was to correct them and not to take revenge. Once a bhikkhu is convicted. He is not completely written
off as an encourageable. But the Sangha would be quite willing to reinstate him and provided him to
reform himself and amended his evil ways suitably. However in the case of those who are convicted of
the four major offences there is no reinstatement. There is a specific procedure to be following the
bhikkhu acting as judge should strictly follow the procedure. When a monk is brought before the court
when charge with committing and offence, he is asked to explain what he has committed. The accused
is given the opportunity to depend himself. When both to accuse and the component have placed. Their

fact, before the court, the Vinayadhara monk examine carefully the following six points:
1. The fact of the case as reported to the court
2. Relevant vinaya
3. Correct interpretaltion
4. The three-fold group of rules
5. Minor offences
6. The circumstances, which are not liable
The Vinayadhara monks need qualification:
1. Through with law in all aspect
2. Guided by law and firm
3. Conversant with legal convention
There are various type of penalties:
1. Tajjaniyakamma act of censure
2. Nissaya kamma- act of sub-ordination
3. Pabbajaniya kamma- act of banishment
4. Patisaraniya kamma- act of reconciliation
5. Ukkhepaniya kamma- suspension
24/10/2001

666EXAMINATION OF THE PARAJIKA REGARDING STEALING

There are 5 ways of considering a theft:
(1) It is a possession of another
(2) Known to be a possession of another
(3) Its important
(4) It is up to the value of 5 or more masaka (money)
(5) Intention to steal.
The story connected stealing in the Parajikapali. Dhaniya wanted to built up a hut, in order to get
some sticks, he went to the overseer of the king. Then the overseer said I have some sticks but they
belong to the king and they kept to be taken in case of an accident. If a king has given to you may take.
Dhaniya took them saying that they are gifts from the king. The matter war reported to the king by a

minister. Then the king asked the Thera to come. He said to the king that the king told once recluses
and brahmins may enjoy gifts of grass, wood and water. The king replied that what he meant was what
is in the forest. By a trick , Dhaniya was tried to deceive the king and steal. Buddha blamed him
and pronounced stealing is as a parajika offence.
Thereafter according to parajikapali, there are many stories how various monks were indulged of
whether their actions fall into category of defeat (parajika). Once some monks stole a bottle of things
that had been bleached from the bleacher fore. They try to escape saying that the Buddha laid down the
precepts for the village and not for the jungle. They were rebuked by the Buddha.
Once a monk with the intention to steal removed the outer cover from its place. It was pronounced
as parajika. Once a monk seeing some goods during the day time made a sign saying I will steal at
night and at night he stole something else. It is also parajika.
Certain monk when distributing robes intending to steal took hold of the robe. once mango thieves
puck mangoes they ran away. When the owner comes the monk ate them thinking that should finish
when the owner comes.
One monk when crossing a river got a cloak that escape from bleacher hand stuck in his foot. That
is also parajika.
All these stories indicate that it is a parajika offence when a person stal something with the
intention even if he steals a handful, it is a parajika. If a crowd arrange a theft and ones steal all are
involved in the theft. When making a sign like I shall cover up my eyes or rest my eyebrows, rest my
head, according to the sign you steal. If at that moment the stealing is done it is a defeat (parajika).
According to the parajikapali should take means interrup steal, change the movement, remove
from place to place, what is not given is defined thus. What is not thrown away, what is guarded,
protected and cherished or what belong to others.
One who is defeated means a wither leaf from its hold and could not become green again. Thus a
monk taken by theft cannot became a monk again.

ABHIDHAMMA
Abhidhamma is divided into two parts: Analysis and Synthesis, as are:
1. Analysis (whole of experiences, explained and examined in many parts)
2. Synthesis (combination of separate parts, elements, substances etc. into a whole or into a system, which results from this
process)
In order to fully understand the knowledge, one must 1. understand the facts and 2. the relationship between these
facts.
The Abhidhamma is the wisdom by means of analysing and take the relationship of a whole, then everything is
inter-dependent, that we are not attached to it. For example, as a meditator, by knowing the facts and correlation, these
became the raw material for a meditator as a guidance. It is not an intellectual study. It is a fully practical and methodical by
explaining the mind one after another. It is a pa bhmi (basics of wisdom).
If there is a new method to be introduced, it must be logic. It bases on:
1. Yotti (argumenst)
2. gama (quoted from the early Buddhist discourses)

ABHIDHAMMA PIAKA (NATURE AND CONTENTS OF ABHIDHAMMA PIAKA)

Abhidhamma Piaka is considered as the third one of the three Piakas. It was never assigned either at the first
place or second place. The third division of the Piaka consists of seven books:
1. Dhammasagan Pi (classification of Dhamma)
2. Vibhaga Pi (divisions)
3. Dhtukath Pi (discourse of elements)
4. Puggalapaatti Pi (the book of individuals)
5. Kathvatthu Pi (points of controversy)
6. Yamaka Pi (the book of pains)
7. Pahna Pi (the book of causal relations)
All of these books are designated by the name pakarana. The definition of Abhidhamma is:
Dhammatireka dhammavisesatthena atirekavisesatthadipako hetthti abhi saddo.
This suggests, that Abhidhamma is something additional to the Dhamma. It also suggests, that Abhidhamma is
something especial(?) compare(?) with(?) the(?) Dhamma(?).(?) Normally what is mentioned in Sutta Piaka is considered
as Dhamma.
It has been suggested the word Abhidhamma standing alone is not found in the Sutta Nipta, the Sayutta or the
Aguttara and only once or twice in the Dgha Nikya and Majjhima Nikya. It properly came into usage at the end of the
period in which the four great nikyas came up. The Mah Saghika refused to include the Abhidhamma in the Tipiaka at
all, as they did not take it for the word of the Buddha. According to the Dgha Bhanaka, the Abhidhamma also included the
whole Khuddaka Nikya.
According to another division the Sayutta Nikya is not a division of the Dhamma, but of the whole canon and in
the fifth are included both the Vinaya and Abhidhamma. There is another legend recorded by Buddhaghosa that the
Abhidhamma was first preached by the Buddha in Tvatisa at the foot of Pariccataka tree, when he was seated on the

Sakka's throne during his visit to his mother in the Tvatisa, later it was taught by him to Sriputta Thera on the bank of
Anotatta lake. The legend further relates that after the enlightenment the Buddha spent in the Yatanagara reliving his mind
the doctrine of the Abhidhamma in all its details.
According to the Cullavagga Pi, the Abhidhamma Piaka was not rehearsed at the first council. The fact that
Abhidhamma is not mentioned in the suttas and that only Dhamma and Vinaya are referred to only prove that at one time
the Abhidhamma Piaka was not a separate piaka, but Kathvatthu was composed only at the third council.
As far as the content of the Abhidhamma Piaka concerns, it does not form a systematic philosophy, but especially
form of Abhidhamma found in the Sutta Piaka. On the other hand, there were direct controversial ideas with the
Abhidhamma, whether it was promulgated by the Buddha or not. When we refer to other Piakas, we can find many details
to prove that the Abhidhamma is creation of the Buddha. On the other hand, there are many details to show that
Abhidhamma is a later development or not the preaching of the Buddha.

QUESTION: GIVE AN ACCOUNT OF THE ABHIDHAMMA PIAKA

The Abhidhamma Piaka is the third division of the Tipiaka, or the Three Baskets. It is a basket of
transcendental doctrine. From the Pli tradition we learn that the Buddha first delivered the Abhidhamma to the Tvatisa
gods. At that time he was living with them on the Pandukambala Rock at the foot of the Paricchattaka tree in the Tvatisa
heaven during his visit to his mother in there. He then preached it to his chief disciples ven. Sriputta, who very often used
to meet the Buddha when he for meals came down to the Manasasoravara. Then Bhaddaji got it from his teacher, ven.
Sriputta. Ven. Revatta and others then received it through a succession of disciples. It took its final form in the third
council which was held during the reign of Asoka, the Maurya ruler. The Buddha as a mark of gratitude to his mother, who
was born in Tusita realm, departed thither and preached the Abhidhamma to the mother Deva and others for three months.
The topics (mtik) of the discourses were later rehearsed to ven. Sriputta, who subsequently elaborated them and
composed the Abhidhamma Piaka.
According to Mahyna tradition the Buddha gave his sermons to different persons at different places and at
different times. Afterwards the Arahats and rvakas collected them and they then arranged them into Abhidhamma
treatises. Buddhists believe, that the suttas were composed on observing the faces of the people while the Abhidhamma was
compiled on observing the suttas. From it we conclude that the Abhidhamma was composed on the basis of the suttas. Thus
we can say here, that the suttas give the foundation of the Abhidhamma. The Abhidhamma deals with the same subject as
the Sutta Piaka. But its treatment is more scholastic than the latter.
It is compiled in the form of questions and answers. As far as the contents of the Abhidhamma are concerned, they
do not form a systematic philosophy, but are a special treatment of the Dhamma as found in the Sutta Piaka. Most of the
matter is psychological and logical, the fundamental doctrines mentioned or discussed are those already propounded in the
suttas and therefore taken for granted. The Abhidhamma may be regarded as a systematization of the doctrines contained, or
implied, in the Sutta Piaka. It formulates these sutta doctrines in strictly paramattha (truly realistic) language. There are
seven divisions of books in Abhidhamma Piaka. They are:
1. Dhammasaga Pi
5. Pahna Pi
2. Vibhaga Pi
6. Puggala Paatti Pi
3. Dhtukath Pi
7. Kathvatthu Pi
4. Yamaka Pi
The Pli word Abhidhamma is composed of the prefix bhi, and the term Dhamma ; Abhi signifies great,
exceeding (atireka) or subtle, noble, ultimate, ultra (visittha). Thus the Abhidhamma means
enlarged/subtle/ultimate doctrine. It also means a higher religion. Ordinarily the word of the Buddha was known as the
Dhamma.

KATHVATTHU PAKARANA (LECTURED VEN. PIYADASSI)

The Kathvatthu Pakarana is the third book of the Abhidhamma Piaka. It is called the Vinapada by the
other six. It is known as a Buddhist book of debate on matters of theology and philosophy. It is to be noted here that it
is the only work of the Tipiaka, which can be ascribed to a definite author ven. Moggaliputtatissa Thera, who was
the chair person during the third Buddhist council, which was held at Ptaliputta (the capital of Magadha province).
Under the patronage of the Maura ruler Asoka in the third century B.C. the Kathvatthu Pakarana was composed.
It is younger than the Dhammasagan Pakarana. A close investigation will make it evident, that this book of
controversy is looked upon in one way as no more than a book of interpretation. A few a specimen of controversy
which the Kathvatthu Pakarana has embodied show that both sides referred to the Buddha as the final court of
appeal. The Kathvatthu Pakarana should be included in the Vinaya collection. From the nature of discussion relating
to Sagha affairs we are inclined to think that the Kathvatthu Pakarana should be incorporated with the Vinaya
collection, because it deals with the Vinaya affairs and is so closely allied with the topic discussed in the Cllavagga
Pli.
The Kathvatthu Pakarana has 23 chapters. In these chapters, there are discussions and refutations 219 in
number (different doctrines items of the various schools). This book seems to have grown gradually and most of the
heretical views discussed are ascribed to various schools, some of which are later than the other. The texts themselves
don't mention the names of schools, so that is supplied by the commentator of the Kathvatthu Pakarana. The
doctrines of the various schools could be better understood by study of that book in association with texts belonging to
Northern schools.
It is wonderful that commentator ven. Buddhaghosa said, that this book was also rehearsed during the first
council. But it is clear that this book was composed after the third council by the chief monk ven. Moggaliputtatissa
Thera (the Abhidhamma Piaka was completed after writing this book). Ven. Buddhaghosa Thera said: Ven.
Moggaliputtatissa Thera brough this book having taken the topic (or Mik) which were given by the Buddha foor
the benefit in the future for the monks. To debate lift(?) other said(?). Therefore all the Abhidhamma was preached
by the Buddha. This view is the traditional belief of Theravda.
In this book many texts quoted from the Suttapiaka give authority to the argument. As far as the terminology
used and the theories set foth are conceived, this seems to belong to the later period. Some scholars agree with
tradition and concept the book is belonging to the latest period. Other make the pahna the latest book of all. The
various heretical views represented in this book, the commentary says, including those of the Vijjiputta, the
Sammitiya, the Sabbatthivda (Sarvastivda), the Mahsaghika, the Kasapiya/Kasyapiya(?), the Adaka, the
Pubbasliya, the Aparaseliya, the Rjagirika/Rjagirika(?), the Siddhatthika, the Gokulika, the Buddhayanika, the
Mahisaka, the Uttarapathaka, the Hetuvda and the Mahsuavda. Some of these are Northern schools known to
the Mahbhasa-sstra. Some are Southern schools unknown to Northern Buddhism.
The first chapters of the Kathvatthu discusses puggala or personal entity, falling away of an Arahant, their
life among the devas, the putting away corruptionsor vices by one portion at a time, the casting off kma-rga and
vypda, everything as persistently exiting, some of the past and future as still exiting, applications in mindfulness.
The language of this book has relationship with the Kathvatthu Pakarana theory.
He vatthi heva natthiti he votthi heva natthiti nahevan = vottabbhe.
Ce vatthi ceva natthiti = amanta.
(This is the Magadisace(?) language)
The second chapters mentions that Arahant, the knowledge of the Arahant, the excellence of the Arahant,
doubt in the Arahant is specified progress in penetration, the Buddha's everyday usage, and duration of

consciousness, two cessations (dvenirodha) etc.

KATHVATTHUPPAKARANA
Kathvatthu is one of the seven Theravda Abhidhamma books. The Theravda tradition says that Abhidhamma
are the words of the Buddha. Theravdin, therefore, considers all the Abhidhamma texts as being preched by the Buddha
himself. But the Kathvatthu shows that this is not the real truth.
Now it is accepted that Kathvatthu was compiled at or after the 3rd Buddhist council held in the 3rd century BC
under the patronage of king Asoka. The president of this council was the famous monk ven. Moggaliputta Tissa. The
kathvatthu is said to be his work. It is to be noted here that it is the only work of the canon, which can be ascribed to a
definite author. Ven. Buddhaghosa said: Ven. Moggaliputta Tissa composed this book having taken the topic mtik,
which were given by the Buddha for the benefit of the monks in the future. So, all the Abhidhamma was preached by the
Buddha. This is the tarditional belief of the Theravdins.
The Kathvatthu was compiled for a particular purpose. It is for the refutation of the views of other schools and the
establishment of the views of the Theravda or Vibhajjavlda views. This was the need of the time. During this time various
schools were presenting theri views and debating among themselfves. Such schools as Andhakas, Vajjiputtakas,
Sarvastivda and Sautrntika were presenting different interpretation to suttas. The Theravdins presented their own view.
There were at least 16 such schools whose views were taken up for discussion and debated in the Kathvatthu.
These views are rejected as being not in accordance with the original teachings of the Buddha. There are 217 or 219
viewpoints that are taken up for discussion and debate. The text starts with the position taken up by the Sammtiyas or the
Puggalavdins, who put forward the view that there is a person over and above the five aggregates. In this manner most of
the important doctrinal problems are discussed in details in the Kathvatthu.
Kathvatthu is considered by some scholars as the earliest book of logic or more precisely the book which uses
logic to establish the Theravda point of view. Hence it is considered very important. Besides, it is of great significance as a
source book to understand the details of different Buddhist schools and their philosophies.
As the Theravda Abhidhamma text it served a great purpose in refuting the opposite viewpoints and establishing
the Theravda (or Vibhajjavda) position. In this respect it can be considered as a very important contribution to Theravda
Buddhist thought as well as to the furtherance and strengthening of Theravda Buddhism in India.

KATHVATTHUPPAKARAA (SHORT NOTES)32

It is the last book of the Abhidhamma Piaka. As the Theravda tradition considers Abhidhamma to be the word of
the Buddha, Kathvatthu too is considered as being such. But it has now been proved beyond doubt that Kathvatthu was
composed in the 3rd century BC and it was done by none other than ven. Moggaliputtatissa.
This is a very important text as regardds the development of Buddhist history of thought. Some even consider this
as the first book written using a logical system of thought.
The main purpose of the book is to refute the views over two hundred of them hold by schools other than
32 This note was among the notes for second yearr, but I believe that for first year students it will be more usefull.

Theravda.(?) Herein Theravda is referred to as Sakavda meaning 'our teaching'. Thus it is seen that the Kathvatthu
played a very vital role in establishing the Theravda tradition that was being challenged by other buddhist schools of
thought mainly by such schools as Puggalavda, Sarvstivda and so on.
The logical system adopted in the Kathvatthu is based on a scheme consisting of three books, namely Thapana,
Ppana and ropana. Thapana denotes the main arguments presented to refute the opposing views. The result reached by
Thapana is referred to as Ppana. The reflection(?) and the finel rejection(?) of the opponents' view was meant by ropana.
Though the opponents are not directly identified in the Kathvatthuppakarana itself the commentary names about 16 of
them. Therefore, kathvatthu when taken along with its commentary throws much light on the development of Buddhist
thought of the time.

THE PANAPAKARANA (ORIGINAL BY VEN. SUVARA)

Pahna Pi, the seventh and last book of the Abhidhamma, is called the Mah Pakarana, the Great Book
announcing the supreme position it occupies and the height of excellence it has reached in its investigation into the ultimate
nature of all the dhammas in the Universe.
The book of causes is the seventh book of the Abhidhamma Piaka. The Sarvlstivda school mentions it as the
Jnaprasthna. It is regarded as the most important and voluminous book of the Abhidhamma Piaka. It deals with
causation and mutual relationship of phenomena. It discusses various kinds of relationship between phenomena. It is known
as Mahpakarana. It is sometimes called the great discourse book. Like the Yamaka, this book is very difficult to be
understood. It has, therefore, ben said that he who masters this book masters all the doctrines of the Abhidhamma.
The Pahna gives a detailed account of the Paiccasamuppda. It in the form of 24 paccayas mentions the 12fold system of the Paiccasamuppda. These 24 paccayas or modes of relationship between things are called the 24
pahnas. The 24 paccayas are:
1. Hetu

2. Arammana
3. Adhipati
4. Anantara
5. Sammanantara
6. Sahajata
etc.
It is to be noted here that some of the paccayas have already been described in the Kathvatthu. But this book can
be mentioned as the first to group them into a body of twenty-four. It is a book of the late period and that is why some
resemblance to the Sriputta Abhidhamma Sstra, in which six conditions are recorded.
The Abhidhamma constitutes the results of an inquiry into the nature of human experience, both sensory and extra
sensory. Since the results are stated and interpreted in terms of language and logic, it allows the Abhidhamma the
justification to be considered as philosophy, the function of philosophy. If the latter is to be practically useful and ethically
the understanding cannot be obtained or developed without refence to the observation of the world within and around us in
the way it actually functions. So, the greater part of the content of Abhidhamma is an analysis and understanding of
phenomena. In this regard the Abhidhamma can be introduced as a critical and descriptive philosophy.

THE PAHNAPAKARANA
The book of causes is the seventh book of the Abhidhamma Piaka. The Sarvastivda school mentions it as the
Jnaprasthna. It is regarded as the most important and voluminous book of the Abhidhamma Piaka. It deals with
causation and mutual relationship of phenomena. It discusses various kinds of relationship between phenomena. It is known
as Mahpakarana. It is sometimes called the great book of discourse. Like the Yamaka, this book is very difficult to
understand. It has, therefore, been said that he who masters this book masters all the doctrines of the Abhidhamma.
The Pahna gives a detailed account of the Paiccasamuppda. It, in the form of 24 paccayas, mentions the 12fold system of the Paiccasamuppda. These 24 paccayas or modes of relationship between things are called the 24
Pahnas. The 24 paccayas are:
1. Hetu
9. Upanissaya
17. Jhna
2. Arammana
10. Purejata
18. Magga
3. dhipati
11. Pacchajta
19. Sampayutta
4. Anantara
12. Asevana
20. Vippayutta
5. Sammanantara
13. Kamma
21. Atthi
6. Sahajata
14. Vipka
22. Natthi
7. Annamanna
15. hra
23. Vigata
8. Nissaya
16. Indriya
24. Avigata
It is to be noted here, that some of the paccayas have already been described in the Kathvatthu. But this book can
be mentioned as the first to group them into a body of twenty-four. It is a book of the late period and that is why there is
some resemblance to the Sriputta Abhidhamma-sstra, in which six conditions are recorded.

The Abhidhamma constitutes the results of any inquiry into the nature of human experience, both sensory and
extra-sensory. Since the results are stated and interpreted in terms of language and logic, it allows the Abhidhamma the
justification to be considered as philosophy, the function of philosophy. If the latter is to be practically useful and ethically
the understanding cannot be obtained or developed without reference to the observation of the world within and around us
in the way it actually functions. So the observation of the world within and around us in the way it actually functions. So the
greater part of the content of Abhidhamma is an analysis and understanding of phenomena. In this regard the Abhidhamma
can be introduced as a critical and descriptive philosophy.

THE NATURE AND CONTENT OF ABHIDHAMMA PIAKA (LECTURED BY VEN. UPARATANA) (ORIGINAL BY VEN. NAI SOMA)
Abhidhamma Piaka is the third division of Tipiaka. It consists of seven books as follows:
1. Dhammasagan pakarana which is the classification of Dhamma that contains detailed enumeration of all phenomena
with analyses of consciousness and its fastest mental concomitants.
2. Vibhaga means divisions or books of analysis where as the first book provides a bird-eyed view with systematic
arrangement.
3. Dtukath pakarana is the discourse on elements and separated into treatises on the thorough analysis of dhtu.
4. Puggalapaatti pakarana is the book of individuals, a small treaded/treatise(?) giving a description of various parts of
individual where acumens(?) along the parts.(?)
5. Kathvatthu pakarana are the points of control, it is the second parathion by ven. Moggaliputtatissa Thera, there he
discussed and refused doctrines of other schools of taught in order to approach all the points of controversy on the
Buddha's Dhamma.
6. Yamaka pakarana means the book of pairs. Yamaka sets out to define and analyse the interrelationship of Dhamma and
Puggala.
7. The last one is Pahna pakarana, which are the books of cause-relationship. It brings together all relationships in a
coordinative form to show that Dhamma does not exist as isolated in detail but that it is constituted by a well ordered
system.
All these books are designated by the name of pakarana - only in the canonical and the commentary is that word
used for the third Piaka defiantly(?). Abhidhamma Piaka is the last one. The definition of Abhidhamma:
Dhammtireka dhammavisesattena abhidhammoti.
That suggests, that it is something additional to the Dhamma.
The three main Abhidhamma traditions were Theravda, Sarvstivda and Sautrntika. There is a huge
Abhidhamma literature for Sarvstivda tradition, where all the books were designated by the name of pada:33
1. naprastna pada Aryaktayana
2. Sangtiparyya pada Aryamoudgalyyana
3. Prjaptikya pada Vasumitra
4. Vijnakya pada Devasarman
5. Dhtukya pada Vashumitra
6. Dharmaskhanda pada Aryamoudgalyyana
7. Prakarana pada - Vashumitra

1. Sangti-pariyya pada
2. Dharmaskandha pada
3. Via pada
4. Praj pada
5. Dhtukya pada
6. Prakaraa pada

33 In the original paper from which I was copy-writing this topic there were two kinds of lists, so I write here both. The
second one was written by hand, it is just different order of the first one.

7. Jna prasthna pada

When we examine the Abhidhamma Piaka of any tradition, it is a huge collection of systematical, tabulated and
classified doctrine of the Buddha that represents the quintessence of his teaching. In Abhidhamma, Dhamma's are no
longer taught in conventional term making references to person and objects as I, we, he, she, man, dog, tree,
etc.
Here Dhamma's are treated entirely in terms of its ultimate reality. Analyses of each phenomenon are to its ultimate
constituent and all relative concept such as man, mountain etc. Thus, in Abhidhamma everything expresses in terms of
khandhas, yatanas, dhtu etc.
Of these texts, Pahna is the last of Abhidhamma Piaka. It is the greatest because it is bigger inside and supreme
in essence. The Abhidhamma texts excluding pakarana were composed between the period of first and third council, while
Kathvathu was completed at the third Buddhist council.

666THERAVADA ABHIDHAMMA
There are seven volumes in the Theravadin Abhidhamma Pitaka. Among those pitakas
Dhammasangani and Yamaka deal with the explanation of mind. in relation to those explanation and its
essence has been brought in point form in the Abhidhmmattasangaha. The seven volumes of
Abhidhamma Pitaka are as follows:
1. Dhammasangani enumeration or classification of dhamma.
2. Vibhavga divisions
3. Dhatukatha discourses of elements
4. Puggala-pabbatti descrition of individuals
5. Kathavatthu subject of discussion
6. Yamaka a book of pairs.
7. Patthana book of relations.
Dhammasangani enumeration or classification of dhamma.

This book is divided into 4 chapters. The 1st chapter is about the citta (consciousness), 2nd
chapter rupa (matter), 3rd chapter nikkhepa (summary) and 4th chapter atthuddana (elucidation).
There it has explained 8 moral consciousness, pertaining to sensual sphere (kamaloka), 12
immoral consciousness, 16 moral resultant consciousness, 7 immoral resultant consciousness, 11
functional consciousness. Pertaining to the form-sphere (rupaloka). 5 moral consciousness, 5
resultant consciousness, 5 functional consciousness.Pertaining to formless sphere (arupaloka), 4
moral consciousness, 4 resultant consciousness, 4 functional consciousness. Pertaining to
supramundane (lokuttara), 4 supramundane moral consciousness and 4 resultant consciousness.
Vibhavga divisions

In the Vibhavga there are 18 divisions. The 1st are khanda (aggregates), ayatana (sense-bases),
dhatu (elements), such as truth, indriya (controlling faculties), paccayakara (causal genesis),
satipatthana (minfulness), sammappadhana (supreme effort), iddhipada (means of accomplishment),
bojjhavga (factors of wisdom), jhana (absorption or trances), appamabba (illimitable), magga (path),

sikkhapada (precept), patisambhida (analytical knowledge), bana (wisdom), khuddakavatthu (minor

subjects), dhammahadaya (essence of truth).
- The idea of gods: Devata-sajyutta.
Dhatukatha discourses of elements

Discussion with reference to elements. This book discusses whether dhamma is included or not
included in, associated with or dissociated from aggregates (khandhas), bases (salayatana) and
elements (dhatu).
Puggala-pabbatti designation of individuals

Designation of individuals human types. It deals with various types of individuals. There are
also ten chapters. The first chapter deals with single individual, the second with pairs, the third with
group of three etc.
Kathavatthu subject of discussion

Points of controversy. This book deals with 216 controversies and these are explained in 23
chapters. This is a book of Theravada refutation of various other Buddhist views.
Yamaka a book of pairs.

This book is divided into 10 chapters, namely mula (root), khandha (aggregates), ayatana
(bases), dhatu (elements), sacca (truth), savkhara (condition thing), anusaya (latent disposition), citta
(consciousness), indriya (controlling faculties) and dhamma.
Patthana book of relations.

The book of causal relations. It deals with 24 modes of causal relations. They are:
1.

Root condition

2.

Object condition

3.

Predominance condition

4.

Proximity condition

5.

Contiguity condition

6.

Conascence condition

7.

Mutuality condition

8.

Support condition

9.

Decisive support condition

10. Prenascence condition

11. Postnascence condition
12. Repetition condition
13. Kamma condition
14. Result condition
15. Nutriment condition
16. Faculty condition
17. Jhana condition
18. Path condition
19. Association condition
20. Dissociation condition
21. Presence condition
22. Absence condition
23. Disappearance condition
24. Non-disappearance condition

666 LECTURE ON

SUTTA VIBHANGA (VINAYA TEXT) BY MRS. PARIS AUGUST 22, 2000

Sutta Vibhanga, the words Sutta Vibhanga means analysis of classification "Vibhanga" of a Sutta
applied to each rule of course of training included the P1timokka. This literal meaning Sutta or Sutra means
strength of strain because the P1timokha is inverted in the Sutta Vinaya. There are two hundred and twentyseven (227) for the monks and three hundred and eleven (311) for Bhikhuni.
Rules for a monk
(1) Par1jika

(2) Sa8ghadisena

13

(3) An2yata

(4) N2saggiya P1cittiya

(5) P1cittiya

30
92

(6) Patidesan2ya

(7) Sekh2ya

75

(8) Adhikarana Samatha

227
Rules for Bhikhuni
(1) Par1jika

(2) Sa8ghadisena

17

(3) N2saggiya P1cittiya

30

(4) P1cittiya

166

(5) Patidesan2ya
(6) Sekh2ya
(7) Adhikarana Samatha

8
75
7
311

In the Sutta Vinaya all this school are arrange us,

(1) The story leading to the rule
(2) P1limokha rule with stage a penalty increase for breaking
(3) The old commentary the P1tabhajaniya on each rule defining word to word

(4) Diversion from the rules

In the Sutta Vinaya a monk usually show a vowing his obtain to the Buddha or to one of the monk or to a
group of a monk directly. Therefore he was thus fare for the Uposato ceremony and could to take his place at
meeting.
The Sutta Vibhanga show that it action were found worthy to be blamed to the course of training
was soulful/sheepfold and penalty was test careful from the preach/brief of each rule of right conduct one
had to face a penalty.
The privation of unsuitable behavior in monk and nun, some to have residence two bases.
(1) A live of conduct prohibited by the Buddha
(2) Pana------ya fix with the rule, reach of the rule, majority of the rule gradually as need a rule and they are
out come of historical development that went on within the order. According to the rules in the Sutta
Vinaya everything regarding monastic regulation are included to four example; the social behavior, the
dress, the food, the medicine etc. the stories are also included to bring four reasons for the informant of
these rules.
(1) P1rajika
This is the first section of the Sutta Vinaya is included four P1rajika which are violation leading to
expansion/ each person. The rules are as followsI. Sexual intercourse of any kind
II. Taking what is not given

III. Taking of human life or consecration

IV. Cleaning firstly to have a chief superior states.

(2) Sa8ghadisena
When a monk does something wrong the offender in subject to penalty for a certain period and then he
can be reinstated by a former act of the Bhikhu order. Five groups base on minor sexual offencer.
I.
II.
III.
IV.

Two rules base on dwelling

Three rules a causing fellow monk falsely
Two rules causing decision in the order
Two rules base on insubordination

(3) Aniyata
They are called undetermined a monk make recharge for braking this type of minor rules. The penalty
depends on the nature of the offence/opinion.
(4) N2saggiya P1cittiya
This is for future and expansion. Then P1cittiya, these rules are for the sake of promoting harmony a
monk, Bhikhu.
(5) Patidesan2ya
These are precept covering etiquettes the monk will be committee and offence if they do not behave
well while making alms round. Spacing a monk make ------small Vinaya rules of this nature he will have to
confuse simple.
(6) Sekhiya
These are very small precept they deal with the daily ruling for bhikhu. The monk should behave
well while preaching the Dhamma to the lady, while eating and while attending to various types of
activities/action. These rules are without story and commentary and they are included in the P1timokkha.
This is a close relationship between the P1timokkha and Sutta Vibhanga, Sutta Vibhanga is a later work.
Therefore, it has a commentary and various elutriations while the P1timokkha both P1timokkha and Sutta
Vibhanga are similar word to word.
(7) Adhikarana Smatha
It was sever ways to settle this view when there is a dispute among the monk. It will be reported to the
judicial committee. They will settle the problems. Some scholar reverse Adhikarana Sutta were found the Vinaya
text.

ANALYSIS OF MIND IN ABHIDHAMMA

1. Kamavacara =
2. Rupavacara =
3. Arupavacara =
4. Lokottara

54 11 worlds
15 16 worlds 31 worlds.
12 4 worlds
=
8

Reference to previous charts etc.

QUESTION: EXPLAIN THE PARA-CANONICAL TEXTS OF ABHIDHAMMA LITERATURE (NOT THE CANON)
Actually when we speak about Abhidhamma literature, first we should know why it is called
Abhidhamma. The Buddha taught only the Dhamma and Vinaya. So, is it different from Sutta and Vinaya
Piaka? Simply speaking, Abhidhamma, as the term implies, is the higher teaching of the Buddha. It expounds
the quintessence of His profound doctrine.
The Dhamma, embodied in the Sutta Piaka is the conventional teaching (vohra desan), and the
Abhidhamma is the ultimate teaching (paramatth desan). There is a curious question about Abhidhamma, that
whether Abhidhamma is essential to realize Nibbna. Undoubtedly, Abhidhamma is extremely helpful to
comprehend fully the words of the Buddha and realize Nibbna, as it presents a key to open the door of reality.
It deals with realities and a practical way of noble living, based on the experience of those who have understood
and realized. Without knowledge of the Abhidhamma one at times(?) might find it difficult to understand the real
significance of some profound teachings of the Buddha. To develop insight (vipassan) Abhidhamma is
certainly helpful.
Abhidhamma is believed to be originally from the Sutta Piaka itself. Let see the sutta of Dgha Nikya
Dasuttara and Sagti Sutta and text of Aguttara Nikya. Abhidhamma has 5 stratas as follows:
1. Canonical

4. Sagaha (compendium)

2. Commentarial

5. Sub-commentarial on compendium (k)

3. Sub-commentarial
When we discuss the canonical texts of Abhidhamma it is clear to us that Abhidhamma Piaka was made
up of 7 texts, namely:
1. Dhammasagan

4. Puggalapaati

2. Vibhaga

5. Kathvatthu

3. Dhtukath

6. Yamaka

7. Pahna

According to Mrs. Rhys Davids, Abhidhamma is a recount of suttanta doctrines, with analysis and
elaborations and comments, hence not a positive contribution to the philosophy of earl Buddhism, but an
analytic, logical and methodological elaboration of what was already given in the discourses. Within Sutta
Piaka Abhidhamma is already found in the dry and schematic enumerations in the Aguttara Nikya and the last
suttas of Dgha Nikya.

The Dhammasagan, Vibhaga, Dhtukath, Puggalapaati and Yamaka, generally deal with the
analysis of phenomena and the Pahna with synthesis.
The Pli canon of Abhidhamma (?) The most important sources are the Pli commentaries and
sub=commentaries, which were written in Sri Lanka as well as in Burma. According to Indian tradition it was
Mahinda who brought Buddhism to Ceylon along with the canon and ahakath (commentary) on it. When we
trace the original sources, almost all the Pli commentaries explain the early Buddhist discourses on an
Abhidhammic basis.

666THE ROLE OF SIMILE AND METAPHOR IN PALI CANON

Simile and metaphor are two of the alavkara especially founded by the Sanskrit writers. As
rhetorical devices they were used in the oldest Vedic writings. These types of poetic expressions are
found in almost all the languages of the world. A simile is a figure of speech in which one thing; one
action or relation is likened to or explicitly compared to something of a different kind or quality. It
requires a phrase beginning with like as as if, etc. which makes it not only more prolix than a
metaphor but also labels the thought as make-believe.
The word metaphor, derived form Greek meta, meaning over, and pherein, meaning to carry,
denotes an analogy, similarity or relation between two things. A metaphor is a forceful figure of speech
based on the resemblance which one object is supposed to bear to another. It is expressed by
transferring a name or an action from an object to which it properly belongs to another. A comparison
is implied but not formally explicitly manifested.
The difference between a simile and a metaphor is slight, the simile being only a metaphor with
an explanation. In general the metaphor is more compact, forceful and suggestive, for instance:
Her face like lotus simile
Her lotus face - metaphor
There are abundant of similes and metaphors, which are very simple and direct, used in the
early Buddhist discourses and later poetic compositions. These often occur in the works like the
Dhammapada and the Thera-Their-gatha, in which the striking feature of these similes is their
simplicity and spontaneity. A few examples may be quoted from the Dhammapada:
If one speaks or acts with wicked mind, because of that, suffering follows the one just as the
wheel follows the hoof of the draught-ox.
Even as rain penetrates an ill-thatched house, so does lust penetrate an undeveloped mind?
As a fish taken out of its watery habitat and thrown on dry ground, this thought trembles. The
dominion of Mara should be eliminated.

If an ignorant man were to associate with a wise one even for a life-time, he will not come to
know what is good, even as a ladle does not know the taste of soup; whereas, if an intelligent person
were to associate with a wise man even for a moment, he will come to know what is good, as the
tongue comes to know the taste of soup.
These similes though they are very simple, direct and based on ordinary observation, are very
effective and convincing. In Buddhism, similes and metaphors are used for the purpose of elucidating
the meaning. One of the most popular similes in the Nikayas, is metaphysical questions regarding the
origin of the world, the duration and extent of the universe, etc. In a dialogue between the Buddha and
the son of Malunkya, the meaninglessness of such metaphysical pursuits is illustrated by a beautiful
simile:
A man is hit by an arrow. His friends hasten to the doctor. The latter is about to draw out the
arrow from the mans body. The wounded man, however, cries: Stop. I will not have the arrow
drawn out until I know who shot it, whether a warrior or a brahman, a vaisya or a sudra; to
which family he belonged; whether he was short or tall; of what species and description the
arrow is and so on. What would happen? The man would die before all these questions are
answered. In the same way the disciple who wishes for answers to all his questions regarding
the extent and duration of the universe, about the nature of the beyond, would perish before he
came to understand the nature of suffering, the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering and
the way to the cessation of suffering, which are the immediate problems as well as their
solutions.
The metaphors, too, is not lack in the scriptural Pali, e.g, dhammacakkapure javaj that is
running in the city, namely, wheel of doctrine; amatassa dvara doors of the immortality; me niluppala
akkhini my blue-lily-eyes.
A clear understanding of the Dhamma is a pre-requisite for spiritual advancement. To facilitate the
understanding of new and unfamiliar concepts, particularly among the uninitiated, the simile and
metaphors have been employed in the Nikayas at its functional best.
666THE ROLE OF SIMILE IN THE PALI NIKAYA. (879)
The Pali terms upama, a feminine noun and upamana, a neuter noun, both mean simile or
parable in English. A simile is a figure of speech in which one thing, one action or relation is likened to
or explicitly compared to something of a different kind or quality. Words such as as or like usually
expresses the comparison.
Simile is a very successful exegetical technique extensively used in all strata of Pali literature. It
is invariably resorted to the explanation of abstract concepts. Unlike in secular literature where similes
are used for poetic value, and sometimes the same hackneyed similes are traditionally used in all
literary works, similes are utilised in Pali literature for the specific purpose of edifying ideas, though
they are rich in poetic values. Therefore these similes display a charming originality and an inspiring

spontaneity. They lend poetic elegance to the profound sober doctrinal discussions. They rouse the
imaginative power of the readers and help to deepen their understanding with sensitivity and
sensibility.
In the Mahavagga, the Buddha says that his Dhamma is profound, difficult to realise,
hard to understand,subtle and comprehensible only by the wise. How could he make it simple and
understandable to the common people whom he preached his Dhamma? Therefore, the use of similes to
clarify the meaning of his teaching is employed.
There are many similes been employed in the Buddhist canon, the most important are the
Dhammapada and the Thera-Therigatha. Even in some suttas, there are ample of similes, for example,
alone in the Samnbbaphalasutta itself has 25 similes. This sutta set forth the fruits of the life of a
recluse and the highest goal of a Buddhist monk is treated, therefore, the subject is very difficult. Here,
the Buddha explains it with homely similes to serve the great purpose of making his teaching crystal
clear to the listeners. When he comes to the Jhana stage, his language becomes rich in similes and
glows with a beauty which is remarkable not only from the religious point of view but also from the
aesthetic view point. According to Prof. Angraj Chaudhary (Essays on Buddhism and Pali literature
p.155), such passages become magnificent in their poetic grandeur and may aptly be called the gem of
Pali literature. Because, as Prof. Angraj Chaudhary pointed out, the similes used in this sutta do not
only simplify the profound matter but also explain its sublime nature. Moreover, the similes seem to be
spontaneous and not laboured. For example, the last simile explains the knowledge of the 4 Noble
Truths that one attains as:
just as a man standing on the bank of a pool of water perceives the oysters and shells, gravel and
the pebbles and the shoals of fish in the clear, translucent and serene water, so he knows the 4
Noble Truths
And in many other texts, the similes used are very simple and direct. A few examples may be
quoted from the Dhammapada:
1. Though a fool all his life associates with a wise man,
he does not perceive the Truth (Dhamma),
just as a spoon (does not perceive) the taste of the soup.verse 64.
2.

If an intelligent person associates with a wise man even for a moment,

He quickly perceives the Truth (Dhamma).
Just as the tongue (perceives) the taste of the soup.verse 65.
These similes though are very simple, direct and based on ordinary observation, they are very
effective and convincing, indeed.
Unlike in Greek, Roman and Indian literature, the Pali Nikaya avoid the use of complex and farfetched similes. This difference is due to the different philosophical standpoints of the Buddhist and the
non-Buddhist. For the traditional Indian philosopher, aesthetics is a fundamental discipline representing
the very experience of Brahman. Hence the development of an extremely sophisticated theory of
poetics (alamkara) that takes both euphonic (wabha) and semantic (artha) aspects into consideration.
However the Buddhist approach to aesthetics and, therefore, to poetics is different. The ethically
oriented pragmatic teachings of the Buddha subordinated aesthetics to ethics. Hence the Buddhas
reluctance to extol the value of literary masterpieces with mere poetic elegance. There are at least three

discourses of the Buddha wherein he speaks rather disparagingly of discourses composed by poets
(kavikata) which may possess literary elegance (cittakkhara cittavyabjana), in contrast to discourses
that embody profound moral ideas (gambhira gambhirattha lokuttara subbatapatisabbutta). In fact, he
was extolling the usefulness of treatises possessing a definie theme relating to moral discourses,
namely, the inculcation of the doctrine of non-substantiality (subbatapatisabbutta), where the profound
moral ideas may be expressed through the most apt similes, as is evident from another statement of
his :
Esa te upama raja atthasandassani kataJataka III. 373.
(These similes are used for the purpose of elucidating the meaning)
A clear understanding of the Dhamma was a pre-equisite for spiritual advancement. To facilitate
the understanding of new ad unfamiliar concepts, particularly among the uninitiated, the similes has
been employed in the Nilayas at its functional best. They are appropriate, simple and uncomplicated.
Similes have also added a variety and richness to the expressionistic style of the Nikayas which makes
one feel comfortable even with the most involved of concepts. All in all, similes have functioned as the
greatest catalyst in simplifying the abstruse in the Nikayas.

666SIMILES AND PARABLES IN BUDDHIST DISCOURSES WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO DIGHA, MAJJHIMA AND SAMYUTTA
NIKAYAS (2001)
Similes and parables are 2 of the Alavkara very commonly and effectively used by writers and
speakers in order to communicate their ideas clearly, lucidly and forcefully. As a great teacher the
Buddha knew what to teach and how to teach. His teaching was characterized by his perfect
skillfulness. In comparing to the modern education the Buddha had utilized many methods of teaching
to make his disciples understand the doctrine, and the effective simile and parable are often used to
define and clarify very subtle concepts. A simile is affected by comparing one thing with another thing,
which usually is of a different knid. It requires a phrase beginning with like, as, as if, etc. which
makes it not only more prolix than a parable but also labels the thought as make-believe. A parable is
usually a short narration of a story, brings out a moral or spiritual lesson.
There are abundant of similes and parables, which are very simple and direct, used in the early
Buddhist discourses and later poetic compositions. These often occur in the works like the
Dhammapada and the Thera-Their-gatha. Even the Digha, Majjhima and Samyutta contain some
apt similes and parables. Though poets usually use similes and parables for the purpose of adorning
their writings. Religious teachers use it more for the purpose of achieving effective communication.
And the Buddha is well known for his almost unique ability to put into these 2 figures of speech.
While the Buddha was preaching a new doctrine to mix audience, he greatly used parables and similes
in order to make his ideas and views very clear and effective. In using similes and parables the Buddha
was careful to select the most apt and simplest ones so that the audiences could easily grasp what he
says. Therefore, for similes he often used day-to-day events and happenings.

For example, to show swiftness of action, such as in the case of appearance and the disappearance of
deities, he often used similes is as swift as a strong man might stretch his bent-arm or flex if again.
This very forcefully brings out the rapidity of the appearance and disappearance of spirits. In the
Mahaparinibbana sutta the Buddha in order to describe the Licchavis, compares them to the gods of
Tavatimsa. The Sakkapabha sutta of the Dighanikaya contains some very beautiful similes. These
are put in the mouth of Pabcasikha who is in love with Timbarus daughter. He compares his beloved
to a delighted breeze to one who sweats or as a cooling draught to one who thirsts. Again he says she is
like medicine to him who is sick, or like nourishment to one who is starving.
The Majjhima too abounds in similes. The Vatthupama Sutta uses apt similes to explain how the
mind could be cleansed. Just as a cloth that is defiled and stained becomes pure and bright with the help
of clear water of just as gold becomes pure and bright with the help of a furnace. So, too, the mind of a
virtuous monk. The Mahaassapura Sutta compares the completely tranquil mind to a lake in a
mountain recess, clear, limpid and undisturbed.
The Samyuttanikaya, too, has some very apt similes. For example, to describe beings that are bound
by desires, they are compared to a bird bound by fetters. (Iccha baddha puthu satta pasena sakuni
yatha). The Kosala Samyutta attempting to explain the inevitable subjugation of beings to old age and
death, say these assail beings like sky scraping huge mountains that fall from all 4 directions.
Parables, too, occur frequently in the Nikayas. The parables occurring in the Payasi sutta of the
Dighanikaya are very good examples. The snake parable in the Alagaddupama sutta and the
Kakacupama Sutta of the Majjhimanikaya, the raft parable in the Kullupama are good examples for
the effective use of parables in the Nikayas.
A clear understanding of the doctrine was a pre-requisite for spiritual advancement. To facilitate the
understanding of new and unfamiliar concepts, particularly among the uninitiated, the similes and
parables have been employed by the Buddha at its functional best. There are abundant of similes
occurred in the Nikayas, though they are very simple, direct and based on ordinary observation, are
very effective and convincing. Therefore, similes and parables have been used not as mere figures of
speech to increase the poetic value of sutta, but mainly to give the hearer knowledge on the nature of
the world and thereby leading them to the realization of Nibbana. (749 words)
666TOPIC 1. SIMILES AND PARABLES IN BUDDHIST DISCOURSES WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO DIGHA, MAJJHIMA AND SAMYUTTA NIKAYAS.
26/03/2001
lectured by Pannaloka
Another aspect of such explanation
The Buddha often uses similes and parables in order to make the idea very clear. For instance, in the Dhammapada and
Cullahattipadopama sutta he uses similes, besides the Alaggato sutta is also based on the similes.

Yavajinampi ce balo Panditam payirupasati Naso dhammam vijanati Dabbi suparasam yatha Muhattamapi ce vibbu

Panditam payirupasati Khippam dhammam vijanati Jivhasuparasam yatha.

----- Evan if the fool associates with a wise man for a whole life, he never understands the dhamma, as the spoon doesnt
know the taste of curry. Evan if the wise associates with a wise man even for a moment, he knows the dhamma quickly, as
the tongue recognizes the taste of curry.

Another instance:
Yathapi bhamaro puppham
Vannagandham ahethayam
Paleti rusamadaya
Evam game municare
--From Bhikkhu Vagga

Another simile used in the Buddhas teaching:

Matayathaniyamputam Ayusa ekaputtamanurakkhe
Evampisabbabhutesu Manasam bhavaye uparimanam. ---S.N.
---- As mother protects her only son as her own life, thus develop unlimited love towards all beings.

The Buddha uses similes sometimes from the immediate surroundings.

666THE APPRECIATION OF POETRY.

1.

connection between poetry and verse.

Verse is a form of poetry. Poets generally writes their poetry in verse form. There
are lot of verse written which is not poetic at all. Verse is the body and the poetry is the soul. Body
without a soul is a dead body. The true taste of verse is the ear but not the eye.
2.

Some essential characteristic of true poetry.

(1).
Regular rhythmregular beat in a sound.
The regular rising and falling in a flow of sounds in poetry, the recurring intervals of
strong and light sounds like the beat of a drum regulating dance movement is called rhythm and
rhythm is the chief and an essential characteristic of verse.
(2).
Rhyme
When verses have the same vowel sounds and end with the same consonant sound, it is
called rhyme. Rhyme is not necessary to verse but generally verse is rhymed. Rhyme serves two
purposes: it makes verse more musical by giving it pleasing sound, and it serves to preserve the
verse form (i.e., metre) in which the poem is arranged by making the ends of the lines.
(3).
Stanzas
poem is divided up into units and that all the units are exactly alike in form . such units or
division in a poem are called stanzas.

Verse is characterized by regular rhythm, rhyme and stanzas. Of there there,

rhythm is essential, rhyme and stanzas form are not essential characteristic of poetry.
3.

Essential characteristic of true poetry

(1).
Music (verbal music)words of beautiful sounds, words near each other
harmonize in sound so as to make word music-connected with rhythm.
(2).
Rhymeword rhyming together
(3).
Onomatopoeiathis is a figure of speech. The sound of the words is made
to suggest of echo the sense.
(4).
Alliterationa figure of speech. It brings together words begins with the
same consonant or vowel sound. These sounds represent the sounds of
various things intended by the poet.
(5).
Repetitionwords of phrases are repeated to emphasize the meaning and to
increase the musical effect of a poem.
(6).
Refrainsa refrain is a form of repetition. In some poem, the same line or
part of it is repeated at the end of each verse. It is called refrain or burden.
(7).
Visiona great poet is a seer, one who has a spiritual insight and can see
truths that other do not. All true poetry is the product of vision or
imagination for it is the expression of it. An ordinary man is aware only of
what he perceives by his senses and sees only the outward aspect of what he
sees. But the poets see much more.
(8).
Imagerythe suggestion of vivid mental picture or images by the skilful
use of words is called imagery.
(9).
Emotionthis appeals not to the head but to the heart. It touches the heart
and creates emotion or various feelings.

The most essential three aspects of poetry are: music, vision and emotion. The
poetry springs from imagination roused by emotion and is expressed in music and imagery.

666EVALUATE THE POETIC FEATURES OF ISIASI. (758)

The gathas of Isidasi are grouped under the title The Group of Forty Verses. Actually, there
are altogether 48 verses (from verse 400 to verse 447). Mrs. Rhys Davids has stated in her translation
of the text that she was unable to classify the metre throughout this poem. However, according to K. R.
Norman, all the verses are ganacchandas except verses 416a and 444a, which are wloka. The
ganacchandas verses are mostly arya, although 410b is very corrupt. Pada b of 441 is also very corrupt,
but it is possible that the metre is Upagiti.
There are several features in this poem which might be held to support a date for its
composition which is later than that of most of the Therigatha.

1.

2.
3.

4.

The mention of Pataliputta in verse 400 must clearly be later than that citys foundation and
rise to pre-eminience. There is , however, no need to assume that this is later than Asokas
time, and moreover verse 400 is one of the verses which is recogized by the commentary as a
later addition by the savgiti-kara. (the other two verses are 401 and 402).
Winternizt claimed that this poem seemed to belong to a later period of decay, when
Buddhism had already passed through many a crisis.
Mrs. Rhys Davids regarded this poem (and the last poem of the text) as the products of later
literary craft. Warders analysis would support this, but any such dating is relative rather then
absolute. Since the arya metre fell into disuse among Buddhist writers, noting in that metre is
likely to be very late.
Mrs. Rhys Davids also drew attention to the fact that although several theris are reputed to
have remembered previous existences, only Isidasi and Sumedha actually recount these to
their contemporaries. Again, it does not seem possible to date a practice of this kind.

The nun whom Isidasi met, according to some scholars, was a Jain. K.R. Norman is of the opinion
that the name Jinadatta suggested her status. Furthermore, the term nijjara in verse 431 (as
nijjaressami) is a technical term in Jainism, which means the gradual destruction of all actions.
This poem gives important points of Buddhist philosophy of life, the principal characteristic
as well as the fundamentals of Buddhism. The force of kamma and its results are depicted very clearly
in this poem. It also makes a hint that, kamma can only be understood by psychic power of
Pubbenivasanusssatibana (retrocognition), i.e., the ability to perceive ones own past history. This
capacity is connected with satanussati vibbana. Accoding to D. J. Kalupahana, this ability is dependent
on memory (sati), and this menory of past experience is attained through acts of intensive concentration
(samadhi).
According to B. C. Law, the most striking feature of this poem is the attainment of Nibbana
by Isidasi. Having gone through the terrible results of bad kamma, Isidasi, though still in her youth and
beautiful, renounced the world. By practicing the Noble Path, she finally attained Nibbana, which is, in
it negative sense the end to all ills, and in its positive sense, the highest Good.
According to V. F. Gunaratna, almost all the poems in Therigatha lack the poetic excellence
that characterizes most of the verses of the Theras. He says we also miss that impassioned longing for
solitude ad that ardent love of nature and forest-life so beautifully expressed in the Thera gathas. Nor
do we find in the Their gathas much of that hortatory element which features largely n some of the
Thera gathas. In language, in sentiment and in outlook there are differences between the verses of the
Theras and those of the Theris. For this, the author gives the answer this may be traced to the
circumstance that in the homes of the early Buddhist era the role of the woman was so different from
that of the man. There is also the added circumstance that Buddhist nuns were mot allowed by their
Vinaya to live alone in secluded places. In the verses of Isidasi, the comment of Gunaratna is also
applicable.
From the point of the kavyaliterature, this poem no doubt has a great value. It throws a flood of
light on the real picture of ancient India life, social condition, religious life and also social position of
women in ancient India. According to Winternitz, both the texts of Theragatha and Therigatha can be
mentioned as the best productions of Indian lyric poetry, from the hymns of the Rgveda to the lyrical
poems of Kalidasa and Amuru.

666EVALUATE THE POETIC FEATURES OF AMBAPALI.

1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

All the verses are in pair to show the contradiction of mundane and supermundane levels of
truths.
For the aspect of physical beauty, all the verses used natural objects to describe the different
parts of the body.
Again, all the verses also used natural objects to give the picture of impermanent and decay
of the body.
The poem itself has show two different aspects of humane characteristic i.e., the emotional
attraction of physical beauty and the spiritual aspiration to discard the attachment of such
beauty.
The poem successfully creates a very strong emotional desire towards physical beauty as well
as a powerful spiritual feeling of disguising such beauty.
The whole poem has successfully conveyed the Buddhist concepts of anicca, dukkha and
anatta i.e., all conditioned phenomena are of the nature of impermanent, unsatisfactoriness
and non-substantiality. The emotional poetic melody, rhythm and the spiritual vision of the
verses have indeed very harmoniously merged to give not only the beauty of the nature but
also the beauty of Truth!

666EXPLAIN THE TWO SYSTEMS OF METRIC IN PALI. (484)

There are two systems of metric in Pali, they are called matta and vanna systems. Matta means
mora and vanna, character. In the former moras are counted and in the latter, characters.
Mattamara system

The following vowels consists of two moras, the symbol of two moras is
(1) a long vowel e.g. a, i,
(2) a vowel preceding a conjunct of consonants e.g. buddha, dhamma,
(3) a vowel preceding the letter m e.g. samsara, simsapa
(4) the vowel at the end of a line in verses e.g. pujemi buddham kusumenena.
All other short vowels consists of one mora and the symbol for it is ,e.g. a, i,
There are five ganas (groups) in Matta system, each gana includes four moras irrespective of the
number of the characters. They are,
(1) --ma-gana
(2) - - --sa-gana
(3)- - --ja-gana
(4) -- --bha-gana
(5)---- --na-gana
Vannacharacter system

There are eight ganas in the vanna system and each gana includes three characters irrespective of
the number of moras. These eight ganas are

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

-
-
--
- -----

--ma-gana
--ya-gana
--ra-gana
--sa-gana
--ta-gana
--ja-gana
--bha-gana
--na-gana

There are hundreds and thousands of metres belonged to these two systems of Matta and Vanna.
But in the Pali texts,Vanna is mostly and widely used. Many Pali texts were composed in verses for the
purpose of accuracy, preservation and easy to remember, as in the oral tradition these are very
essential.

According to the Vuttodaya, there are many names given to each different Vanna. For example,
the name of the order of ja-ta-ja-ra is vamsattha and that of ta-bha-ja-ja(long) is vasantatilaka. All the four lines have the same order of Vanna, for examples
(1)vamsatthaja-ta-ja-ra
visaradam vadapathativattinam
- - / -/ - -/ -
ja ta ja ra
tilokapajjotamasayhasayinam
- -/ -/ - -/ -
ja ta ja ra
asesabeyyavaranappahayinam
- -/ -/ - -/ -
ja ta ja ra
namami sattharamananttagocaram
- - / -/- -/ -
ja ta
ja
ra
The verse of this particular vamsattha vanna for easy remembering is
Vadanti vamsatthamidam jatajara and its order of the ganas is
- -/ -/ - -/- which is still ja-ta-ja-ra.
(2)vasantatilakata-bha-ja-ja-(long)
The particular verse of this vasantatilaka Vanna for easy remembering is
vutta vasantatilaka tabhajajagago and its order of the ganas is
-/ - -/- -/ - -/ which is ta-bha-ja-ja-(long)
However, in the early Buddhist discourses, the lines are not governed by meters, the priority

place is given to the meanings, therefore sometimes the metres are broken.

666 SHORTQUESTIONS WITH SHORT ANSWERS:

What are the three sections of Dighanikayas and how many Sutta are find in each section?
The three sections of Dighanikaya

Silakkhandha Vagga Pali (Division concerning Morality)

Mahavagga Pali ( The large Division)
Pathika Vagga ( the Division beginning with the discourse on Pathika, the naked Ascetics)
The Sutta on each Sections:

Silakkhanda Vagga Pali

1.Brahmajala

2.SuttaSamannaphala

3.Ambattha

4.SuttaKutadanta Sutta

5.Mahali Sutta

6.Jalitya Sutta

7.Mahasihanafda

8.Patthana Sutta

9.Sabbe Sutta
12.Lohicca Sutta

10.Kevatta Sutta
13.Tevijja Sutta

14.Mahavagga Pali
Maha Vagga Pali

1.Mahapadana Sutta
3.Mahaparinibbana Sutta
5.Janavasabba Sutta
7.Mahasamaya Sutta
9.Mahasatipatthana Sutta

2.Mahanidana Sutta
4.Mahasudassana Sutta
6.Mahagovinda Sutta
8.Sakkapanha Sutta
10.Payasi Sutta

Pathikavaggapali

1.Pathika Sutta
3.Cakka vattti Sutta
5.Sampassadaniya Sutta
7.Lakkhana Sutta
9.Atanatiya Sutta
11.Dasuttara Sutta

2.Udanumbarika Sutta
4.Agganna Sutta
6.Pasatika Sutta
8.Sigala Sutta
10.Sangiti Sutta

What are opening Sutta in four Nikayas?

Digha Nikaya---

Brahmajala Sutta

Majjhima Nikaya Samyutta Nikaya

Mulapariyaya Sutta
-

Aguttara Nikya

Oghatarana Sutta
Citta Pariyadana Sutta

1. The first Council four Nikayas was entrusted four different parties, name the four parties.

Digha Nikaya
Majjhima Nikaya
Samyutta nikaya
Aguttara Nikya

--- Ven. Anada and his followers were in charge

--- Followers of Ven.Sariputta were in charge
--- Ven Mahakassapa and his followers.
---- Ven Anuruddha

2. The extent four Nikayas

Di _Ni
M _N
S _N
A _N

34
152
7762
9557

3. The names of Khudaka nikaya

1.Khudakapata pali
3.Undana
5.Suttanipada
7.Theragatha
9.Jataka pali
11.Niddesa
13.Apadana
15.Buddhavamsa

2.Dhammapada
4.Itivuttaka
6.Vimanavutthu
8Therigatha
10.Petavatthuni
12.Patidambhida magga
14.Cariyapitaka

Burmese tradition
16. Suttanipata
18. Petakopadesa

17. Nettippakarana
19. Milindapanha

What are the characteristics of the four Nikayas according to the commentary?
Digha Nikaya has the nature of promoting faith in the Buddha, Dhamma and the Sangha.
Majjhima Nikaya helps to crushing the hereitcal view.

Samyutta Nikaya helps to analyze the doctrine intelligently.

Aguttara Nikya helps to preach the interesting sermons.

Name six of the verses compilation in the khudalaka Nikaya?

The Dhammapada
The Theragatha
The Apadana

The Suttanipada
The Therigatha
The Buddhavamsa

TheCariya Pitaka

What is the name of the verse section in the Samyutta Nikaya?

Sagatha Vagga Samyutta pala

How are the parts of the Majjhima Nikayas named?

The parts of the Majjhimanikaya are:
1. Milindapannasa deals with the first 50 Suttas in five Vaggas,
2. Majjhimapannasa- consists of the second 50 Suttas in five Vagggas too.
3. Uparipannasa deals with the 52 Suttas in five Vaggas.

What are the bases of classification of Anguttara Nikayas, and how are its parts named?
Anguttara Nikayas is containing (9557), short Suttas is divided into (11) divisions known as
Nipatas. Each Nipata is divided again into groups called vaggas, which usually contain ten Suttas.
The discourses are arranged in progressive numerical order, each Nipata containing Suttas with
items of Dhamma, beginning with one item and moving up by units of one till they are eleven items
of Dhamma in each Sutta of the last Nipata.:

Eka Nipata pali

Tika Nipata pali
Pancaka Nipata pali
Sattaka Nipata pali
Navaka Nipata pali
ekadasaka Nipata pali

Duka Nipata pali

Catuka Nipata pali
Chacaka Nipata pali
Atthaka Nipata pali
Dasaka Nipata pali

How many Udanas are there in the Udana?

There are 80 Udana in the Udana.
In the first watch of the night the Buddha uttered the first stanza- when the nature of things become
clear to the ardently meditating recluse, then all his doubts vanish, because he understand what that
nature is as well as its cause.
In the second watch of the night the Buddha uttered the first stanzaWhen the real nature of the things becomes clear to the ardently meditating recluse, then all his
doubt vanish, because he perceive the cessation of causes
In the first watch of the night the Buddha uttered the first stanzaWhen the real nature of the things becomes clear to the ardently meditating recluse, then like the
sun that illumines the sky, he stands repelling the dark host of Mara.

4. How many verses and Theras in Theragatha and how many Theras are verses?
Verses 1239{1279}
Theras 384 (264)
Theras (One verses) 120
5. How many verses and theris in the therigatha and how many theris are verses?
Verses
Theras
Theras (One verses) 18

494
101

How many stories are there in the Cariya-pitaka and how are they divided?

There are (35) stories

They are divided as -- Ten stories in the first Vagga are concerned with accumulating of virtues in alms giving,
The second Vagga has ten Stories on practice of morality and
The last Vagga mentions fifteen stories, **five of them dealing with renunciation, *one with
firm determination, and *six with truthfulness, *two with loving-kindness and one with
equanimity.

What is the prototype of the Pali chronicle?

Buddhavamsa

QUESTIONS

Clarify, with evidence, how the Buddha's teaching has been classified as Nine-fold Division.

Examine briefly the structure and contents of the Pli Vinaya Piaka.

Probe what was meant by the term the two fold discipline (ubhatovibhaga) at the first council.

Write a detailed account on classification of the whole the Buddha's teaching into five Nikyas.

Clarify, with evidence how the Buddha's teaching has been classified as Navgasatthussana
(Ninefold portion).

Survey the composition of the Dhammapada with special reference to its poetical value.

Write a critical introduction either for Sayutta Nikya or Aguttara Nikya.

Examine how far simile and metaphor are used in the Pli Canon.

Write comprehensive notes on two of the following.

I. Patimokkha
II. Khuddakapha
III. Parivra Pi
IV. Kathvatthuppakaraa
V. Dhammavinaya

Critically examine the traditional classification of the Pli Canon.

Examine how all the words of the Buddha were incorporated into Dhamma and Vinaya at the first
council.

Write a detailed introduction to any (one) of the first four Nikyas on your choice.

Write a short account of the texts comprising the Pli Vinaya Piaka.

Make a survey of the contents of the Khuddaka Nikya.

Name the books of the Abhidhamma Piaka, and write a substantial account on any (one) of them.

Appreciate the poetical merits of Theragth.

Write short notes on two of the following:

I. Suttanipta
II. Apadnapi
III. Navgasatthussana
IV. Paisambhidmagga

Examine the reliability of commentarial interpretations of Nine Fold Division of Dhamma when
analyzing them.
Clarify the historicity and content of Dgha nikya and assess the importance of Brahmajla sutta as the
first one of Sutta Piaka.
Elucidate the use of Vinaya rules paying special attention to Dasa atthavase.
Evaluate the significance of nidhnakath of Atthasalni when examine the origin and historicity of
Abhidhamma Piaka.
Dvsita Buddhato ganhi,
Dve sahassni bhikkhuto.
Is this view reliable? Examine paying attention to sayings of the Buddha and sayings of the disciples of
Pli canon.
Review critically the place of verses in Pli Tipiaka.
Discuss, to what extent applicable the cleverness of languages of the Buddha to be sharpen the literary
significance of Pli Tipiaka.
Clarify your opinion for the possibility of lost texts.
Give an overview of the Nine-Fold-Division of buddhism. Show whether the classification is systematic.
Comment on development of the Sutta Piaka.
Does the Cullavagga Pi statement Eteneva upyena pacapi nikye pucchi. mean that all of
Buddhism was included in 1st council deliberation? give your reasons for this view.
Discuss the manner in which Theravda schools attempted to include the Abhidhamma Piaka in the
Buddha's original teachings.
Explain how the code of discipline in Vinaya Piaka was composed.
Use the Thera and Ther gthas to demonstrate the literary aspects of the Tipiaka.
Show how the disciples' teachings were validated and became part of the main body of Buddha's
teaching.
Write short notes on any two of the following:
I. Ubhato vibhaga
II. Suttanipta
III. Dhammapada
IV. Kathvatthuppakarana
V. Dhamma Vinaya

P.F.I. 102 PLI LANGUAGE AND GRAMMAR

A general knowledge of the fundamentals of the traditional Pli grammar with special emphasis on the following topics is
expected here: Alphabet, Nouns, Verbs, Indeclinables, Secondary Derivations, Primary Derivations, Combinations,
Compounds, Adjectives, Syntax and Plisentence patterns. In addition, a general knowledge on the following topics should
be acquired: origin, growth and expansion of Pli language, position of Pli among old and middle Indo-Aryan languages,
development of Pli as a written dialect, various stages in the development of Pli language with special reference to the
characteristics specific to each stage, Sanskrit influence on Pli and similarities and dissimilarities between phrase and verse
in Pli.
Recommended Reading:
1. New Pli Course, Vol. i., ii.
2. Introduction to Pli
3. Pli Made Easy
4. Pli Reader
5. A Graduated Pli Course (Part 1)

A. P. Buddhadatta, Colombo, 1954 1962

A. K. Warder, London, 1963
B. nanda Maitreya Thera, Japan, 1993
L. W. Adikaram, Colombo, 1947
Sumangala Suriyagoda Thera, Second Edition, Nedimala, 1994

666THE MEANING OF THE WORD PALI

The word Pali is the language of Tripitaka or Tipitaka, the sacred scriptures or the Buddhist canon of
southern Buddhism. We can say that which preserves or says meaningful discourses,Atthava pati
rakkhati iti tasma pati. The word is derived from the causative base of Pa-to protect. Agrammatical
work, says Saddattham palatiti Pali, text is so-called because it protects the sense of words or preserves
the importance of words.euroupean scholars have made a derivation from Pali. They say, a
row{ pankti}or line of leaves of a book itself and lastly the canon embodied in the book and its
language. There is also another derivation from Prakata,Paada and pala. It informs us that Pali means
language of the common people. A Buddhist scholar named Kosmbi mentions that the name is derived
from the root pal to protect, to preserve and originally means the book or literature in which the
preservation of the Buddhist canon has taken place. He says further that the great commentator
Buddhaghosa describes the tipitaka or its language by the name pali. It means the text of the Buddhist
scriptures. According to some scholars, Pali takes its meaning from path or village. For it being popular
speech and rustic in character it is known as pali. It is interesting to note that Pali was known by itself
without any word like Bhasa or Vacana which was added after it. It is not a rustic speech. It can be
mentioned here as an elaborate language even in the Buddhist canon. It is said that the Pali is derived
from Pankti is known as panti and phonologically it is impossible when we see that pankti is pali. A
scholar from Germany says that Pali is derived from the name of the city of Pataliputra which is known
in Greek translation as Pataliputra. He describes, Pali is contracted from patali. And assumption is that
it was a language of Pataliputra. He thinks that the word Patali in patalipurta became Indian in Indian
mouths and Pali was magadhas language and PataliPutra was Magadhas capital. But in Indian
methods the word Patali has not changed into Pali. It is known as Padali in later Prakrt and from these
we have Patali in old Bangali and it is Parura in modern Bengali. This derivation of pali has been more
satisfactorily given by the old scholars from Pa {to protect} and patali cannot give Pali in middle indo
Aryan. It is difficult to say that Pali has taken its name from a city called Pataliputra which in Greek is
pataliputra. Thus from the above facts we can say that the word Pali can be used here in the sense of
texts.The term Pali does not appear to have gained currency as nomenclature for any kind of language.
Even if we look into the Culavamsa forming a later supplement to the Mahavamsa we find that the
term pali is used in it clearly in the sense of original Buddhist texts, the texts of the canon, as
distinguished from the commentaries.
HISTORY OF PLI LANGUAGE (PLI GRAMMAR)
The grammarians have divided Indian languages into three divisions:
(1)
Old Indo-Aryan languages, which are called Vedic languages, it was from the beginning until the 6th
century BC.

(2)
Middle Indo-Aryan languages (Prkrit, Sanskrit, Magadh, Arthamagadh and so on), it was from 6th
century BC until 1000 AD.
(3)
Modern Indo-Aryan languages (consisting of Hind, Bengali, Brahmini, Sinhala and Nepali languages),
from 1000 AD until the present day.
Pli language is considered as the middle Indo-Ariyan that derived from Sanskrit. But there is consensus of opinion
regarding the fact that Pli is not derived from classical Sanskrit, but rather from old Vedicand therefore Pli is not later than
Sanskrit. It is generally accepted that Pli and other forms of Prkrit which constitute the Middle Indo-Aryan languages in
the history of development of Indo-Aryan languages represent the immediate result of evolution of old-Indo-Aryan. It is
also accepted through both Pli and other Prkrit forms constitute the middle Indo-Aryan groups of languages.
According to the orthodox theory, Pli is Magadh. Ven. Buddhaghosa commenting in his commentary says:
ettha sakaniruttinma sammsambuddhena vuttapakro magadhko vohro. Sakanirutti here means the Magadha dialect
as used by the Buddha. It is clearly seen that the Buddha was not a Magadha, but a Kosallan, and hence his mother tongue
could not have been the Magadha dialect. However, it is argued that as the Buddha spent most of his time in the Magadha
region he may have used Magadha as the medium of his discourses. Besides, as the Magadha kingdom was the most
powerful at that time, it is also probable that Magadha dialect was the lingua franca of the time and hence the Buddha used
it as the medium of instruction.
But, the Buddha allows monks to use their own dialects. During 6th century BC India was influenced by
philosophical and religious thought and people had to use different dialects. This means the origin of Pli language depends
on various dialects of contemporary languages. The Buddha states that quarrel over the particular dialects is not worthy:
Janapadanirutti nabhiniveseya samanna netidhaveya.
(Aranavibhaga sutta, Majjhima nikya)
It is useless to dogmatic the words but the meaning is the most important.(?) All this incident leads us to one
conclusion, that the Pli language was a lingua franca or mixed language.

HOME OF PLI
What, then, is the home of Pli? What is its origin? Some European orientalists have tried to locate the home of
Pli in such different regions in India as Kosala, Avanti, Kosambi, Taxila and even the Vindhya area, Kalinga, Ptaliputta,
and Mgadha.
Westergard and E. Kuhn consider Pli to be the dialect of Ujjayini, because it stands closest to the language of
the Asokan-inscriptions of Girnar and also because the dialect of Ujjazini is said to have been the mother-tongue of
Mahinda. R. O. Franke and Sten Konow have decided in favor of the Vindhya region as the home of Pli. Oldenberg and
E. Mller consider Kalinga to be the home of Pli.
Maurice Winternitz is of the opinion that the Buddha himself spoke the dialect of his native province Kosala and
it was most likely in this same dialect in which He first began to proclaim his doctrine. Later on, however, He wandered and
taught in Mgadha. When in course of time the doctrine spread over a large area, the monks of various districts preached
each in their dialect. It is probable that some monks coming from Brahmin circles also attempted to translate the speeches of
the Buddha into Sanskrit verses. However, the Buddha himself absolutely rejected it, and forbade learning his teachings in
any other language except Mgadh.
Dr. Grierson has inclined to decide that Mgadh was a dialect of Mgadha. Wilhelm Geiger considers Pli to be
of pure Mgadh.
The ancient tradition of Ceylon, where the Pli Tipiaka and Commentaries were preserved and handed down from

the 3rd century BC definitely states that it is Mgadh, the language of Mgadha, the original language (mlabh) in which
the Buddha spoke.
It is reasonable to suppose that the Buddha must have spoken one or more of the dialects current in the 6th century
BC in Mgadha. In a way, any or all of them may legitimately have been called Mgadh. Although we know nothing
definite about those dialects today, we may reasonably guess that they could not have been basically very different from one
another.
But whether the dialect the Buddha usually spoke in was exactly the same as the language of the Tipiaka as we
have it today is another matter. What we call Pli today is not a homogeneous but a composite language containing several
dialectal forms and expressions.

666GEOGRAPHICAL AND HISTORICAL EXPANSION OF PALI

Pali is the name used designates the language in which the Theravada Tipitaka is written. It
appears to be from the word Patha and could be an abbreviation of Palibhasa and also called tantibhasa.
The general tradition is that Pali is the language of Magadha and for this reason it is also called
Magadhi. This view is based on the belief that the Buddha, not a Magadhan, lived and preached in
Magadha, and therefore he must have spoken Magadhi.
This view has been current in Sri Lanka; it is also the view of Ven. Budhaghosa. But many
scholars argue against this. For example Westergaard and Kuhn proposed the view that it is a dialect in
Ujjayani. Franekes view was also the same. This view is supported by the fact that mother tongue of
Ven. Mahinda, who has been a dialect of Ujjayani. Oldenburg considers Pali to be a language of
Kalinga country. But after considering all available views Geiger, too agrees with Windisch, who
considers Pali to be the form of Magadhi.
Norman writing recently says that there are many inconsistencies between Pali and Magadhi
with regard to phonetics. Thus it is seen that the question regarding the home of Pali is yet under
debate. What is clear however is that it is a form Prakrit or Middla Indo-Aryan. This was used first in
the writing down of the Theravada Buddhist canon in the first century B.C. in Sri Lanka.
When Theravada Buddhism went to S. E Asian countries such as Burma, Thailand, Cambodia,
language was influenced by the main language in those countries. Pali has also been greatly influence
by Sanskrit with regard to spelling and phonetics, syntax, style and vocabulary. It is a language, which
has been repeatedly reshaped.
However, it is not desired from later Sanskrit for it shows closer relation to Vedic Sanskrit.
Thus the gerund in Tvana (gantvana), the form tehi, yehi (vedic tebhis, yebhis prove this.
Geiger who says that Pali is not a homogeneous language but a mixed language shows four
different stages of its development.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Language of gathas, which is very, heterogeneous and old.

Language of the canonical prose, which is more homogeneous, with more rigid rules, followed.
Later prose of the post-canonical literature as found in Milinda panha etc.
Language of later artificial poetry where Sankritization is more marked.

By-S.N

666INTRODUCTION TO PLI LANGUAGE

Pali is the language of Theravada Buddhist literature, was first found in Sri Lanka and there it spread over other
countries with the Tipitaka and commentaries. Although Pali it was found originally in Sri Lanka, but according to some
western scholars it was originated in India. They located the home of Pali in such different regions of India as Kosala,
Avanti, Kosambi, Taxila, the Vindhya area, Kalinga, Pataliputta and Magadha.
The home of Pali? This question had two kinds of answer: the answer given by Pali tradition and by modern
philologist. With in the Pali tradtion, Pali to be known as Magadhi, i.e., the language of Magadha. Modern philologist
classify Pali as a form of Middle Indo Aryan language.The evolution of Indo-Aryan languages are divided into three stages:
(a) Old Indo-Aryan ---- 1500 B.C ~ 600 B.C. (Vedic and Sanskrit)
(b) Middle Indo-Aryan ---- 600 B.C. ~ 1000 A.D.
(c) Modern Indo-Aryan ---- 1000 A.D.
The second stages again sub-divided into three periods.
(i)
600 B.C.
~ 200 B.C. ------ Pali Tipitaka, Asoka Prakrit.
(ii)
200 B.C.
~ 600 A.D. ------ Ardha-magadhi, Surasena etc.
(iii) 600 A.D.~ 1000 A.D -----Apabhrajwas.
It is generally believed that Pali arises from some spoken of Middle Indo-Aryan, and belongs to the first period, and is
the form of Prakrit. According to the Theravada chronicles, the Pali canon was first committed to writing at a monastery at
Alu-vihara in central Sri Lanka in the first century A.D., during the reign of Vattagamani Abhaya, thus, it is the form of
Prakrit which was used.
The Pali language has three principal grammars, viz. Kaccayana, Moggallaya and Saddaniti traditions. The first
tradition, Kaccayana deriving its name from its eminent author Kaccayana Mahathera, is the oldest and most systematic of
Pali grammar and most of the grammatical were based on this tradition.

PERIOD OF PLI LANGUAGE

Old Indo-ryan period:

1800 BC 600 BC

Middle Indo-ryan period: 600 BC 1000 AD

1.

Part of Middle Indo-ryan period: 600 BC 200 BC

2.

Part of Middle Indo-ryan period: 200 BC 600 AD

3.

Part of middle Indo-ryan period: 600 AD 1000 AD

It is generally believed that Pli came from a Middle Indo-ryan language because it has close relation to Vedic
form (of language). Moreover, some scholars believe that not only the Pli derived from Vedic language but also the
classical Sanskrit. On the other hand, most of Pli words are similar to Sanskrit. Therefore, some say that Pli derived from
classical Sanskrit. But that is not possible as there is no evidence for it. Pli was not a main language of India, but it has
been considered as one of the dialects.

According to philologists classical Sanskrit and Pli language derived from Vedic Sanskrit, the mother language of
both of them is the same. It is supposed that Sanskrit was used or spoken by higher people of the society of ancient time, but
Pli has been mixed with regional dialects and used by general people. The special thing is the word 'Pli', which was used
as the name of the language since 12th century AD. Before then no one used the term 'Pli' to introduce any language.
According to Buddhaghosa, instead of the word 'Pli' they used several terms to introduce the language, such as Tanti,
Tantibh, Mgadh, Mgadhbh.
Pli has developed since the First Buddhist Council. After the First Council, during the Second and Third Councils
the pioneers of the Pli language started to write commentaries and translate. Especially most of the commentaries have
been composed in Pli language in the first century AD. In 19th century many scholars who were interested in studying Pli
from European countries had contributed great effort to develop the Pi language. According to the form of the language
which has existed in the text and commentaries, Pi language can be divided into four periods. They are as follows:
1. Tipiaka-verses language era
2. Tipiaka-prose language era
1.

3. Commentarial language era

4. Poetry language era

Tipiaka-verses language era

This is the oldest form of Pli language. This exists in the stanzas which are available in Sutta Nipta and
Dhammapada books. We can study many Vedic Sanskrit's characteristic in those books. Some words derived from Vedic
Sanskrit directly and some words have a very close relationship with the Vedic form.
2.

Tipiaka-prose language era

The form of this language is more different than the 'verses' language. Howe we can say they are different?

3.

4.

1.

More new words were added and oldest forms were reduced.

2.

The language is controlled by some grammatical rules.

3.

It has used only a few words to express meanings although it gave complete meaning.

Commentarial language era

1.

The characteristic of this language exists in Milinda Pah, Nettippakaraa and later in many commentaries.

2.

Many artificial words exist in this one and one of the characteristic features is higher strength(?).

3.

Some explain this is a scholastic language.

Poetry language era

The character of this language can be seen in later poetries in Pli.

666EARLY BUDDHIST CONCEPTION OF LANGUAGE AND ITS USAGE. (794)

Unlike the other religions current at the time of the Buddha in India, Buddhism emphasized the
importance of understanding the nature of the world of experience as far as the emancipation is
concerned. The true freedom, according to Buddhism, cannot be experienced unless we get rid of the
defilement namely greed, hatred and delusion. People are attached to the world because of these
fundamental characteristics of human mind. The world including the human being is necessarily
subjected to the law of causation (paticcasamuppada). So, everything in the world is impermanent,
what is impermanent is suffering, what is suffering is soulless, that is to say, nothing in the world can
be considered as mine, I or myself. The real freedom or emancipation, as to the Buddha is to get rid of
this mass of suffering. To achieve this freedom, one should investigate through intellect into the real
nature of the world. In order to convey this message, the Buddha and his disciples preached a large

number of discourses to different types of people. The verbal communication was the main method of
instruction at the time, therefore we find valuable instructions in the Buddhas discourses concerning
the nature of language and its usage. Language is an instrument that we use to impart a message to the
hearers. In this regard, the speaker as well as the hearers should have a good understanding of the
nature of the language. The impermanent nature of the world is described with words and sentences
which refer mostly to the static concepts. Therefore, the Buddha advised his disciples to use the
language with caution.
Although we dont find a theory of language in early Buddhist discourses, the instruction given
to the disciples with reference to the language and its usage are worthy to be considered in this respect.
The Vinaya Pitaka (Vin. II, 139) records a story related to two Brahmin monks called Yamelu and
Tekula who requested the Buddha to translate the Buddhas teaching into Vedic language or metre
(handa mayaj bhante buddhavacanaj chandaso aropema). The reason for this request was that, the
various monks of different clans spoiled or destroyed (dusenti) the Buddhas teaching through their
own languages or dialects (te sakaya niruttiya buddhavacanaj dusenti). The Buddha categorically
refused this request and advised the disciples to use their own languages or dialects to learn the
Buddhas teaching (Anujanami bhikkhave sakaya niruttiya buddhavacanaj pariyapunituj). Further, the
Buddha declared that if whoever translate the Buddhas teaching into Vedic language or metres become
guilty of offence callde dukkata (wrong-doing).
The Pali expression anujanami bhikkhave sakaya niruttiya buddhavacana pariyapapunituj,
however has different interpretation. Buddhaghosa interpreted it as I order you to learn the word of the
Buddha in his own language, i.e., in the Buddhas language (Magadhi language). But according to
several Chinese versions, the statement of the Buddha means to learn the word of the Buddha each in
his own dialect. According to Ven. Rahulas opinion, what is meant by Magadhi language actually
refers to several different dialects spoken in ancient Magadhi (Humour in Pali Literature).
During the 6th century B.C. in India, there had been a number of dialects such as Magadhi and
Apabhrajsa used among the ordinary people. The language of the high caste people was Vedic or
Sanskrit. The sacred texts of Hinduism were preserved in Vedic language. The Buddha as well as other
religious leaders like Nigantha Nagaputta, who opposed the Brahmanic tradition, mostly used the
dialects of the common people in order to propagate their doctrines. This incident recorded in the
Vinaya reminds us the liberal attitude of the Buddha towards language and its usage. The same attitude
is further confirmed by a statement occurs in the Aranavibhavga-sutta (No. 139) of the Majjhima
Nikaya. In this sutta, the Buddha advised his disciples not to attach to the provincial dialect and not to
transgress the common parlance (Janapadaniruttij nabhinivesseyya, samabbaj natidhaveyyati). It is
further explained with the example that in different states of India, people called the same object in
different terms with reference to different dialects. The bowl for example, is called in different states as
patta, pati, vitta, sarava, dharopa, pona or pisila.
Even in his first sermon, the Buddha has emphasized the importance of the gravity of language
in preaching the Dhamma. Two terms occur in the statement satthaj sabyabjanam (Mahavagga Vin. I)
refer to the two components of language namely meaning and sound. The Buddhas advice was that in
preaching the Dhamma, these two aspects of language should be perfect. In the Dhammapada (verse
101), he instructed the people that, thousand stanzas without meaning are useless, whereas even a
single stanza is useful than those thousand if it conveys a useful meaning. (Sahassam api ca gatha,
anatthapadasajhita. Ekaj gathapadaj seyyo, yaj sutva upasammati).

Language and Communication extract from A History of Buddhist Philosophy Continuities and
Discontinuities. p.60.
Dhamma as text (pariyatti) involves the two philosophical issues. A text is intended to
communicate some idea, and language, whatever its form, is the primary means of such
communication. Thus the first philosophical problem is to determine the nature of linguistic
convention. The second relates to the authenticity of the text.
1. The Natuer of Language
The Buddha, who perceived the world of human experience as being in flux, was not willing to
recognize language as a permanent and eternal entity. Like everything else, language (loka-samabba =
generality of the world, loka-vohara = usage of the world, loka-sammuti = convention of the world) is
in flux. The basic entity (as the Indian term aksara implies), but rather a conventional symbol (savkha)
that people adopt depending on circumstances. And it is only recently that psychobiologists of
language have come to realize that natural environment and material culture affect the relative
frequency of the occasions for using various words. The fact that words and conceptions are neither
absolute nor completely arbitrary is clearly recognized in the Aranavighangasutta of the M.N (No.
139). Here, there are two significant assertions about language i.e.,
(1)
(2)

The recognition of the kinship of words, based on usage rather than on simple etymology
adopted by the grammarians, a feature noted more recently by philosophers of language.
The language drift, which is a repudiation of the absolute structures of language that are
supposed to be revealed by linguistic analysis. Here again, drift is caused by usage. This
language drift represents a midway position between strict adherence (abhinivesa), more
appropriately described as linguistic or conceptual constipation, on the one hand, and
transgression (atisara) or, literary linguistic or conceptual diarrhea, on the other.

In the Brahmanical system the Vedas were considered to be revealed texts, which prompted the
preservation of every word and every syllable unchanged, thus generating the so-called science of
etymology (nirukti) and grammar (vyakarana) as part of the studies ancillary to the Vedas themselves.
In contrast, the Buddhas attitude toward language seems to have compelled his disciples to concentrate
on hermeneutical problems. The situation was rendered more complicated when the Buddha permitted
his disciples to use their own languages in disseminating the teachings. Thus the textual tradition
(pariyatti), whatever the language in which it is preserved, was an important means of preserving and
communicating the Buddhas doctrine (dhamma).
2. Authenticity of the Texts
According to the Buddha himself, verbal testimony (sadda), whether preserved as an oral
tradition or as a recorded one, is neither an absolute source of knowledge nor an utterly useless means
of communication. Seeing and hearing, are two important sources of knowledge. For the Buddha, the
voice of another (parato ghosa) constitutes an important means of knowledge, not in itself, but
supplemented by investigative reflection (goniso manasikara) (M.N. I, 294).

The voice of another can be very ambiguous. It can be the voice of anyone, an enlightened
person or an unenlightened one. Even if it is the voice of the Enlightened One, it needs to be checked
and rechecked (D.N. I, 3). However, while not claiming divine authority and absolute sacredness for
his statements of doctrine (dhamma) and discipline (vinaya), the Buddha probably felt the need to
perpetuate them without too much distortion. Hence toward the end of his life, he recommended certain
hermeneutical principles that his disciples could employ whenever there was controversy regarding the
teachings. These 4 hermeneutical principles are referred to as Mahapadesa (primary indicators), i.e., to
check the statement made by anybody or any community against the doctrine (dharma) and the
discipline (vinaya). These 4 statements might be made either by any one of the following:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

A monk
A senior monk residing in some place
A community of senior monks who are educated, conversant with the tradition, and
custodians of the doctrine and discipline as well as the formulae.
A senior monk who is educated, conversant with the tradition, and custodian of the
doctrine and discipline as well as the formulae.

666WHAT ARE THE TECHNIQUES OF THE LANGUAGE USED IN CANONICAL LITERATURE?

It is gradually believed that Pali arises from some spoken dialect middle indo-Aryan it
belong to the first or early middle indo-Aryan stage. It has the characteristics of the middle indo-Aryan
language. We can mention here directly, that it has never taken its origin from classical Sanskrit.
Because there are some peculiarities which Clearly signify that Vedic has some close relation with it.
With the help of the ancient Buddhists of the Hinayana shcool or the Theravada school. The Pali
language And its literature have developed in India. It has close connection with the Theravada school
in India, because it was its vehicle. So we find the flourishing Condition of Pali literature in India when
the Theravada school played a great role in the history of Buddhism.
But after the arise of the Mahayana. Not only the Theravada school but also the study of
Pali gradually declined in India. Pali and the Theravada school then took their home in Ceylon they
played a prominent Part for more than 2ooo years in the religious history of that country.
From Srilanka, Theravada Buddhism and Pali were introduced into Burma, Siam,
Cambodia and Laos. According to the orthodox theory, Pali is Magadhi. Magadhantrutti and
Magadhikabhasa. Pali scholars from Srilanka, Siam, campuchea believe that Pali can be identified with
the language of the Buddha. He used to stay in Magadha most of his time,

it is quite natural that the language of Magadha was spoken by Him .for this reason Pali
has been identified with Magadhi. It is quite natural that the early Buddhist scriptures were composed
in Magadhi in which the Buddha Spoke. It was the language of the place where the religion of the
Buddha arose.
The Buddhistic tradition says that the language of the Pali-tipitaka, which was the
Original canon, was the language of the Buddha himself.
Thus from the above facts it is clear that Magadhi was regarded as Mulabhasa or the
basic language. It was the language in which the words of the Buddha were originally fixed.
According to the Buddhists of the Hinayana or the Theravada school. The language Of
Magadha was the speech of the Buddha. This was regarded as the Mulabhasa the primary speech of all
men. This was spoken by men of the primeval Epoch, by the Brahmins and by the Buddhas. The
natural speech of many which alone would be spoken if human beings were thought no other language.

QUESTION: SHOW WITH EXAMPLE THE FEATURES OF PRAKRIT LANGUAGE PRESERVED IN PLI?
The Pli language is included in the middle Indu Aryan language. So, it has many features of Prakrit language. Pli language is
not so rough as Sanskrit and not so smart as Prakrit language. When compared Pli and Prakrit language many similarities can be seen.
According to the alphabet of both Pli and Prakrit languages there are no differences. Iru, Ir(?), Iu, Eu these letters are dropped in
both language. They are somehow difficult to pronounce. So, they disappeared and other vowels and consonants represent them. For
example: the letter iru, ir(?) are too difficult to pronounce.
Examples:
mruga
tsuna
drusthi
krata

-)
-)
-)
-)

miga
tina
dihi
kata

Sometimes iru becomes u :

riju
-)
uju
ritu
-)
utu
sruta
-)
suta
iru becomes a :
fraha(?) -)
geha(?)
ru becomes ra :
bruhad
-)

braha

iru becomes ri :
rite(?)
-)

???

iru becomes ru :
viruksha -)
rukkha

ri becomes iru :
rigveda -)
irugveda

ei becomes i :
dheira
-)

iru becomes ana :

nrupatih -)
narapati
ilu becomes u :
klutta
-)

kutta

ai becomes e :
airavana -)
maitr
caitya
vaira
taila

mett
cetiya
vara(?)
tela

eravana
-)
-)
-)
-)

ai becomes i :
aiswarya -)
issariya
saindhara
-)
sindhara
sailasana -)
silasana

1. The visarga disappeared. That is divided in three ways. It is difficult for pronunciation:

dhira

ou becomes o :
oushadha-)
osadha/oshadha(?)
ourasha -)
orasa
mourya -)
moraya
ubhou
-)
ubho
kousalaya
-)
kosalla
ou becomes u :
pouggalika
-)
puggalika
soundarya
-)
sundara
oudhatya -)
udhacca
roudra
-)
ruda
ou becomes a :
nouka(?) -)
nava(?)
gourava -)
garava

(a)
deva
narah

The visarga after the ending vowels becomes o:

-)
deva
-)
nara

(b)
The visarga is ended after the e ending and u ending stems.
agrih
-)
aggi
pituh
-)
pitu
bhikshuh -)
bhikkhu
(c)
The consonant after the visarga is reduplicated.
duhka
-)
dukkha
nihsoka -)
nissoka
duhsata -)
dussata
2. Consonant ending stems are not in both Pli and Prakrit languages:
tman
-)
att
bhagavan
-)
bhagav
rja
-)
rja
pratipat -)
prapatti(?)
saret
-)
srada
3. The number dual is dropped in Pli and Prakrit:
agnih
-)
agni, aggi, agnayah, aggayo
4. Dative and possessive case forms are similar in Pli and Prakrit language.
5. Imperative and pot mrical/interrogative(?) mood verbs used commonly kaungeya, vade.
6. When we conjugate the routs/root(?) the attanpada forms are much more:
vapate; bhajeta
7. The past participle forms are used instead of finite past and verbs:
so gaman agami
so gama gato
8. ???
9. In old Indu Ariyan languages o ending make nouns with nominative singular endings with ah.:
devah

-)

devo

But in Prakrit a becomes e deve(?) feature in the canon:

vanappa gumbhe yath phussitagge sukhe dukkhe jive
10. ra becomes la in Prakrit:
raja
-)
laja
marata
-)
malata
taruna
-)
talama
sukaman(?)
-)
sukumala(?)

QUESTION: OPINIONS GIVEN BY SCHOLARS ABOUT THE ORIGIN OF PLI LANGUAGE SHOULD BE GIVEN. (HISTORY OF
PLI LANGUAGE) (LECTURED BY VEN. PIYARATNA) (ORIGINAL BY VEN. EIDARIYA (MYINGYAN))
It is generally believed that Pli arose from a spoken dialect of people living in the early or first Middle Indu
Aryan era. It has the characteristics of the Middle Indo-Aryan languages. We can mention here directly that it had never
took its origin from classical Sanskrit, because there were peculiarities which clearly signify, that Vedic Sanskrit has some
close relation with it.(?) It is close not to the Sanskrit but to the Vedic language.
According to orthodox theory, Pli was the language of Magadhi. Ven. Buddhaghosa used the term 'Pli' which he
himself called 'Mgadhbhs' to introduce Buddha's words, Dhammapada etc. The Buddha used to stay in Magadha most
of his time. It is quite natural that the language of Magadha was spoken by him. Otherwise after the passing away of the
Buddha the first council was held near the capital of Magadha, Rjagaha. For this reason, Pli Buddhist scriptures were
composed in Magadhi. It was the language of the place, where the religion of the Buddha arose. This was considered as
mlabhsa, the original language of man. It was spoken by man of the early time of this on by the Brahmins and by the
Buddha.
The speech of Magadha took its shape in Sri Lanka, when ven. Mahinda brought Buddhist canon from magadha to
Sri Lanka in the 3rd century BC. We do not know exactly what dialect he brought with the canon to Sri Lanka during the
first time. It may have been Pli language or some other dialects, but the undoubted fact was that the canon was sent by the
king Asoka, emperor of Magadha. And it embodied the 'Buddha vacana'. Pli and Theravda school took their home in Sri
Lanka. They played a prominent part for more than two thousand years in the religiouis history of the country. From Sri
Lanka, Theravada Buddhism and Pli language were instroduced to Myanmar, Thailand, Cambodia and Laos.
Dr. Oldenberg does not accept ven. Mahinda's mission to Sri Lanka and he thinks that it is not a historical fact.
The people of kalinga played a great role in the introduction of Pli into Sri Lanka. He says that Pli was the language of

Kalinga. The home of Pli was in the South. R. O. ranke mentioned that form of literary Pli was not in the Eastern part of
middle India. According to the Wester Gaard and Kuhn, Pli was the dialect of U-Jeni and of Gujarat, because it fully
agrees with the language of Asoka's inscriptions of Girnar. It is said, that the dialect of Ujjeni was the mother tongue of
ven. Mahinda. He took Buddhism as his religion and knew the dialect Ujjeni, which he studied when he was staying in
Ujjeni.

666DIFFERENT VIEWS ABOUT THE HOME OF PALI

(1) Magadha windisch and Geirger
(2) Kalavga Oldenberg
(3) Taxila Grierson
(4) Vindya Konow
(5) Ujjane Franke and Westergard

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Apart from these views, Buddhaghoda, the great pali commentator says that the medium of
the Buddha was Magadhi (sammasambuddhena uttappakaro magadhiko voharo the dialect of
Magadha was speak by the Buddha). As far as these views are concerned, a great part of India
was covered by the language of the Buddha. as T.W. Rhys Davids put it this language does
widely understood and used from the land of the Kurus (close to Delhi, north-west India) in the
west, to Magadha in the east, Northwards at Savatthi and Kusinara in the Nepal hills, and
Southwards in one direction as far as Ujjena or Ujjein could not have this Sanskrit.
The pali canonical texts bring out the fact that the Buddha wandered mostly in the
Majjhimadesa. According to Mahavaggapali, the boundaries of Majjhimadesa are as followed:
In the east town of Kajangala
In the southeast of river Sarasvati
In the southwest to the town of Satakannika
In the west to the Brahmana district of Thuna
In the north to the Usiradhaja mountain.
The circumference of Majjhimadesa can be traced out in another way. The regions that were
beyond the Majjhimadesa are frequently referred to as Paccantima Janapadas (remote areas),
which are considered as social linguistically backward regions. The Buddha says that it could be
better to be born in the Majjhimadesa than being born in the Paccantima Janapadas. The
commentary on the Dhammapada states that there are lesser opportunities in the Paccantima
Janapadas to listen even to the doctrine of the Buddha. The Avguttara Nikaya giving the facts
that those who are born in the Paccantima Janapadas are weakness and milakkha (barbarians).

According to Papabcasudani, commentary on Majjhima Nikaya that the Buddha did not stay in
the Paccantima Janapadas even for a night. Similarly he advised the four-fold assembly of
disciples not to visit these remote areas. According to this, it may be said that the people who
lived beyond the Majjhimadesa were not completely unintelligent, the main problem they
confronted seems to have been their incapability in understanding the Buddhas language.
666INDO-ARYAN LANGUAGE
(1) Old Indo-Aryan language Indian subcontinents (1500BC-600BC)
- Southern India: Telingu, Kannada, Malayala, Tamil.

M K T
Tamil
(2) Middle Indo-Aryan language (600BC-1000AD)
(3) New Indo-Aryan language (1000AD-onwards)
-

Indo-Aryan language is not considered in South India.

Whatever languages derived from Vedic Sanskrit is called Indo-Aryan Languages.
India and Europe language are closely related. Indo-European people migrate to Iran and Europe.
(1) Indo-European period
(2) Indo-Iran period
(3) Indo-Aryan period
Vedic Sanskrit includes four Vedas, Aranyaka, Upanisads, the literatures found in this period is
called Vedic Period
When Indo-Aryan settled in Indus, they have already comprised hymns. After 900 years, i.e., in the
6th century, Buddha and Mahavira came into existence and mainly settled in East India. The
Brahmins were in the West.
Thus, they were divided into Aryan and Non-Aryan people, and that the language of the eastern
people was considered low. The language of the eastern people are called Prakrit.

Notes:
666G IV E

A B R IE F IN T R OD UC T I O N T O T H E H IS T O R Y O F

I ND O -A R IY A N L A N G UA G E S

The long internal history of Indo-Ariyan in India, spanning about 3,500 years, may be
divided linguistically into three stages: Old, Middle and New Indo-Aryan. These may be taken as
corresponding roughly to the periods 1500 B.C. 600 B.C., 600 B.C.-1000 A.D. and 1000A.D.present.

1.

O LD I ND O -A R IY A N

LA N G U A G E S

(1500 B.C 600 B.C)

This stage can be subdivided into two, i.e. Early and Later.

(1) Early Old Indo-Ariyan

Vedic Sanskrit based apparently on a far-western dialect, perhaps influenced by Iranian;
further substages may be distinguished, the language of Books II VII of the Rg-veda
being the most archaic, that of the Brahmanas and Sutras the least.

(2)

Later Old Indo-Ariyan

Classical Sanskrit based on a dialect of the midland (western Ganges valley, eastern
Punjab, Haryana), although influenced by Vedic. This is the language of the kathas,
dramas, kavyas, histories and Puranas. Later litrrature was much influenced by Middle
Indo-Ariyan and retained only its phonetics and morphology.

2.

M ID D L E I ND O -A R IY A N

LA N G U A ES

(600 B.C 1000 A.D)

It is believed that with the development of Classical Sanskrit, the popular dialects spoken by
the Indo-Ariyans were also developed at the same time. These dialects are generally designated as
Middle Indo-Ariyan languages. This stage is from 600 B.C. to 1000 A.D. which is again subdivided
into 3 periods.

(1)

Early Middle Indo-Ariyan.

This period is from 600 B.C to 200 B.C.

A. Awokan Prakrits various regional dialects of the 3 r d Century B.C. (eastern, east-central,
south-western, north-western), with the notable exception of the midland, recorded in the
inscriptions of the Emperor Asoka on rocks and pillars in various parts of the
subcontinent, even in Greek.

B. Pali language of the Theravada Buddhist canon and

other literature, apparently based on a midland dialect

(Magadhi) possibly influenced

by the original eastern forms of the remembered Buddhist discourses, and subsequently by
Sanskrit. It has never taken its origin from Classical Sanskrit because there are some
peculiarities, which clearly signify that Vedic has a closer relation to it. Again, the
language of the metrical portion of the canon proper, or Gathas, is more archaic than the
language of the commentaries

and other literature.

C. Early Ardhamagadhi language of the earliest Jain

sutras.

(2)

Second Middle Indo-Ariyan

This period is from 200 B.C. to 600 A.D.

A. Niya Prakrit administrative language of an Indo-Ariyan polity in Chinese Turkestan.

B. Ardhamagadhi supposedly the ancient language of Kosala.
C. Post-Asokan inscriptional Prakrit.
D. Magadhi language of Bihar, and presumably of the Mauryan Empire.
E. Wauraseni the standard Prakrit of the drama.
F. Maharashtri a south-western dialect, vehicle of lyric poetry.
G. Sinhala Prakrit language of the Sinhalese inscriptions, from the 1 s t century B.C.

(3)

Late Middle Indo-Ariyan

This period is from 600 A.D. to 1000 A.D.

A.

Apabhramsa literary language based on midland speech of a later stage than

Sauraseni Prakrit.

B.

Elu this is a sort of Sinhalese Apabhrajwa.

The apabhramwa (falling away) is an important transitional stage in the development of

the Prakrit towards the modern Indo-Ariyan languages. It is a corrupt form of language spoken
by common people which developed between the 600 1000 A.D. By about 550 A.D., Prakrits
had become decadent, and the Apabhrajwa came into existence. One of them is the vernacular
of Western India which was used by poetry. Its chief characteristic is the further reduction of
inflexions, which are in part replaced by postpositions, as in modern Indian language. A similar
degenerate Prakrit was used in Bengal by a few late Buddhist poets, and is the ancestor of
modern Bengali.

3.

M OD E R N I N D O -A R IY AN L AN G U A G E S (1000 A.D

P R E S EN T )

These languages include Marathi, Hindi, Bengali, Oriya and Sinhala etc.

666THE LINGUISTIC HISTORY OF INDO-ARYAN

The history of the development of Indo-Aryan has normally been studied under 3 linguistic
period, namely:
(1) Old Indo-Aryan
(2) Middle Indo-Aryan
(3) New or Modern Indo-Aryan
The older phase is represented in literature by the language of the Rigveda and later Vedic texts
(Brahmana, Aranyaka, Upanisads). This was the language on which the language of the poetry of the
epics was based, and by the spoken variety used by elite groups and which was the basic of panimis
grammar and which was later leveled as classical Sanskrit.
-

Sanskrit means define. San kru = made. Modify, purify.

The chronology of Indo-Aryan Languages:
Vedic

Vedic

Sanskrit epics (Mahabhrata 200BC, Rammabba)

grammar (Asthadyayi oldest grammar text in Indian language; work of

Panimi.)
Sanskrit

classical Sanskrit texts (Buddhacarita, Lalistavitara etc)

-

After grammar, the language is called Sanskrit or classical Sanskrit. The above Sanskrit is belonged
to Middle Indo-Aryan.

The middle phase belongs to 600BC to 1000AD, this period also can again be divided into 3
phases:
(1) Old Prakrit pali and Asokan edict
(2) Middle Prakrit
(3) Apabrajsa latest Prakrit language
Old Prakrit included inscription dialects from the middle of the 3 rd century BC down to the 2nd
century AD. The pali of the Theravada canon and other Buddhist texts, the canon of the Jain tradition
which was written in Ardha-magadhi. Inscription of Asoka can be put into this period.
Middle Prakrit (200-600AD) is represented by Prakrit languages like Maharastri, Sauraseni, Lathi,
Paisaci etc.
Apabramsa represents the colloquial , language of latest middle Indo-Aryan period.
New Indo-Aryan includes all the modern Indo-Aryan languages, such as Hindi, Bengali, Marathi,
Gujarathi, Urdu, Sinhala etc.
In the early Vedic stage, the spoken variety was not far removed from the literary variety, this
situation is seen to change gradually in the later Vedic stage. The differences between these two
varieties were strongly marked, this has been explained as the result of the closer and longer duration of
contact with the non-aryan speech community. The linguistic periods given above can be reclassified
taking into account the sources background of those who used the language.
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

The separate spoken dialects of Aryan and non-Aryan at the time of the ealry migration of the
former
Literary vedic dialects indicating the period of more established settlement
The spoken variety of the Aryan and non-Aryan speech community after their mutual contact, we
can assume 3 kinds of speech variations existing at this stage, namely, Aryan speech, Non-Aryan
speech and the mixed variety.
The literary variety of the Brahmanas and the Upanisads.
Regional spoken dialects (Prakrit dialects) current in the geographical area from Gandhara in the
northwest of Magadha in the east.
The canonical dialects of Buddhism and Janisim such as Pai, Aradhamagadhi and inscriptional
Prakrit.
The standard literary dialect, i.e., classical Sanskrit.
The literary Prakrit as found in the Sanskrit plays (dhamma).

As the Aryan speech community moved from the northwest to the Gange valley and than eastward, the Aryan speech became increasingly corrupt.
Due to those corruption, Brahmanas became anxious about this dialect mixture, and further
expressed the fear that incorrect pronunciation would weaken the efficacy of their speech and
therefore their power. One of the later Vedic text states that Asuras were defeated because they
pronounced the phase he-rayo as he-layo. Since the magical efficacy of the Mandra (spells) derived
from pronunciation, correct speech was imperative.
As and when Aryanization spread to many parts of north India, several Prakrit dialects emerged
perhaps parallel the evolution of the various mixed castes. There was a cleavage between the
speech of the elite and the common people from the early stage. Even the early portions of the
Rgveda are not freed from Prakritism. It is appearance from Patanjalis (author of Mahabhasya, he was
a brahmin) discussion that Prakrit was by then the first language of even the Brahmanas. The incorrect
or substandard variety is referred to as the apasabdha or apabramsa or mleccha fromed by Patanjali. He
states that for one correct from there were several apasabdas as equivalent. For instance, the word
gauh (cow) has gavi, goni, gota, gopotalika has equivalent apasabdas. Some of these words referred
to as apasabdas by Patanjali are attested in Jaina Maharasthi or Asokan prakrit.
666P AL I

IS T H E OR IG IN A L LA N G U A G E O F H U M A N B E IN G

COMMENT.

The ancient tradition of Ceylon, where the Pali Tipitaka and the commentaries were preserved
and handed down from the 3 r d century B.C., definitely states that Pali is the language of Magadha
(Magadhi), the original language (mula-bhasa) spoken by the Buddha.
If Pali is the language of Magadha, it would have been difficult to consider it as the original
language of human being. Dr. Walpola Rahula Thera has clearly pointed out that, the Buddha must
have spoken one or more of the dialects current in the 6 t h century B.C in Magadha. Perhaps, all these
dialects would have been called Magadhi.
Furthermore, the term Pali in the Theravada tradition was originally used to denote the
Sacred Text (Tipitaka), it was never the name of any language in any sense. The facts are as
follows:

1. In the Commentaries, the term Pali is employed to denote

the Text (patha) of the Tipitaka as opposed to its Atthakatha
(commentary), it never signified a language.

2. The Sub-commentaries (Tika) written several centuries later

(e.g. Sarattha-mabjasa), explain the expressions the
beautiful language the mode of Pali and the mode of
Tanti found in the commentaries mean Magadhabhasa,
still they do not call it Pali as we do today.

3. The term Pali-bhasa for the first term appears only in the
introductory verses of the Rasavahini, a book of popular
stories written in Pali in the 14 t h century A.D.

Since Pali was only the name of the Buddhist Sacred Text, how then it became the Mulabhasa of
human being? This is only the over-emphasized of the importance of the Pali (now it comes to be known
as the language of the Sacred Text) by pious Buddhists during the later time that has pushed it to the
place of original positon.
Linguistically, Pali belonged to the stage of an early Middle Indo-Ariyan language, i.e., from 600
B.C. to 200B.C

It was much later than the Vedic of the Old Indo-Ariyan language, i.e., from 1500

B.C. to 600 B.C. Therefore from its historical development, it is difficult to consider Pali as the original
language of human being. In the far East, the Chinese language is even still much older, i.e. 14,000 years
of history as evidenced from the pictography found on bones of animals and shells of tortoises.
Scholars have agreed the fact that Pali is an artificial language developed out from various dialects,
e.g.

1. Wilhelm Geiger Pali should be regarded as a form of

Magadhia lingua francacontaining elements of all the
dialectswas indeed no pure Magadhi, but was yet a form
of popular speech which was based on Magadhi.
(Pali Literature and Language, p.4-6)

2. Walpola Rahula what we call Pali today is not a

homogeneous but a composite language, containing several

dialectal forms and expressions. It is probably based on the

Magadhi which the Buddha generally spoke, and out of it a
new artificial, literary language later evolved (Humour in
Pali Literature, p.10)

Since Pali is an artificial language evolved from several dialects, it is not proper to say that it is the
original language of human beings.
On the other hand, if the sense of pidgim and creole is applied here, Pali can then be regarded
as a kind of first language used by the Buddhists, first in spoken and later in written form.
Furthermore, if mulabhasa is considered the basic language in which the words of the Buddha
were originally fixed, whereas the other versions are regarded as secondary variations, then Pali can be
called the mulabhasa of the Buddhist Sacred Text, but not of all human beings.
By way of conclusion, Pali is a very old but beautiful and meaningful language. It is not the
original language of human being, but rather, it is a rich spiritual heritage of all races of man.

666SOCIAL LINGUISTIC ATTITUDE OF BUDDHIST AND JAIN.

The founder of Buddhism and Janism choose one of the prakrit dialects for their religious
discourses. Both Buddha and Mahavira addressed the people in Magadhi and Ardhamagadhi
respectively. The Buddha pre-refused for a popular dialect reflects his linguistic attitude. One of the
stories narrated in the Cullavagga reveals his attitude towards the language of the Brahmanical religion,
i.e., Sanskrit. It is said that two monks of Brahmana origin complained to the master that the prakrit
speaking monks of diverse origin tend to corrupt the speech of the Buddha. therefore they suggested
that the words of the master be rendered into Sanskrit. The Buddha clearly rejected this proposal. This
story establishes two facts:
1. The attitude of the Buddha towards the speech forms of the Brahmanas was not favourable.
2. Brahmana monks were not able to shade (v. )their language royalty even after their
conversion.
Though the object of the Buddha was to communicate with the people, the medium of
communication was surely not the low variety but a language variation to the higher and culture class.
The Mahayanists on the contrary show a different for Sanskrit. They introduced Sanskrit and translated
the original canonical text into Buddhist-hybid Sanskrit. The shift in the language affinity many be
explained on the ground that the majority of the important Mahayana teachers were of Brahmana

origin, like Asvaghosa, Nagarjuna.

Linguistically, the emergence of two kinds of situations is noticeable. The first represent the
dominant aryan speech. Community coming into contact with non-aryan speakers during the process of
their migration. With the former absorbing the later into its flow resulting in bi-lingualism and mutual
influence in the respective languages. The second stage is represented by the emergence of various
prakrit dialects resulting from a longer duration of contact. Different religions sects have also emerged
in this period and completed with each other for superiority. New religions leaders and contemporary
rulers patronage prakrit dialect, as a result of which this dialect gained supermercy and virtuously
eclipsed ()Sanskrit.

666T H E B U DD H A S

V IE W S O N

L AN G U A G E

According to the Cullavagga (Vin. II, 139), two monks named Yamelu and Tekula, who were
brothers and brahmins by birth, proposed to the Buddha that the Word of the Buddha
(Buddhavacana) should be put into chandas (language of the Vedas) so that no one could corrupt it
in their own dialects.
However, the Buddha reproached them and rejected their proposal, on the ground that putting
his word into chandas would not be conducive to the benefit of the people. Then addressing the
gathering of monks, he gave the following injunction which is now a Vinaya rule:

Bhikkhus, the Word of the Buddha should not be put into

Chandas. If anyone should

do so, there would be an offence of wrong-doing. Bhikkhus, I allow you to learn the Word of
the Buddha in your own dialects.

The Pali expression anujanami bhikkhave sakaya niruttiya buddhavacana pariyapapunituj,

however has different interpretation. Buddhaghosa interpreted it as I order you to learn the word of
the Buddha in his own language, i.e., in the Buddhas language (Magadhi language)
In order to clarify what sakaya niruttiya actually means, Walpola Rahula quotes the
Aranavibhavgasutta of the Majjhima Nikaya (no. 139) to make it clear the Buddhas view on
language.

At the beginning of this discourse, the Buddha says that one should not be attached to the

provincial dialects and deviate from recognized parlance. He gives an example to show the fact that,
there are many words of different dialects which denote bowl, (i.e. patta, pati, vitta, pona, pisila),
one should not cling to his own dialect and say this word only is true and the rest is false.
At the end of this sutta, the Buddha says that not to be obstinately attached to a dialect and
not to deviate from recognized parlance is a step in the peaceful path (arana patipada) and the
right-path (samma-patipada), whereas to be obstinately attached to a dialect and to deviate from
recognized parlance is a wrong-path (miccha-patipada), a path of conflict (sarana warlike).
From this sutta we can see that the Buddha considered all dialects and languages equally valid.
Thus, the Pali term sakaya nituttiya should be rendered as each in his own language, but no in
Buddhas language. Language is only a means to Truth and any language can be used to learn the
Buddhavacana.

666LINGUISTIC VARIATION
Religious and Ritual Forms
Period
Region
Early Late Vedic
Late Vedic
Mauryan
Post-Mauryan
Post-Mauryan
Vedic (early phase) (late phase
(early phase)
(second phase)
upto Panini
period of
down to the
and early
Patabjali and
second century
Buddhist
Indo-Greek
AD
NorthVedic
Vedic
Vedic
Vedic, Prakrit Vedic,
Eic Vedic,
Epic
Western
Sanskrit,
and Sanskrit
and
India
Prakrit dialects. Prakrit dialects.
Buddhist Hybrid
Sanskrit.
Upper and Vedic
Vedic
Vedic,
Vedic
& Vedic & Prakrit Vedic, Pali and
Middle
Ardhamagadhi. Prakrit dialects dialects,
Epic Prakrit dialects,
Ganges
such
as Sanskrit.
Epic Sanskrit.
region
Ardhamagadhi.
East
Vedic, Pali and Vedic, Pali and Vedic, Pali and Vedic,
Epic
Prakritd
Prakrit
Prakrit dialects. Sanskrit,
Pali
dialects.
dialects.
and
Prakrit
dialects.
West
Vedic
Vedic
Vedic, Pali and Vedic, Pali and Vedic,
Epic
Prakrit
Prakrit dialects, Sanskrit,
Pali
dialects.
Epic Sanskrit.
and
Prakrit
dialects,
Classical
Sanskrit.

Note: Vedic includes sajhitas, Aranyakas, Upanisads and Sutras.

Remarks: A few changes in the phonological and grammatical level can be observed. However, they
are not significant enough to corrupt the purity of the ritual dialect.
* Ritual forms are those which were used in performing sacrifices and other rituals. Religious forms are
those which were used in the discourses of the Upanisads thinkers and also in the preaching of the
Buddha and Mahavira.

666HISTORY OF PALI LITERATURE.

The Aryan languages used or spoken in the Indian subcontinent are called Indo-Aryan languages.
The evolution of these Indo-Aryan languages are explained under three stages:
(1) Old Indo-Aryan = 1500 BC ~ 600 BC. E.g., Vedic and Sanskrit languages.
(2) Middle Indo-Aryan = 600 BC ~ 1000 AD. This second stage is again sub-divided into three
sections. Between the first and the second sections there comes another group called
transitional stage. They are as follows:
(a) 600 BC ~ 200 BC, e.g., pali Tipitaka, Asoka prakrit.
(b) 200 BC ~ 600 AD.
(c) 600 AD ~ 1000 AD
(3) Modern Indo-Aryan = 1000 AD ~ up to present, e.g., Hindi, Bengali, Sinhala etc.
According to the above specifications, pali is one of the Indo-Aryan languages. There are three
main categories in the traditional pali grammar including the text written in Burma:
(1) Kaccayana
(2) Moggallayana
(3) Saddaniti or Burmese tradition
(1) Kaccayana tradition.

Kaccayana is the oldest tradition among the other traditions. The author of this book is ascribed to
Ven. Mahakaccayana. He was one of the Buddha great disciples. Anyway this assumed that the author
Kaccayana was a scholar of later period. The first book of Kaccayana tradition is called Kaccayana. At
this was very popular among the pali students, there are also a large number of ancillary work related to
it. During the subsequent period, most important texts that belonged to the Kaccayana tradition are as
follows:
1. Mukhamattadipani
2. kaccayanasuttaniddesa
3. Kaccayananavana
4. Rupasidhi
5. Rupasidhitika
6. Balanatara
7. Balanatarupuranatika

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Kaccayanasina
Saddabindu
Saddabindupuranatika
Sambandhacinta
Sambandhacintatika.
(2) Moggallayana Tradition

moggallayana tradition is also called Moggallayana, this book also written by a monk called
Moggallayana in 12th century A.D. in Sri Lanka. Some of its ancillary works are as follows:
1. Moggallayanapancika
2. Padasadhana
3. Padasadhanatika
4. Payogasiddhi
5. Niruttisangha
6. Balappabodhana
(3) Saddaniti Tradition

Saddaniti is the name of the main text that belonged to the third tradition. Its author is Ven.
Aggavajsa of Burma during the 15th century AD. It seems that pali and Sanskrit languages have a very
long history and tradition. Almost all the pali grammar books or texts mentioned have been made to
advise the students to follow Sanskrit grammar where necessary.
The Pali grammarians though following Sanskrit grammar have been able to preserve their
identity with reference to the Buddhas teaching.
So we find the expression Jinavacanayuttam means all grammar rules should be in
confirmitive with the Buddhas teaching in every traditional grammar as a common rule. If anything
was against the Buddhas teaching there were not prepared to include into Pali grammatical rules.
Their underline some grammatical concepts according to the Buddhist philosophy. The concept
its lingattha (original meaning of the noun), its analysis this reference to Abhidhammic explanation of
pabbatti. Further they have explained the origin of pali language giving at the supreme state and not its
stated as a dialect derived from Vedic or Sanskrit. The definition of the status of pali run as follows:
1. sa magadhi mulabhasa
2. nara yayadikapika
3. brahmano cassutalapa
4. sambuddha capibhasare.
The original language called Magadhi is spoken by the original human beings (brahmans), the
term pali of this language came into being at the later period in Sri Lanka. the ancient
grammarians always used the term Magadhi for it perhaps Magadha was a centre for the Buddha
propagation of the dhamma. different names appeared in the Pali canon for the Buddhas language
or sayings. Dhamma, dhammavinaya and navagasathusasena are some of them.
In a way these various designation such as suggest the pali language or the original sayings
of the Buddha had no definite name at the beginning, perhaps due to the fact that it was collection
of discourses delivered by the Buddha as well as by many other disciples through different Indian

dialects in different states.

The first Buddhist council held after 3 months of Buddha passing away might have
considered this problem of medium and as a solution they have given a similar form for this
discourses for the benefit future generations. Further, in a subsequent council, this process was
continued by the elders after the 3rd Buddhist council that was held during the period of king
Asoka, this systematize collection of this discourse was introduced to Sri Lanka as the Tipitaka
three baskets of Buddhas sayings.
Pali Grammar - Maharupasiddha

Three traditions:

1. Kaccayana (oldest)
2. Moggallana
3. Saddaniti (Burmese)

Attho akkharasabbato = the meaning is known through the characters

666T H E E V OLU T I O N

OF

ALPHABET

FROM

S AN S KR IT

TO

PALI

1. Evolution of Vowel
The Sanskrit alphabet contains two pure vowels: a, a; seven sonant vowels: i, i, u, u, r , r, l ;
and four diphhongs: e, o, ai, au.
The main characteristic of the evolution of the vowel system from Sanskrit into Pali is the
elimination of the sonant vowels r , r , l and of the dipthongs ai, au. The other vowels are generally
well retained, though they also undergo some changes on account of the structure either of the
syllable or of the word.

Elimination of r , l
(1) r was a complex phoneme since it included both vocalic and consonant elements. Hence it was
the first to undergo change. In Pali, r came to be represented by the vowel a, i , u , e.g.

hrdaya

>

hadaya (heart)

srgala

>

sigala (jackal)

prcchati

>

pucchati

(asks)

In a few cases r is replaced by ra and ru e.g.

Brhant

>

Brjhayati

>

brahant (lofty)
bruheti (increases)

(2) The sonant vowel l in klpta has been replaced by the vowel
u, e.g.
Klpta

>

kutta

(arranged)

Elimination of the diphthongs ai, au

The process of the elimination of the diphthongs had already started in Sanskrit where ai and au
had been reduced to e and o, while ai and au had become ai and au. This process was continued
in Pali and thus also ai and au were reduced to e and o , e.g.

Vaita

>

vera

(hatred)

Ratrau

>

ratto

(at night)

Ausadha

>

osadha

(medicine)

Changes of vowels due to the structure of syllable

e.g.

dir-gha

>
jir-na

digha

(long)

>

jinna

(old)

Changes of vowels due to the structure of word

e.g.

kantat

>

kanta

(from the loved one)

kantaj

>

kantaj (the loved one)

2. Evolution of consonant
The Sanskrit alphabet consists of 35 consonants. In passing over into Pali, the alphabet has lost
the palatal and the cerebral sibilants and the visarga. Pali, on the other hand, retains the Vedic
consonant l.
The other consonant changes can be classified under 3 headings, i.e.

1.Changes of final consonants

2.Changes of intervocalic consonants

3.Changes of consonant groups

Loss of sibilants
The palatal and cerebral Sanskrit sibilants give rise in Pali to the dental sibilant, e.g.
Darwayati

>

dasseti (points out)

Karsati

>

kassati (ploughs)

Loss of visarga
The visarga was dropped when it was preceded by any other vowel, e.g.

agnih

>

mrduh >

aggi

(fire)

mudu

(soft)

Changes of final consonants

(1) mute final consonant, e.g.

marut

>

tavat

maru
>

(wind)

tava

(so long)

(2) Nasal consonants, e.g.

agnim

>

aggij

(fire)

purisanam

>

purisanaj

(of men)

(3) Visarga, e.g

purusah

>

puriso (man)

antah

>

anto

(inside)

Changes of intervocalic consonants

A Sanskrit intervocalic consonant is lost in a few cases;

aya and ayi

avi

>

ai

>

>

ai

>

au

>

ava

>

avu

>

sthavira

>

thera

(elder)

bhavissati

>

haissati

>

hessti (will be)

bhavati

>

havuti

hoti

(is)

e.g.

>

Sometimes an intervocalic consonant is softened, e.g.

pratikrtya

>

patikacca or patigacca

(previously)

kapi

>

kavi

(monkey)

Changes of consonant group

Various Sanskrit consonant groups, in passing over to pali, are either assimilated or split up by
the insertion of a vowel (svarabhakti) e.g.

prapta

>

agamya>

agamma

klesa

kilesa (defilement)

>

sneha >

patta

(reached)

(having come) -

sineha (love)

regressive assimilation
progressive assimilation

svarabhakti.

666ASSIMILATION OF VOWELS
Sanskrit
1. Karma
2. Dharma
3. Marga
4. Varna
5. Sarva
6. Nirvana
7. Mitra
8. Putra
9. Ulkamukha
10. Iksvaku
11. Prccha

Pali
>
>
>
>
>
>
>

kamma
(deed)
>
dhamma
(doctrine)
magga
(path)
vanna
(colour)
sabba
(all)
>
nibbana
(extinction, final bliss)
mitta
(friend)
>
putta
(son)
ukkamukha (the opening or receive of a furnace)
>
Okkaka
(of legendary King)
puccha
(ask)
ASSIMILATION OF CONSONANTS

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Sanskrit
Cakhsu
Anyatara
Apramana
Anuyukta
Sajyukta

>
>
>
>
>

Pali
cakkhu
abbatara
appamabba
anuyutta
sajyutta

(eye)
(a certain, some)
(boundlessness, infinitude)
(given to, intent upon)
(group)

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.

Itvara
Isti
Iwvariya
Pudgala
Utpada
Utsada
Bhiksu
Satya
Pratyeka
Avidya
Samyak
Sparwa
Awva
Duhkha
Vijbana
Prajba
Jbatra
Sajvrtti
Daksina
Tistha
Citra
bhajyate
kudya

>

>
>
>
>
>

>
>
>
>

>

ittara
(pass by, changeable)
>
itthi
(woman)
>
issariya
(rulership, supremacy)
>
puggala
(person)
uppada
(coming into existence)
ussada
(prominence, rubbing in)
bhikkhu
(monk)
sacca
(truth)
>
pacceka
paccekabuddha
avijja
(ignorance)
>
samma
(rightly)
>
phassa
(contact)
>
assa
(horse)
>
dukkha
(pain, suffering)
>
vibbana
(consciousness)
pabba
(wisdom)
batta
(intelligence)
sammuti
(general opinion, convention)
>
dakkhina
(southern ,right side)
tittha
(stand)
>
citta
(mind)
>
bhajjati
(to roast, to toast)
kudda
(wall)

In pali, the vowel before double consonants, e.g., pp or tt is always short.

In some cases, a Sanskrit word can be seen as different forms in the pali texts, for instance, the
Sanskrit term aryan develops into four different forms: ayya, ariya, ajja and ayira. Ariya should be the
original word, and i is inserted for easily to pronounce. The different forms appear in pali simply
because of the different languages used by the monks in the various provinces in India.
The vowel r of Sanskrit develops into a, i, u, e , r ; l into u; ai and au into e and o in pali. For
example:
(1) r > a:
- mrta
>
mata
(dead)
- rksa
>
acca (bear)
- prsata >
pasada
(spotted)
- vrka
>
vaka
(wolf)
- hrdaya >
hadaya (heart)
(2) r > i:
- srgala >
sigala (fox)
- rksa
>
ikka
(bear)
rna
>
ina
(debt)
vrwcika
>
vicchika
(scorpion)

srpatika

>

sipatika

(seed-house)

(3) r > u:
-

srta
rju
rsabha >
prcchati
mrnala >

>
suta
>
uju/ujju
usabha (bull)
>
pucchati
mulala (lotus-stalk)

(listen, learn)
(straight)

- grha

>

geha

(house)

- vrksa

>

rukkha (tree)

(asks)

(4) r > e

(5) r > r

(6) l > u
-

klpta
klpti

>
>

kutta
kutti

(work, behaviour)
(arrangement, fitting)

(7) ai > e: long before single consonant and short before double consonants.
- airavana
>
eravana
(Indras elephant)
- vai
>
ve
(indeed, truly particle of affirmation)
- maitri >
metti
(friendship)
(8) au > o:
-

aurasa >
paura >
ratrau >

orasa
pora
ratto

(self-begotten, legitimate)
(urban)
(at night)

Reference:
(1)
A Pali Grammar
Wilhelm Geiger
Pali Text Society. Oxford, London.
(2)
Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar & Dictionary
Franklin Edgerton
Motilal Banarsidass Publishers, PVT. Delhi.
(3)
Classroom notes

666T H E

D EV E L OPM E N T O F N O U N IN

P AL I (P A L I

N O M INA L D E C L EN S IO N S )

The declensions of nouns and adjectives in Pali are the historical development, or
simplification, of the declensions in Sanskrit. Hence, in order to understand them better, it is

necessary to compare and contrast the Pali declensions with the corresponding declensions in
Sanskrit.
The following are the general characteristics of the evolution of declensions from Sanskrit to
Pali.

1 Loss of consonant declension

On account of the loss of final consonants, all the stems that ended in a mute consonant,
have passed over to the vowel declensions: e.g.
Marut

> maru (wind)

Vidyut

> vijju or vijjuta (lightning)

2. Prevalence of the a declension

There is a very strong tendency to build up a uniform and simple declension, avoiding all
difficult forms, especially those that would entail the application of difficult sandhi rules. And
the simplest of all the declensions is that of the stems in a or thematic stems, e.g., Aggi has a
genitive aggissa, an ablative aggisma and locative aggismij.

3. Indistinctness of the gender

Pali has retained the 3 genders as in Sanskrit. The distinction, however, between the
masculine and the neuter nouns is seen only in the nominative, vocative and accusative singular
and plural.

4. Loss of the dual

Pali has retained the singular and the plural numbers, but it has lost the dual due to its
tendency towards simplification. On the other hand, a phonetic reason may have helped towards
the disappearance of the dual too.

5. Loss of cases
Both the dative and the ablative case have been almost entirely lost in Pali. The dative
case takes the same ending as the genitive, e.g. purisassa and purisanaj; whereas ablative has
generally been assimilated to the instrumental both in singular and plural, e.g. aggina, aggibhi,
aggihi.

6. Loss of case endings

The endings of the accusative plural of the masculine vowel stems have been lost since, in
passing over into Pali, they coincide with the endings of the accusative singular. Thus the
accusatives plural purusan, agnin become in Pali purisaj, aggij which are accusatives singular.

7. Lengthening of the stem vowel

The vowel stems have generalized in Pali the lengthening of the final vowel of the stem
before the case ending of the plural in the dative, genitive, instrumenal, ablative, and location,
e.g. agginaj, aggihi, aggisu.

8. Pronominal case endings

In order to make up for the loss of some case endings, recourse is had to the case endings
of the pronominal declension. In Sanskrit we find purusena, purusawya, purusesu which
become in Pali purisena, purisassa, purisesu. Besides these endings, in Pali we find also the
endings sma, smij for the ablative and locative singular, and e and ehi for accusative and
instrumental plural, e.g. purise, purisehi.

9. Vowel gradation
The vowel gradation in the declension of the nouns has greatly lost in clearness in some
cases, while in others it has entirely disappeared, e.g. Sanskrit has aksi, aksna, aksnah, aksini,
aksibhih, aksnam, Pali has generalized the stem of the nominative: akkhi, akkhino, akkhini,
akkhihi, akkhinaj.

666THE PALI ALPHABET

The Pali alphabet, there are 41 letters altogether and it divides again into two groups. One belongs to
vowels, there are 8 and one is part of consonants there are 33 letters.
8 Vowels

A, A, I , I, U, U, E, O
Of the 8 vowels, A , I and U are short voice, in Pali, it is called Rasa. The rest are long, and it is
called Digha. Prosodically the short vowels before a double consonant or n (= niggahitta) are long. It is
to be noted that E and O are pronounce short before double or conjunction consonants (as in khettam,
bhonto, etc). Although E and O are included in long vowels they are often sounded short before a
double consonant, e.g. Metta sethi, okkamati, yottam, etc.
Consonants

Consonants, they are divided into two groups--- Vagga and Avagga (non-group). 25 consonants from
K to M are called grouped because they are divided into five groups of five letters each. They are as
follow: -1. K kh g gh n
= Ka vagga or Ka group
2. C ch j jh n
= Ca vagga or Ca group
3. T th d dh n
= Ta vagga or Ta group
4. T th d dh n
= Ta vagga or Ta group
5. P ph b bh ma
= Pa vagga or Pa group
These groups are named after the first letter of each Vagga and the last five of letters of the Vaggas,
viz., n, n, n, n, m are named Vagganta or nasals. The remaining of seven consonants: y, i, r, v, s, h, i,
n are the part, which belong to Avagga due to they can not be grouped as the above. The sonant n is
called Niggahitta and it always comes after a short vowel.
Of the five groups or Vaggas, here they are again separated into two parts, one part is Aghosa, the
Voiceless. They are as follow:
1. K
kh
2. C
ch
3. T
th
4. T
th
5. P
ph
And one is the part of Ghosa, which name Voice, they are as below: 1. G
gh
n

2. J
jh
n
3. D dh
n
4. D
dh
n
5. B
bh
ma
Again all the vowels and the consonants are divided according to the place of their formation and
utterance.
According to the place of their formation:

K kh g gh n h and a, a are guttural

C ch j jh n y and i, i are palatals
T th d dh n r l
are lingual
T th d dh n l s
are dental
P ph b bh ma and u, u are labials
E is guttural and palatal
O is guttural and labial
V is dental and labial
N is mere a nasal breathing found only after short vowels e.g. ratham, manim, yagum.
According to the utterance

1. The first and the third letter of each of the five vagga are called unaspirates, because they are
pronounced without a strong breathing or h- sound.
The second and the fourth letters of the same are aspirates, because they are pronounced with a strong
breath or h-sound added to them
666THE PALI ALPHABET
Alphabet is a set of symbols or characters used to represent the sounds of a language. Each
character in an alphabet usually represents a simple vowel, a diphthong, or a consonant, rather than a
syllable or a group of consonants and vowels. The term alphabet, as used by some, however, also
includes the concept of syllabaries.
Pali has no script of its own, but is written in several scripts, depending on the country in which it
is written and the audience for which it is intended. In India the Nagari, in Sri Lanka the Sinhalese, in
Burma the Burmese, in Siam (Thailand) the Siamese, and in the Cambodia (Kamboja) script.
In the West, Pali is commonly written in the Roman alphabet with some modifications (diacritics),
as in the works issued by the Pali Text Society (PTS), now it has gained international currency.
The sound system of Pali consists of two parts: vowel and consonant, all together consists of 41
letters, i.e., 8 vowels and 33 consonants.

Vowels (svara)

The vowels are: a a i i u u e o. According to the length of sound, these vowels may be
divided into three parts: vowels long by nature, vowels short by nature and vowels of variable length
(1) Vowels long by nature: a i u
(2) Vowels short by nature: a i u
Prosodically the short vowels before a double consonant or j (niggahita) are
counted long. For example: Atthi (bone) itthi visuj
(3) Vowels of variable length: e o
(i) Pronounced short before double or conjunct consonants, e.g. khettam (field)/ metta;
bhonto
(ii) Pronounced long before single consonant, e.g. deva loka
(ii) Diphthongs, sometimes called secondary vowels.
e.g. a + i = e
a + u = o

The consonants (vyajana).

The consonants are:

ka

kha

ga

gha

va

ka-vagga

ca
ta
ta
pa

cha
tha
tha
pha

ja
da
da
ba

jha
dha
dha
bha

ba
na
na
ma

=
=
=
=

ca-vagga
ta-vagga
ta-vagga
pa-vagga

ya

ra

la

va

sa

ha

la

(a)

All the consonants are divided into grouped and non-grouped. 25 letters from ka to ma are
divided into five groups, each contain 5 letters. Each group is named after the first letter, e.g.
kavagga, cavagga and so on.

(b)

The last five letters of the vaggas, i.e., v b n n and m are called vagganta or nasals, as they
are pronounce with the help of nose.

(c)

The remaining 7 consonants: ya, ra, la, va, so, ha and la are called avagga (non-grouped)

as they are not grouped like above.

(d)

Consonant j is called niggahita. It always comes after a short vowel, e.g. rathaj (chariot),
manij.

Again, all the 41 letters can be divided according to the place of their formation and utterance, i.e.;
According to the places of formation:

ka
kha
ga
gha va a a ha
ca
cha ja jha ba i i ya
ta
tha da dha na ra la
ta
tha da dha na la sa
pa
pha ba bha ma u u
=
e
guttural and palatal
o
guttural and labial
va
dental and labial
j nasal breathing

= gutturals
= palatals
= linguals
=
dentals
labials

According to Utterance:

(a)
(b)

The first and the third letters of each of the five vaggas are called non-aspirates (sithila),
because they are pronounced without a strong breathing or h-sound.
The second and the fourth letters of each of the five vaggas are aspirates (dhanita) , because
they are pronounced with a strong breath or h-sound added to them.

Furthermore, all the 41 letters can be divided into hard letters (voiceless or aghosa) and soft
letters (voiced or ghosa)
1.
2.

Hard letters = The first and second letters of all vaggas.

Soft letters =besides the hard letters, the rest are soft.
The identifying of vowels and consonants

The explanation and identify the differences between vowels and consonants are based on three
parts:
(a) Position of the tongues upper, middle and lower.
(b) Nature of the lips shape of the mouth, i.e, rounded or unrounded
(c) Breathing obstructed or unobstructed.

The main differences between vowels and consonants is that consonant block the air stream that
is coming out of the lungs through the oral cavity or the nasal cavity by moving the tongue or the lower
lip to the different places of the mouth.

6661. PALI ALPHABET

Alphabet is a set of symbols or characters used to represent the sounds of a language. Each character in an alphabet
usually represents a simple vowel, a diphthong, or a consonant, rather than a syllable or a group of consonants and vowels.
The term alphabet, as used by some, however, also includes the concept of syllabaries.
An alphabet is a system of representing the sounds of a language by a set of clearly understandable and reproducible
symbols. This generally involves assigning to the most common sounds their own individual graphemes, or written forms.
Pali has no script of its own, but is written in several scripts, depending on the country in which it is written and the
audience for which it is intended. In India the Nagari, in Sri Lanka the Sinhalese, in Burma the Burmese, in Siam (Thailand)
the Siamese, and in the Cambodia (Kamboja) script.
In the West, it is commonly written in the Roman alphabet with some modifications (diacritics), as in the works
issued by the Pali Text Society (PTS), now it has gained international currency.
Pali language is understand through the character or symbols and they represented particular sound. Thus, the first
theory given in Maharupasiddhi of Kaccayana system: attho akkharasabbato i.e., meaning is known through the
characters.
Thus, the sound system of Pali consists of two parts: vowel and consonant, all together consists of 41 letters, 8 vowels
and 33 consonants.

(1) Alphabetical order

a
e

kh
ch
th
th
ph

g
j
d
d
b

gh
jh
dh
dh
bh

v
b
n
n
m

o
k
c
t
t
p

y
j

(a) Sara (Vowels)

The vowels are: a

a i

u u

e o

These vowels are then divided into 3 short and 3 long and 2 medium length of sound.
(i) Long (digha)

(ii) Medium length =

e

e o

o
pronounced short before double consonants.
Example: metta , khetta , kottha , sotthi.

pronounced long before single consonants.

Example:
deva , sena , loka , odana.
o

diphthongs, sometimes called secondary vowels.

Example: combine vowels
a
+
a +

(iii) Short (rassa)

i
u

=
=

e
o

Prosodically the short vowels before a double consonant or j (niggahita) are counted long.
Example: vagga , dhamma , mayaj , visuj

(b) Vyabjana (Consonants)

There are all together 33 consonants and are always pronounced with a vowel. The 33 consonants are as follows:
ka

kha
ca
ta
ta
pa
ya
aj

la

ga
cha
tha
tha
pha
ra

gha
ja
da
da
ba
la

va
jha
dha
dha
bha
va

ba
na
na
ma
sa

ha

(i) Group and non-group

The 33 consonants are divided into grouped and non-grouped. 25 consonant form ka to ma are divided into 5 groups
(vagga), each contain 5 letters. Each group is named after the first letter.
Example:
1st group:
ka
ka-vagga
2nd group:
ca
ca-vagga
3rd group:
ta
ta-vagga
4th group:
ta
ta-vagga
5th group:
pa
pa-vagga
The last letter in each group i.e. va ba na
help of nose.

kha

ga

gha

va

cha

ja

jha

ba

tha

da

dha

na

tha

da

dha

na

pha

ba

bha

ma

na ma are called vagganta or nasals as they are pronounce with the

The 7 consonants of ya ra la va sa ha la are non-grouped (avagga) as they are not grouped like other 5
groups. They are called antattha, which means right at the end of alphabet.
The last consonant j is called niggahita. It always comes after a short vowel, e.g rathaj, manij, yaguj.
Again, according to their quality of utterance, the 33 consonants may be divided into:

 voiceless (aghosa)
pha
la
soft consonants (ghosa)
aspirate consonants (aghosa)
bha
sa.
unaspirate consonants (ghosa)
occlusive or mute consonants
nasal consonants
liquid consonants
semi vowels
sibilant
aspiration

ka

=
=

all the rest

kha
gha

=
=

all the rest

the first 4 letters in all vaggas
=
va
ba
na
ra
la
la
=
ya
va
=
s
=
h

kha

ca

cha

ta

tha

ta

tha

pa

cha

jha

tha

dha

tha

dha

pha

na

ma

(2) Interconnection of place and sound

Thana, karana, payatana, suti and kala are important terms while deal with Pali alphabets.

(a) Thana
The 41 letters can be divided according to the organ of articulation. There are together six places called thana, i.e.,
guttural, palatal, lingual, dental, labial and nasal.
ka
ca
ta
ta
pa
e
o
va
j

kha
cha
tha
tha
pha
=
=
=
=

ga
gha
va
a
a
ja
jha
ba
i
i
da
dha
na
ra
la
da
dha
na
la
sa
ba
bha
ma
u
u
kanthataluja (guttural and palatal)
kanthotthaja (guttural and labial)
dantotthajo (dental and labial)
merely a nasal breathing (anunasika)

ha
ya

=
=
=
=
=

kanthaja (gutturals)
taluja (palatals)
muddhaja (linguals)
dantaja (dentals)
otthaja (labials)

Thana is the places where the letters or sounds are produced, but with only the places, sounds are not able to
pronounce from letters. Therefore, the karana is deal with.

(b) Karana
Karana means instrument, thus the meaning given here means the places of tongue, where they have to make the
contact with 6 thana.
(i)
(ii)
(iii)

Jivhagga
jivhopagga
jivhamajjha

=
=

=
tip of the tongue
near to the tip of the tongue
middle of the tongue

Example:

Jivhamajjha

tongue

Jivhapagga
Jivhagga

(c) Payatana
The effort needed to produce the sound. There are several levels of attempt, e.g.,
(i)
close
(ii)
open
(iii)
semi-close

(d) Suti --- different levels of hearing

(e) Kala
Time needed to produce a sound. The different duration of time is called mora.
Mora, Pali (matta), Sanskrit (matra), is a minimum duration of time that has to be used to pronounce a letter.
Examples:

short vowel
long vowel

=
=

one mora
two moras

e.g.
e.g.

ka
ka

When crying, astonishing and summoning, three moras are needed to pronounce the letters. However in Sanskrit,
three moras are quite common, but not in Pali .

(3) The identifying of vowels and consonants

The explanation and identify the differences between vowels and consonants are based on three parts:
(a) Position of the tongue ---- upper, middle and lower
(b) Nature of the lips ---- shape of the mouth, i.e., rounded or unrounded.
(c) Breathing ---- obstructed or unobstructed
The main differences between vowels and consonants is that consonant block the air stream that is coming out of

the lungs through the oral cavity or the nasal cavity by moving the tongue or the lower lip to the different places of the
mouth.

QUESTION: EXPLAIN WITH EXAMPLE THE CLASSIFICATION OF ALPHABET, VOWELS AND CONSONANTS. (LECTURED BY
VEN. PIYARATNA)
The classification of alphabet, vowels and consonants, vagga, avagga, the place of formation (ekaja, dvija) and their utterances
voice, voiceless (ghosa, aghosa).
(1)
According to the Kaccyana tradition, there are 41 letters in the Pli alphabet 8 vowels and 33 consonants. They are:
vowels:
a

e
o
consonants:
k
kh
g
gh

c
ch
j
jh

t
th
d
dh
n
p
ph
b
bh

y
r
l
v
s
h

(2)
According to Moggallna tradition, there are 43 letters ten vowels and 33 consonants. The vowels are: a, , i, , u, , e, , o, .
The rest are consonants. The vowels are divided into short and long:
(a) Kaccyana:
(b) Moggallna
short:
short:
a
i
u
a
i
u
e
o
long:
long:

e
o

Prosaically, the short vowels before a double consonant or (niggahta) are counted as long. It is to be observed that e and o are
pronounced short before a double or conjunct consonants (like in khettam, bhonto, etc.).
The consonants are divided into:
(a)
vagga (grouped)
(b)
avagga (non-grouped)
(a)
25 consonants (in the table given above) from k to m are called 'grouped', because they are divided into five groups of
five letters in each group:
(i)
Kavagga (ka-group):
k
kh
g
gh

(ii)
Cavagga (ca-group):
c
ch
j
jh

(iii)
avagga (a-group):

(iv)
Tavagga (ta-group):
t
th
d
dh
n
(v)
Pavagga (pa-group):
p
ph
b
bh

These groups are named after the first letter of each vagga. The last five letters of the vagga, viz. , , , n, are called
vagganta, or 'nasals'.
(b)
The remaining seven consonants: y, r, l, v, s, h, are called avaggas as they are not grouped like the above. The
consonant is called niggahta. It always comes after a short vowel. Again, all the vowels and consonants are divided according to the
place of their formation and utterance. The places of formation:
38 letters called ekaja:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)

k, kh, g, gh, , h, and a, are 'gutturals'

c, ch, j, jh, , y and i, are 'palatals'
, h, , h, , r, l are 'linguals'

3 letters called dvija:

(i)
e is 'guttural' and 'palatal'
(ii)
o is 'guttural' and 'labial'
(iii)
v is 'dental' and 'labial'

(iv)
t, th, d, dh, n, , s are 'dentals'
(v)
p, ph, b, bh, m and u, are 'labials'
(vi)
is merely a nasal breathing found only after short
vowels, e.g.: ratha, mani, yagu.

According to utterance (voice, voiceless ghosa, aghosa):

(i)
The first and the third letter of each of the five vaggas are called 'unaspirates' (voice, ghosa), because they are pronounced
without a strong breathing h-sound.
(ii)
The second and the fourth letters of the same are aspirates (voiceless, aghosa), because they are pronounced with a strong
breathing h-sound added to them.

666THE PALI ALPHABET

The Pali alphabet, there are 41 letters altogether and it divides again into two groups. One belongs to
vowels, there are 8 and one is part of consonants there are 33 letters.
8 Vowels

A, A, I , I, U, U, E, O
Of the 8 vowels, A , I and U are short voice, in Pali, it is called Rasa. The rest are long, and it is
called Digha. Prosodically the short vowels before a double consonant or n (= niggahitta) are long. It is
to be noted that E and O are pronounce short before double or conjunction consonants (as in khettam,
bhonto, etc). Although E and O are included in long vowels they are often sounded short before a
double consonant, e.g. Metta sethi, okkamati, yottam, etc.
Consonants

Consonants, they are divided into two groups--- Vagga and Avagga (non-group). 25 consonants from
K to M are called grouped because they are divided into five groups of five letters each. They are as
follow: -16.
17.
18.
19.
20.

K
C
T
T
P

kh
ch
th
th
ph

g
j
d
d
b

gh
jh
dh
dh
bh

n
n
n
n
ma

=
=
=
=
=

Ka vagga or Ka group
Ca vagga or Ca group
Ta vagga or Ta group
Ta vagga or Ta group
Pa vagga or Pa group

These groups are named after the first letter of each Vagga and the last five of letters of the Vaggas,
viz., n, n, n, n, m are named Vagganta or nasals. The remaining of seven consonants: y, l, r, v, s, h, l,
n are the part, which belong to Avagga due to they can not be grouped as the above. The sonant n is
called Niggahitta and it always comes after a short vowel.
Of the five groups or Vaggas, here they are again separated into two parts, one part is Aghosa, the
Voiceless. They are as follow:

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.

K
C
T
T
P

kh
ch
th
th
ph

And one is the part of Ghosa, which name Voice, they are as below: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

G
J
D
D
B

gh
jh
dh
dh
bh

n
n
n
n
ma

Again all the vowels and the consonants are divided according to the place of their formation and
utterance.
According to the place of their formation:
9.
K kh g gh n h and a, a are guttural
10.
C ch j jh n y and I, I are palatals
11.
T th d dh n r l
are lingual
12.
T th d dh n l s
are dental
13.
P ph b bh ma and u, u are labials
14.
E is guttural and palatal
15.
O is guttural and labial
16.
V is dental and labial
17.
n is mere a nasal breathing found only after short vowels e.g. ratham, manim, yagum.
According to the utterance.
1) The first and the third letter of each of the five vagga are called unaspirates, because they are
pronounced without a strong breathing or h- sound.
The second and the fourth letters of the same are aspirates, because they are pronounced with a strong
breath or h-sound added to them.

CASE (KRAKA)
1. The first case-ending
The first case or case-ending (paham) is used in the sense of the nominative agent in the active voice and the
object must have the second case ending.
Ex.: Aha amba khadhmi.
It is also used in the sentence of accusative case or the object in the passive voice and the subject must be with the
third case-ending.
Ex.: May odano paccma.

Note that the verb must agree only with the noun having the first case-ending (not with the noun having the second
and the third case-ending) in person and number. In expression the gender of the nouns, the first case-ending is used: naro,
ka, citta.

2. The second case-ending

The second case-ending (dutiya) is used in the sense of accusative case or object of a sentence in (having the verbs
of the motion and the active voice, the transitive verb).
Ex.: Aha geha gacchmi. Tva geha gacchasi.
It is also used in the following circumstances:
1.

Duration of the time and distance: So masa(?) pahati. So yojana gacchati.

2.

In connection with such upasagga as: So gamma(?) upavsati. So anuvassa dna deti.

3.

Sometimes in the genitive case in connection with such indeclinables as antara, nissaya, pai and the like: Buddho
rjagaha nissaya veluvae viharati. Nadi nerajara pati bodhi rukkha mule bhagav nisdi.

4.

Also in the sense of the instrumental and locative: Vin dhamma ko sukha. Eka samaya bhagav jetavane
viharati.
Similar form of the second case-ending is used in the adverbial sense: So khipa gacchati.

3. The third case-ending

1.

The third case-ending (tatiya) is used in instrumental case: So cakkhun rpa passati. So hatthena kamma
karoti.

2.

In denoting the agent (subject) is used in the passive voice: May odano pacito. Svkkhto bhagavat dhammo.

3.

In denoting a distinguishing attribute: Buddho jtiy khattiyo, gottena ca gotamo.

4.

In denoting the defects of the body: So cakkhum kno. Padena khajo.

5.

In connection with such words as saha, saddhi, vin, ala, sama, sama and the like: Pitar saha putto
gacchati. Rj vin masena na bhujati.

6.

In denoting a cause or reason: So aena vasati. Kenatthena iddhgato.

7.

In denoting the completion of an action: So ekheneva brnasi pysi.

8.

In the ablative sense: Pahavya eka rajjena sotapatti phala vara.

9.

In the locative sense: Tena samayena bhagav jetavane viharati.

10. In the sentence having (with) the causative verb, the third case-endings is used in the accusative sense: Smiko
dsa gma gamayati.

6663. DECLENSION & CONJUGATION

(A) Declension
Declension is the inflection of nouns, adjectives, pronouns and numerals by means of dissonance indicating case,
gender and number.

All declined words such as nouns, pronouns, adjectives and declinable participles are summed up under the term
Nama.
They are declined in three genders, two numbers and eight cases.

(1) Three genders

There are three genders of substantives, namely masculine, feminine and neuter. Generally nouns that express male
beings are regarded as nouns in masculine gender, and those that express female beings are nouns of feminine gender. Most
noun that express neither male nor female beings are called nouns of neuter gender. But some words like matugama
which means a woman are declined as a noun of masculine gender. The noun devata (deity or angel) is a feminine noun
in spite of the fact that it represents heavenly beings or spirits both male and female.
Two words denoting the same thing may be, sometimes, in different genders, e.g. pasana and sila are both synonyms
for a stone, but the former is masculine, and the latter is feminine. Likewise one word, without changing its form, may
process two or more genders e.g. geha (house) is masculine and neuter, kucchi (belly) is masculine and feminine. Actually
the gender in Pali grammar is rather a grammatical gender
The three genders declined according to their stem ending.
Example: Declension of vowel stems:
(i)
masculine
(ii) feminine
(iii) neuter
---

---

a i i u u
--a i i u
a i u

(2) Two numbers

Numbers are two as singular and plural. Nouns are declined only in these two numbers.

(3) Eight cases

Nouns or declinable words are declined in eight cases as, nominative, accusative, instrumental, dative, ablative,
genitive, locative and vocative. Case endings are added to nouns (declinable).
(a)

Nominative
The nominative is used in two contexts:
(i)
Subject of an active sentence is in nominative
e.g. So aharaj bhubjati = he eats food.
(ii)
e.g.

Object of a passive sentence is in nominative

Tena aharo bhubjate = the food is eaten by him.

When a noun stands as the subject of a sentence. Subject is of three kinds:

(i) Simple :
Daso rukkhaj chindati
(ii) Causative
:
Setthi dasaj rukkhaj chindapeti.
(iii) Reflexive :
rukkho patati. Ghoto bhijjati.

When a noun is in apposition with another noun in the nominative.

e.g.
raja Magadho Seniyo Bimbisaro

When a noun stands alone and expresses only the meaning of its stem.
e.g.
Buddho, puriso.

(b) Accusative
The accusative is generally used to denote an object in a sentence. It is the case of the direct object
and can further be used as an adverb, expressed by mean especially to express direction and extension (in
time or space). The goal of a motion is also the accusative case. Thus, it is used:
-

Extension in time and space is denoted by the accusative.

e.g.
Atho kho bhagava bodhirukkhamule sattahaj ekapallavkena nisidi.

The ordinals denoting for which time, are put in this case.
e.g.
So dutiyaj pi tatiyaj pi thateva yaci.

Most of the adverbs are in this case.

e.g.
Tumhe imasmij mate yeva sukkhaj jivissatha, jivante tu dukkhaj jivatha.
.
All verbs implying motion govern the accusative.
e.g.
puriso gamaj gacchati

The prefixes anu, abhi, adhi, pati and upa govern the accusative.
The indeclinables dhi, antara and samanta govern the accusative.

(c) Instrumental
The instrumental case indicates the instrument or the cause, and it is used to express
companionship or possession. It is also the case of the agent in passive expressions.
-

The agent by whom an action is performed is put in the instrumental.

e.g.
Vaddhakina geho kariyati.

The instrumental with which an action is performed is put in this case.

e.g.
So pharasuna rukkhaj chindati.

The instrument shows cause or reason.

e.g.
Rukkho vatena kampati ; Kammuna vasalo hoti.

The conveyance in or on which one goes.

e.g.
Sa yavatika yanassa bhumi, yanena gantva yana paccorohitva.

The price at which a thing is bought.

e.g.
Satasahassena me kitaj.

The way by which one goes.

e.g.
Imina maggena yahi.

The words expressing birth, lineage, origin or nature govern the instrumental.
It expresses the time in or at.
e.g.
Dvihi masehi nitthasi ; Tena samayena Buddho Bhagava Uruvelayaj viharati.
It expresses the companionship or possession
In the expression what is the use of? the thing is expressed by the instrumental, and the person by the
dative case.

The indeclinables saha, saddhij, samaj, vina and sometimes alaj govern this case.
Some adverbs also are in the instrumental.
In comparison the thing compared is in this case.
The thing with which something is mixed is put in this case.
The state, in which something is done, is expressed by the instrumental.
The expression less by takes the instrumental.
The potential and the past passive participle take the instrument for their original subject.

The instrumental and ablative have largely fallen together in singular, except in case of a-base, which
retains its own form.
(d) Dative
Dative is the case of the indirect object, for instance, the person to whom something is given. Generally, the
dative is used to express the person who has the advantage of some action.
When something is given to someone.
When something is done for someone.
When liking or disliking for someone or something is expressed.
When someone is informed of something.
When the sense of purpose is expressed.
Suitability or fitness is denoted by the dative.
In such expression as: what is the use of, etc., the person is expressed by the dative.
When something is refused, the person is put in the dative.
The indeclinables namo, sotthi, svagataj, lavha and the words expressing their meaning govern the dative.
When something is sent to someone the receiver is put in the dative
When something is told or preached to someone the person who listens is put in the dative.
The indiclinables alaj sometimes govern the dative.
When a thought has occurred to someone the person is put in the dative.
The words prefixed with patu and avi govern the dative.
The dative case is often difficult to distinguish from genitive, since the form is usually the same. The meaning
are also often quite close to each other.
In singular, the dative and genitive have fallen together, except in case of a-base, where there is a distinct form
also.
It should be pointed out that Pali has no equivalent to the verb have. The idea may
be expressed in many ways, e.g., atthi or santi.

(e) Ablative
The ablative case is used to express movement away from something and release from something. The ablative
can also express what has happened before something. as is expressed by means of the ablative, and the adverbial
expression are also found in the ablative. Hence, it is used:
Separation
The measure of length, breadth, or distance is denoted by the ablative.
When some direction is expressed.
When some cause or reason is expressed.
When release from something is expressed.
The verbs having the meaning to avoid, to obtain, to fear, to abhor govern the ablative.
The indeclinables araka, abbatra, yava, uddhaj, adho govern the ablative.
Tha (to stand) preceded by u governs the ablative.

The comparative tara and those words which express its meaning govern the ablative.
The expression since, beginning from or from that time are denoted by the ablative.
The adverbs pubbe, pure, puretaraj, paraj, oraj, etc. govern the ablative.
The idea in terms of is expressed by the ablative.

(f) Genitive
The genitive case expresses possession; it has the limiting force of an adjective . The genitive is the most
common case for expressing relations between nouns.
-

It also expresses the connection or relation of something or someone with some action.
The thing with which something is composed, or of which something is consisting, is put is the genitive.
The state of things expressed by the genitive.
The group or heap, from which one person or a thing is distinguished or selected, is put in the genitive.
The words of skill, proficiency etc., and their opposites govern the genitive.
The word denoting time, locality, direction and distance are put in the genitive.
When a portion of a whole is mentioned the whole is put in the genitive.
When a word in genitive, with a participle in agreement, denotes some attendant circumstance it is called
genitive absolute.

(g) Locative
The locative shows the place in or on which a thing or person is, or an action is performed.
The locative denotes the time when an action takes place.
When an individual or a thing is selected from a whole class or group, the latter is put in the locative.
The locative shows the cause or motive of an action.
The words denoting overlordship or ownership govern the locative.
The locative is used absolutely wit a participle in the same case as itself.
When someone is careful in doing something, the action is put in the locative.
The words signifying reverence, respect, love, delighting in, saluting, seizing, kissing, fond of , and
striking govern the locative.
It denotes the circumstances in spite of or under which an action is done.

(h) Vocative
f
The Vocative forms always stand out the sentence, it is used when somebody is addressed: bhikkhave
O monks!
g

The following example is the inflection or case endings of the declension of masculine stem a.

Inflection or case ending of the declension

Case
singular
Nom.
O
Acc.
J
Ins.
Ena
by with through
Dat.
aya ssa
to for
Abl.
a mha sma
from

a
e
ebhi ehi
anaj
ebhi ehi

by with through
to for
from

Gen.

anaj

of

ssa

of

plural

Loc.
Voc.

e mhi smij
a a

on in
O!

esu
a

on in
O!

The declension may be taken up under the following heads:

(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

Nouns
Adjectives
Pronouns
Numerals

(i) Declension of Nouns

Nouns in Pali are differently declined according to their gender and termination. They are divided into two groups with
reference to their endings, some ending in vowels and others ending in consonants.

The following are the examples of the declension of nouns in vowels ending:
Example : Declension of noun in nominative case
Gender

Stem

Stem ending
a

naro

nara

Aggi

aggi

aggi

Pakkhi

pakkhi

pakkhi pakkhino

garu

garu

bhata

bhataro

natta

nattaro

gunava

gunavanto gunavanta

Bhatu
Nattu

Gunavantu

Feminine

aggayo
garavo

Vidu

vidu

vidu

viduno

Go

go

gavo

gavo

Vanita

vanita

vanita

vanitayo

Bhumi

bhumi

bhumi

bhumiyo

Kumari

kumari

kumari kumaryo

dhenu

dhenu

mata

mataro

Dhenu
Matu

Neuter

plural

Nara

Garu
Masculine

Singular

dhenuyo

Nayana
Atthi

a
i

nayanaj
atthi

nayana nayanani
atthi atthini

Cakkhu

cakkhu

cakkhu

cakkhuni

(ii) Declension of Adjectives

Adjective in Pali are not treated separately from nouns, as they take all the inflections of the nouns. Almost all
pronouns become adjectives when they are used before a substantive of the same gender, number and case. They are
pronouns when they stand alone in a sentence.
Therefore, adjectives are divided into three kinds, namely: pronominal adjective, verbal adjective and ordinary
adjective.

(a) Pronominal adjective

When pronouns become adjectives is called pronominal adjective

(b) Verbal adjective

Participles are a kind of adjectives formed from the verbal bases. Like verbs they are divided into present, past and
future, and each group is again divided into active and passive. Being adjectives they are declined in all the genders.
(c) Ordinary adjective
Ordinary adjective are white (seta), short (rassa), big (mahanta) and so on. As the adjectives qualify nouns, which
are of different genders and numbers, they must agree with their substantive in gender, number and case.

(iii) Declension of Pronouns

Pronouns admit of all genders as they stand for every person or thing which are in different genders. They become
adjectives when they qualify other nouns. They have no vocative forms.
Pronouns are divided into 5, namely:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)

Personal Pronoun
Relative Pronoun,
Demonstrative Pronoun
Interrogative Pronoun
Reflexive Pronoun

(The declension of pronouns see appendix 3, page38 )

(iv) Declension of Numerals

In Pali grammar, the numerals of cardinal and ordinal are declinable, they are more often used as adjective. Some of
the numerals take all the genders, and some have their own.

The stems eka, ti, catu (2,3,4) are of all genders and declined differently in each gender.

Eka (one) has only singular forms. The plural forms are used to express the meaning some. e.g. eke manussa =
some people.

From dvi (2) up to attharasa (18), all cardinals are declined only in plural number, alike in all the three genders .

From ekunavisati (19) up to navuti (90) all cardinals are declined only in feminine gender, singular number.

Sata and sahassa (100, 1000) are declined in neuter gender.

Koti (10000000) and pakoti (koti x 100) are declined in feminine gender.

Number those ending in a like visa, tijsa (20,30) etc. are declined like feminine nouns ending in a, but only in singular
number.

The following are some examples of the numeral declension:

Declension of dvi == two(plural)
(common to all genders)
Case
Plural
Nom /Acc
dve ; duve
Abl / Ins
dvibhi ; duvinnaj
Dat / Gen
dvinnaj ; duvinnaj
Loc.
dvisu
Declension of pabca == five(plural)
( similar in all genders)
Case
Plural
Nom /Acc
pabca
Abl / Ins
pabcabhi ; pabcahi
Dat / Gen
pabcanannaj
Loc.
pabcasu
Ccha, satta, attha and all up to attharasa are declined like pabca
Declension of cha == six(plural)
( similar in all genders)
Case
Plural
Nom /Acc
cha
Abl / Ins
chabhi ; chahi
Dat / Gen
channaj
Loc.
chasu
Declension of satta == seven(plural)
( similar in all genders)
CasePluralNom /AccsattaAbl / Inssattabhi ; sattahiDat / GensattannajLoc.sattasu
Declension of attha == eight (plural)
( similar in all genders)
CasePluralNom /AccatthaAbl / Insatthabhi ; atthahiDat / GenatthannajLoc.atthasu
Declension of nava == nine(plural)
( similar in all genders)
CasePluralNom /AccnavaAbl / Insnavabhi ; navahiDat / GennavannajLoc.navasu

(B) Conjugation

Conjugation is to state or set out (a verb) with its various inflection endings in order, i.e. in its voices, moods,
tenses, numbers and persons. Verbs are formed with roots by adding suffixes and prefixes to them.
Verbs indicates actions, and is an important part of predicate which says somethings about the subject. The
following verse is the difinition of verb:
Yantikalaj tipurisaj
Kriyavacitikarakaj
attilivgaj dvivacanaj
tadakhyatantivuccati
Whatever has three tenses, three persons
indicates action, has three voices,
has no three gender, has two numbers
then, it is called akhyataj (verb)
1.

Tikalaj
(1) present tense =
(2) past tense
(3) future tense

=
three tenses
Vattamanakala
=
Atitakala
=
Anagatakala.

2.

Tipurisaj
(1) First person
(2) Second person
(3) Third person =

=
three persons
=
uttamapurisa
=
majjhipurisa
pathamapurisa

3.

Tikarakaj
(1) Active voice
(2) Passive voice =
(3) subjective voice

=
three voices
=
kattukaraka
kammakaraka
=
bhavakaraka

4.

Dvivacanaj
(1) singular
(2) plural

=
=

two numbers
Ekavacana
=
Bahuvacana

The Pali verbs are conjugated in singular and plural.

There are three persons: first person, second person and third person.
There are two voices: active and passive.
There are three tenses, namely: present, past and future.
There are three moods, namely: imperative, optative and conditional.
There are seven different conjugations in Pali, they are called dhatuganas (group of roots). The Pali grammarians represent
roots with a final vowel, but it is often dropped or changed before the conjugational sign. Each dhatuganas has one or more
different conjugational signs, which come between the root and the verbal termination.

seven conjugations and their signs 1st conjugation Bhuvadigana a 2nd conjugation Rudhadigana m a 3rd conjugation
Divadigana ya 4th conjugation Svadigana no nu una 5th conjugation Kiyadigana na 6th conjugation Tanadigana o
yira 7th conjugation Cutadigana e aya
A great number of roots are included in the first and the seventh group. The following are the examples of the 1st
and 7 conjugation in the three tenses, three persons and their singular and plural forms.
th

Example : 1st conjugation

Present TensePast TenseFuture Tensesingularpluralsingularpluralsingularplural 3rd person ti nti i i uj ijsu issati
issanti 2nd person si tha O ittha issasi issatha 1st person - mi - ma ij imha imha issami issama
Examples : 7th conjugation
The base of the seventh conjugation of two kinds as it has two conjugational signs e.g. from the root pala two
bases pale and palaya are formed.
Conjugation of pala (base pale)
Present TensePast Tense (pale and palaya combined)Future TensesingularpluralSingularPluralsingularplural3rd p.
paleti palenti Palesi palayi Palesuj palayuj palayijsu palessati palessanti2 nd p. palesi paletha Palayo Palayittha palessasi
palessatha1st p. palemi palema Palesij palayij Palayimha palayimha palessami palessama
Conjugation of pala (base palaya)
Present TenseFuture TensesingularPluralsingularplural3rd p. palayati palayanti palayissati palayissanti2nd p. Palayasi
palayatha palayissasi palayissatha1st p. palayami palayama palayissami palayisama

The conjugational sign na of the fifth group is shortened in the third person plural.

Example : 5th conjugation in the simple present tense

Base vikkina Vikkinati Vikkinanti (shortened) Vikkinasi Vikkinatha vikkinami vikkinama
(1) Eight modes of conjugation
There are eight modes or eight verbal cases (akhyatavibhatti) of conjugation of verbs in Pali. Each of the seven
groups of roots may be conjugated according to the eight modes given below:
(1)
Vattamana
(2)
Ajjatani
(3)
Bhavissanti
(4)
Pabcami
(5) Sattami
(6)
Hiyattani
(7)
Parokkha
(8)
Kalatipatti

=
=
=
=
=

Present Indicative
Past Indicative or Aorist
Future Indicative
Imperative and Benedictive
Optative or potential
=
Imperfect
=
Perfect or past Indefinite
Conditional

There are two sets of inflection to form the verbs in either voice; one set is named Parassapada and the other
Attanopada. The parassapada set was formerly used only to form the Active Verbs, and the attanopada set to form the
Passive ones. When a verbal root is conjugated in the Active and Passive in the two sets of inflection there is no different
meaning.
The following are the First Conjugation according to the eight modes:
First Conjugation
1. Vattamana (Present Tense)
ParassapadaAttanopada
Ti
nti
te
nte
Si
tha
se
vhe
-mi
-ma
e
-mhe
Conjugation of the root paca (to cook) in Present Indicative:
Active VoiceParassapadaAttanopadaPersonSingularPluralSingularPlural 3rd pacati pacanti pacate pacante 2nd pacasi
pacatha pacase pacavhe 1st pacami pacama pace pacamhe

Passive VoiceParassapadaAttanopadaPersonSingularPluralSingularPlural 3rd paccati

paccasi paccatha paccase paccavhe 1st Paccami paccama pacce paccamhe
2. Ajjatani (Aorist)
(with or without a augment)
ParassapadaAttanopada i i uj ijsu
a
u O

ttha

ise

ivhaj

paccanti paccate paccante 2nd

ij mha mha

Active Voice Root Gam (u) to go

ParassapadaPersonSingularPlural 3rd agacchi
agami agamasi agacchum gacchum agamum gaccimsu
agamumsu gamumsu agamamsu 2nd agaccho gaccho
agamo gamo
agacchittha gacchittha
agamittha gamittha 1st agacchim gacchim
agamim agamasim agacchimha gacchimha
agamimha gamimha

issanti

issate

Issante

issasi

imhe

gacchi

3rd agaccha gaccha

Attanopada
Person
Singular
Plural
agama gama
agacchu gacchu
agamu gamu 2nd agacchise agamise agacchivham gacchivham
agamivham gamivham 1st agaccham gaccham
agamam gamam
agacchimhe gacchimhe
agamimhe gamimhe
3. Bhavissanti (Future Tense)
ParassapadaAttanopada issati
Issamhe

aj

issatha

issase

Issavhe

issami

issama

issaj

Active Voice Root Bhu (to be)

Parassapada
AttanopadaPersonSingularPluralSingularPlural
3rdBhavissati bhavissanti bhavissate bhavissante 2nd Bhavissasibhavissatha bhavissase bhavissavhe 1st
bhavissamibhavissama bhavissam bhavissamhe
4. Pabcami (Imperative)
ParassapadaAttanopada

tu

ntu

taj

ntaj x ; (a)hi

tha

ntaj

vho

-mi

-ma

amase

Active Voice
Parassapada
AttanopadaPerson Singular
Plural
Singular
Plural 3rd gacchatu
gacchantu gacchatam gacchantam 2nd gaccha gacchahi gacchatha gacchassu gacchavho 1st gacchami gacchama gacche
gacchamese

5. sattami (Optative ; potential)

ParassapadaAttanopada
eyya , e
eyyama
eyyaj
eyyamhe

eyyuj

etha

eraj

eyyasi

eyyatha

Active Voice
Parassapada
AttanopadaPerson Singular
gaccheyyum
gacchetha gaccheram 2nd gaccheyyasi
gaccheyyatha
gacchetho gaccheyyavho 1st gaccheyyamigaccheyyama
gaccheyyam gaccheyyamhe

6. Hiyattani (imperfect)
ParassapadaAttanopada
Root to go

Parassapada

ttha

tthuj

AttanopadaPerson

ttha
Singular

etho

Plural

se

Singular

vhaj

Plural

a ; aj

Singular

eyyavho

eyyami

Plural 3rd gaccheyya

mha

ij

mhase

Plural 3rd agaccha agama

aga agacchu agamu agacchatha agamattha agacchatthum agamatthum 2nd agaccho aagmo agacchattha agamattha
agacchase agamase agacchivham agamivham 1st agaccha agama
agaccham agamam
agacchamha agamamha
agacchim agamim
agacchamhase agamamhase

7. Parokkha (Past Perfect)

ParassapadaAttanopada
a

ttha

re

ttha

ttho

vho

mha

mhe

Active Voice Root paca

Parassapada
AttanopadaPerson Singular
Plural
Singular
Plural 3rd
nd
st
papaca papacu papacittha papacire 2
papace papacittha papacittho papacivho 1 papaca papacimha papaci
papacimhe
8. Kalatipatti (Past Conditional)
ParassapadaAttanopada
ssa ssa
ssaj
ssamhase

(with a augment)
ssajsu
ssatha ssijsu

sse

ssatha

ssase

ssavhe

ssa

ssamha

Active Voice a before the root

Parassapada
AttanopadaPerson Singular
Plural
Singular
rd
nd
Plural 3 apacissa apacissa apacissamsu apacissatha apacissimsu 2 apacisse apacissatha apacissase
apacissavhe 1st apacissa apacissamha apacissam apacissamhase

666DECLENSION
Nouns in Pali are differently declined according to their gender and termination.
Nara is a masculine stem, ending in --- a.
It is also to be declined as following: --Singular
Plural
Nom.
Naro = man
Nara= men
Acc.
Naran=man
Nare=men
Ins.
Narena=by, with, or through man
Narebhi; Narehi= by, with, or
through men
Dat.
Naraya; Narassa=to or for man
Naranan= to or for men
Abl.
Nara; Narmha; Narasma= from a man
Narebhi; Narehi= for a man
Gen.
Narassa =of man
Naranan= of men
Loc.
Nare; Naramhi; Narasmin= on or in man
Naresu= on or in men
Vo.
Nara: Nara= Oman
Nara= O men
In Pali, there are seven inflections or case endings of the above declension are;
Case
Nom.
Acc.
Ins.
Dat.
Abl.

Singular
o
n
ena
aya; ssa
a; mha; sma

Plural
a
e
ebhi; ehi
anan
ebhi; ehi

Gen.
Loc.
Vo.

ssa
e; mhi; smin
a: a

anan
esu
a
666D EC L E N S IO N

Nadi
Singular
Nom./ Voc.

Plural

Nadi

nadi, nadiyo,

najjo
Acc.

Nadij

nadi, nadiyo

najjo
Ins./Abl.

Nadiya, najja

nadibhi,

nadihi
Dat./Gen.

Nadiya, najja

nadinaj

Loc.

Nadiya, nadiyaj, najjaj

nadisu

Mano
Singular

Plural

Nom.

Mano, manam

Acc.

Manaj

Ins.

mana, manani
mane, manani

Manasa, manena

manebhi, manehi

Dat./Gen.

Manaso, manassa

mananaj

Abl.

Manasa, mana,

manebhi, manehi

Manamha, manasma
Loc.

Manasi, mane

manesu

Manamhi, manasmij
Voc.

Mana, mana

mana, manani

Satthu = Nattu
Singular

Plural

Nom.

Sattha

sattharo

Acc.

Sattharaj

satthare, sattharo

Ins./Abl.

Satthara, satthara

sattharebhi,

satthubhi
sattharehi, satthuhi.
Dat./Gen.

Satthu, satthuno

sattharanaj,

Satthussa
Loc.

Satthari

Voc.

Sattha, sattha

satthanaj,

satthunaj

sattharesu, satthusu
sattharo

Gacchanta
Singular
Nom.

Plural

Gacchaj, gacchanto

gacchanto,

gacchanta
Acc.

Gacchantaj

Ins.

gacchante

Gacchata, gacchantena

gacchantebhi,

gacchantehi
Dat./Gen.

Gacchato, gaccchantassa

gacchataj,

gacchantanaj
Abl.

Gacchata, gaccchantamha

gacchantebhi, gacchantehi

Gacchantasma
Loc.

Gacchati, gacchante,

gacchantesu

Gacchantamhi, gacchantasmij
Voc.

Gacchaj, gaccha
Gaccha

gacchanta

gacchanto,

5. Pitu (mas)
Singular
Nom.

Pita

Acc.

Pitaraj

Plural
pitaro

Ins.

pitaro, pitare (pitu)

Pitara, pituna (petya)

pitarebhi, pitarehi,

putubhi, putuhi
Dat./Gen.

Pitu, pituno, pitussa

pitaranaj, pitanaj,

pitunaj, (pitunnaj)
Loc.

Pitari

pitaresu, pitusu
(pitasu)

Voc.

Pita, pita

pitaro

6. aggi (mas)
Singular

Plural

Nom.

Aggi

aggi, aggayo

Acc.

Aggij

aggi, aggayo

Ins.
Dat./Gen.

Aggina

aggibhi, aggihi

Aggino, aggissa

Abl.

Aggina, aggimha, aggisma

Loc.

Aggimhi, aggismij

agginaj
aggibhi, aggihi
aggisu

7. ratti (fem)
Singular
Nom.

Ratti

Plural
ratti, rattiyo,

(ratyo)
Acc.

Rattij

ratti, rattiyo

Abl.

Rattiya, ratya

rattibhi, rattihi

Dat./Gen.

Rattiya, ratya

rattinaj

Loc.

Rattiya, rattiyaj, ratto

Note: rattiya

rattisu

>

ratya

Inst. pl -- rattisu

8. amha
Singular

Plural

Nom.

Ahaj

mayaj, amhe

Acc.

Maj, mamaj

amhebhi, amhakaj,

no
Ins.

Maya, me

amhebhi, amhehi,

no
Dat./Gen.

Mama, mayaj

Me, mamaj

amhaj, amhakaj,

no

Abl.

Maya

amhebhi, amhehi

Loc.

Mayi

amhesu

666CONJUGATION
There are seven different conjugations in Pali; they are called dhatugana (=group of roots). The Pali
grammarians represent roots with a final vowel, but it id often dropped or changed before the
conjugational sign. Each dhatugana has one or more different conjugational signs, which come
between the root and the verbal termination.
The seven conjugations and their sigh are:
1st
conjugation
= Bhavadigana: a
nd
2
conjugation
= Rudhadigana: m-a

3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th

conjugation
conjugation
conjugation
conjugation
conjugation

= Divadigana : ya
=Svadigana: no, nu, una
=Kiyadigana: na
=Tanadigana : o,yira
=Cura digana: e, aya

A great number of roots are included in the first and the seventh group. For instance, the roots pacca
and bhava, belong to the first conjugation. The last vowel of Pacca is dropped before the conjugational
sign a.
The monosyllabic roots like bhu do not drop their vowel. It is strengthens before the conjugational sign.
i or i strengthen becomes e
u or u trengthen becomes o
E.g. Ni+ a becomes Ne+a:
Bhu+a becomes bho+a
Then e followed by a is changed into ay
A .. ava
Ne+a
becomes
Bho+a .

naya
Bhava

The seventh conjugation

The special feature of the first conjugation is that the last vowel of the base is lengthened before the
First Personal endings.
The same rule is applied for the bases ending with a of the 2 nd, 3rd, 6th and 7th conjugations, in addition
to their special features.
The bases of the seventh conjugations are of two kinds as it has two conjugational signs, e.g. from the
root two puja bases puje and pujaya are formed.
E.g. puja
Base Puje
1.Pujeti
Pujenti
2.Pujesi
Pujetha
3.Pujemi
Pujema
Base Pujaya
1.Pujayati
Pujayanti
2.Pujayasi
Pujayatha
3.Pujayami Pujayama

First conjugation

Present Tense
The inflections or the personal endings of the First Mode, Vattamana or Present tense are:
Parassapada
(Active voice)
3rd punja ti (he eats)
2nd punja si(you eat)
1st punja mi(I eat )

punjanti
(they eat)
punjatha (you eat)
punjama (we eat)

Middle attanopada
3rd punjate
2nd punjase
1st punje

(he eats)

punjante
punjavhe
punjamhe

Conjugation of the root punja (to eat) in present Indicative.

Attanopada
3rd punjate
2nd punjase
1st punje

(he is eaten)

punjante (they are eaten)

punjavhe
punjamhe

The imperative (Bendicative Included)

The personal endings of this are:
Parassapada
3rd punja tu (let him eat)
2nd punja hi
1st punja mi

punjantu (let they eat)

punjatha
punjama

Attanopada
3rd punjatam
2nd punjassu
1st punje
The optative (Potential)

punjantam
punjavho
punjamase

The personal endings of this mode are:

Parassapada
3rd punjeyya (he would eat)
2nd punjeyyasi
1st punjeyyami

punjeyyun (they would eat)

punjeyyatha
punjeyyama

Attanopada
3rd punjetha
2nd punjetho
1st punjayyam punjeyyamhe

punjeran
punjeyyavho

Past tense

The second mode is Ajjatani, Aorist.

The personal endings of this mode are:
Parassapada
3rd punji
2nd punjo
1st punjin

punjum;
punjattha
punjamha

Attanopada
3rd punja
2nd punjise
1st punjan

punju
punjivhan
punjimhe

The 6th mode is Hiyattani.

The personal endings of this mode are:
Parassapada
3rd punja
2nd punjo
1st punja ; punjan
Attanopada

punju
punja ttha
punja mha

punjinsu

3rd punjattha
2nd punjase
1st punjin

punjatthun
punjavhan
punjamhase

This was originally used to express the definite past, and Ajjatani was used to express the time recently
passed; but now they have lost their individual significance, and Ajjatani is extensively used to express
the definite past.
Past Indefinite

The seventh mode. Parokkha.

The personal endings of this mode are:
Active Voice

Parassapada
3rd punja
2nd punje
1st punja

punju
punjattha
punjamha
Attanopada

3rd punjattha
2nd punjattho
1st punji

punjare
punjavho
punjamhe

This mode is very seldom used, and this is characterised by the reduplication of root.
1. The first consonant of a root is reduplicated together with the vowel that follows it.
2. If the root begins with a vowel that vowel alone is reduplicated.
3. Its corresponding palatal reduplicates a guttural.
4. An aspirate is reduplicated by its unaspirated, and an unaspirate by itself.
5. J reduplicates H of a root.
6. A long vowel is shortened in the reduplicated syllable.

Future tense

The third Mode is bhavissanti

The personal endings of this mode are:
Parassapada

3rd Punjissati
2nd Punjissasi
1st Punjissami

Punjissanti
Punjissatha
Punjissama
Attanopada

3rd Punjissate
2nd Punjissase
1st Punjissamhe

Punjissante
Punjissan
Punjissavhae

The past Conditional

The personal endings of the 8th mode, Kalatipatti, are:

Parassapada
3rd Bhunjissa
Bhunjissa
nd
2 Bhunjisse
1stBunjissami

bhunjissansu
bhunjissatha
bhunjissama

Attanopada
3rd Bhunjissatha
2nd Bhunjissase
1st Bhunjissan

bhunjissinsu
bhunjissavhae
Bunjissamhase

This mode sometimes takes the augment a, before the root.

Parassapada
3rd Abhunjissa; (if he had eaten)
Abhunjissa
nd
2 Abhunjissase

Abhunjissamsu
Abhunjissatha

1st Abhunjissa

Abhunjissamha

Attanopada
3rd Abhunjissaha
2nd Abhunjissase
1st Abhunjissam

Abhunjissimsu
Abhunjissavhae
Abhunjissamhe

Second conjugation

Rudhadi-Group
There is no difference in the personal endings of this or the other forthcoming conjugations from the
First conjugation. The difference lies in the bases formed through the different conjugational sings.
The conjugational sign of this Rudhada-group is n a. n is inserted after the first syllable of the root:
e.g. the root Sica(to sprinkle)+n-a =Sinca+; when the last vowel is dropped it becomes Sinca.
One may conjugate these bases just like the verbs in the First Conjugation:
Sincati (he pour down)
Sincanti (they pour down) and so on for every mode.
Some other bases of this conjugation are:

Yuja (to yoke or join) +n-a=yunja

Vida (to suffer)+n-a=vinda
Bhida (to break)+n-a=bhinda
Muca (to release)+n-a=munca
Badha (to bind or confine)+n-a=bandha
Rudha (to obstruct)+n-a+rundha

Third conjugation

Divadi-group
The sign of this group is ya, which is assimilated to the last consonant of the root. Some rules and
examples for assimilation of Y are given in the Mixed Sandhi, the page number 7-8. They may be
applied here too.

After a root ending in a long vowel, Ya does not changes its form.
In other cases:
Dh+ya becomes jjha
S+ya
becomes ssa
V+ya becomes bba
Examples
Divu (to play) +ya+ti=divyati=dibbati
Yudha (to fight)+ ya+ti=yudhyat=yujjhati
Budha (to know)+ ya+ti=budhyati=bujjhati
Sivu (to sew) + ya+ti=sivyati=sibbati
Ga (to sigh)+ ya+ti=gayati
Jha(to ponder) + ya+ti=jhayati
Dusa (to vex)+ya+ti=dusyati=dussati
Ve (toweave)+ya+ti+vayati. Ve becomesva

Fourth conjugation

Svadi-group
The conjugation signs of this group are na,una and no.
Examples
Su (to hear)+na+ti=sunati
Su (to hear)+no+ti=sunoti
Pa+apa(to attain or come to)+una+ti= papunati
Sambhu(to attain)+na+ti=sambhunati
A +vu (to fix on to, tostring) +na+ti=avunati
Sakka (to be able)+una+ti= sakkunati

Fifth conjugation

Kayati-group
The conjugational sing of this group is na.
Examples

Gaha (to take)+na+ti=ganhati

Mi (to measure)+na+ti=minati
Asa (to eat)+na+ti=asanati
Dhu (to shake)+na+ti=dhunati
Na (to know) becomes ja. Ja+na+ti=janati
Ji (to conquer)+na+ti=jinati
Ki (to bargin)+na+ti= kinati (to buy)
Vi +ki+na+ti= vikkinati
Here n is interchanged with h.
Sixth conjugation

Tanadi-Group
The conjugational sign of this group is o.
Examples
Pa+apa(to attain or come) +o+ti= papoti
Mana (to think)+o+ti= manoti
Kara ( to do)+ o+ti=karoti
Tanu(to expand)+o+ti= tanoti

Seventh conjugation

Curadi-group
The conjugational sign of this group is aya, usually contracted to e.
These signs strangthen the radical vowels I and u of the roots when they are not followed by a conjunct
consonant.
Examples
Cunna (to powder) + e + ti = cunneti
Cinta (to think) +e + ti = cinteti
Cura (to steal)+e + ti = coreti
Cura +aya + ti =corayati
Gupa (to guard)+e + ti =gopeti
Gupa +aya + ti = gopayati
Chadda (to throw away)+e + ti =chaddeti

QUESTION: WILL BE, THE INFINITIVE (LECTURED BY VEN. PIYARATNA)

The sign of the infinitive is -tu. It is used like in English:
pacitu (to cook)
laddhu or labhitu (to get)
ptu (to drink)
haritu (to carry)
pivitu (to drink)
dtu (to give)
gantu (to go)
haritu (to bring)
bhottu or bhunjitu (to eat)
ktu (to do)
-tu is simply added to the roots of one syllable to form the infinitive. An extra i is added before -tu in the case
of the bases consisting of more than one syllable.
(1)

-tu and -tave are suffixed to the roots or the bases in order to form infinitives.
(i)
Thy are joined with an additional i, to the roots ending in a and u:
paca + i + tu = pacitu (to cook)
dhvu + i + tu = dhavitu (to run)
jana + i + tu
= janitu (to know)
(ii)
They are directly added to the roots ending in :
d + tu
= dtu (to give)
th + tu
= thtu (to stand)
Root kara becomes k before these; then it is treated as a root ending in :
k + tu
= ktu (to do)
k + tava
= ktave (to do)
(iii)
The last consonant of some roots is assimilated to t of the suffixes:
kara + tu
= kattu (to do)
chida + tu
= chettu (to cut)
buja + tu
= bhottu (to eat; to enjoy)
(iv)
Strengthening the first vowel sometimes takes place before these:
n + tu
= netu (to lead; to carry)
su + tu
= sotu (to hear)

(2)
To the causal bases and the bases of the seventh conjugation ending in a these suffixes are joined with the help of i.
They are directly added to those bases ending in e.
(a) Causal bases:
kre + tu
= kretu,
mrpe + tu = marapetu,

kreya + i + tu = krayitu (to cause to do)

mrpaya + i + tu
= marapayitu (to cause to kill)

(b) Bases of the seventh conjugation:

core + tu
= coretu,
dese + tu
= desetu,

coraya + i + tu = corayitu (to steal)

desaya + i + tu = desayitu (to preach)

QUESTION: EXPLAIN THE NIGGAHITA SANDHI WITH EXAMPLE (LECTURED BY VEN. PIYARATNA)
(1)
before a vagga-consonant may, sometimes, be transformed to the 'nasal' or the fifth letter of the group to which
that consonant belongs.
dipa + karo
= dipakaro
ta + dhana
= tadhana

(2)

before l is sometimes transformed to l:

sa + lahuko
= sallahuko
pu + linga
= pullinga
sa + lapo
= sallapo

(3)

before e or h is sometimes changed to n; before e is duplicated:

paccatta + eva = paccattaeva
ta + hi tassa
= tan hi tassa
eva + hi vo
= evan hi vo

(4)

followed by y combines with y to form :

sa + yogo
= saoga
ya + yad eva
= yaad eva
sa + yojana = saojana

(5)

followed by a vowel sometimes becomes or d.

ta + aha
= ta aha
eta + avoca
= etad avoca
ki + eta
= ki eta

(6)

followed by a vowel or a consonant is sometimes elided; then the vowel in some cases is lengthened:
tasa + aha
= tasaha
eva + aha
= evaha
adasi + aha = adasaha

(7)

A vowel after is sometimes elided; then undergoes the change stated in most instances:
abhinandu + iti = abhinandu ti
hala + idani
= hala dani
ida + api
= ida pi

(8)

is sometimes inserted before a vowel or a consonant:

cakkhu + udapdi
= cakkhu udapdi
manopubba + gama
= manopubbagam
ava + siro
= avasiro

QUESTION: WILL BE HAVE DECLENSION OF RJA (KING) (LECTURED BY VEN. PIYARATNA)

Rj (king):
Singular
nom.
rj
acc.
rjna, rja
ins.
ra, rjena
dat.,gen. rao, rjino
abl.
ra, rjamh, rjasm
loc.
rae, rjini, rjamhi, rjasmi
voc.
rja, rj

Plural
rjno
rjno
rjbhi, rjhi, jjebhi, rjehi
raa, rjna, rjna
rjbhi, rjhi, rjebhi, rjehi
rjusu, rjesu
rjno

Att (self):
nom.

Singular
att

Plural
attno

acc.
ins.
dat., gen.
abl.
loc.
voc.

attna, atta
attan, attena
attano
attan
attani
atta, att

attno
attanebhi, attanehi
attna
attanebhi, attanehi
attanesu
attno

Gunavantu (virtuous):
Singular
nom.
gunav
acc.
gunavanta
ins.
gunavat, gunavantena
dat., gen.
gunavato, gunavantassa
abl.
gunavat, gunavantamh,
gunavantasm
loc.
gunavati, gunavante
gunavantamhi, gunavantasmi
voc.
gunava, gunava, gunav

Plural
gunavanto, gunavant
gunavante
gunavantebhi, gunavantehi
gunavata, gunavantna
gunavantebhi, gunavantehi
gunavantesu
gunavanto, gunavant

QUESTION: SHOULD BE HAVE CONJUGATION GAMU-GAM34 (LECTURED BY VEN. PIYARATANA)

Answer:
1. Present (vattamn) (he) goes
Parassapada (active) (he) goes
Person
Sg.
Pl.
st
1
()gacchmi
()gacchma
2nd
()gacchasi
()gacchatha
rd
3
()gacchati
()gacchanti

Attanopada (passive) (he) is gone

Sg.
Pl.
()gacche
()gacchamhe
()gacchase
()gacchavhe
()gacchate
()gacchante

2. Past (ajjatan) (he) went

Parassapada
Person
Sg.
1st
()gaccho, ()gamo,
()gacchim,
()gamim,

Attanopada
Sg.
()gacchise,
()gamise,
()gaccha,

Pl.
()gacchittha,
()gamittha,
()gacchimha,

Pl.
()gacchivha,
()gamivha,
()gacchimhe,

34 I added to every form of the verb (), so that it can be clearly seen, that with the verb gaccha is the conjugation same,
only that should be added at the beginning of each word.

()gamasim

()gamimha

()gama

()gamimhe

2nd

()gami, ()gamasi

()gamum,
()gacchimsu,
()gamimsu,
()gamamsu

()gama

()gamu

3rd

()gacchi

()gacchu

()gaccha

()gacchu

Pl.
()gamissma
()gamissatha
()gamissanti

Attanopada
Sg.
()gamissa
()gamissase
()gamissate

Pl.
()gamissamhe
()gamissavhe
()gamissante

Attanopada
Sg.
()gacche
()gacchassu

Pl.
()gacchamase
()gacchavho

()gacchata

()gacchanta

3. Future (bhavissanti) (he) will go

Parassapada
Person
Sg.
1st
()gamissmi
2nd
()gamissasi
rd
3
()gamissati

4. Imperative (pacam) go! / let (him) go!

Parassapada
Person
Sg.
Pl.
st
1
()gacchmi
()gacchma
2nd
()gaccha,
()gacchatha
()gacchahi
3rd
()gacchatu
()gacchantu

5. Optative potential (sattam) (he) would go

Parassapada
Attanopada
Person
Sg.
Pl.
Sg.
Pl.
st
1
()gaccheyymi ()gaccheyyma ()gaccheyya ()gaccheyyamhe
2nd
()gaccheyyasi ()gaccheyyatha()gacchetho
()gaccheyavho
rd
3
()gaccheyya
()gaccheyyu ()gacchetha
()gacchera

QUESTION: SHOULD BE HAVE MODES.. (LECTURED BY VEN. PIYARATANA)

1. Present (vattamn)
Parassapada
Person
Sg.
1st
mi
2nd
si
3rd
ti

Pl.
ma
tha
nti

Attanopada
Sg.
e
se
te

Pl.
mhe
vhe
nte

Pl.
mh
tha
u, isu

Attanopada
Sg.
a
ise

Pl.
imhe
ivha

Pl.
issma
issatha

Attanopada
Sg.
issa
issase

Pl.
issmhe
issavhe

2. Past (Ajjatan)
Person
1st
2nd
3rd

Parassapada
Sg.
i
o

3. Future (bhavissanti)
Parassapada
Person
Sg.
1st
issmi
2nd
issasi

3rd

issati

issanti

issate

issante

4. Imperative (pacam)
Parassapada
Person
Sg.
1st
mi
2nd
hi
3rd
tu

Pl.
ma
tha
ntu

Attanopada
Sg.
e
ssu
ta

Pl.
mase
vho
nta

5. Optative potential (sattam)

Parassapada
Person
Sg.
1st
eyyami
2nd
eyyasi
3rd
eyya

Pl.
eyyama
eyyatha
eyyu

Attanopada
Sg.
eyya
etho
etha

Pl.
eyyamhe
eyyavho
era

6. Imperfect (hinyatani)
Parassapada
Person
Sg.
1st
a, a
2nd
o
3rd

Pl.
mha
tha

Attanopada
Sg.
i
se
ttha

Pl.
mhase
vha
tthu

7. Perfect / Past infinitive (parokkha)

Parassapada
Person
Sg.
1st
a
2nd
e
3rd
a

Pl.
mha
tha
u

Attanopada
Sg.
i
ttho
tha

Pl.
mhe
vho
re

8. Past conditional (kalatipatti)

Parassapada
Person
Sg.
1st
ssa
2nd
sse
3rd
ss, ssa

Pl.
ssamh
ssatha
ssasu

Attanopada
Sg.
issa
issase
ssatha

Pl.
ssmhase
ssavhe
ssisu

QUESTION: SHOULD BE HAVE CONJUGATION BHU (LECTURED BY VEN. PIYARATANA)

1. Present (vattamn)
Parassapada
Person
Sg.
st
1
bhavmi
2nd
bhavasi
3rd
bhavati

Pl.
bhavma
bhavatha
bhavanti

Attanopada
Sg.

Pl.
bhave
bhavamhe
bhavase
bhavavhe
bhavate
bhavante

2. Past (ajjatan)
Person
1st
2nd
3rd

Parassapada
Sg.
bhavi
bhavo
bhavi, bhvi

Attanopada
Pl.
Sg.
Pl.
bhavimha, bhavimh
bhava
bhavimhe
bhavitha
bhavise
bhavivha
bhavum, bhavimsu
bhava
bhavu

3. Future (bhavissanti)
Parassapada
Person
Sg.
1st
bhavissmi
2nd
bhavissasi
rd
3
bhavissati

Attanopada
Sg.
bhavissa
bhavissase
bhavissate

Pl.
bhavissma
bhavissatha
bhavissanti

4. Imperative (pacam)
Parassapada
Person
Sg.
Pl.
st
1
bhavmi
bhavma
2nd
bhava, bhavahi bhavatha
3rd
bhavatu
bhavantu
5. Optative potential (sattam)
Parassapada
Person
Sg.
1st
bhaveyymi
2nd
bhaveyysi
rd
3
bhaveyya

Attanopada
Sg.
bhave
bhavassu
bhavata

Pl.
bhavissamhe
bhavissavhe
bhavissante

Pl.
bhavmase
bhavavho
bhavanta

Attanopada
Sg.
bhaveyya
bhavetho
bhavetha

Pl.
bhaveyyma
bhaveyytha
bhaveyyu

Pl.
bhaveyymhe
bhaveyyavho
bhavera

6662. SANDHI (EUPHONIC COMBINATIONS)

When two sounds are joined together, they sometimes undergo changes according to certain rules for the sake of
euphony is called Sandhi (combination or fitting together). The joining or combination occurs between the last letter of the
first and the last letter of the second word. The former, if it is a vowel, is called pubbasara and if a consonant is called
pubbavyabjana. The latter is called parasara and paravyabjana respectively.
Examples:

loka + agga

saj

thana

---- loka

=
agga

pubbasara
=
parasara

----

=
thana

pubbavyabjana
=
paravyabjana

saj

According to the rules apply to the joining together of two vowels, two consonants, we have vowel sandhi rules
and consonant rules, and another is the combination of j called niggahitasandhi. There are also a few cases of joining
together of consonants and vowels called mixed sandhi.
Thus, the section generally is divided into 4 sub-headings, namely:
(a) sarasandhi
(b) vyabjanasandhi
(b) niggahitasandhi
(c) vomissakasandhi

(1) SARASANDHI
The rules of vowel sandhi are based on the avoidance of hiatus. There is hiatus when two vowels come together.
Hiatus is avoided by the rules of elision, contraction, changing and insertion. With the rules of these, sometimes the 1 st or 2nd
vowel is lengthening or shortening.
The combination of vowels is effected by elision or changing of one of the two contiguous vowels. The words are
usually combined after elided. According to the rules of Sarasandhi, they may be divided as follows:

(A) ELISION
(i) First vowel is elided when vowel is before another vowel.
Examples:

(ii)

+
+
+
+

aggapuggalo
indriya
imani
assu

=
=
=
=

lokaggapuggalo
pabbindriya
tinimani
tayassu

=
=
=
=

Buddhanussati
atito
yopaya
rattuparoto

Sometimes when the 1st vowel is elided, the 2nd is lengthened

Examples:

(iii)

loka
pabba
tini
tayo

Buddha
ati
yopi
ratti

+
+
+
+

anussati
iti
aya
uparoto

When two contiguous vowels are dissimilar, the second is elided

Examples:

chaya
sabba
iti
akase

+
+
+
+

iva
iti
api
iva

=
=
=
=

chayava
sabbati
itipi
akaseva

The short vowel that follows o is elided and an apostrophe is put in its place.
kiso
+
asi
=
kisosi
so
+
ahaj
=
sohaj
(iv)

Sometimes when the 2nd vowel is elided, the 1st vowel is lengthened
Examples

deva
vi
sadhu
kijsu

+
+

+
+
iti
idha

iti
atinameti
=
=

=
devati
=
vitinameti
sadhuti
kijsudha

(B) CONTRACTION
(i)

When two vowels come together, they may be contracted into one
Examples: Two similar vowels are sometimes contracted into long of the same kind
a
+
a
=
a
a
+
a
=
a
a
+
a
=
a
a
+
a
=
a

* the result is similar in the case of

(ii)

When the vowel a or a combine with i or i is contracted to e

a
a

+
i

Examples:

(iii)

i i u u

i
=

iva
+
+
+

bandhusssa
jina
upa
ava

iritaj
ito
icca

=
=

bandhusseva
jineritaj
=
upeto
=
avecca

When the vowel a or a combine with u or u is contracted to o

a
a
Examples:

+
+

u
u

=
=

canda +
Yatha +
Udadhi +

o
o

udaya =
udaka =
umi

candodaya
yathodake
=
udadhomi

The contraction into e and o of sandhi applies mainly to the Gatha-language.

(C) CHANGING
(i) i

i e before dissimilar vowels is changed to y ,then the 2nd vowel sometimes is lengthened.
Examples:

aggi
me
sotthi +
satami +

+
+

agaro
ayaj
atthu
=
at the =

=
=

aggyagaro
myayaj
sotthyatthu
sotamyatthe

(ii) o u before dissimilar vowel is changed to v , then the 2nd is lengthened.

Examples:

so

+
yo
anu
na tu +

ahaj
+
+
eva

=
ayaj
eti

svahaj
=
yvayaj
=
anveti
=
na tveva

(D) INSERTION
(i)

Consonants, y v m d n t r l h are sometimes inserted between two vowels to avoid a hiatus.

Examples:

y
v

:
na
vuddhi +
:

idaj
=

+
+

avgulaj =
uccati =

eva

ti
pa

=
nayidaj
vuddhiyeva

m:

idha
lahu

+
+

ijjhati
essati

=
=

idhamijjhiati
lahumessati

d :

atta

attho

attadattho

tivavgulaj
pavuccati

tava

eva

n :

ito

ayati

t :

tasma
ajja

iha
+

tavadeva

itonayati

=
agge

tasmatiha
=
ajjatagge

r :

du
patu
ni

+
+
+

akkhato =
ahosa =
uttaro =

durakkhato
paturahosa
niruttaro

l :

cha
cha

+
+

abhibba =
ajsu
=

chalabhibba
chalajsu

h :

su

uju ca

suhuju ca

(B) VYABJANASANDHI
In Pali the consonants may be divided according to their strength or power of resistance and sometimes the vowel
before a consonant is lengthened or shortened for the sake of prosody.
(i)

vowel + consonant is generally reduplicated

A consonant after a vowel is generally reduplicated. An aspirate is reduplicated by an unaspirate, and an unaspirate

by itself.
Examples:

(ii)

rupa
du
vi
upa

+
+
+
+

khando =
karaj
=
banaj =
davo

Long vowel shortened before a reduplicated consonant

Examples:

para
a
tanha

+
+
khayo

kamo
khato
=

The exception to this rule are:

vedana +
khandho =
pabba +
khandho =
(iii)

vedanakkhandho
pabbakkhandho

khanti +
jayati +
mabbati +
nibbattati

paramaj =
soko
balo
+
dukkhaj

khanti paramaj
=
jayati soko
=
mabbati balo
=
nibbattti dukkhaj

vowel before a consonant sometimes is shortened

Examples:

(v)

=
parakkamo
=
akkhato
tanhakkhayo

vowel before a consonant is sometimes lengthened

Examples:

(iv)

rupakkhandho
dukkaraj
vibbanaj
=
upaddavo

bhovadi
Buddhe yadi va +

+
savake

So and eso before a consonant, o is changed into a

nama so hoti
=

=
bhovadi nama so hoti
buddhe yadi va savake

Examples:

eso
so
eso
so

+
+
+
+

dhammo=
muni =
patto
=
idani
=

esadhammo
sa muni
esa patto
sa idani

(C) NIGGAHITASANDHI
(i)

When a nasal vowel is followed by a consonant, the anusvara before mutes and nasals is changed into the
corresponding nasal
Examples:

dipaj
sayaj

+
+

saj

+
amataj +
evaj
+

(ii)

saj
puj
saj
patisaj +

+
+
+
lino

lahuko =
livgaj =
lapo
=

sallahuko
pullivgaj
=
sallapo
patisallino

taj
evaj
paccataj
taj khanaj

+
+
+

+
hi vo
eva
eva

hi tassa =
tab hi tassa
=
evab hi vo
=
paccatab-b-eva
=
tabkhanab-b-eva

saj
yaj
saj
anantarikaj

+
yogo
+
yad eva
+
yojanaj
yam ahu =

=
sabbogo
=
yabbad eva
=
sabbojanaj
anantarikabbam ahu

+
+
+
+

ahaj
avoca
atthaj
idaj

tam ahaj
etad avoca
tam atthaj ; tad atthaj
yad idaj ; yam idaj

j followed by a vowel becomes m or d

Examples:

(vi)

dado
me sutaj =

j followed by y are optionally changed into bb

Examples:

(v)

thanaj

dipavkaro
sayabjato
=
santhanaj
=
amatandado
evam me sutaj

j before e or h is changed to b and b is before e is reduplicated

Examples:

(iv)

=
=

j before l is transformed to l
Examples:

(iii)

karo
jato

taj
etaj
taj
yaj

=
=
=
=

j followed by a vowel or a consonant is elided and in some cases is lengthened

Examples:
tasaj

(vii)

+
+
ahaj
+

aggaj
sasanaj
=
ahaj

=
vidunaggaj
=
Buddhana sasanaj
tasahaj
=
evahaj

A vowel after j is elided and sometimes changed stated in (i)

Examples:

(viii)

vidunaj
Buddhanaj
+
evaj

abhinanduj
halaj
tvaj
uttarij

+
+
+
+

iti
idani
asi
api

=
abhinandun ti
halan dani
=
tvaj si
=
uttarim pi

is sometimes inserted before a vowel or a consonant

Examples:
ava

chakku +
+

udapadi =
siro

cakkhuj udapadi
=
avajsiro

(D) VOMISSAKASANDHI
When i before a dissimilar vowel is changed to y i.e., according to the rule of vowel sandhi rules of changing (i) ).
y together with preceding consonant, undergoes several changes.

(i) ty becomes cc
Examples:

iti
ati
jati
pati

+
+
+
+

evaj
antaj
andho
ayo

=
=
=

ity
aty
jaty
=

+
+
+
paty

evaj
antaj
andho
+

=
=
=
ayo

iccevaj
accantaj
jacandho
=

yadi
+
nadi + a

evaj

=
=

yady
nady

+
+

evaj
a

yajjevaj
=
najja

adhi

agama =

agama =

patccayo
(ii)

dy becomes jj
Examples:

(iii)

dhy becomes jjh

Examples:
ajjhagama

bodhi

avga

adhy
bodhy

avga

bojjhavga

(iv) bhy becomes bbh

Examples:

abhi
+
okaso = abhy + okaso
abhi + uggacchati = abhy + uggacchati =

=
abbhokaso
abbhuggacchati

(v) py becomes pp
Examples:

api
api

+
+

ekacce =
ekada =

apy
apy

+
+

ekacce =
ekada =

appekacce
appekada

666SANDHI DIVIDED INTO:

1. Vowel (svara)
2. Consonant (vyabjana)
3. Nasal (niggahita)
4. Mixed (vomissaka)
- There are certain words:
1. lopa = dropped
2. adesa = replaced
3. agama = inserted
4. samikarana = assimilation
5. svarabhakti = anaptikis
Phonetics is a part of grammar which deal with the elementary vocal sounds. In pali it is
technically called sikkaha or akkhata sandhi. The letter expression being used in contradict
distinction with para-sandhi or words sandhi. There are various changes that occur in the
articulation or pronunciation of syllabus or sounds in simple words. The main cause of these
changes is generally described as laziness or the tendency to express the sound with least effort.
All the middle Indo-Aryan speech including pali are marked by the simplification of the sound
system which prevailed in the old Indo-Aryan speechs (Vedic Sanskrit). Some of the old sounds
were simply dropped, and in the combination of dissimilar sound they were either change to
similar ones or modified and replaced by an easier altogether different sound. This tendency is
generally regarded as a phase of linguistic decay. When pali is a literal speech came to be
standardized, some of the lost sounds were restored in it and a few others were compensated.
The process of decay in the sound system which is started from early times and continued to
operate freely on all Prakrit dialects. Thus to a considerable extend by the standardization,
the phonetics changes in pali as the other languages may be broadly divided into two classes,
one comprising those that can be explained by some universal principles and the other
relating to those that are attributed to local or dialectic reasions. The content changes belonging
to the second class, takes place more or less owing to the influence of other local or neighboring
dialects having their own peculiar , words and pronunciation.
As mentioned earlier, sandhi is the union or combination of two letters or sound. Sandhi
helps to utter words easily and simply like tadhita (secondary derivative), kitaka (primary
derivative), samasa (compound). Sandhi also shorten the sound, samada, kitaka and tadhita
summarize not only the sound but also meaning. It is important that by combination, sound can
be shortened. In Sanskrit, combination are rigid and highly formulized, but in pali it is
free and unconventional . Tada sandhi or word sandhi is not importing in pali, it
depends on the writer. Both Sanskrit and Pali combination are much more frequent

in verses than prose for the sake of meter, e.g., - v v v v v v = mano pubbangama dhamma. It
is accession combine word in verses. According to Wineisch, words sandh of pali in
comparison with Sanskrit certainly appear to be more order and natural. They do not pretend to
be consistent and universal because they are lots of exception in most cases. So we have lot of
variation in pali combination. It is very important that this variation reveal the phases and
influences of the different provincial mode of pronunciation.
-

Western part of India Sanskrit, known as Aryavarta.

Eastern part Magadhi, known as Non-Aryans
Western part Brahmins were respected --- Brahmanas
Eastern part Ksyatriyas were respected --- Sramanas
Prakrit it has different kinds, around 20, uncluding Magadhi etc.
Vedic old Indo-Aryan
Classical Sanskrit Prakrits, i.e., middle Indo-Aryan
Others modern Indo-Aryans, e.g., Sinhala etc.

17/2/2000
1. Elision (lopa) e.g., loka + aggo > lokaggo (the great of the world, i.e, Buddha)
2. Insertion (agama) e.g., atta + attam > attadattam (each and everybody)
- Mitra vadagamo = like a friend
3. Substitution (adesa), e.g., saj + yoga > sabbogo
- Satru vadadeso = like a enemy
4. Lengthening (dirgha) e.g., guru + upadesa > gurupadesa (advise of the teacher)
5. Shortening (hrasva), e.g., eso + dhammo > esa dhammo
6. Assimilation (samikarana) e.g., atma > atta
- utpala > uppala (lotus)
- unmada > ummada (mad)
7. Dissimilation (asamikarana) e.g., guru > garu
8. Reduplication (dvitva) e.g., ni + mala > nimmala; maha + dhana > mahaddhana.
- Sandhi or combination can be divided into four categories:
(6) Svara sandhi combination of vowels
(7) Vyabjana sandhi combination of consonants
(8) Niggahita sandhi combination of vowels, consonants and nasals
(9) Vomissaka sandhi mixed combination and shortening and lengthening.

666EUPHONIC COMBINATION (2000)

Phonetic or phonology is a part of grammar, which deal with the elementary vocal, sound. In Pali it is technically called
Sikkha or Akkhara Sandhi. The letter expression being used in contradistinction with Padasandhi or word Sandhi. There are
various changes that occur in the articulation or pronunciation of syllabus or sound in simple word. The main cause of these
changes is generally described as laziness or the tendency to express a sound with the least effort.

All the middle Indo-Aryans speeches including Pali are marked by the simplification of the sound
system which prevail in the Old Indo-Aryans speeches (Vedic and Sanskrit). Some of the old sounds
were seemly dropped, and in a combination of dissimilar sound they either change to similar one or
modified and replace by and easier and all together different sound. This tendency is generally regarded
as a place of linguistic decay. When Pali a literally speech came to be standardise some of the last
sounds were restored in it and a few other were compensated. The process of decay in the sound system
which started from early time and continue to operate freely on all the Prakrit dialect. Thus to a
considerable extend by the standardisation of Pali the phonetic changes in Pali as in other languages
and it may be broadly divided into two classes:
1. Comprising those that can be explained by some universal principle and
2. The other relating to those that are attributed to local or dialect reason.
The phonetic changes belonging to the second class take place more or less owing to the influence of
other local or neighbouring dialect having their own federal mode of pronunciation.
As mentioned earlier Sandhi is the union or combination of two letters or sound. Sandhi help to utter
words easily and simply like taddhita-secondly derivative, Kittaka-primary derivative, Samasacompound Sandhi also shortens the sound. Samasa, taddhida and Kittaka summarise not only the sound
but also meaning. It is important that by combination of sound, sound can be shorten no meaning. In
Sanskrit combination are rigid and highly formulised but in Pali it is free and unconventional.
Padasandhi or word Sandhi is not imperative in Pali. It depends on writers. Both in Sanskrit and Pali
combination are much more frequent in verses than prose, for the sake of metre (prosody). It is
essential to combine word in verses. According to E.windisch words Sandhi of Pali in comparison with
Sanskrit certainly appear to be older and natural. They do not pretend to be consistent and universal
because there are lot of exception in more cases. So we have lot of variation in Pali combination. It is
very important that the variation prevail the traces and influences of the different provincial modes of
pronunciation.
There are many rules to combine words. They are run as follows:
1. Elision (Lopa) = e.g. Loga+aggo = lokagga
2. Insertion (Agama) = e.g. Atta+ attam = attadattam
3. Substitution (Adesa) = e.g. Sam+ yogo =sannogo
4. Lengthening (dIrgha) = e.g. Guru+ upadesa =gurupadesa
5. Assimilation (sAmikara) = e.g. Atma>atta
6. Dissimulation (asAmikaraBa) = e.g. Guru>garu
7. Reduplication (Dvitva) =e.g. Ni+ mala= nimmala.

Combination can be divide into four groups:

1. Svara Sandhi
2. vyaGjana sandhi
3. Niggahita Sandhi and
4. Vomissaka Sandhi. Mixed sandhi ( for definition see the New Pali course )

1.Svara Sandhi

1.There is the dropping of final vowel, followed by a vowel, at the end of the first also vowel, and
initial also vowel. E.g:
1. Attha + ime = atthime
2. ekA + itthi = ekitthi ( one woman)
3. Eka + Una = ekuna ( 19)
4. Giri + agga = giragga (mountain peak)
5. Maha + inda = mahinda (owl)
2.Sometimes the succeeding vowel is dropped when there is preceding vowel( Purva svara lopa).E.g:
1. chAyA+iva=chayava
2. cakkhU+indriyam=cakkhundriyam
3. Vande+ahaM= vandehaM
Yassa+idAni= yassadAni ( what now)
3.When there are dissimilar vowels in the place preceding and succeeding, another vowel is inserted,
instead of both preceding and succeeding.
1. Canda+udaya=candodaya
2. Vijja+udaya=vijjodaya
3. Na+upeti=nopeti
4. Jina+iritam=jineritam
4.

When a and a followed by i i and u u they change to e and o.

I,I > e
u,u> o. e.g:
1. up+ ikkhati =upekkhati
2. jina+ irita =jinerita
3. canda+ udaya =candodaya

4. vama+uru =vamuru-left thigh

5. i i or e before a dissimilar vowel is sometimes changed to y and then the

succeeding vowel is sometimes lengthened. e.g:
aggi+agara=agyagara
dasi+ahoti=dasyahoti
te+aham=tyaham
6. If final vowel is dropped, there is sometimes the lengthening of the succeeding vowel. e.g:
1. na+assa=nassa- not his, not for him
2. tada+aham=tadaham
3. bahu+upakaram=bahupakaram
4. appassuto+ayam=appassutayam- this one is uneducated.
7. If succeeding vowel is dropped, the proceeding is also lengthened. e.g:
1. aggi+iva+ aggiva
2. pati+iha=patiha
3. sadhu+iti=sadhuti
4. kimsu+idha=kimsudha- what is here
5. vijju+iva=vijjuva- like a lightening
8. When o and u are proceeding those vowels are sometimes chanced to va and
succeeding vowel is lengthened. e.g:
1. yo.+aham=yvaham-that I
2.

anu+eti=anveti

3. anu+addhamasam=anvaddhamasam
4. su+akkhata=svakkhata
5. su+agatam=svagatam-welcome.
9.Sometimes the consonants ya, va, ma,da, na, ta, ra, la are inserted between two consecutive
vowels. e.g:
(ya)
1. na+imassa=nayimassa

2. vihare+eva=vihareyeva- only in the temple

3. na+idha=nayidha
4. na+idaM=nayidaM
5. Vuddhi=eva= vuddhiyeva
(va)
1. ti+aNgula=tivangula
2. pa+uccati=pavuccati
(ma)
3. idha+aham=idhamaham
4. lahu+essati=lahumessati

(da)
1. atta+attam=attadattam
2. puna+eva= punadeva, again indeed
3. tava+eva=tavadeva, initially
(na)
1. ito+ayati= itonAyati = come from here
2. ratti+utthana= ratthinutthana=getting up at night
(ta)
1. ajja+agge=ajjatagge-from today
2. tasmA+iha=tasmatiha-because of that
(ra)
1. dhi+atthu=dhirathu-may it be prosperous, wise
2. raja+iva=rajariva- like a king
3. patU+ahosi=paturahosi- become manifest

(la)
1. cha+abbiGGA=chalabhinna-six super-knowledge
2. cha+aNga=chalanga-six parts
(H)
Su+ujUca= suhujUca
putha+eva=puthAgeva

10.

Sometimes the prefix (upasagga) adhi followed by a vowel is changed to ajjha e.g:
1. adhi+acara=ajjhacara-sexual transgression
2. adhi+asaya=ajjhasaya-intention
3. adhi+esita=ajjhesita-requested

11.

Sometimes adhi becomes abbha e.g:

1) abhi+antara=abbhantara-internal
2) abhi+agata=abbhagata-just arrived
3) abhi+okasa=abbhokasa- space, sky

12.ati sometimes becomes acca. pati becomes pacca. iti becomes icca e.g:
1. ati+anta=accanta-extreme end
2. pati+anta=paccanta-border
3. iti+eva=iccaeva

666SANDHI =EUPHONIC COMBINATION

The two letters of the similar word or of two different words are joined together for the sake of
euphony the union is called Sandhi (combination or fitting together). In the Sandhi, there are three
separations, Sarasandhi--combination of vowels, Vyanjanasandhi ---combination of a vowel and a
consonant, and
Sarasandhi--combination of vowels, when a word ending in a vowel is joined to a word beginning with
a vowel, or when two adjacent vowels of the same word are joined together.

Vyanjanasandhi -combination of a vowel and a consonant, when a word ending in a vowel is joined to
a word begins with a consonant.
Niggahittasandhi is combination of n and a vowel or a consonant, when a word or a syllable ending in n
is joined to a word or a syllable beginning either with a vowel or a consonant,
(I) Svarasandhi vowel-Sandhi

Combination of vowels is effected by elision or change of one of the two contiguous vowels. A vowel
before another vowel is sometimes elided.
Examples
Vandiyaggam
= Vandiya+aggam, A before A, one must be
elided
Tanevasanani
= Taneva+asanani
A ---A, A -------Amanussupaddavo
= Amanussa+uppaddavo
A ---U, A -------Pannindriyam
= Panna+ indriyam
A ---I,A -------Tinimani
=Tini+ imani
I
I, I -------Nohi h etam
= Nohi+etam
I
E, I -------Bhikkhunovado
= Bhikkhuni+ ovado
I
O, I -------Matupatthanam
= Matu+ uppathanam
U
U, U -------Sametayasma
= Sametu+ayasma
U
A, U -------Dhanam matthi
= Dhanam me + atthi
E
A, E -------Sabbeva
= Sabbe+ eva
A
E, E -------Asantettha
= Asanto+ettha
O
E,
O -------Tayassu
= Tayo+assu
O
A, O -------When the two contiguous vowels are dissimilar, the second is sometimes elided.
a+a, a+a, a+a, a+a are simillar; so are i+i, etc., a+i, u, e, or o are dissimilar; so are i+a, u, e, o and so
on.
Examples
Chayava
Itipi
Devata nusi
Akatannu si
Vandehan
Sohan
Chakkhudriyam
Kathava ka
Patova
Moggalanosi

= chaya +iva
= iti +api
= devata nu + asi
= akatannu + asi
= vande + ahan a e,
= so + ahan
= chakkhu + indriyam
= katha + evaka
= pato +eva
= moggalano +asi

i after a,
i must be dropped
a after I,
a ----------------a u, a
a u, a
a
a o, a
i u, i
e a, e
e o, e
a o, a

The vowel a or a combinations with a following i or i to e; with a following u or u to o (i.e., a+ i or i >

e; a+ u or u> 0).
Bhandhusa + iva
Jina +iritan
Canda + udayo
Yatha + udake
Upa + ikkhati
Na + upeti
Udadhi + umi

= bhandhusa eva
= jineritam
= candodayo
= yathodake
= upekkhati
= nopeti
= udadhomi

(II) Consonant-Sandhi

A consonant after a vowel is generally reduplicated. An aspirate is reduplicated by an un-aspirate,

and an un-aspirate by itself.

Examples
Rupa+khando
Du+karam
Anu+gaho
Pari+ cajati
Seta+chatam
Tatre+thino
Patthama+ jhanam
Vi+nanam
Upa+davo
Ni+dhana
Su+patitthito
Ni+palam
Du+bhikkham
Ni+malo
Appa+suto

=Rupakkhando
=Dukkaram
=Anuggaho
=Pariccajati
=Settacchatam
=Tatratthino
=Patthamajjhanam
=Vinnanam
=Upaddavo
=Niddhano
=Suppatitthito
=Nippalam
=Dubbhikkam
=Nimmalo
=Appassuto

A long vowel before a reduplicated consonant is often shortened.

Example

Para+kamo
A+khato
Tanha+khayo
Maha+phalam
A+sado

=Parakkamo
=Akkhato
=Tanhakkhayo
=Mahapphalam
=Assado

The exceptions to this rule are:

Vedana+ khando
Yath+kamam
Panna+khandho

=vedanakkhandho
=yathakkamam
=pannakkhandho

A vowel before a consonant is sometimes lengthened and sometimes shortened for the sake of
prosody.
Example

Lengthened
Khanti+paramam
=khantiparamam
Jayati+soko
=jayati soko
Mannati+balo=mannati balo
Nibbattati+dukkham
=nibbattatti dukkham
Shortened
Bhovadi+nama so hoti
Yitthan va+hutan va+ loke
Buddhe yadi va+ savake

=bhavati nama so hoti

=yattham va hutamva loke
=buddhe yadi va savake

O in so and eso before a consonant is sometimes changed into a.

Example

Eso+ dhammo =esa dhammo

So+muni
=sa muni
So+ silava
=sa silava
Eso+patto
=esa pato
Eso+ idani
=esa idani

(III)Niggahita-Sandhi

N before a vagga-consonant may, sometimes, be transformed to the nasal or the fifth letter of the
group to which that consonant belongs.
Examples

Dipan + Karo = Dipankaro

Rann+ jaho
San+thanan
Tan+dhanan
Tan +phalan
Sayan+jato
Amatan+dado
Evan+me sutan

= Rananjaho
= Santhanam
=Tandhanam
=Tanphalam
=Sayanjato
=Amatandado
= Evam me sutam

N before l is sometimes transformed to l.

Examples

San+ lahuko
Pun+lingan
San+lapo
Patisan+lino

=Sallahuko
=Pullingam
=Sallapo
=Patisallino

N before e or h is sometimes changed to n; n before e is reduplicated.

Examples

Paccattan+ eva
Tan+hi tassa
Evan +hivo
Tan+ khanan+eva

=Paccattan-n-eva
=Tan hi tassa
=Evan hino
= tankhanan n eva

N followed by combines with y to form nn.

Example

San+yogo
Yan+ yad eva
San+ yojanan
Anantarikan +yam ahu

= Sannogo
=Yannad eva
= sannojanam
= anantarikannam ahu

N followed by a vowel sometimes becomes m or d.

Examples
Tan+ahan
Etan+ avoca
Kin+ etan
Tan+ atthan
Tam+ anatta
Yan+ idan

=Tam aham
=etad avoca
= kim etam
=Tam attham
=Tad anatta
= Yad idam; yam idam

N followed by a vowel or a consonant is sometime elided; then the vowel in some cases is
lengthened.
Examples

Tasan+ ahan
Evan+ ahan
Vidunam+aggan
Buddhanan+sasanam
Adasin+ahan
Ariyasaccanam+dassanam

A vowel after n is sometimes elided; the n undergoes the change stated in 0Sf1 in most instances.

Abhinandun
Cakkan+iva
Halan+idani
Tvan+ asi
Idan + api
Uttarin+api

=tasaham
=evaham
=vidunaggam
=buddhana sasanam
= adasaham
=ariyasaccana sasanam

+ iti

=abhindunti
=cakkam eva
=halan dani
=tvansi
=idam pi.
= uttarim pi

N, is sometimes inserted before a vowel or a consonant.

Examples
Chakku+ udapadi
Anu+thulani
Manopubba+ gama
Yava cidha
Ava+siro

=chakkum udapadi
=anum-thuiani
=manopubbangama
= yavac idha
= avamsiro
Mixed Sandhi

When I before A dissimilar vowel is changed to Y (according to the above rule), that Y, together with
the preceding consonant, undergoes several changes.

I.

ty becomes cc

iti+ evan= ity+evan

ati+ antan=aty+antan
jati+andho=jaty+andho
iti +adi=ity+adi
pati+ayo= paty+ayo

=iccevam
=accantam
=jaccandho
=iccadi
=paccayo
II.

yadi +evan=yady+evan
nadi+ a= nady+a
III.

dy beccomes jj
=yajjevam
=najja
dhy becomes jjh

adhi+agama= adhy+agama =ajjhagama

adhi+okasa=adhy+okaso
=ajjhokaso
Bhodhi+anga=bodhy+anga =bojjhanga
IV.

bhy becomes bbh

abhi+uggacchati=abhy+uggacchati
abhi+okasa=abhy+okaso
=abbhokaso
abhi+accikhanan= abhy+acikkhanan

api+ ekacce= apy+ekacce

api+ekada=apy+ekada

= abbhuggachati
=abbhcikkhanan

V.
by becomes pp
= appekacce
=appekada

666SANDHI
1. Sarasandhi = vowel sandhi
If there are 2 similar vowels, the first is deleted, after delete, we cannot sperate the wordl
e.g:
Loka +
addapuggala =
lokaggapuggalo
(the greatest person in the world)
Pabba +
indriyam
=
pabbindriyaj (the sense of wisdom/faculty of
wisdom)
Tini
+
mani
=
tinimani (these three) neuter
No hi +
etaj
=
no hetaj
(this is not so)
Bhikkhuni+ ovado
=
bhikkunovado (advise for nun/instruction for nun)

Matu +
sametu +
abhibhu +
dhanamme+
wealth)
sabbe
+
tayo
facts)
asanto +

upatthanaj
ayasma
ayatanaj
atthi
eva
+

matupatthanaj (supporting of the mother)

=
sametayasma (venerable may classify himself)
=
abhibhayatanaj (faculty oppression)
=
dhana + me (dhanamme) dhanammatthi
(I have

=
assudhamma =

ettha

sabbeva (almost all; definitely all ; certainly all)

tayassudhamma (three facts; there will be three
asantettha (here the bad people; unculture people)

2. If two vowels is dissimilar, the following (second) vowel is deleted.

Yassa +
Sabba +
Chaya +
Iti
+
Assamani+
Cakkhu +
Akatabbu+
Akaso +
Te
Vande +
So
Cattaro +
Vasalo +
Moggallano +
Katha
+
Pato

idani =
iti
iva
api
asi
indriyaj
asi
iva
+
api
ahaj =
+ ahaj
ime
iti
asi
eva ka =
+
eva

yassadani (now of someone)

=
sabbati (perception thus /also)
=
chayava
(shadow; light as shadow)
=
itipu (thus /also)
=
assamanisi
(you are not the real monk)
=
cakkhundriyaj (the sense of eye)
=
akatabbusi (you are ungrateful)
=
akaseva (as in the sky)
=
tepi (they also)
vandehaj (I worship)
=
sohaj (that I )
=
cattarome (these four)
=
vasaloti (as a lowcaste)
=
moggallanosi (was) are
kathava ka (talk; what to talk; nothing to talk)
=
patova (early morning)

3. The vowel a or a combine with following i i or u u

()
bandhussa
upa
upa
ava
jina
na
canda
yatha

+
+

iva
+
+ ito
+
+
+
udayo
udake

=
bandhusseva (as of relation)
ikkhati =
upekkhati
(looks indifferently)
=
upeto (endowed with)
icca
=
avecca (having known)
iritaj =
jineritaj (spoken by the conqueror)
udayo =
nopeti (does not fit; not applicable)
=
candodaya (rising of moon)
=
yathodake (as in the water)

when the first vowel is deleted, the following i i u u become = e o

i
+ i
=
e

+ u

= o

4. If first vowel deleted, the 2nd vowel is lengthened: ()

tatra
buddha+
sa
sabbava
tada
yani
gacchami
ati
kiki
bahu
madhu +
su
yopi +
idani +
sace
appassuto
itaro
saddha +
kamma +
kamma)
tatha
+
ratti
vi
+

+
ayaj =
tatrayaj
anussati
=
buddhanussati (reflection of the Buddha)
+
atthika =
satthika (successful)
+ assa
=
sabbavassa (perception (his) would be)
+
ahaj =
tadahaj (then I)
+
idha bhutani =
yanidhabhutani (whoever being are here)
+
iti
=
gacchamiti
(I go)
+
ito
=
atito (gone)
+
uva
=
kikiva (like bird have to protect our precepts)
+
upakaraj
=
bahupakaraj (many assistant)
udaka =
madhudakaj (water mixed with water) sweet water
+
upadhatitaj =
supadhatitaj (well considered ; well thought)
ayaj =
yopayaj (whoever this)
ahaj =
sacayaj (now I )
+
ayaj =
sacayaj (if this)
+
ayaj =
appassutayaj (this person who is little heart; uneducated)
+
itarena =
itaritarena (other; by others and others)
idha vittaj
=
saddhidha vittaj (confidence is the wealth)
upaissayo
=
kammupanissayo (fate of kamma; result of
upamaj=
tathupamaj (as simily; as ; e.g.)
+
uparato
=
rattuparato
(not taking meal in the night)
upasamo
=
vupasamo
(specification)

5. According to the new rules, the 1st vowel is lengthened.

Lokassa
Deva +
Vi
Vi
Savghayi +
Jivitahetu+
Vijju
+
Kijsu
+
Sadhu +

+
iti
+
+
api
api
iva
idha
iti

iti
=
atipatti =
atinamenti
=
=
=
=
=

=
lokassati (of the world; to the world)
devati (the deity) indeclinable
vitipatti
(over stepping)
=
spent
savghatipi (double cloths ; robe)
jivitahetupi (evil for the sake of living)
vijjuva (as lightning)
kijsudha (what in this world)
sadhuti(well)

6662. SANDHI (EUPHONIC COMBINATIONS)

When two sounds are joined together, they sometimes undergo changes according to certain rules
for the sake of euphony is called Sandhi (combination or fitting together). The joining or combination
occurs between the last letter of the first word and the last letter of the second word. The former, if it is
a vowel, is called pubbasara and if a consonant is called pubbavyabjana. The latter is called
parasara and paravyabjana respectively.
Examples:

loka

+ agga

saj

---- loka

>
agga

pubbasara
>

parasara
thana ----

saj

>
pubbavyabjana
thana >
paravyabjana

According to the rules apply to the joining together of two vowels, two consonants, we have
vowel sandhi rules and consonant sandhi rules, and another is the combination of j called
niggahitasandhi. There are also a few cases of joining together of consonants and vowels called mixed
sandhi.
Sandhi generally is divided into 4 sub-headings, namely:
1. sarasandhi
2. vyabjanasandhi
3. niggahitasandhi
4. Vomissakasandhi 666SANDHI =EUPHONIC COMBINATION
The two letters of the similar word or of two different words are joined together for the sake of
euphony the union is called Sandhi (combination or fitting together). In the Sandhi, there are three
separations, Sarasandhi--combination of vowels, Vyanjanasandhi ---combination of a vowel and a
consonant, and
Sarasandhi--combination of vowels, when a word ending in a vowel is joined to a word beginning with
a vowel, or when two adjacent vowels of the same word are joined together.
Vyanjanasandhi -combination of a vowel and a consonant, when a word ending in a vowel is joined to
a word begins with a consonant.
Niggahittasandhi is combination of n and a vowel or a consonant, when a word or a syllable ending in n
is joined to a word or a syllable beginning either with a vowel or a consonant,
(I) Sarasandhi vowel-Sandhi

Combination of vowels is effected by elision or change of one of the two contiguous vowels. A vowel
before another vowel is sometimes elided.

Vandiyaggam
Tanevasanani
Amanussupaddavo
Pannindriyam
Tinimani
Nohi h etam
Bhikkhunovado
Matupatthanam
Sametayasma
Dhanam matthi
Sabbeva
Asantettha
Tayassu

Examples
= Vandiya+aggam,
A before A, one must be
elided
= Taneva+asanani
A ---- A, A -------= Amanussa+uppaddavo A ---- U, A -------= Panna+ indriyam
A ---I,A -------=Tini+ imani
I
I, I -------= Nohi+etam
I
E, I -------= Bhikkhuni+ ovado
I
O, I -------= Matu+ uppathanam
U
U, U -------= Sametu+ayasma
U
A, U -------= Dhanam me + atthi
E
A, E -------= Sabbe+ eva
A
E, E -------= Asanto+ettha O
E, O -------= Tayo+assu
O
A, O --------

When the two contiguous vowels are dissimilar, the second is sometimes elided.
a+a, a+a, a+a, a+a are simillar; so are i+i, etc., a+i, u, e, or o are dissimilar; so are i+a, u, e, o and so
on.
Examples

Chayava
Itipi
Devata nusi
Akatannu si
Vandehan
Sohan
Chakkhudriyam
Kathava ka
Patova
Moggalanosi

= chaya +iva
= iti +api
= devata nu + asi
= akatannu + asi
= vande + ahan a e,
= so + ahan
= chakkhu + indriyam
= katha + evaka
= pato +eva
= moggalano +asi

i after a,
i must be dropped
a after I,
a ----------------a u, a
a u, a
a
a o, a
i u, i
e a, e
e o, e
a o, a

The vowel a or a combinations with a following i or i to e; with a following u or u to o (i.e., a+ i or i >

e; a+ u or u> 0).
Bhandhusa + iva
Jina +iritan
Canda + udayo
Yatha + udake

= bhandhusa eva
= jineritam
= candodayo
= yathodake

Upa + ikkhati
Na + upeti
Udadhi + umi

= upekkhati
= nopeti
= udadhomi

(II) Consonant-Sandhi

15)

A consonant after a vowel is generally reduplicated. An aspirate is reduplicated by an unaspirate, and an un-aspirate by itself.

Examples
Rupa+khando
Du+karam
Anu+gaho
Pari+ cajati
Seta+chatam
Tatre+thino
Patthama+ jhanam
Vi+nanam
Upa+davo
Ni+dhana
Su+patitthito
Ni+palam
Du+bhikkham
Ni+malo
Appa+suto

=Rupakkhando
=Dukkaram
=Anuggaho
=Pariccajati
=Settacchatam
=Tatratthino
=Patthamajjhanam
=Vinnanam
=Upaddavo
=Niddhano
=Suppatitthito
=Nippalam
=Dubbhikkam
=Nimmalo
=appassuto

A long vowel before a reduplicated consonant is often shortened.

Example

Para+kamo
=Parakkamo
A+khato
=Akkhato
Tanha+khayo
=Tanhakkhayo
Maha+phalam
=Mahapphalam
A+sado
=Assado
The exceptions to this rule are:

Vedana+ khando
Yath+kamam
Panna+khandho

1.

=vedanakkhandho
=yathakkamam
=pannakkhandho

A vowel before a consonant is sometimes lengthened and sometimes shortened for

the sake of prosody.
Example

Lengthened
Khanti+paramam
=khantiparamam
Jayati+soko
=jayati soko
Mannati+balo=mannati balo
Nibbattati+dukkham
=nibbattatti dukkham
Shortened
Bhovadi+nama so hoti
Yitthan va+hutan va+ loke
Buddhe yadi va+ savake

=bhavati nama so hoti

=yattham va hutamva loke
=buddhe yadi va savake

O in so and eso before a consonant is sometimes changed into a.

Example

Eso+ dhammo =esa dhammo

So+muni
=sa muni
So+ silava
=sa silava
Eso+patto
=esa pato
Eso+ idani
=esa idani

(III)Niggahita-Sandhi

(1)

N before a vagga-consonant may, sometimes, be transformed to the nasal or the fifth

letter of the group to which that consonant belongs.
Examples

Dipan + Karo = Dipankaro

Rann+ jaho
= Rananjaho
San+thanan
= Santhanam
Tan+dhanan
=Tandhanam
Tan +phalan
=Tanphalam
Sayan+jato
=Sayanjato
Amatan+dado =Amatandado
Evan+me sutan
= Evam me sutam

1)

N before l is sometimes transformed to l.

Examples

San+ lahuko
Pun+lingan
San+lapo
Patisan+lino

=Sallahuko
=Pullingam
=Sallapo
=Patisallino

13) N before e or h is sometimes changed to n; n before e is reduplicated.

Examples
Paccattan+ eva
Tan+hi tassa
Evan +hivo
Tan+ khanan+eva

=Paccattan-n-eva
=Tan hi tassa
=Evan hino
= tankhanan n eva

N followed by combines with y to form nn.

Example

San+yogo
= Sannogo
Yan+ yad eva =Yannad eva
San+ yojanan = sannojanam
Anantarikan +yam ahu
= anantarikannam ahu
1. N followed by a vowel sometimes becomes m or d.
Examples
Tan+ahan
Etan+ avoca
Kin+ etan
Tan+ atthan
Tam+ anatta
Yan+ idan

=Tam aham
=etad avoca
= kim etam
=Tam attham
=Tad anatta
= Yad idam; yam idam

N followed by a vowel or a consonant is sometime elided; then the vowel in some cases is
lengthened.
Examples

Tasan+ ahan
Evan+ ahan
Vidunam+aggan
Buddhanan+sasanam
Adasin+ahan
Ariyasaccanam+dassanam

=tasaham
=evaham
=vidunaggam
=buddhana sasanam
= adasaham
=ariyasaccana sasanam

A vowel after n is sometimes elided; the n undergoes the change stated in 0Sf1 in most instances.

Abhinandun
Cakkan+iva
Halan+idani
Tvan+ asi
Idan + api
Uttarin+api

+ iti

=abhindunti
=cakkam eva
=halan dani
=tvansi
=idam pi.
= uttarim pi

N, is sometimes inserted before a vowel or a consonant.

Chakku+ udapadi
=chakkum udapadi
Anu+thulani
=anum-thuiani
Manopubba+ gama
=manopubbangama
Yava cidha
= yavac idha
Ava+siro
= avamsiro
Mixed Sandhi
When I before A dissimilar vowel is changed to Y (according to the above rule), that Y, together with
the preceding consonant, undergoes several changes.

I.

iti+ evan= ity+evan

ati+ antan=aty+antan
jati+andho=jaty+andho
iti +adi=ity+adi
pati+ayo= paty+ayo

ty becomes cc

=iccevam
=accantam
=jaccandho
=iccadi
=paccayo
II.

dy beccomes jj

yadi +evan=yady+evan
nadi+ a= nady+a
III.

=yajjevam
=najja
dhy becomes jjh

adhi+agama= adhy+agama =ajjhagama

adhi+okasa=adhy+okaso
=ajjhokaso
Bhodhi+anga=bodhy+anga =bojjhanga
IV.

bhy becomes bbh

abhi+uggacchati=abhy+uggacchati
abhi+okasa=abhy+okaso
=abbhokaso
abhi+accikhanan= abhy+acikkhanan

api+ ekacce= apy+ekacce

api+ekada=apy+ekada

= abbhuggachati
=abbhcikkhanan

V.
by becomes pp
= appekacce
=appekada

QUESTION: EXPLAIN THE VOWEL (SANDHI) WITH EXAMPLE (LECTURED BY VEN. PIYARATANA)
Combination of vowels is affected by elision or change of one of the two contiguous vowels.
(1)

A vowel before another vowel is sometimes elided:

a before a :
vandiya + agga
= vandiyagga
a before :
t eva + asanani
= tan evasanani
o before a :
tayo + assu
= tayassu

(2)

When two contiguous vowels are dissimilar, the second is sometimes elided:
i after :
chy + iva
= chyva
a after i :
iti + api
= itipi
a after o :
so + aha
= so'ha

(3)

The vowel a or combines with a following i or to e; with a following u or to o

(i.e., a + i or = e ; a + u or = o):
bandhussa + iva
= vandhuss'eva
canda + udayo = candodayo
na + upeti
= nopeti

(4)

When the first vowel is elided, the second is sometimes lengthened:

tatra + aya
= tatr + aya
= tatrya
tad + aha
= tad + aha
= tadha
sace + aya
= sac + aya
= sacya

(5)

Sometimes the first vowel becomes long when the second is elided:

deva + iti
sdhu + iti
lokassa + iti

= deva + ti
= sdhu + ti
= lokassa + ti

= devti
= sdhti
= lokassti

(6)
i, or o before a dissimilar vowel is sometimes changed to y; then in some places the second vowel is
lengthened:
aggi + agro
= aggy + agro= aggygro
me + aya
= my + aya
= myya
sattam + at the= sattamyatthe
(7)

o or before a dissimilar vowel is changed to v; sometimes the second vowel is lengthened:

so + aha
= sv + aha
= svha
su + akkhto
= sv + akkhto = svakkhto
na tu + eva
= natveva

(8)

Consonants y, v, m, d, n, t, r, l, h are sometimes inserted between two vowels to avoid a hiatus.

na + ida
= nayida
pa + uccati
= pavuccati
ajja + agge
= ajjatagge
su + uj ca
= suj ca

666SVARA SANDHI (VOWEL COMBINATION)

-

(1) There is a dropping of final vowel followed by a vowel.

attha +
ime >
atthime
eka
+
itthi
>
ekitthi.
ekitthiya kare papaj labhamana nivatake
eka +
una
>
ekuna
- giri
+
aga
>
giraga (tip of the mountain)
- maha
+ hinda
>
mahinda
(2) Sometimes the succeeding and preceding vowel is drop or elite.
purva svara lopa elite the preceding vowel
sara sare lopaj succeeding
Succeeding vowel is dropped:
chaya
+
iva
>
chayava (just like a shadow)
cakkhu
+
indriyaj
>
cakkhundriyaj (eye faculty)
vande
+
ahaj >
vandehaj (I worship)
yassa
+
idani >
yassadani (for what you have to do now)
Preceding vowel is dropped:
vandami
+
ahaj >
vandamahaj (I worship)
yassa
+
idani >
yassidani

(3) When there are dissimilar vowels in a place of proceeding or succeeding, another vowel is
inserted instead of both proceeding and succeeding.

canda +
vijja
na

udaya >
candodaya (the moon arises) i.e., a + u = o
+
udaya >
vijjodaya
+
upeti >
nopeti (not approach); apeti (to come)

(4) When a and a followed by i, i, and u, u, they changed to e and o.

- i, i = e
- u, u
=
o
- upa
+
ikkhati >
upekkhati
- jina
+
irita
>
jinerita (utterance, teaching of the Buddha)
- canda + udaya>
candodaya
- vama +
uru
>
vamoru
(5) i, i or e before a dissimilar vowel is sometimes changed to y and then the succeeding vowel is
sometimes lengthen.
- aggi +
agara >
agyagara (fire house)
dasi +
ahosi >
dasyahosi (women slave)
te
+
ahaj >
tyahaj (that I)
(6) If final vowel is dropped there is sometimes the lengthening of the succeeding vowel.
na
+
assa
>
nassa (not his, not to him)
tada +
ahaj >
tadahaj (then I )
bahu +
upakaraj
>
bahupakaraj (support in many ways)
appasuto
+
ayaj> appasutayaj
(7) If succeeding vowel is dropped, the preceding is also lengthened.
aggi
+
iva
>
aggiva
pati
+
iha
>
patiha (husband is here)
sadhu +
iti
>
sadhuti (well)
kijsu +
idha >
kijsudha (what is important in this world)
vijju
+
iva
>
vijjuva (life is like a lightning)
(8) When o and u are preceding, those vowels are sometimes changed to v and succeeding is
lengthened.
- o, u > v
- yo
+
ahaj >
yvahaja
- yo gamaj gacchati so ahaj = who is go to the village that is I.
- anu
+
ati
>
anvati (follow)
(9) Sometimes the consonants ya, va, ma, da, na, ta, ra, la are inserted between two consecutive
vowel.
ya:
na
+
imassa >
nayimassa (not to this one)
vihare +
eva
>
vihareyeva (only in the monastery)
na+
idha
>
nayidha (not here)

va:

ma:

ti
pa
idha
lahu

+
+
+
+

angula >
uccati >
ahaj >
essati >

tivangula (three fingers inches)

pavuccati (utter well, clearly said)
idhamahaj (I am here)
lahumessati (insignificant)

(10) Sometimes the prefix adhi followed by a vowel is changed to ajjha.

adhi +
acara >
ajjhacara (bad behavior)
adhi +
esita
>
ajjhesita (requested)
(11) Sometimes abhi becomes abbha.
abhi
+
antara >
abhi
+
agata >
abhi
+
okasa >

abbhantara (internal)
abbhagata (just arrived)
abbhakasa (space)

(12) ati becomes acca.

ati
+
anta
pati +
anta
iti
+
eva

accanta (extreme end)

paccanta (remote)
icceva (like thus)

>
>
>

666SVARASANDHI
Combination of vowels, i.e., when a word ending in a vowel is joined to a word beginning with
a vowel, or when two adjacent vowels of the same word are joined together.
The rules of vowel sandhi are based on the avoidance of hiatus . There is hiatus when two
vowels come together. Hiatus is avoided by the rules of elision, contraction, changing and insertion.
Thus, according to these rules, Sarasandhi may undergo changes as follows:
(1) ELISION
(a) First vowel is elided when before another vowel.
Examples:

(b)

+ aggapuggalo
pabba +
indriyaj

>

lokaggapuggalo
>
pabbindriyaj

Sometimes when the 1st vowel is elided, the 2nd is lengthened

Examples:

(c)

laka

Buddha
na

anussati
+
assa

>

Buddhanussati
>
nassa

When two contiguous vowels are dissimilar, the second is elided

Examples:

chaya +

iva

>

chayava

sabba +
(d)

iti

>

sabbati

Sometimes when the 2nd vowel is elided, the 1st vowel is lengthened

Examples

deva
sadhu +

+
iti

iti
>

>
devati
sadhuti

(2) CONTRACTION
(a)

When two vowels come together, they may be contracted into one

Examples: Two similar vowels are sometimes contracted into long of the same kind
a
+
a
>
a
a
+
a
>
a
a
+
a
>
a
a
+
a
>
a
* the result is similar in the case of i i u u
(b)

When the vowel a or a combine with i or i is contracted to e

Examples:

jina

+
upa

(c)

iritaj
+

>
ito

jineritaj
>

upeto

When the vowel a or a combine with u or u is contracted to o

Examples:

canda +
udaya >
Vama +
uru

candodaya
>

vamoru

(3) CHANGING
(a) i

i e before dissimilar vowels is changed to y ,then the 2nd vowel sometimes is lengthened.

Examples:

aggi

+
me
dasi
sotthi +

agaro >
aggyagaro
+
ayaj
>
myayaj
+
ahosi >
dasyahosi
atthu
>
sotthyatthu

(b) o u before dissimilar vowel is changed to v , then the 2nd is lengthened.

Examples:

so

ahaj

>

svahaj

su

agatam>

yvayaj

(4) INSERTION
(a)
Consonants, y v m d n t r l h are sometimes inserted between two vowels to avoid a
hiatus.
Examples:

na

idaj

>

nayidaj

(not

this)
na

imassa >

nayimassa

(not to

ti

avgulaj>

tivavgulaj

(3

this one)
v

fingers)
pa

uccati >

pavuccati

(utter

well)
m:

lahu

+
idha

essati >
+

lahumessati

ahaj

>

(insignificant)
idhamahaj

(I am

here)
d:
tava
first, initially)

eva

>

tavadeva

(at

puna

eva

>

punadeva

(also

ito

ayati

>

itonayati

again)
n:
here)

ratti

utthana>

iha
ajja

>
+

tasmatiha
agge

(come from

rattinutthana (get up

at night)
t :

tasma +

>

(due to it)
ajjatagge

(since today)
r :
patu
(became manifest)

+
raja

ahosi

>
+

iva

paturahosi
>

rajariva

(like a king)
l :
cha
superknowledges)

abhibba

cha

>

chalabhibba

anga

>

(six
chalanga

(six parts)
h:

su

uju ca >

suhuju ca

QUESTION: EXPLAIN WITH EXAMPLE THE CONSONANT SANDHI. (LECTURED BY VEN. PIYARATANA)
(1)
A consonant after a vowel is generally reduplicated. An aspirate is reduplicated by an
unaspirate by itself:
rupa + kara
= rupakkhandho
pari + cajati
= pariccajati
upa + davo
= upaddavo
ni + malo
= nimmalo
du + kara
= dukkara
tatra + thito
= taratthito
ni + phala
= nipphala
appa + suto
= appassuto
(2)

unaspirate, and an

A long vowel before a reduplicated consonant is often shortened:

para + kamo
= parakkamo
tanha + khayo
= tanhakkhayo
+ sado
= assado
+ khto
= kkhto
maha + phala = mahapphala
The exceptions to this rule are:
vedan + khandho
= vedankkhandho
yath + kama = yathkkama
pa + khandho
= pakkhandho

(3)

A vowel before a consonant is sometimes lengthened and sometimes shortened for the sake
(a) Lengthened: khanti + parama
= khant parama
jyati + soko
= jyat soko
mannati + balo
= mannat balo
nibbattati + dukkha
= nibbattat dukkha
(b) Shortened:

(4)

bhovadi + nama so hoti

yittha va + huta va + loke
buddhe yadi va + savake

= bhovadi nama so hoti

= yittha va huta va loke
= buddhe yadi va savake

o in so, and eso, before a consonant is sometimes changed into :

eso + dhammo = esa dhammo
so + muni
= sa muni

of prosody.

so + silava
eso + patto
eso + idani

= sa silava
= esa patto
= esa dani

666NIGGAHITASANDHI
1.The Niggahita followed by a consonant is sometimes change to the final better of the group
(N,G,B,n,m) to which the consonant belonged or to the letter L-e.g
1. Evam+me sutam= evamme sutam
2. Kim+ci= kinci
3. Kim+nara=kinnara
4. Kum+nadi=kunnadi
5. Pun+linga=pullinga
6. Sam+jata=sanjata
7. Sam+lapa=sallapa

2.The Niggahita followed by e h are sometimes changed to GG and G respectively.

1. Aham+eva=ahaGGeva
2. Tam+eva=taGGeava
3. Aham+hi=ahaGhi
4. Tam+hi=taGhi
3.

The Niggahita followed by y is also sometimes changed to GG together with the y.

1. Sam+yama=saGGama
2. Sam+yutta=saGGutta.
3. Samam+yeva+samaGGeva

4. The Niggahita followed by a vowel is sometimes changed to m and somewhere to the d.

1. bahum+eva=bahudeva
2. etam+avoca=etadavoca
3. yam+idam=yadidam
4. Tam+antaram=tadantaram

5. Tam+anantaram=tadanantaram
6. yam+icchitam=Yadicchitam
5. the Niggahita too is sometimes inserted before a vowel or a consonant coming after final vowel.
1. Anu+thula=anumthulam
2. Cakkhu+udapadi=cakkhumudapadi
3. Ava+sira=avamsira.

6. Sometimes there is a dropping of the Niggahita before a vowel.

1. Adasim+aham=adasiham
2. Sayam+anha=sayanya
3. Vidunam+aggo=vidunaggo
7. Sometimes there is a dropping of the Niggahita also before a consonant.
1. Buddhanam+sasanam=Buddhanasasanam
2. Devanam+santike=devanasantike
3. Dhammanam+paragu=dhammana paragu
4. Gantum+kamo=gantukamo
7. There is sometimes the dropping of a vowel coming after the Niggahita.
1. Alam+idani=alamdani
2. Bijam+iva=bijamva
3. Idam+api=idampi
9.When the vowel coming after the Niggahita is dropped, the next consonant if it be a double one
also becomes single.
1. Evam+assa=evamsa
2. Puppham+assa=pupphamsa

666NIGGAHITASANDHI
When two letters of the same word or of two different words are joined together for the sake of
euphony the union is called Sandhi.
Niggahitasandhi is the combination of j and a vowel or a consonant. It occurs when a word or a
syllable ending in j is joined to a word or a syllable beginning either with a vowel or a consonant.
The following are the examples of niggahitasandhi.
1.

The niggahita followed by a consonant is sometimes changed to the final letter of the group to
which the consonant belongs or to the letter l.
Examples:
Kij
+
ci
>
kibci
(whatever)
Kij
+
nara
>
kinnara
(which person)
Puj
+
linga
>
pullinga
(masculine)
Saj
+
jata
>
sabjata (well born)
Kuj
+
nadi
>
kunnadi
(polluted river)

2.

The niggahita followed by e, h is sometimes changed to bb and b respectively.

Examples:
Ahaj +
eva
>
ahabbeva
Taj
+
eva
>
tabbeva
Ahaj +
hi
>
ahabhi
Taj
+
hi
>
tabhi

3.

The niggahita followed by y is also sometimes changed to bb together with the y.

Examples:
Saj
+
yama
>
sabbama
(control,
discipline)
Saj
+
yutta
>
sabbutta
(comprises)
Samaj +
yeva
>
samabbeva (oneself)
Saj
+
yogo
>
sabbogo
Yaj
+
yad eva
>
yabbad eva

4.

The niggahita followed by a vowel is sometimes changed to mand somewhere to d.

Examples:
Taj
+
ahaj
>
taj ahaj
Kij
+
etaj
>
kim etaj
Bahuj +
eva
>
bahudeva
Etaj
+
avoca >
etadavoca

5.

The niggahita too is sometimes inserted before a vowel or a consonant coming after the final

vowel.
Examples:

Anu

Cakkhu
Manopubba
+
Ava

+
udapadi
>
cakkhujudapadi
+
gama >
manopubbajgama
thula
>
anujthulaj
+
sira
>
avajsiro

6.

Sometimes there is a dropping of the niggahita before a vowel; then the vowel in some cases is
lengthened.
Examples:
Vidunaj
+
aggaj >
vidunaggaj
Sayaj +
anha
>
sayanha
Evaj +
ahaj
>
evahaj
Tasaj +
ahaj
>
tasahaj

7.

Sometimes there is a dropping of the niggahita also before a consonant.

Examples:
Buddhanaj
+
sasanaj
>
Buddhana sasanaj
Devanaj
+
santike
>
devana santike
Dhammanaj +
paragu
>
dhammana paragu
Gantuj
+
kamo
>
gantu kamo

8.

There is sometimes the dropping of a vowel coming after the niggahita.

Examples:
Idaj
+
api
>
idam pi
Tvaj +
asi
>
tvaj si
Alaj +
idani
>
alaj dani
Bijaj +
iva
>
bijaj va

9.

When the vowel coming after the niggahita is dropped, the next consonant if it be a double one
also become single.
Examples:
Evaj +
assa
>
evaj sa
Pupphaj
+
assa
>
pupphaj sa

666NIGGAHITA SANDHI (J)

1. The niggahita followed by a consonant is sometimes changed to the final letter of the group to
which the consonant belongs or to the letter l.
Examples:
Evaj me sutaj : evaj +
me
>
evamme

Kij
Kij
Puj
Saj
Kuj

+
+
+
+
+
Saj

ci
nara
linga
jata
nadi
+

>
>
>
>
>
lapa

kibci
(whatever)
kinnara
(which person)
pullinga
(masculine)
sabjata (well born)
kunnadi
(polluted river)
>
sallapa
(converse)

2. The niggahita followed by e, h is sometimes changed to bb and b respectively.

Examples: e =
bb ; h = b
Ahaj +
eva
>
ahabbeva
Taj
+
eva
>
tabbeva (he himself)
Ahaj +
hi
>
ahabhi
Taj
+
hi
>
tabhi
3. The niggahita followed by y is also sometimes changed to bb together with the y.
Examples:
Saj
+
yama
>
sabbama
(control, discipline)
Saj
+
yutta
>
sabbutta
(comprises)
Samaj +
yeva
>
samabbeva (oneself)
Saj
+
yogo
>
sabbogo
Yaj
+
yad eva
>
yabbad eva
4. The niggahita followed by a vowel is sometimes changed to mand somewhere to d.
Examples:
Taj
+
ahaj
>
taj ahaj
Kij
+
etaj
>
kim etaj
Bahuj +
eva
>
bahudeva
Etaj
+
avoca >
etadavoca
(said thus)
Yaj
+
idaj
>
yadidaj (whose)
Taj
+
antaraj >
tadanantaraj/ tadantaraj (after that,
than)
5. The niggahita too is sometimes inserted before a vowel or a consonant coming after the final
vowel.
Examples:
Cakkhu
+
udapadi
>
cakkhujudapadi (got
the vision or eye)
Manopubba +
gama >
manopubbajgama
Anu
+
thula
>
anujthulaj
(small or big)
Ava
+
sira
>
avajsiro
(upside
down)

6. Sometimes there is a dropping of the niggahita before a vowel; then the vowel in some cases is
lengthened.
Examples:
Vidunaj
+
aggaj >
vidunaggaj (chief of the wise
men)
Sayaj +
anha
>
sayanha
Evaj +
ahaj
>
evahaj
Tasaj +
ahaj
>
tasahaj
Adasij +
ahaj
>
adasi ahaj
(I gave)
7. Sometimes there is a dropping of the niggahita also before a consonant.
Examples:
Buddhanaj
+
sasanaj
>
Buddhana sasanaj
Devanaj
+
santike
>
devana santike (in the
present of god)
Dhammanaj +
paragu
>
dhammana paragu (expert in
dhamma)
Gantuj
+
kamo
>
gantu kamo (wish or decide
to go)
- sabba papassa akaranaj etaj buddhanaj sasanaj
v- vv- ---v vv vv- v-v
8. There is sometimes the dropping of a vowel coming after the niggahita.
Examples:
Idaj
+
api
>
idam pi (this also)
Tvaj +
asi
>
tvaj si
Alaj +
idani
>
alaj dani
Bijaj +
iva
>
bijaj va (like a seed)
9. When the vowel coming after the niggahita is dropped, the next consonant if it be a double one
also become single.
Examples:
Evaj +
assa
>
evaj sa
Pupphaj
+
assa
>
pupphaj sa

666EXERCISE POINTING OUT THE NIGGAHITA SANDHI AND GIVES THE EXPLANATION.
1. Tassa attano ca tasab ca devatanaj silab ca sutab ca cagab ca pabbab ca anussarato cittaj
pasidati.
Tasaj
+
ca
>
tasab ca
silaj
+
ca
>
silab ca

sutaj
cagaj
pabbaj
#

+
+
+

ca
ca
ca

>
>
>

sutab ca
cagab ca
pabbab ca

The Niggahita followed by a consonant is changed to the final letter of the group to which the
consonant belongs.
e.g.: ca belongs to the cavagga ca cha ja jha ba. Therefore j is replaced by the last letter of the
ca group.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2. Tasma sabbamay attanaj; Assaj bhadraj va vanijo.

saj
+
yamaya + attanaj > sabbamay attanaj
The niggahita followed by y is sometimes changed to bb together with the y.

bhadraj +
iva
>
bhadraj va
There is sometimes the dropping of a vowel coming after the Niggahita.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3. Karomi tuyhaj vacanaj; Tvaj si acariyo mama.

tvaj
#

+
asi
>
tvaj si
A vowel after j is sometimes elided.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4. Anussaretha Sambuddhaj, Bhayaj tumhaka no siya.

tumhakaj +
no
>
tumhaka no
Sometimes there is a dropping of the Niggahita before a consonant.

5. Eva haj cintayitvana; Nekakotisataj dhanaj; Nathanathanaj datvana; Himavantaj upagamij.

Evaj +
ahaj >
eva haj
j followed by a vowel is sometimes elided; then the vowel in some cases is lengthened.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

6. Dayako danapati yabbad eva parisaj upasavkamativisarado va upasavkamati.

yaj +
yaj
+ eva >
yaj yad eva
The Niggahita followed by a vowel is sometimes changed to m or d.

yaj
+ yad + eva > yabbad eva
The Niggahita followed by y is sometimes changed to bb together with the y.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

7. Abbaya ca panahaj samananaj Sakyaputtiyanaj dhammaj evahaj tasma dhammavinaya

apakkanto.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8. Tena hi, gahapati, tabb ev ettha patipucchissami.
Taj + eva
#

> tabb eva

The Niggahita followed by e is sometimes changed to bb.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9. Tab hi tassa sakaj hoti, Tab ca adaya gacchati.

Taj + hi
#

>
tab hi
The Niggahita followed by h is sometimes changed to b

taj + ca
> tab ca
The Niggahita followed by a consonant is changed to the final letter of the group to which the
consonant belongs.

10. Imani cattari ariyasaccani ti, bhikkhave,yan taj vutaj, idam etaj paticca vuttaj.

Yaj
+
taj
>
yan taj
The Niggahita followed by a consonant is changed to the final letter of the group to which the
consonant belongs.
e.g. taj belonged to the tavagga: ta tha da dha na. Therefore j is changed to n.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

11. Tanhavkaro, Medhavkaro, Saranavkaro, Dipavkaro ti cattaro Buddha ekasmibb eva kappe
uppajjijsu.
Tanhaj + karo >

Tanhavkaro

Medhaj
+ karo > Medhavkaro
Saranaj
+ karo >
Saranavkaro
Dipaj + karo > Dipavkaro
The Niggahita followed by a consonant is changed to the final letter of the group to which the
consonant belongs.
e.g. karo belonged to the Kavagga: ka kha ga gha va. Therefore j is changed to v.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

12. Idam avoca Bhagava; attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato bhasitaj abhinandun ti.

Abhinanduj +
ti
> abhinandun ti
The Niggahita followed by a consonant is changed to the final letter of the group to which the
consonant belongs.
e.g. ti belonged to the tavagga: ta tha da dha na. Therefore j is changed o n.

QUESTION: EXPLAIN DIGU SAMASA WITH EXAMPLE IN PLI (LECTURED BY VEN. PIYARATANA)
When a numeral and a substantive is combined, it is called digu. The numeral must be the first number.
The numerals being a kind of adjectives this compound may be included in kammadnraya. But it is separated and
given a different name for the convenience of students(?).

(1)
(2)

There are two kinds of digu:

Samahara collective (which expresses a whole and takes the form of the neuter singular)
Asamahara individual (which does not express a whole, but takes the plural form)

Here the objects indicated by the last member are considered individually:
Samahara-digu: dve + anguliyo = dvangula (two inches)
tayo + loka
= tiloka (three worlds)
catasso + disa
= catuddisa (four-quarters)
paca + silani
= pacasla (five precepts)
satta + ahani
= sattaha (a week)
sata + yojanani= satayojana (hundred leagues)
Asamahara-digu:tayo + bhava
= tibhava (the three states of existence)
pance + indriyni
= pancindriyni (five senses)

666QUESTION: WHAT IS SAMSA? HOW MANY KINDS OF SAMSA? GIVE AN EXAMPLE OF EACH KIND OF SAMSA.
When two or more nouns are combined together to form a grammatical unit it is called a samasa
(compound).
There are six kinds of samasa (compounds):
(1)
Kammadharaya (adjectival compound)
nila + uppala
= niluppala (blue water-lily)
sariputto + thero
= sariputtatthero (the elder Sriputta)
cando + viya + mukha
= mukhacando (moon-like face)
mahanto + muni
= mahamuni (great sage)
khattiya + kumr
= khattiyakumr (princess of the warrior caste)
na + ariyo
= anariyo (ignoble, low)
(2)

Digu (numeral determinative):

(i)
samahara (collective):
dve + anguliyo = dvangula (two inches)
(ii)
asamahara (individual):
teyo + bhava
= tibhava (the three states of existence)

(3)

Tappurisa (dependent determinative)

gama + gato
= gamagato (gone to the village)
buddhena + desito
= buddhadesito (preached by the Buddha)
yaguya + tandula
= yagutandula (rice for gruel)
gantu + kamo
= gantukamo (desirous to go)
rukkha + patito
= rukkhapatito (fallen from the tree)
ranno + putto
= rajaputto (king's son)
vane + puphani
= vanapupphani (flowers in the forest or wild-flowers)
manasi + karo
= manasikaro (keeping in the mind, attention)
dhamma carati ti
= dhammacari (observer of the Dhamma)

(4)

Dvanda samasa (copulative or aggregative)

(i)
(ii)

Asamahara dvanda
mt ca pit ca = mtpitaro (parents)
Samahara dvanda
cakkhu ca sota ca
= cakkhusota (eye and ear)

(5)

Avayibhava (adverbial compound)

rathassa + anu
= anuratha (behind the chariot)
sota + pati
= patisota (against the current)
jivo + yava
= yavajiva (as long as life lasts)

(6)

Bahubhihi (relative or attributive compound)

chinna + hattha (yassa, so)
= chinnanatho ((a man) whose hands have been cut off)
bahavo + nadiyo (yasmi, so) = bahunadiko ((a country) where there are many rivers)
mahanti + panna (yassa, so)
= mahpanno ((a person) who has many wives)

666COMPOUND (SAMASA)
When two or more nouns are combined together to form a grammatical unit it is called a Samasa
(Compound).
Some compounds have an indeclinable as their first member. A few compounds are made up entirely of
indeclinable.
There are six kinds of compounds:
Kammadharaya
=
Adjectival Compound (where an adjectival and a
Substantive is combined).
Digu
=
Numeral Determinative ( numeral+substantive).
Tappurisa
=
Dependent Determinitive (substantitive+substantive).
Dvanda
=
Copulative or Aggregative (two or more nouns).
Avyayibhava =
Adverbial Compound (where an indeclimable-adverb
included-and a substantive is combined).
Bahubbihi
=
Relative or Attributive Compound (which bears a
signification different from that of the component words).
***The case endings of the first member or members of a compound are generally dropped; only in a
few instances they are preserved.

Kammadharaya

Adjectival Compound
The two members of an Adjectival Compound must, in their uncompounded state, be in the same case.

Examples
Nilan+ uppalan
=niluppalam ( blue water-lilly)
Rattan+vatthan
= rattavatthan (red cloth)
Seto+hatthi
= setahathi
( white elephant)
Nico+puriso
=nicapuriso
(a dwarf ; vulgar man)
Punna+nadi
=punnanadi
( overflowing river)
Digho+maggo = dighamaggo (long path)
The qualifying word here is generally placed first; but in some cases it comes last.
Examples
Buddhagoso+acariyo =Buddhagosacariyo
(the commentator, Buddhagosa)
Bimbisaro+raja
=Bimbisararaja
(King Bimbisara)
Sumedho+pandito
=Sumedhapandito
(the wise, Sumedha)
Sariputto+thero
=Sariputtathero
(the Elder Sariputta)
(These four examples can also be called Noun in Apposition according to English grammarians).
If the descriptive word were in comparison, it comes last in this compound.
Examples
(The sun like Buddha) Adicco viya Buddho= Buddhadicco
(The moon like face) Cando viya mukkhan = mukkhacando
(The lion like sage) Siho viya muni =
munisiho
(The elephant like or noble Buddha) =
nago viya Buddho=Buddhanago.

In Kammadharaya the adjective mahanta becomes maha. If it is followed by a double

connsonant it becomes maha.
Examples
Manhanto+ muni= mahamuni ( great sage)
Mahanti +pathavi= mahapathavi( great earth)
Mahantan+bhayan= mahabhayan( great fear)
When the two members of a Kammadharaya are feminine, the first one assumes the form of the
masculine, if the word had been formed from a masculine stem.

Examples
Khattiya+kumari= Khattiyakummari (princess of the warrior caste).
Brahmani+kanna= Brahmanikumari (a brahmin girl)
Nagi+ manavika = Nagimanavika ( maiden of the Naga tribes)
Dutiya +panti =Dutiyapanti
( second line or class)
Note- When the first feminine form is a proper noun, it does not take the masculine form,e.g.,
Examples
Devapokkharani ( the deity pond)
Nandadevi
(Nanda Queen)

When the particle na (not) is combined to another word, it is replaced by a before a

consonant, and by an before a vowel. (This is not included, anyhow, in the fifth class of compounds
though it has an indeclinable as its number).
Examples
Na+ manusso= amanusso (non-human being)
Na+samano = assamano (not a monk)
Na +ariyo = anariyo (ignoble; low)
Na+ittho = anittho (not agreeable)
Na+kusalan= akusalan( sin; bad action)
Digu- compound

When a number and a substantive is combined it is called digu. The numeral must be the first member.
The numerals being a kind of adjectives this compound may be included in Kammadharaya. But it is
separated and given a different name for the convenience of students.
There are two kinds of Digu:
1. Samahara = collective (which expresses a whole and takes the form of the neuter singular ).
2. Asamahara = individual, (which does not express a whole, but takes the plural form). Here the
objects indicated by the last member are considered individually.
Samahara-digu
Dve+anguliyo
Tayo+loka
Catasso + disa
Panca+silani

= dvangulan
= tilokan
=catuddisan
=pacasilani

(two inches)
(three worlds)
(the four-quarters)
(the five precepts)

Satta+ahani
Satan+ yojanani

=sattahani
= satayojanani

(a week)
(hundred leagues)

Asamahara-Digu
Tayo+bhava
Pance+indriyani

= tibhava
= pancindriyani

(the three states of existence)

(the five senses).
Tapurisa samasa

Dependent determinative compounds

If two nouns, related to each other by some oblique case, are joined together, it is called Tapurisa
Compound.
The first member, which may be in any case other than the Nominative (and the Vocative), qualifies or
determines the last member.
The last member determines the gender and the number of the compounds.
These compounds may be divided into six groups according to the cases belonging to the first
members;
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Dutiya Tapurisa
Tatiya Tapurisa
Catutthi-Tapurisa
Pancami-Tapurisa
Chatthi-Tapurisa
Sattami Tapurisa

( with the Accusative Case).

(with the Instrumental).
(with the Dative).
(with the Ablative)
(with the Possessive).
(with the Locative).

Dutiya Tapurisa

( with the Accusative Case).

Gaman +gato= gamagato
Sukkhan+patto=sukkhapatto
Rathan+ arulho= ratharulho
Pamanan+atikkhanto= pamanatikkanto

(gone to the village).

(having attained the happiness).
(having got into the car).
(gone over the measure).

Tatiya Tapurisa

( with the Instrumental).

Buddhena+desito=buddhadesito
Ahina+dattho=ahidattho
Ranna+hato= rajahato
Vinnuhi+ garahito=vinnugarahito

(preached by the Buddha)

(bitten by a serpent)
(killed by the King).
(despised by the wise)

Catutthi-Tapurisa

(with the Dative).

Yaguya+ tandula= yagutndula
(rice for gruel)
Buddhassa+deyyan=buddhadeyyam(that should be given to the Buddha).
Ranno+ arahan=rajarahan
(worthy of a king)
Pasadaya+dabban
(material for the mansion).

The compounds formed with an infinitive and kama (desirous) or kamta (desire) are considered to be in
the Dative-Tapurisa.
Datun+kamata=datukamata
(desire to give)
Vattun+kamo=vattukamo
(desirous to say)
Gantun+kamo=gantunkamo
(desirous to go)
Sotun +kamata=sotukamata
(desire to hear)

Pancami-Tapurisa

(with the Ablative)

Rukkha+patito=rukkhapatito
Bandhana+mutto=bandhanamatto
Rajamha+bhito=rajabhito
Duccaritato+virati= duccaritavirati

(fallen from the tree).

(released from the bond or confinement)
(afraid of the king).
(abstinence from vice or bad conduct).

Chatthi-Tapurisa

(with the Possessive).

Jinassa+vaccanan= jinavacanan
Ranno+putto=rajaputto
Pupphanan+ gandho
Dhananan+rasi= dhanananrasi

( word of the Buddha).

(kings son)
(smell of the follower)
( a heap of corn).

Sattami Tapurisa

(with the Locative).

Game+vasi=gamavasi
Kupe+manduko=kupamanduko
Vane+pupphani=vanapupphani
Dhame+ rato= dhammarato

(villager).
(frog in the well).
(flower in the forest or wild flower0
(delighting in the doctrine)

***It is said at above beginning that the case endings of the first members of some compounds are not
dropped. In that case the compound is called aluttasamasa. Examples for this are mostly found in
Tapurisa.
Examples
Pabhan+karo= pabhankaro
Ante+vasiko= antevasiko
Panke+ruhan=pankeruhan
Manasi+karo=manasikaro
Parassa+padan=parassapadam
Pubbe+nivaso+ pubbenivaso

(generator of the light; the sun).

(a resident pupil)
(grown in out of the mud, e.g. lotus)
(keeping in the mind; attention).
(word for another Reflective voice)
(former lives; life in a former existence).

There is a variety of the tappurisa in which the last member is a verbal derivative which cannot be used
independently. It is named Uppada_Tapurisa
Examples
Kumbhan karoti= kumbhakaro
( a potter).
Dhamman carati=dhammacara
(observer of the dhamma).
Urena gacchati ti= urago
(a serpent).
Attamha jato= attajo
(son)
Pabbate tittati ti=pabbatatitho
( one who stands on a rock).
Note = karo, go, jo and tho in these examples are not used independently. They stand in these forms
only in compounds.
Dvanda-samas

Copulative or aggregative compounds

Two or more nouns joined by ca (=and) may be combined together eliminating the intermediate
conjuntions. The compound thus formed is called dvanda.
The members of this compound must be co-ordinate in their uncompounded state.
There are two kinds of Dvanda-compounds:1. Asamahara
2. Samahara
Asamasahara- the first one stands in the plural, and takes the gender and declension of its last member.
Samasahara- the second one takes the form of a neuter singular and becomes a collective, whatever is
the numbers. This occurs with the names of birds, parts of the body, trees, herbs, arts, musical
instruments, etc.
Asammahara-Dvanda

Samana ca brahmana ca= samanabrahmana (monks and brahmin).

Cando ca suriyo ca= candocasuriya
(the moon and the sun).
Deva ca manussa ca= devamanussa
(gods and men)
Mata ca pita ca= matapitaca
(parents).
Sura ca asura ca nara ca naga ca yakkha ca= sura sura nara naga yakkha (gods, Asuras, human beings,
Nagas and yakkhas).

Samahara-dvanda

All members of the Dvada-Compounds being coordinative, there arises the question of the order of
their position. The following rules are given as to the order:a) Shorter words are placed before longer ones.
b) Words in I or u are placed first.
Examples
Gitan ca vaditanca =gitavaditan
( singing and music)
Cakkhu ca sotan ca=cakkhusotan (eyes and ears)
Jara ca marana ca= jaramaranan
(decay and death)
Hatthi ca assa ca ratha ca pattika ca=hatthssa rattha pattikam
infantry).
Hatthi ca gavo ca assa ca valava ca = hatthi- gavassa valavan

( elephants, horses, chariots

and

(elephants, cattle, horses and mares).

Avyayibhava-samasa

Adverbial compounds
When the first member of a compound is an indeclinable and the second a substantive, it is called an
Avyayibhava-samasa.
The whole compound becomes an adverb, taking the ending of the ( neuter) accusative singular. Some
case (usually oblique) is implied in the substantial member according to the meaning of the
indeclinable.
Nagarassa+ upa= upanagaram
Rathassa+ anu= anuratham
Gharan+anu= anugharam
Anu+addhamasan= anudhammasam
Mancassa+hettha= hettamancam
Pasadassa+upari=uparipasadam
Pakarassa +tiro=tiropakaram
Gamssa+ anto= antogamam
Sotan+pati=patisotam
Kamo+yatha= yathakam
Vddhanan+(patipati) yatha=yathavuddham
Bhattassa+paccha=pacchabhattam
Gangaya+adho= adhagangam
Jivo+yava=yavajivam
Vatassa+anu=anuvattam
A(yava)+samuddan
Attho+yava=yavadattham
Nagarato+bahi=bahinagaram
Balan+yatha=yathabalam

(near the town)

(behind the chariot).
(horse after horse)
(once in a fortnight).
(under the bed).
(upon the mansion, e.g. on the terrace; upstairs)
(across or through the rampart)
(inside the village)
(against the current)
(according to the order)
(according to the seniority)
(after the meal; e.g. afternoon)
(down the river)
(as long as life lasts)
(following or with the wind).
(as far as the sea-coast)
(as much as desired; to the full)
(outside the town)
(according to ones strengths, e.g. to the ones stability)

Bahubbihi-samasa

(Relative compounds)
When two or more substantives are combined together and the resultant denotes something other than
what is meant by the two members severally, the compounds is called Bahubihi-samasa (Relative or
Attributive).
This compound requires the addition of such relative pronouns as: he, who, that, which, etc. to
express its full meaning; therefore; this is used as an adjective and takes any gender according to that of
the noun which it qualifies.

Examples
Chinna+hattha (yassa, so)= chinnahattho (a man) whose hands have been cut off).
Lohitena+makkaitan+sisan (yassak, so) ( a man ) whose head is besmeared with blood).
Arulha+vanija(yan,sa)=arulhavanija( a ship) on which the martinets have embarked.
Jitani+ indriyani(yena, so)=indriyo( a monk) who has subdued his senses.
Dinno+ sunko(yassa, so) dinnasunko(an official) to whom the tax is given.
Niggata+jana(yasma, so)niggatajano(a village) from where the people have departed.
Khina+asava(yassa, so)=khinasavo( a saint) whose passion are destroyed.
Sampannani+ sassani(yasmin, so)=sampannasasso (a province)in which the crops are abundant).

Feminine nouns ending in I,u, and the stems ending in tu, generally take the suffix ka, when they are
the last member of a bahubahi.
Bahavo+nadiyo(yasmain,so)= bahunadiko( a country) where there are many river.
Apagato+ sattha(yasma, so)=apagatasatthukam (the doctrine) whose founder is dead.
Bahu+vadhuyo(yassa,so)= bahuvadhuko( a person) who has many wives.
When a feminine noun is the last member of a Bahubbihi, it takes the masculine, or neuter form, if it is
determining a masculine or neuter nouns; also the first member, if it is feminine, drops its feminine
sign.
Mahanti+ panna (yassa, so)= mahapannp( a person) who has great wisdom.
Pahuta+jivha(yassa, so)=pahutajivho (a man) whose tongue is broader (than that of other).
Acla+ saddha(yassa, so)= acalasaddho ( a man) with an unshakenable faith)
Digha+ jangha (yassa, so) dighajangho( a man) whose shanks are long.

666SAMASA
Samasa pada sankhepo, samasa means summarising, shortening boiling down the word. The
combine senses of related words denoting names, upasakka and nipada are called samasa or compound.
In a samasa a new base is formed according to the following rules.

The case ending of the component words excepting the last is generally dropped. And
the compound take new ending according to its need

The first word or part of a compound is called Pubbapada. And the next one is called
Parapada. Sometimes the final vowel of the pubbapada, if long, becomes short. E.g. Dasi ca
dasoca=dasidaso.

If the pubbapada is in the feminine gender it is sometimes changed into the masculing
form. E.g: Brahmani+darika=Brahmanadarika

Pubba+disa=pubbadisa
Compounds are helpful towards economy of words time and space. Hence all languages utilize
pompons in all ages. In Pali one simple word or a noun can be combined with one or two other. When
combine two or more words together it forms a grammatical unit, which is called Samasa. The meaning
of the word Samasa is coordination or summary. The sense of related word is important in combining
word.
As we put earlier the case ending of compounds words excepting the last one are gradually drop and
new form gets new case ending. The genders of combined words are changed and the words are joined
together for the sake of Euphonic combination.
Pali grammarian divided compound into (6) classes. According to the interrelationship existing
between the members of compounds. Six kinds of compounds are:
1. Kammadharaya- adjectival compound.
2. Digu- numerical determinative compound.
3. Tappurisa- dependent determinative compound.
4. Dvanda- populative or coordinative or aggregative compound.
5. Avyayibhava- adverbial compound.
6. Bahubbihi- relative or attributive compound.

1. Avyayibhava
Avyaya pubbako -avyabibhavo.
This is so called because the sense of indeclinable word is predominant in it. The compound in which
Avyaya or indeclinable appears as the first member or word is called Avyayibhava or indeclinable
compound.
The base formed by Avyayibhava compound is neuter and indeclinable. When it ends in a sound it
takes only m. e.g:
I.
II.

Masakanamabhava> nimmasakam (absence of mosquito).

Balam anatigamma> yathabalam.

III.

Attampati> paccattam (every body).

IV.

Nagarato bahi> bahinagaram (out of the city).

V.

Gamassa anto> antagamam.

VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.

Gangaya upari> Uparigangam.

Mancassa hettha> hetthamancam.
Kuddhassa tiro> tirokuddham (across the wall).
Sotassa patilomam> Patisotam ( against the stream).

X.

Jivassa pariyantam> yavajivam.

XI.

Rathassa paccha> paccharatham.

XII.
XIII.

Jetthassa anupubbena> anujettham.

Sahassassa paro> parosahassam (more than thousand) and so on.

666SAMASA
When two or more nouns are combined together to form a grammatical unit is called a samasa
in Pali. In sandhi, we also find two or more words are combined together to make a noun. But sandhi is
done for easy pronunciation, while in compound, the meaning is emphasize, not the sound. Thus,
samasa connects meaning, sandhi is connected with the sound system.
Samasa or compound are not unknown in English language. They are usually short, like
unknown, outstanding, stationmaster, but may reach considerable length, although usually written
with hyphen or interspace, like welfare-reform plan, river-transport system. They form a special
means of grammatical expression: they consist of a series of words, not necessary nouns, although
nouns are most common in English compounds, simply lined up without inflections. The whole unit
has a grammatical function in the sentence, as indicated by the inflection of the last component. The
Pali compounds fit into the same definition but they are much more varied and may be quite long.
Definition, Quality and Ornament of Samasa are:
(1) Definition:
(a) Samaso padasavkhepo = compound means the shortening of words (both in letter and sound)
(b) Samasoti bhinnatthanaj = having one meaning of the words which have various meaning.
Therefore, sound and meaning are shortened in samasa.
(2) Quality: They are 10 qualities in every literary work. One such quality is Ojo which means the
essence.
(3) Ornament: Apart from the qualities, there are such 35 poetic ornament. Therefore samasa is one of
the poetic ornament, it can beautify the poet.
In a samasa, a new base is formed according to the following rules:
(1) The case ending of the component words excepting the last are generally dropped and the

compound takes new ending according to its need.

(2) The first word or part of a compound is called pubbapada, and the next one is called parapada.
Sometimes the final vowel of the pubbapada if long become short, e.g: dasi ca daso ca > dasidaso.
(3) If the pubbapada is in the feminine gender, it is sometimes changed into the masculine form, e.g.:
Brahmani + darika > Brahmanadarika.
Samasa are helpful towards economic of words, time and space. In pali, one simple word or a noun
can be combined with one or two other. When combined two or more words together, it forms a
grammatical unit which is coordination or summary. The sense of related words is important in
combining words. As we put earlier the case ending of compound words excepting the last one are
gradually dropped and new form gets new case ending. The genders of combine words are changed and
the words are joined together for the sake of euphony.
Pali grammarians divide compound into 6 classes according to the inter-relationship existing
between the members of compound.
1. Avyayibhava Adverbial Compound
2. Tappurisa Dependent Determinative Compound
3. Kammadharaya Adjectival Compound
4. Digu Numeral Determinative Compound
5. Bahubbihi Relative or Attributive Compound
Dvanda Copulative or Aggregate Compound
666SAMASA
There are 7 types of samasa in Pali (including complex compound). Kammadharaya is one of
them. The definitions of samasa are given as follows:
1.

Samasa padasavkhepo
= compoud means the shortening of words (both in letter and in meaning)

2.

Samasoti bhinnatthanaj padanamekatthta

= having one meaning of the various words which have many meanings.

Samasa is one of the 35 poetic ornaments, it can beautify the poet. Therefore it is commonly
used as beautifying aspect.
1.Kammadharayasamasa

This is a dependent descriptive compound. The definition is given below:

Visesanavisessabhuta dve pada yada samasyante tada so samaso kammadharayo namo.
=
when two words of qualifier and qualifyee are combined together, then it is called
kammadharayasamasa, e.g.

1.

ratta
ratta
lata

+
=

lata

rattalata

(redcreeper)

qualifier
=
qualifyee

Actually the qualifier of the compounds can be used as an attribute or as an apposition or

as an adverb.
1. Attribute e.g.

(1) Kalyanamitta
(2) Pubbakamma

kalyana
pubba

=
=

attribute
attribute

The adjective pubba is placed at the end of the samasa when it qualifies a past participle, e.g.
(1) ditthapubbaja rupaj
=
object seen before
(2) vutthapubbo gamo
=
village inhibited formerly.
2. Noun in apposition e.g.

(1) Asokaraja
(2) Sariputtathera

=
=

king Asoka
the Elder Sariputta

When the noun in apposition expresses a comparison, then this is placed at the end of the samasa.
e.g.
(1) munisiho
(2) mukkhacando

(siho iva muni)

(cando iva mukkha)

3. Adverb, particle and preposition e.g.

(1) sammasambuddho=
fully enlightened
(2) pacchasamano
=
(3) sujano
(4) punabbhavo
=

follower
=
good man
new existence

Kammadharaya is similar to the Tappurisa samasa. But the two component words of the
former refer to the same object or locus.

2.Tappurisasamasa

This is a dependent determinative compound which consists of two members of which the first
depends on the second as a noun or a pronoun in an oblique case, i.e., in any case other than the
nominative and the vocative.
This compound is a noun or an adjective according to the last member is a noun or an adjective.
The gender and the number of the compound are also determined by the last member.
There are 6 kinds of Tappurisa.
Dutiga-Tappurisa (with the Acc. Case)

e.g.
(1) gamaj
(2) sukhaj

+
+

gato
hato

=
=

gamagato
sukhapatto

Tatiya-Tappurisa (with the Ins. Case)

e.g.
(1) Buddhena +
(2) Rabba

desito =
+
hato

Buddhadesito
=
Rajahato

Catutthi-Tappurisa (with the Dative)

e.g.
(1) Buddhassa
(2) Yaguya

deyyaj =
Buddhadeyyaj
+
tandula
=
yagutandula

Pabcami-Tappurisa (with Abl. Case)

e.g.
(1) Rukkha
(2) rajamha

+
patito =
rukkhapatito
bhito =
rajabhito

Chatthi-Tappurisa (with gen.)

e.g.
(1) Rabbo
(2) Jinassa

+
+

putto
vacanaj

=
=

Rajaputto
Jinavacanaj

+
rato

vasi

=
gamavasi
dhammarato

Sattami-Tappurisa (with loc.)

e.g.
(1) Game
(2) Dhamma +

Notes:
1.

The compounds formed with an infinitive and kama (desious) or kamata (desire) are

considered to be in the
Dative-Tappurisa.
e.g.
(1) gantuj
(2) sotuj
2.

gantukamo
=
sotukamata

In some cases, the case-endings of the first member are not dropped. These compounds are
called Aluttasamasa, e.g.
(1) pabbaj
(2) manasi

3.

kamo
=
+
kamata

+
+

karo
karo

=
=

pabbajkaro
manasikaro

(the son)

If the last member of the compound is a verbal derivative which cannot be used independently.
It is named upapada-Tappurisa, e.g.
(1) kumbhaj karoti ti
(2) urena gacchati ti

=
=

kumbhakato
urago

Comment on the following topics -:

1.Pali alphabet,
2.Sandhi,
3.Declension and conjugation,
4.Compound
5.Indeclinable.

666S A MA S A

There are 7 types of samasa in Pali (including complex compound). Kammadharaya is one of
them. The definitions of samasa are given as follows:

1. Samasa padasavkhepo
=

compoud means the shortening of words (both in letter and in meaning)

2. Samasoti bhinnatthanaj padanamekatthta

=

having one meaning of the various words which have many meanings.

Samasa is one of the 35 poetic ornaments, it can beautify the poet. Therefore it is commonly
used as beautifying aspect.

1.Kammadharayasamasa
This is a dependent descriptive compound. The definition is given below:

Visesanavisessabhuta dve pada yada samasyante tada so samaso kammadharayo namo.

=

when two words of qualifier and qualifyee are combined together, then it is called
kammadharayasamasa, e.g.

1.

ratta

ratta

lata

lata

rattalata

(redcreeper)

qualifier
=

qualifyee

Actually the qualifier of the compounds can be used as an attribute or as an apposition or as

an adverb.

1. Attribute e.g.
(1) Kalyanamitta

kalyana

attribute

(2) Pubbakamma

pubba

attribute

The adjective pubba is placed at the end of the samasa when it qualifies a past participle, e.g.

(1) ditthapubbaja rupaj

(2) vutthapubbo gamo =

object seen before

village inhibited formerly.

2. Noun in apposition e.g.

(1) Asokaraja

king Asoka

(2) Sariputtathera

the Elder Sariputta

When the noun in apposition expresses a comparison, then this is placed at the end of the samasa.
e.g.

(1) munisiho

(siho iva muni)

(2) mukkhacando (cando iva mukkha)

3. Adverb, particle and preposition e.g.

(1) sammasambuddho =

fully enlightened

(2) pacchasamano

(3) sujano
(4) punabbhavo

follower
=

good man

new existence

Kammadharaya is similar to the Tappurisa samasa. But the two component words of the former
refer to the same object or locus.

2.T A P P U R IS AS A M A SA
This is a dependent determinative compound which consists of two members of which the
first depends on the second as a noun or a pronoun in an oblique case, i.e., in any case other than the
nominative and the vocative.
This compound is a noun or an adjective according to the last member is a noun or an
adjective. The gender and the number of the compound are also determined by the last member.
There are 6 kinds of Tappurisa.

1. Dutiga-Tappurisa (with the Acc. Case)

e.g.
(1) gamaj

(2) sukhaj

gato
+

hato

gamagato
=

sukhapatto

2. Tatiya-Tappurisa (with the Ins. Case)

e.g.
(1) Buddhena +

desito =

Buddhadesito

(2) Rabba

hato

Rajahato

3. Catutthi-Tappurisa (with the Dative)

e.g.
(1) Buddhassa

deyyaj =

(2) Yaguya

Buddhadeyyaj

tandula

yagutandula

4. Pabcami-Tappurisa (with Abl. Case)

e.g.
(1) Rukkha
(2) rajamha

patito =

bhito

rukkhapatito

rajabhito

5. Chatthi-Tappurisa (with gen.)

e.g.
(1) Rabbo

putto

Rajaputto

(2) Jinassa

vacanaj

Jinavacanaj

6. Sattami-Tappurisa (with loc.)

e.g.
(1) Game
(2) Dhamma

+
+

rato

vasi

=
=

gamavasi

dhammarato

Notes:

1.

The compounds formed with an infinitive and kama

(desious) or kamata (desire) are considered

to be in the
Dative-Tappurisa.

e.g.
(1) gantuj

kamo

(2) sotuj

2.

gantukamo

kamata

sotukamata

In some cases, the case-endings of the first member are not dropped. These compounds are called
Aluttasamasa, e.g.

3.

(1) pabbaj

karo

pabbajkaro

(2) manasi

karo

manasikaro

(the son)

If the last member of the compound is a verbal derivative which cannot be used independently. It
is named upapada-Tappurisa, e.g.

(1) kumbhaj karoti ti

kumbhakato

(2) urena gacchati ti

urago

666COMPOUND OR SAMASA
Compounds are not unknown in English language. They are usually short, like unknown, outstanding,
stationmaster, but may reach considerable length, although usually written with hyphen or interspace, like welfare-reform
plan, river-transport system. They form a special means of grammatical expression: they consist of a series of words, not
necessarily nouns, although nouns are most common in English compounds, simply lined up without inflections. The whole

unit has a grammatical function in the sentence, as indicated by the inflection of the last component. The Pali compounds fit
into the same definition but they are much more varied and may be quite long.
Therefore, when two or more nouns are combined together to form a grammatical unit it called a Samasa
(compound) in Pali. In Sandhi, we also find two or more words are combined together to make a noun. But Sandhi is done
for easy pronunciation, while in compound, the meaning is emphasize, not the sound. Thus, Samasa connects meaning,
Sandhi is connected with the sound system.
Definition, Quality and Ornament of Samasa

Denifinition
:
Samaso padasavkhepo
words (both in letter and sound)

Samasoti bhinnatthanaj

compound means the shortening of

having one meaning of the words

which have various meanings.

Therefore, sound and meaning are shortened in Samasa.

Quality :
There are 10 qualities in every literary work. One such quality is Ojo
which means the essence

Ornament

Apart from the qualities, there are such 35 poetic ornament.

Therefore, compound is one of the poetic ornament, it can beautify the poet..
(2) The Division of Samasa
Samasa or compound may be divided into six kinds:
(a)
Kammadharaya =
is combined.
(b)
Digu

adjectival compound (where an adjective and substantive

=

numeral determinative (numeral + substantive)

(c)
Tappurisa
=
dependent determinative (substantive + substantive)
Dvanda samasa =
co-ordinative compounds
Avyayibhava
=
adverbial compoud (where an indecliable adverb
included and a substantive is combined)
(f)
Bahubbihi
=
relative or attributive compound (which bears a signification
different from that of the component words)
(d)
(e)

(a) Kammadharaya samasa

A kammadharaya samasa consists of two members of an adjectival compound must, in their uncompounded state, be in the
same case.
They are qualifier and qualified; the qualifier (visesana) is adjective, qualified (visessa) is a noun.
(a)
The qualifying word is generally placed first, but in some cases it comes last. And if the descriptive word in
comparison, it comes last in this compound.
Examples:

rattaj

+
Digho

Asoko +
Sariputto

vatthaj =
rattavatthaj
(red cloth)
+
maggo =
dighamaggo
(long path)
raja
+

adicco viya Buddho

=
thero
=

Asokaraja
=
Sariputtatthero

Buddhadicco

(king Asoka)
(elder Sariputta)

(the sunlike Buddha)

siho viya muni

munisiho

(lionlike sage)

The adjective mahanta becomes maha (lengthened), and if followed by a double consonant becomes maha
(shortened)
Example:

mahanto

+
Mahantaj

muni
+

=
mahamuni
(great sage)
bhayaj =
mahabbhayaj (great fear)

When two feminine words, the first one assumes the form of the masculine, if the word
had been formed from a masculine stem.
Example:

khattiya +
Nagi

kumari =
khattiyakumari
+
manavika
=

(princess of the warrior caste)

nagamanavika (maiden of the

Naga tribe)
when the first feminine form is a proper noun, it does not take the masculine form.
e.g. Nandapokkharani (Nanda pond)
when the particle na is combined to another word, it is replaced by a before a consonant, and by an before a vowel.
Example:

na
na

+
+

manusso
ariyo

=
=

amanusso
anariyo

(non-human)
(ignoble; low)

(b) Digu samasa

When a numeral and a substantive is combined it is called digu. The numeral must be the first member.
There are two kinds of Digu:
Samahara
= collective (which expresses a whole and takes the form of the neuter singular)
Asamahara = individual (which does not express a whole, but takes the plural form)
(i) Samahara Digu
Examples:

pabca

silani
+

=
ahani

pabcasilaj
(the five precepts)
=
sattahahaj
(a week)

+
pabca

bhava

=
+

tibhava (the three states of existence)

indriyani
=
pabcindriyani

satta
(ii) Asamahara Digu
Examples:

tayo

(the five

senses)
(c) Tappurisa samasa
If two nouns, related to each other by some oblique case, are joined together, it is called Tappuisa compound.
The first member, which may be in any case other than the nominative (and the vocative), qualifies or determines
the last member.
The gender and the number of the compound are determined by the last member.
Tappurisa samasa may be divided into six groups according to the cases belonging to the first members:
Dutiya-Tappurisa(with the accusative case)
Tatiya-Tappurisa (with the instrumental)
Catutthi-Tappurisa
(with the dative)
Pabcami-Tappurisa
(with the ablative)

Chatthi-Tappurisa
Sattami-Tappurisa

(with the possessive)

(with the locative)

(i) Dutiya-Tappurisa
Examples:
village)

gamaj

gato

gamagato

(gone to the

Sukkhaj +

patto

sukkappatto

=
Buddhadesito
(preached by the Buddha)
rajahato
(killed by the king)

(having attained

happiness)
(ii) Tatiya-Tappurisa
Examples:

Catutthi-Tappurisa
Examples:

Buddhena
Rabba +

+
hato

esito

rabbo
Buddhassa

+
+

arahaj =
deyyaj =

rajarahaj
(worthy of a king)
Buddhadeyyaj (that should be given to the Buddha)

The compounds formed with an infinitive and kama (desirous) or kamata (desire) are considered to be in the dativetappurisa.
Examples:

(iv) Pabcami-Tappurisa
Examples:

gantuj
Sotuj

+
+

kamo =
kamata =

gantukamo
sotukamata

rukkha +
Rajamha

patito
+

jinassa +
Rabbo +

vacanaj =
putto =

game
Dhamme

+
+

bhito

(desirous to go)
(desire to go)

rukkhapatito
(fallen form the tree)
=
rajabhito
(afraid of the

king)
(v) Chatthi-Tappurisa
Examples:

(vi) Sattami-Tappurisa
Examples:

jinavacanaj
rajaputta

vasi
rato

=
=

(word of the Buddha)

(kings son)

gamavasi
dhammarato

(villager)
(delighting in the doctrine)

If the case ending of the first members of some compounds are not dropped. In that case the compound is called
Aluttasamasa.
Examples:

ante
Manasi +

+
karo

vasiko =
=

antevasiko
(a resident pupil)
manasikaro (keeping in the mind)

There is a variety of the Tappurisa in which the last member is a verbal derivative which cannot be used independently. It is
named Upapada-Tappurisa.
Examples:
kumbhaj+
karoti ti =
kumbhakato
(a potter)
Attamha
+
jato
=
attajo (son)
(d) Dvanda samasa
Two or more nouns joined by ca may be combined together eliminating the intermediate conjunctions. The
compound thus formed is called Dvanda. The members of this compound must be co-ordinate in their uncompounded state.
There are two kinds of dvanda samasa:
Asamahara and Samahara.Dvanda.

(i) Asamahara Dvanda

Stands in the plural, and takes the gender and declension of its last member.
Examples:

samana ca brahmana ca
Mata ca pita ca

samanabrahmana (monks and brahmins)

=
matapitaro

(parents)

(ii) Samahara Dvanda

Takes the form of a neuter singular and becomes a collective, whatever be the number of its members. This occurs with the
names of birds, parts of the body, trees, herbs, arts, musical instruments etc.
Examples:

cakkhu ca sotab ca
=
Jara ca maranab ca

cakkhusotaja
(eye and ear)
=
jaramaranaj
(decay and death)

(e) Avyayibhava samasa

When the first member of a compound is an indeclinable and the second a substantive, it is called an Avyayibhava
samasa.
The whole compound becomes an adverb, taking the ending of the (neuter) accusative singular. Some case (usually
oblique) is implied in the substantial member according to the meaning of the indeclinable.
Examples:

nagarassa
Gharaj

+
+

upa
anu

=
=

upanagaraj
anugharaj

(near the town)

(house after house)

(f) Bahubbihi samasa

When two or more substantives are combined together and the resultant denotes something other than what is
meant by the two members severally, the compound is called Bahubbihi or relative or attributive compound.
This compound requires the addition of such relative pronouns as : he, who, that, which, etc. to express its full
meaning; therefore this is used as an adjective and takes any gender according to that of the noun which it qualifies.
Examples: chinna

+
Jitani +

hattha (yassa, so) = chinnahattho (a man) whose hands have been cut off.
indriyani (yena, so) =
jitindriyo (a monk) who has subduced his senses.

Feminie nouns ending in i, u and the stems ending in tu, generally take the suffix ka, when they are the last member of a
Bahubbihi.
Examples: bhavo

nadiyo =

bahunadiko (a country) where there are many rivers.

When a feminine noun is the last member of a Bahubbihi, it takes the masculine, or neuter form, if it is determining a
masculine or neuter noun; also the first member, if it is feminine, drops its feminine sign.
Examples:

mahanti +

pabba =

mahapabbo (a person) who has great wisdom

Missaka samasa
Compounds themselves may become the members of another compound, and this new compound again may be a
member of another compound, thus forming compounds within compounds. These mixed compounds are called Missaka
samasa (complex compounds)
Examples:

Suranara-mahito
(a) sura ca nara ca
(b) suranarehi
+

mahito =

sabbalavkara-patimandita
(a) sabbe
+

alavkara

=
suranara
(Dvanda)
suranaramahito (Tappurisa)

sabbalavkara

(Kammadharaya)
(b) sabbalavkarehi +

patimandita

sabbalavkarapatimandita

(Tappurisa)

666SAMASA (COMPOUND)
samaso pada sankhepo. Samasa means summarizing the words (to save the time and
space). The combine sense of related words denoting names (noun), upasaga, prefixed and
nippata is called samasa or compound. In a samasa, a new base is formed according to the
following rules:
(1) The case ending of the component words excepting the last are generally dropped and the
compound takes new ending according to its need.
(2) The first word or part of a compound is called pubbapada, and the next one is called parapada.
Sometimes the final vowel of the pubbapada if long become short, e.g., dasi ca daso ca >
dasidaso.
(3) If the pubbapada is in the feminine gender, it is sometimes changed into the musculilne form,
e.g., brahmani + darika > brahmanadarika.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Compound are helpful towards economic of words, time and space. Hence all languages
utilize compound in all aids. In pali one simple word or a noun can be combined with one
or two others, when combined two or more words together, it forms a grammatical unit which is
called samasa. The meaning of the word samasa is coordination or summary. The sense related
word is important in combing words. As we put earlier the case ending of compound words
excepting the last one are gradually dropped and new form gets new case ending. The genders
of combine words are changed and the words are joined together for the sake of euphony.
Pali grammarians divide compound into 6 classes. According to the interrelationship
existing between the members of compound:
Avyayibhava adverbial compound
Tappurisa dependent determinative compound
Kammadharaya adjectival compound
Digu numerical determinative compound
Bahubbihi relative or attributive compound
Dvanda copulative or co-ordinative compound

(1) Avyayabhava
avyaya pubbako avyayibhavo it is so called because the sense of the indeclinable word is
predominant in it. The compound in which and avyaya or indeclinable appears as the first
member of world is called avyayibhava or indeclinable compound. The base form by
avyayibhava compound is neuter and indeclinable. When it ends in a sound, it takes only j.
For examples:

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)

nagarato bahi
gamassa anto
nagarassa upa
gharaj anu
bhattassa paccha
gangaya upari
mabcassa hettha
kuddhassa tiro
sotassa patiloman
jetthassa anupubbena
sahassassa paro
jivassa pariyantaj
balaj anatigama
attajpati
masakanaj abhava
masakanaj abhava
balam anatigamma
attajpati (pati attam)
jivassa pariyantaj
rathassa paccha

>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>

bahinagaraj
antogamaj
upanagaraj
anugharaj
pacchabhattaj
uparigangaj
hetthamabcaj
tirokuddhaj
patisotaj
anujetthaj
>
parosahassaj
yavajivaj
yathabalam
>
paccattaj
nimmasakaj
nimmasakaj
yathabalaj
paccattaj
yavajivam
>
paccharathaj

(out of the city)

(inside the village)
(near the city)
(house after house)
(after lunch)
(upper part of river)
(under the bed)
(outside the wall)
(against the stream)
(according to seniority)
(more than thousand)
(as long as the life last)
(according to ones strength)
(separate, individual)

(according to ones strength)

(separate, individual)
(as long as my life last; until the end)

666GIVE THE MEANING OF THE WORD SAMASA WITH EXAMPLES AND EXPLAIN TAPPURISASAMASA IN PALI?
When two or nouns are combined together to form a grammatical unit it is called a s Samasa some
compounds have an indeclinable as their first member. A few copounds are made up intirely of
indeclinables. There are six kinds of compounds. {1}kammadharaya= adjectival compound Examples:
nilam+upalam=niluppalam blue water-lily. Sarijputto+thero=Sariputtathero the elder Sariputta. Cando
viya mukham=mukhacando moonlike face. Mahanto+munij=mahamuni great sage.
Khattiya+kumari=khattiyakumari princess of the warrior casts. Na+ariyo=anariyo ignoble, low.
{2}Digu= numeral determinative, example 1,Samahara-collective Dve+anguliyo-dvangulam two
inches 2,Asamahara=individual Teyo+bhava=tibhava the three state of existence
3,Tappurisa=dependent determinative Example gamma+gato=gamagato gone to village,
Buddena+desito=Buddhadesito preached by the Buddha,
Yaguya+tandula=yaguya+tandula=yagutandula ricefor gruel, gantum+kamo=gantukamo desirous to
go, Rukkha+ptito=rukkhapatito fallen from the tree, Ranno+putto=rajaputto king`s son,
Vane+puphani=vanapupphani flowers in the forest or wild flowers, Manasi+karo=vanasikaro keeping
in the mind attention. Dhammam caratiti=dhammacari observer of the Dhamma. 4,Dvanda
Samasa=copulative or aggregative Example, Asamaharadvanda Mata ca pita ca=matapitaro parents,
Cakkhu ca sotan ca=Cakhusotam eye and ear. 5,Avvayibhava=Averbail compound Examples,
Rathassa+anu=anuratham behind the chariot. Sotam+pati=patistam against the current
Jivo+yava=jivajivam as long as life lasts. 6,Bahubbhihi=ralative or attributive compound Example
Chinna+hattha yassa so=channahattitho a man whose hands have been cut off. Bahavo+nadiyo
Yasmim so=Bahunadiko a country where there are many rivers. Mahanti+panna yassa so=Mahapanno

a person who has many wives.

QUESTION: EXPLAIN THE KICCA SUFFIXES WITH EXAMPLE AND SHOW HOW TO USE THEM IN SENTENCES.
(lectured by ven. Piyaratna)
We treat kicca suffixes first because they are few in number:
-tabba, -aniya, -nya, -niya, -tayya and -icca these are kicca suffixes
(1)

-tabba or -aniya may be annexed to all the roots to form potential participles expressing a passive meaning:
kara + tabba
= kattabba or ktabba (that should be done)
Explanation: In a place'r of the root is similar to the first consonant of the suffix in the other'r is elided and the first
vowel is lengthened.(?)
kara + aniya
= karanya (that should be done)
su + tabba
= sotabba
su + aniya
= savaniya (that should be heard)
Explanation: In both places the vowel of the root is strengthened; and in the second instance the strengthened
vowel becomes av.
kara + tabba
hara + aniya
paca + aniya

= ktabba
= haraniya (should be carried)
= pacaniya (should be cooked)

(2)
-nya and -niya are suffixed to some roots to form passive participles ( is is the sign indicatory of strengthening).
The changes they undergo are:
dhya becomes jjha
dya becomes jja
mya becomes mma
jya becomes jja
gya becomes gga
cya becomes kya
Examples:

(3)

= vadya = vajja (what should be said)

= gamya
= gamma (what should be understood)
= vkya (what should be spoken)
= grayha (what should be despised)

-nya after the roots ending in , i and become eyya.

d + eyya
= deyya (what should be given)
ji + eyya
= jeyya (what should be conquered)
n + eyya
= neyya (what what should be led)
-niya
kara + niya
mara + niya

(4)

vada + nya
gamu + nya
vaca + nya
garaha + nya

= kriya (what should be done)

= mriya (what should be killed)

-icca and -tayya are suffixed only to form a limited number of words:
kara + icca
= kicca 'that should be business)

Ar(?) of the root is elided before the suffix:

+ tayya
= tayya (what should be known)
pada + tayya
= pattayya (what should be arrived)35

QUESTION: WILL BE ABSOLUTIVES... (LECTURED BY VEN. PIYARATNA)

(1)
Indeclinable active past participles or gerunds or absolutives according to some modern grammarians are formed
with the suffixes -tv, -tvna, -tna, -ya and -tya.
(i)

These may be joined to the roots or bases by means of a connecting i:

paca + i + tva
= pacitva (having cooked)
bhunja + i + tva = bhunjitva (having eaten)

(ii)

Sometimes the last consonant of the root is dropped before these:

kara + tva
= katva (having done)
chida + tva
= chetva (having cut or broken)

(iii)

The final long vowel of a root is sometimes shortened or strengthened before these:
da + tva
= datva (having given)
ni + tva
= netva (having carried)

(iv)
t of the suffixes is dropped or changed together with the last consonant of the root in a
few cases:
disa + tva
= disva (having seen)
ladha + tva
= laddha (having got)
(v)

Where nothing but the elision of the final vowel of the root has taken place:
hana + tva
= hantva (having killed)
gamu + tva
= gantva (having gone) m is changed to n

(2)
-ya is assimilated, in many cases, to the last consonant of the root; it is directly added to the roots ending in a long
vowel.
(i)
(ii)

(iii)
(iv)

(3)

Directly added: + da + ya
= dya (having taken)
Assimilated with the preceding consonant:
a + gamu + ya = agamya
= agamma (having come)
vi + bhaja + ya = vibhajja (having divided)
-y is interchanged with the last consonant if the latter is h:
gaha + ya
= gahya
= gayha (having taken)
Sometimes -y is reduplicated:
vi + ci + ya
= viceyya (having considered)

-tya is always changed to -cca together or without the last consonant of the root:
upa + hana + tya= upahacca (having vexed)
ava + i + tya
= avecca (having understood)

35 Actually this verb does not make sense, because arrive is a verb that cannot be in a passive form.

TADDHITA NOMINAL DERIVATIVES (GIVEN BY VEN. PAINDRIYA) 2010

Words formed by adding suffixes to the bases of substantives, primary or derived from roots,
adjectives, etc. are called Taddhita. Some of these derivatives are treated as nouns and adjectives and are declined
accordingly. A few others are treated as indeclinables. There are many such suffixes which are used in various senses. The
following are the principal ones of these :1. '-a' is used to signify possession, pedigree, etc.
In this case the initial vowel, not followed by a double consonant, undergoes Vuddhi substitute. Examples :Pa + a = paa (m. Nom. Sing. pao), he who has wisdom, or wise.
Saddh + a = saddh (m. Nom. Sing. saddho), he who has faith, or faithful; devotional.
Vasih + a = Vsiha -vsiho, son of Vasiha; vsih, daughter of Vasiha; vsiha, Vasiha clan.
2. '-ika'36 is used to signify pertaining to, mixed with, crossing, versed in, engaged in, etc. In this case too the initial
vowel, not followed by a double consonant, undergoes Vuddhi substitute. Examples :Dhamma + ika = dhammika, righteous.
Ky + ika = kyika, bodily
Nagara + ika = ngarika, pertaining to the city, i.e., urban.
Loka + ika = lokika, worldly
Loa + ika = loika, mixed with salt
Nv + ika = nvika, navigator, he who crosses in a ship
Magga + ika = maggika, traveller
Vinaya + ika = venayika, he who studies vinaya
Bhagra + ika = bhagrika, treasurer
3. '-ima' and '-iya' are also used to signify pertaining to . Examples :Anta + ima = antima, last
Majjha + ima = majjhima, middle, central
Loka + iya = lokiya, worldly
4. '-i', '-ika', '-ima', '-mantu', '-vantu', and '-v' are used to signify possession. Examples :Daa + = da, he who has a stick
Chatta + = chatt, he who has an umbrella
Putta + ika = puttika, he who has sons
Daa + ika = daika, he who has a stick
Putta + ima = puttima, he who has sons
Dhiti + mantu = dhitimantu, courageous
Bandhu + mantu = bandhumantu, he who has relatives
Gua + vantu = guavantu, virtuous
Medh + v = medhv, he who has wisdom
5. '-maya' is used in the sense of made of. Examples :Aya + maya = ayomaya, made of iron
Dru + maya = drumaya, wooden
Mana + maya = manomaya,37 mental
Rajata + maya = rajatamaya, made of silver
Suvaa + maya = suvaamaya, or sovaamaya, golden
6. '-t' is used to signify collection, state, or quality. The derivatives thus formed are always in the
feminine. Examples :Gma + t = gmat, collection of villages
Jana + t = janat, multitude
Bla + t = blat, ignorance, childhood
Dhamma + t = dhammat, state of things, nature
Manussa + t = manussat, manhood
36 It may be similar to English '-ish' and '-ic' as in 'hellish' or 'heroic'.
37 Mana and other words are similarly declined when combined with another word or with the suffix '-maya' they change
their final vowel from '-a' into '-o'.

7. '-tta'38 and '-ya' are also used to signify state or quality.39 The derivatives thus formed are in the
neuter. In the case of '-ya' the initial vowel, not followed by a double consonant, undergoes Vuddhi
substitute. Examples :Aroga + ya = rogya, health, freedom from disease
Bla + ya = blya, ignorance, childhood; + tta = blatta, ignorance
Manussa + tta = manussatta; manhood
Nla + tta = nlatta, blueness
Paita + ya = Pitya, and Paicca, wisdom
8. '-tara' and '-iya' are used to express the comparative degree, and '-tama' and '-iha', the
superlative degree. Examples :POSITIVE COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE
Bla, young, ignorant blatara balatama
Dhamma, religious, righteous dhammiya dhammiha
Gua, virtuous guiya guiha
Medha, wise medhiya medhiha
Pata, noble patatara patatama
Ppa, evil ppatara, ppiya ppatama, ppiha
Appa, little, few appatara appatama
Appa kaniya, younger kaniha, youngest
Pasattha, good seyya, better seha, best
Vuddha, old jeyya jeha
9. '-ka' is, affixed to numerals to denote a group. Examples :Eka + ka = ekaka, one-group; unit; groups of singles
Dvi + ka = dvika, two-group; dyad ; twofold group
Catu + ka = catukka, four-group; tetrad ; threefold group
These derivatives take either the masculine or the neuter.
10. '-kkhattu' is affixed to numerals to denote the number of times. Examples :Eka + kkhattu = ekakkhattu, once
Dvi + kkhattu = dvikkhattu, twice
11. '-dh' is affixed to numerals, '-so' and '-th' to others, to form distributive adverbs. Examples :Eka + dh = ekadh, in one way
Paca + dh = pacadh, in five ways, fivefold
Bahu + dh = bahudh, in many ways, manifold
Attha + so = atthaso, according to the meaning
Sabba + so = sabbaso, in every way
Aa + th = aath, in another way, differently
Sabba + th = sabbath, in every way
These last two classes of derivatives are treated as declinables. It should be understood that some comparatives and
superlatives are formed by prefixing 'ati-', and 'atva-' or 'ativiya-' to the positive respectively.

TADDHITA (COPIED FROM THE NEW PALI COURSE, GIVEN BY VEN. PAINDRIYA) 2010
It was stated in first book that there are five classes of nouns, of which the first, second and the third classes have
already been explained. The fifth, taddhitama, will now to be explained. Taddhita or a secondary derivative is formed
from a substantive or a primary derivative by adding another suffix to it.
(A) These derivatives are adjectives in their nature , but in most cases are used as substantives.
(B) The final vowel of a word is often elided before a taddhita suffix.
38 Compare with Saskrt 'tvam'; English '-dom', e.g. 'kingdom'.
39 Sometimes the word 'bhva', which means nature or state, is combined with other words to express
state or quality, e.g., purisabhva (manhood); itthibhva (womanhood) etc.

(C) The first vowel of the word, to which the suffix is added, is often strengthened when it is not followed by a double
consonant. In this case a becomes , , , become e, u, become o.
(D) To indicate that some suffix required strengthening, an indicatory letter is affixed by the grammarians to it. This
indicatory letter is generally . The main divisions of the taddhitas are:
() Smaa-Taddhita.
() Bhva-Taddhita.
() Avyaya-Taddhita.
The first division is again divided into the following sub-divisions:
(1) Apaccattha

(3) Atthyattha

(2) Anekattha

(4) Sakhya

Smaa - Appaccattha
Suffix '-a' is added to some nouns to denote a lineage. Examples:
Vasihassa apacca = vsiho.
Formation:
Vasiho+a (When the last vowel and are dropped) becomes vasi+a after strengthening the first vowel and joining the
last one to the stem it becomes vasiha. Now, this being an adjective, it may qualify any male, female, or a group as born in
the clan of vasiha. Therefore, it may take the gender of the person or the group for which it stands. If the person be a man
it is in the masculine. If the person be a woman it takes the feminine form, Vsih. If it be a family it is in the neuter.
Similarly formed are:
Bhradvja+a =Bhradvja

Vasudeva+a=Vasudeva

Gotama+a=Gotama

Baladeva+a=Baladeva

'-nyana' and '-na' are suffixed to vaccha, kacca and some other names to denote the linage.
Vacca+yana=Vacchyana

Moggalla+yana=Moggallyana

Kacca+yana=Kaccyana

Moggalla+na=Moggallna

Kacca+na= kaccna
In the first two instances the vowels are not strengthened because they are followed by double consonants. '-neyya
is suffixed to kattika, vinat and some other feminine nouns to denote their offspring.
Kattik+eyya=Kattikeyya

Bhagin+eyya=Bhgiayya

Vinat+eyya=venateyya

Rohi+eyya=bhagineyya

'-nava' is suffixed to Manu, Upagu and such others to denote the offspring.
Manu+ava=Mava.
Upagu+ava=Opagava.
Padu+ava=pandava.
'-era' is suffixed to vidhava and some others to denote the offspring.
Vidhav+era =vedhavera.
Samaa+era=Smaera.

Smaa - Anekattha
'-nika' is suffixed to some nouns to denote the meanings mixed with engaged in, living by means of, going by
means of, relating to, playing upon, connected with, dealing with, carrying upon, born in or belonging to a place, studying,
possession, etc.
A. Mixed with:

H. Dealing with

Ghata+ika=ghtika

Tadula+ika = tadulika

Loa+nika=loika

Tela+ika = telika

Sakaa+ika=skaika

Skara+ika = skarika

B. Engaged in:

I. carrying upon:

Nava+ika=Nvika

Ssa+ika = ssika

Sakaa+ika=sakaika

Khandha+ika = khandhika

C. Living by means of:

J. Born in or belonging to a place:

Balisa+ika=blisanika

Magadha+nika = Magadhika

D. Going by means of

Araa+ika = araika

Pada+ika=pdika or padika

Loka+ika=lokika

Ratha+nika=rathika

Apya+ika=apyika

E. Relating to

K. Studying:

Samudda +ika=smuddika

Vinaya+ika=venayika

Raha +ika =rahika

Suttanta+ika=suttantika

F. Playing upon

Takka+ika=takkika

Vi +ika=veika

L. Possession:

Vasa+ika=vasika

Sagha+ika = sghika

G. Connected with

Sarra+ika = sarrika

Dvra+ika = dvrika

M. Performed by:

Bhadgra+ika=bhadagrika

Kya+ika=kayika
Vc+ika=vcasika
Mana+ika=mnasika

Suffix '-a' is added to some nouns to denote the meanings dyed with, the flesh of, belonging to, knowing of,
where someone lives or is born, where something exists or has arisen, possession,etc.
A. Dyed with:

D. Knowing:

Kasva+a=ksva

Vykaraa+a=veyykaraa ('vya-' becomes 'veyy-'.

Halidda+a=hlidda

E. Place where someone lives or is born:

Nila+a=nila

Naga+a=ngara

B. The flesh of:

Sara+a=srasa

Skara+a = sokara

Mana+a=mnasa

Mahisa+a = mhisa

Ura+a=orasa

Sakua+a=sakuna

F. Possession:

C. Belonging to:

Saddh+a=saddh

Sugata+a=sogata

Pa+a=pa

Magadha+a=Mgadha
Purisa+a=porisa
'-ima' and '-iya' are suffixed to some nouns to denote possession,position,etc.
Pacch+ima=pacchima

Putta+iya=puttima

Anta+ima=antima

Jat+iya=jiya

Majjha+ima=majjhima

Bodhipakkha+iya=bodhipakkhiya

Heha+ima=hehima

Pacavagga+iya=pacabaggiya

Loka+iya=lokiya

Udara+iya=udariya

'-t' is suffixed to some nouns to denote multitude or collection. The derivatives formed with this are in the
feminine.
Jana+t=janat
Gma+t=gmat
Deva+t=devat
This, however,does not give a collective meaning. The suffix '-ma' too sometimes gives a collective meaning.
Dvi+a=dve+a=davya
Ti+a=te+a=taya (here 'e' becomes 'ay')
'-lu' is suffixed to some nouns to denote tendency and abundance.
Day+lu=daylu
Abhijjh+lu=abhijjhlu
Dhaja+lu=dhajlu
'-ka' is often added to the end of these words, which are always adjectives, and dayluka etc, are formed. '-ka is
suffixed to some nouns to denote smallness, contempt, collection, etc., but sometimes it adds nothing at all to the primary
meaning of the word.
Putta, puttaka

Ghaa, ghaaka

Ludda, luddaka

Pha, phaka

Padita, paditaka
Collection:
Catu+ka=catukka, and many other words formed with numerals will come in the sankhyataddhita.
Adding nothing to the primary meaning.
Kumra=kumraka
Mava=mavaka
Mudu=maduka
This is sometimes added to the derivatives formed with suffix '-ma', denoting the place where someone lives or is
born, and to Bahubbhi compounds, denoting possession, necessarily when the last member ends in a vowel other than '-a'.
(a) Kusinr+a=kosinra=kosinraka

Rjagaha+a=Rjagaha=gjagahaha
(b) Bahu+nad+ka=bahunadika.
'-maya' is suffixed to some nouns to form adjectives denoting made of, arisen from.
Suvaa,suvaamaya

Mathikmaya

Rajatamaya

Manomaya

Drumaya

Smaa-Atthyattha:
Suffixes '-ava', '-ala', '-ila', '-ika', '-', '-v', and '-ss' are annexed to different nouns to denote possession or the
meaning endowed with.
A. -ava

E. -

Kesa+ava=kesava.

Ml+= mal

B. -ala

Vamma+= vamm

Vc+ala= vcla

Bhoga+=bhog

C. -ila

Kuha+= kutth

Ja+ita=jaila

Manta+= mant

Phea+ila= pheila

Danta+= dant

Tuda+ila= tudila

F. -v

D. -ika

Medh+v= medhav

Dada+ika= dadika

My+v= myv

Ml+ika= mlika

G. -ss

Gaa+ika=gaika

Tapa+ss= tapass
Yasa+ss=yassass
Teja+ss=tejass

The feminine forms of the nouns annexed with '-', '-v', and '-ss' are formed by adding another suffix, '-in' to
them.
Mli+in= malin

Medhavi+in= medhavin

Mant+in= mantin

Tapass+in= tapassin

To denote possession,'-vantu' and '-mantu' are suffixed to different nouns,is suffixed to the nouns ending in '-a',
and the other to those ending in '-' and '-u'.
Guna+vantu= gunavantu

Buddhi+mantu= buddhimantu

Dhana+vantu= dhanavantu

Bhamu+mantu= Bhanumantu

yu+mantu become yasmantu through yusmantu, but not yamantu. More words of this kind and their
declension are given on page of the first book. The feminine of these is formed by adding an '-' at the end of the suffix and
dropping 'u' before it.
Guavantu+= guavant
Satimantu+= satimant
Sometimes they drop not only u but also n of the suffix.

Dhana+vantu+= dhanavat
Buddhi+mantu+= buddhimat
An additional is annexed to form the feminine of the derivatives formed with the suffixes '-mava', '-nika', 'neyya', '-na', '-vantu' and '-mantu'.
Mava+i=mav

Bhagineyya+=bhagineyy

Nvika+= navik

Gotama+=gotami

'-a', is suffixed to some nouns to denote possession.

Saddh+a=saddha.
Pa+a=paa.
Ppa+a= ppa.
'-ara' is suffixed to form the adjectives of the comparative degree, and '-tama' to form those of the superlative.
Positiv: ppa

Pasitive: sundara

Comparativ: papatara

Comparative: sundaratara

Superlative: papatama

Superlative: sundaratama

Smaa-Sakhytaddhita
'-ma' is suffixed to the cardinal numerals to form ordinals.
Paca+ma= pacama
Satta+ma = sattama
Aha+ma= ahama
Being adjectives, these are in the three genders. In the feminine they take in addition the feminine suffix '-' or '-'.
Pacama+=pacam the fifth
Pacama+= pancam the fifth
And so on in every case.
'-tiya' is suffixed to dvi and ti to form ordinals. Dvi becomes du and ti becomes ta before that suffix.
Dvi+tiya=du+tiya=dutiya
Ti+tiya=ta+tiya=tatiya
Dvi takes the forms du and di when it is followed by some other nouns or suffixes.
Dvi+vidha= duvidha
Dvi+rattiyo= diratta
Dvi+gua= digua
'-ha' is suffixed to catu and ha is cha in order to form the ordinals.
Catu+ha=catuttha.
Cha+ha= chaha.
'-' is suffixed to dasa, when it is preceded by some other numeral, to form ordinals denoting a lunar day. In that
compound the last vowel of the preceding numeral sometimes becomes a.
Eka+dasa+= ekadas

Paca+dasa+= pacadas or pannaras

Dvi+dasa+=dvdas

Catu+dasa+ = ctuddasi

'-ka is suffixed to the numerals to form the collective nouns.

Dvi+ka=dvika

Sata+ka=sataka

Ti+ka=tika

Dasa+ka=dasaka

Catu+ka=catukka

Bhva-Taddhita.
'-t', '-tta', '-ttana', '-ya' and '-eyya' are suffixed to some nouns to denote the state, nature or quality of being.
Lahu+ta=lahuta

Bahussuta+tta=bahussutatta

Sura+ta= surata

Puthujjana+ttana=puthujjanattana

Settha+ta =satthta

Jaya+ttana=jayttana

Hina+ta =hinata

Aroga+nya=arogya

Manussa+tta=manussatta

Dubbala+nya=dubbalya

Yacaka+tta=yackatta
'n' in '-ya' is indicative of strengthening of the first vowel. Many consonants before '-ya' change their forms
together with '-ya' of the suffix.
T+nya= tya becomes cca

+nya=nya becomes jja

J+nya=jya. becomes jja

J+ya=jya becomes ssa

D+nya=dya becomes a
Padita+ya=paditya=padicca

Nipuna+nya=nepunya=nepunna

Adhipati+nya=dhipatya=dhipacca

Glana+nya=gelanya=gelanna

Bahusuta+nya=bhusutya=bhusacca ('u' of suta is

changed into 'a')

Sumana+nya=somanasya=somanassa

Kusala+nya=kosalya=kosalla

Adhipati+neyya=adhipateyya

Vipula+nya=vepulya=veplla

Saha+neyya=saheyya

Suhada+nya=sohadya=sohajja

Patha+neyya=patheyya

Bhisaja+nya=bhesajya=bhesajja

Raja+nya= rajya=raja
'-Na' is suffixed to a few nouns to denote the state.
Pau+a=paava.
Garu+na=garava.
Remark.
The derivatives formed with '-t' are in the feminine those formed with '-tta', '-ttana', '-ya', and '-neyya' are in the
neuter, patava and grava are in the masculine, patuta, garuda and patuttam, garuttam, which are in the feminine and the
neuter respectively are also found.

Avyaya - Taddhita.
'-kkhattu' is suffixed to the numerals to form the multiplicative adverbs.
Eka+kkhattu=ekakkhattu

Sakassakkhattu

Dvikkhattu

Bahukkhattu

Dasakkhattu
'-dh' is suffixed to the numerals to form the adverbs of manner.
Panca+dha=pancadha

Gahudha

Dasadha

Katidha

Satadha
'-so' is suffixed to some nouns to form the distributive adverbs.
pacaso

sabbaso

hnaso

yoni+so=yoniso

pda(?)

bahuso
'-th' and '-tha' are suffixed to some pronouns in order to form the adverbs of manner.

Ta+th=tath

Sabba+th=sabbbath

Ya+th=yath

Ki+tha=katha

Aa+tha=aath

Ima+tha=itta

Ubhaya+th=ubhayath
'-tana' is suffixed to some indeclinables to form adjectives from them.
Ajja+tana=ajjatana

Pur+tana=purtana

Sve+tana=svtana

Sana+tana=sanantana

Hiya+tana=hyattana
'-tra', '-ttha', '-hi' and '-ha' are suffixed to some pronouns in order to form adverbs of place.
Sabba+tra=sabbatra

Ima+ttha=attha ('ma' is elided and 'i' be comes 'e')

Sabba+ttha=sabbattha

Ima+tra=atra ('-ma' is elided and 'i' becomes 'a')

Ta+tra=tattra

Ki+hi=kuhi ('ki' becomes ku)

Ta+ttha=tattha

Ki+ha=kaha ('ki' becomes ka)

Ya+ttha=yattha

Ta+hi/ha=tahim/taha.

Aa+tra=aatra
'-d', '-dni' and '-dcana' are suffixed to some pronouns in order to form adverbs of time.
Ya+d=yad

Ki+d=kad

Ta+d=tad

Ima+dni=idni

Sabba+d=sabbad

Ki+dcann=kudcana

Eka+d=ekad
'-ha' and '-dha' are suffixed to ima to form two adverbs of place.
Ima+ha=iha

Ima+dha=idha ('ma' of ima is elided before '-dha')

666T A DD H IT A (S EC O N D A R Y D E R IV A T IV E )
The stem of a noun is derived from a root by the addition of one or more suffixes. The stem that is
formed by the addition of one suffix to the root is called a primary derivative (kitaka). The stem that is
formed by adding one or more suffixes to a primary derivative is called a secondary derivative (taddhita).
Therefore Taddhita means a special kind of nouns which have been formed by adding suffixes
(which have special meanings) to the noun or to the primary derivatives.
The main divisions of the Taddhitas are:

1. Samabba-Taddhita (General)
2. Bhava-Taddhita
3. Avyaya-Taddhita

(Gerundial)
(Indeclinable and Adverbials)

There are 6 main groups of suffixes to form the Avyaya-Taddhita, i.e.

1.

Suffix to form the multiplicative adverbs.

i.e. numeral

2.

-kkhattuj

e.g.

(1) eka

kkhattuj

ekakkhattuj

(once)

(2) bahu

kkhattuj

bahukkkattuj

(many times)

Suffix to form the distributive adverbs.

i.e. noun

3.

-so

e.g.

(1) padaso

word by word

(2) sabbaso

in every ways

Suffixes to form adverbs of manner, i.e.

(1) numeral

-idha

e.g.

(2) pronouns

(a) pabcadha

in 5 ways

(b) dasadha

in ten ways

-tha, -thaj.

e.g.
(a) ta

tha

tatha

(in that way)

(b) ya

tha

yatha

(as)

(c) ubhaya

tha

ubhayatha

(in both

(d) kij

thaj

ajjatana

ways)
=

kathaj

way; how)

4.

Suffixes to form adjective

i.e. indecliable

-tana

e.g.
(1) ajja
(2) hiyo

5.

tana

tana

hiyattana

Suffixes to form adverbs of place. i.e.

(1)pronouns

e.g.

-tra, -ttha,

-him,

-ham.

(in what

(a) sabbatra

(everyday)

(b) sabbattha
(c) kij

him

(d) kim

haj

(2) Ima

kuhim (kim > ku)

kahaj

(kij > ka)

-ha and -dha.

(a) Ima

ha

iha

(b) Ima

dha

idha

(here)

(Ima > I )

6.Suffixes to form adverb of time.

i.e. pronoun

-da,

-dani and -dacanaj.

(1) ya

da

yada

(whenever)

(2) Ima

dani

idani

(now)

(3) kij

dacanaj

kadacanaj

(sometimes)

QUESTION: GIVE A DESCRIPTION BRIEFLY ON THE SECONDARY DERIVATION AND DESCRIBE APACCATHA SUFFIXES
WITH EXAMPLES.
Taddhita or secondary derivative is formed from a substantive or primary derivative by adding another suffix
(denoting some special meaning) to it.
These derivatives are adjectives in their nature, but in most cases used as substantives. The final vowel of a word is
often elided before a taddhita suffix. The first vowel of the word, to which the suffix is added, is often strengthened when it
is not followed by a double consonant. In this case:
a becomes ,
i becomes ,
becomes e,
u becomes o,
becomes o.
To indicate, that some suffix requires strengthening an indicatory letter (anabandha) is affixed by the grammarians
to it. This indicatory letter is generally n.
Appaccatha, suffix -na is added to some nouns to denote a lineage (not, that n is indicative of strengthening.)
Example: vasithassa apaccan = vsittho(?)

QUESTION: EXPLAIN NUMERICAL DERIVATIVES WITH EXAMPLE.

-ma is suffixed to the cardinal numerals to form ordinals.
Example: paca + ma = pacama.
-tiya is suffixed to dvi and ti to form ordinals: dvi becomes du and ti becomes ta before that suffix.
Example: dvi + tiya = du + tiya = dutiya
-ttha is suffixed to catu and ttha to cha in order to form the ordinals.
Example: catu + ttha = catuttha
i is suffixed to dasa when it is preceded by some other numeral, to form ordinals denoting a longer day(?). In that
compound the last vowel of the preceding numeral sometimes becomes a.
Example: eka + dasa + i = ekadasi
-ka is suffixed to the numerals to form the collective nouns.
Example: dvi + ka = dvika

QUESTION: EXPLAIN BHAVA COMPOUND WITH EXAMPLE.

Bhava (gerundial) taddhita. -ta, -tta, -ttana, -nya and -neya are suffixed to some nouns to denote the state,
nature or quality of being:
-ta:
lahu + ta
-tta:
manussa + tta
-ttana: puthujjana + ttana
-naya:
aroga + naya

= lahuta
= manussatta
= puthujjanattana
= arogya

n in naya is indicative of stregthening of the first vowel. Many consonants before -nya change their forms together
with -ya suffix:
t + nya = tya
l + nya = lya
d + nya = dya
b + nya = nya
j + nya = jya
s + nya = sya

becomescca.
becomeslla.
becomesjja.
becomesbna.
becomesjja.
becomesssa.

Examples:
pandita + nya = panditya = pandicca
kosala + nya = kosalya = kosalla
suhada + nya = sohadya = sohajja
nipuna + nya = nepunya = nepua
bhisaja + nya = bhesajja = bhesajja

-neyya: adhipati + neyya = dhipateyya. -na is suffixed to a few nouns to denote the state.
Examples:
patu + na = ptva
garu + na = grava

666INDECLINABLE (AVYAYA), NIPATA AND UPASAGGA

-

nipata = uncountable.
Upasagga = beginning of a word or prefix. There are 15-20 upasagga.
Vikarana or infix, e.g., in between suffix and root, kara + i + ti = i is vikarana.
There are 10 groups of root is pali:
Bhu >
bha
+ v + i
=
bhavati
Ru
>
rud
+ a + i
=
rudati
Di
>
div
+ ya + ti
=
divati
Su
>
su
+ na + ti
=
sunnati
INDECLINABLES

Notes:
The indeclinable are particles, they are incapable of any declension according to the rules of
grammar. In other words they remain alike or unchanged, irrespective of number, gender, person and
case. In pali grammatical text, nipatas are defined as follows:
Sadisam tisu lilngesu
Sabbasu ca vibhattisu
Vacanesu ca sabbesu
Yaj na vyeti tadavyayaj.
Same in three genders; in all cases, in all numbers; whateer does not decline or change that is
called avyaya (indeclinable).
Besides the upasaggas, all other particles are called the nipatas. Some of them are expletive
particles i.e., not necessary to the sense that inserted just to full a gap in a sentence, they are called
padapurana. And the rest are meant to supply a specific sense, they are called atthapurana. There is
a different between nipatas and upasaggas in regard to they used. The former are used either alone or
with other words within a sentence but the latter can only be prefix to nominal or verbal bases. For

example, abhi + dhamma (dhamma is nominal); apa + gacchati (gacchati is verbal bases).
Nipatas like ca, ce, va, va, hi, kho, pana, khalu etc are never used at the beginning of a sentence.
There is a large number of nipatas in pali of which the following are most frequently used:
1. addha timely, exactly,
some places it has no20. Pana (meaningless)
surely, indeed, certainly.
meaning.
Sukho
have21. Sace if
2. Aho oh!
sapurissena
sanghamo22. Sakim once
3. Amma sometimes used for
(associated or to meet a good23. Sakka possible
dear (female)
man indeed a happiness)
24. Patthaya hence forth
4. Antara between
10. Ijgha look here. (to draw25. Sudam just
5. Ara away, far from. Rukkho
attention).
Ijgha
gaso26. Uda, udahu or
gamo ara (tree far from
gacchama bhagavato dassana27. Vata indeed, surely, truly
village)
(look here, let go to see the28. Yava as far as, until
6. Atha then, but.
Buddha.)
29. Tava till then, yet
7. Bhiyyo too much, much11. Kamam

inevitable,30. Ettha here

more.
Bhiyyo
cittam
willingly
31. Idani now
passidati. (heart is much more12. Khalu (meaningless)
32. Kacci perhaps
please). Dukkhaj attha bhiyyo13. Kira (meaningless)
33. Kaham where
(suffering is too much here). 14. Nama by name (namely) 34. Katham now
8. Handa

addressing.15. Nissaya near at, near to, or35. Kiva how far
Sometimes no meaning, but
because of that
36. Mabbe perceive, think
we use at the beginning of the16. Ma not
37. Tada then
sentence. Handa, ahaj gamisaj17. Na not
38. Tatha like wise, accordingly
(well-go; it is emphatic18. Nu (meaningless) kho nu39. Yebhuyyena almost all,
particle.)
tvaj (who are you?)
frequently.
9. Have indeed, certainly. In19. Nuna surely
Some words which were originally pronominal dedicative were later used adverbially as nipatas.
Those are:
1. atra here
8. tada then
2. ettha here
9. ekada once
3. ito from here
10. sada everyday, always
4. tatra there
11. sabbada everyday, always
5. idha, idha here
12. sabbattha every where
6. kada when
13. ajja - today
7. yada whenever

666INDECLINABLE
Tunand taveare suffixed to the roots or the bases in order to form infinitives. (tava is employed
only in verse)
a) They are joined with an additional I to the roots ending in a and u.

b) They are directly added to the roots ending in a.

c) The last consonant of some roots is assimilated to t of the suffixes.
d) Strengthening of the first vowel sometimes takes place before these.
tun with an additional i
paca+i+tun= pacitum
khada+i+tun=khadatitum
hara+ i+ tun=haritum
dhavu+i+tun=dhavitum

(to cook)
(to eat)
(to carry)
(to run)

Added to the bases

suna+i+tun=sunitum
bujjha+i+tun=bujjhitum
jana+i+tun= janitum
chinda+i+tun=chinditum

(to hear)
(to understand)
(to know)
(to cut)

After the roots ending in a

Da+tun=datum
Pa+tun=patum
Tha+tun=thadum
Na+tun=natum
Ya+tun= yatum

(to give)
(to drink)
(to stand)
(to know)
(to go)

Root kara becomes ka before these; then it is treated as a root ending in a.

Ka+tun=katum
Ka+tva= katva

(to do)
(to do)

Where assimilation occurs and the radical vowel is strengthened:

Kara+tun= kattum
Chida+tun=chettum
Bhuja+tun= bhottum
Pada+tun= Pattum
Hara+tun= hattum
Vada+tun= vattum
Gamu+ tun=gantum
Labha+tun= laddum
Budha+tun=boddhum

(to do)
(to cut)
(to eat; to enjoy)
(to arrive or attain)
(to carry)
(to play)
(to go)
(to get)
(to perceive)

In the last two examples both bh+ t and dh+ t have become ddh.
Where t is nit doubled and strengthening of the vowel takes place:
Ni+tun= netum
Ji+tun=jetum
Su+tun=sotum
Hu+ tun=hotum

(to lead or carry).

(to conquer)
(to hear)
(to be or become).

To the causal bases, and the bases of the seventh conjugation, ending in a, these suffixes are joined
with the help of an i. They are directly added to those bases ending in e.
Causal base
Kare+tun= karetum
Karaya+i+tun= karayitum
Marape+tun= marapetum
Marapaya+i+tun=marapayitum
Gahe+tun=gahetum
Gahapaya+i+tun=gahapayitum

(to cause to do).

(to cause to kill).
(to cause to take)

Bases of the Seventh conjugation

Core+tun= coretum
Coraya+i+tun=
Pale+tun=paletum
Palaya+i+tun=palayitum
Dese+tun=desetum
Deseya+i+tun=

(to steal)
(to protect or govern)
(to preach)

Indeclinable active past participles or gerunds or absolute, according to some modern grammarians are
formed with the suffixes tva, tvana, tuna, tu and tya.
a)
b)
c)
d)

These may be joined to the root is dropped before these

Sometimes the last consonant of the root is dropped before these.
The final long vowel of a root is sometimes shortened or strengthened before these.
T of the suffix is dropped or changed together with the last consonant of the root in a few cases.

Joined to the roots by means of I

Paca+i+ tva=pacitva
Kara+i+ tvana= karitvana
Vanda+i+ tva=vandituna

( having cooked)
( having done)
( having bowed down)

Joined to the bases:

Bhunj+i+ tva=bhunjitva
Saya+i+ tvana=sayitvana
Suna+i+ tuna=sunituna
Jaha+i+ tva=jahitva

(having eaten)
(having slept)
(having heard)
(having abandoned)

Where the last consonant is dropped:

Kara+i+ tva=katva
Hana+i+ tva=hatva
Bhuja+i+ tva=bhutva
Pada+i+ tva=patava
Caja+i+ tva=catva
Chinda+i+ tva=chitva
Bhida+i+ tva=bhitva

(having done)
(having killed)
(having eaten)
(having arrived or come)
(having abandoned)
(having cut)
(having broken or opened)

Final vowel shortened or strengthened

Da + tva=datva
Ni+ tva= netva
Hu+ tva=hutva
Na+ tva=natva
Tha+ tva=thatva

(having given)
(having carried)
(having been)
(having known)
(having stood or stayed)

T of the suffix is dropped or changed

Disa+ tva=disva
Labha+ tva=labhatva

(having seen)
(having got)

Where nothing but the elision of the final vowel of the root has taken place:
Hana+ tva= hantva
Mana+ tva=mantva
Ni+ tva=nitva
Ya+ tva=yatva
Pa+ tva=tva

(having killed)
(having thought)
(having carried)
(having gone)
(having drunk)

In gamu + tva = gantva

(having gone) m is changed to n.

Ya is assimilated, in many cases, to the last consonant of the root; it is directly added to the roots
ending in a long vowel.
Directly added
A+dha+ya= adhaya
Pa+ha+ya= pahaya
A +ni +ya= aniya
A+na+ya= anaya

(having taken)
(having abandoned)
(having brought)
(having known)

Assimilated with the preceeding consonant.

A +gamu+ya= agamya= agamma
Ni+ sada+ya=nisadya= nisajja
A+kamu+ya=akamya= akkamma
U+pada+ya=upadya+=upajja
Upa+labha+ya=upalabhya=upalabba
Pa+mada+ya=pamadya= pamajja
A+rbha+ya+arabhya= arabbha
Pa+visa+ Ya= pavisya= pavisa
Vi+bhaja+ya=vibhajya= vibhajja

(having come)
(having sat).
(having trodden)
(having born or arisen)
(having got)
(having delayed or having negligent).
(having begun, on account of; concerning).
(having entered)
(having divided).

Y is interchanged with the last consonant if the latter is h.

A+ruha+ya= aruhya= aruhya
Gaha+ya=gahya=gayha
San+muha+ya= sammuhya=sammuyha
Pa+gaha+ya= paggahya=paggayha

( having ascended)
( having taken)
( having forgotten)
( having raised or held up)

Sometimes y is reduplicated:
Vi+ni+ya= vineyya
Vi+ci+ya= viceyya

( having removed)
(having considered)

Tya is always changed to cca together or without the last consonant of the root.
Upa +hana+ tya= upahacca
(having vexed)
A+hana+ tya= ahacca
(having knocked)
Pati+ i (to know or go)+tya= paticca
(following upon; on account of).
Anu+ vida+tya= anuvanicca
(having known or considered)
Ava+ i+ tya= avecca
(having understood)
Upa+i+ tya= upecca
(having come near).

Ni+ pada+tya= nipacca

Ni+ hana+tya= nihacca
San+ kara+tya= sankaracca
Vi+vica+tya= vivicca=

( having bowed down)

(having knocked down)
( carefully; respectfully)
( having separated).
666INDICLINABLE

The indiclinable words are divided into two groups: Upasagga and Nipata (particles and prefixes).
Upasagga
Upasaggas are prefixes, they are sometimes prefixed to verbs and their derivations. Generally, they modify the meaning of
the root, or intensify it, and sometimes alter it; in some cases they add nothing to the original meaning of the root.
Upecca atthaj sadantiti upasagga hi padayo (having come near the nouns and verbs, they decorate its meaning).
According to the traditional grammar the prefixes are 20 in number, viz., a, ati, adhi, anu, abhi, apa, api, ava, u, upa, du,
ni, ni, pa, para, pari, pati, vi, saj and su.
The following are some examples show how the prefixes alter the meaning of a root kam (to go):
Examples:

abhi
pati

+
+

kamu
kamu

=
=

abhikkamati
patikkamati

(goes ahead; proceeds)

(goes back, steps backwards or

ni
anu

+
+

kamu
kamu

=
=

nikkhamati
anukkamati

(goes out)
(follows)

retreats)

Each prefix indicates different meaning when prefixed to different root. The exmaples below formed with each prefix
together with their meanings.
Examples:

u
upa
du
ni
ni
pa

=
=
=
=
=
=

uppacchati
upagacchati
dukkata
niharati
nibbana
pahujjhati

=
ati
adhi
anu
abhi
apa
api
ava

agacchati
=
atijata
=
adhipati
=
anujata
=
abhidhamma
=
apagacchati
=
apilandha
=
avajata
(arises)
(goes near)
(badly done)
(ejects)
(cessation of craving)
(rises)
para
=
parabhava
pari
=
parivara
pati
=
patibujjhati
vi
=
vivarati
saj
=
sabjanati
su
=
sugandha

(comes)
(born beyond or have highest qualities than parent)
(lord; superior)
(born after or resembling ones father)
(special dhamma; highest doctrine)
(goes away)
(adorned)
(low-born)

(downfall)
(attendant)
(realizes)
(defilement)
(recognise)
(fragrance)

(2) Nipata
Nipata are indeclinables which include adverbs, preposition (also including postposition) and paritcles (comprising

conjunction and interjection), infinite ending in tuj and tave and all the absolutives. They can be used independently and
indicate different meaning in different context.
Tattha tattha upatantiti nipata (nipata, stand everywhere in the sentence). They are pure or simple and derivative.
Adverbs
The adverb is a word which modifies the meaning or the application of a verb or of a whole sentence. According to their
meaning, the adverbs may be divided into:
Adverbs of time : kada, tada, sada, idani, ajja, suve, hiyo, yada, ekada, paccha, pura,
sayaj, pato, parasuve, parahiyo.
(ii)
Adverbs of place :
tattha, tatra, tahij, kutra, kutha, kuhim, kuto, yattha, uddhaj, adho,
purato, idha, abbatra, tiriyaj, abhito, sabbbadhi.
(iii)
Adverbs of manner:
evaj, tatha, kathaj, yatha, sahasa, sanikaj, sighaj, vegena,
vegasa, sukhaj, dukkhaj, samma, sanhena, anupubbhena.
Adverbs of quantity, extent, degree : ettavata, tava, tavata, yava, yavata, pabcaso,
ekadha, bhiyyoso, mattaya, sabbaso, vaggaso, bhagaso.
Adverbs of cause or reason : tena, tena hi, tasma, kasma, tato, yato, yatha,
(vi) Other adverbial particles : anga, api, alaj, kira, kho, nama, iti.
.
Preposition
The more common prepositional adverbs are:
governing the accusative case : antara, paccha, yava, vina, samanta, yatha.
governing the instrumental case : abbatra, vina, saddhim, saha, samaj, yatha.
governing the genitive case : hettha, antarena, anto, upari, purato, pure, samantato,
samanta, avidure, antara.
governing the ablative case : abbatra, antara, ara, araka, uddhaj, oraj, pabhuti, paraj, pubbe, pura, paccha, bahiddha,
yava, vina, adho.
governing the locative case : yatha.
Conjunction and interjection
A conjunction is a word used to point out the relation that exists between two notions which can be expressed by two or
more nouns or adjectives or pronouns or adverbs or full sentences. The conjunctions may be co-ordinative and
subordinative.
Co-ordinative conjunctions: ca, udahu, atha, va, tathapa, vava, apiapi.
Subordinative conjunctions: sace, ce, yadi, yatha, yatra hi nama, va yadi va.
Interjection are words indicating feelings of joy, sadness, anger, or words used to call the attention of someone else: handa,
aho, je, re, dhi, ivgha, he, sadhu, aho nuna, aho vata, yagghe, taggha, ambho.

666NIPATA- INDECLINABLE
The indeclinable are particle. They are incapable of any declension according to the rules of grammar.

In other words they remain alike or unchanged irrespective of number, gender, person and cases. In
Pali grammatical text Nipatas are defined as follows:
Sadisam tisu lingesu- similar in three genders
Sabbasu ca vibhattisu- in all cases
Vacanesu ca sabbesu- in all numbers
Yam na vyeti tada vyayam- whatever does not decline, that is called Avyaya.
Beside the Upasaggas all other particles are called the Nipatas. Some of them are expletive particles,
E.g not necessary to sense but inserted just fill a gab in a sentence. They are called Padapurana. And
the rest are meant to supply a specific sense. They are called Atthapurana. There is a different between
Nipatas and Upasakkas in regard to their use. The former are used either alone or with other words,
within a sentence but the later can only be prefix to nominal or verbal bases.
Nipata like ca, ce, va, vA,hi, kho, pana, khAlu, etc are never used at the beginning of the sentence.
There is a large number of Nipatas in Pali of which the following are most frequently used:
addhA indeed, really.
aho Oh
amma mother, dear.
antarA between.
ArA far from.(rukkhato gamato ArA. ArA nibbAna santhike).
atha then.
bhIyyo too much.(bhIyyo so matthAya. BhIyyo cittam pasIdati.
DhukkhaM ettha bhIyyo)
handa now. Well. (an emphatic particle used to express a resolution). Handa aham gamissAmi.
have indeed, certainly. ( sukho have sappurisena sangamo- to meet a good man is indeed happiness.
Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacArI).
iBgha look here (ingha Avuso gassAma bhagavato dassanAya).
amaM inevitable, willingly.
khAlu- (no meaning)
kira (no meaning)
nAma by name ( kikI nAma kAsirAjA )
nissAya near. At. Because of that.
ma - not
na not
nu ( no meaning)

nuna surely.
Pana
paTThAya- henceforth
Sace if
Sake once
SakkA possible
Sudam just
udAhu or
uda or
vata- indeed. Surely. Truly.
YAva- as far as. Until.
TAva- until then. Yet.
Ettha- here.
idAni- now
kaccI- perhaps.
Kaham- where.
Katham- how
Kiva- how far.
MaGGe- presumably.
tadA- then
tathA- likewise. Accordingly.
YebhUyyena- all most all. Frequently.
Some words, which were originally pronominal derivative, were later used adverbially as Nipatas. Such
as:
atra- here
ettha- here.
ito- from here.
iha, ida here
kada- when
tatra- there
yada- whenever

tadA- then
ekada- once day
sadA- always
sabbadA- always
sabbattha- every where
ajja- to day

666AVYAYIBHAVA
avyaya pubbako avyayibhavo It is so called because the sense of the indeclinable word is
predominant in it. The compound in which and avyaya or indeclinable appears as the first member or
word is called avyayabhava or indeclinable compound. The base form by avyayibhava compound is
neuter and indeclinable. When it ends in a sound, it takes only j , for examples:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)

nagarato bahi
gamassa anto
nagarassa upa
gharaj anu
bhattassa paccha
gangaya upari
mabcassa hettha
kuddhassa tiro
sotassa patiloman
jetthassa anupubbena
sahassassa paro
jivassa pariyantaj
balaj anatigama
attajpati
masakanaj abhava

>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>

bahinagaraj (out of the city)

antogamaj
(inside the village)
upanagaraj
(near the city)
anugharaj
(house after house)
pacchabhattaj
(after lunch)
uparigangaj
(upper part of river)
hetthamabcaj
(under the bed)
tirokuddhaj
(outside the wall)
patisotaj
(against the stream)
anujetthaj
(according to seniority)
>
parosahassaj
(more than thousand)
yavajivaj
(as long as the life last)
yathabalam
(according to ones strength)
>
paccattaj
(separate, individual)
>
nimmasakaj

666NIPATA

(1)

Nipatas are indeclinable particles which include conjunction, preposition, adverb, interjection,
the infinitives ending in tuj and tave, and all absolutives.

(2)

Nipatas cen be used independently.

(3)

They indicate different meanings in different context.

(4)

Tattha tattha upatantiti nipata

-

Nipata stand everywhere in the sentence.

Examples:
(a) conjunction
-

deva ca manussa ca (gods and men)

(b) preposition
-

ca

saha

ahaj mama bhataro saha gamaj gacchami

(I go to the village with my brothers)

(c) adverb
-

pura

pura mayaj Himavantaj gacchimha

(d) interjection =

abbhumme

abhumme!! Kathan nu bhanasi?

sallaj me, deva, urasi kampesi?

(Alas! How are you talking, my lord, are you piercing my heart with a dart?)
(e) infinitive =
-

ahaj dhammaj sotuj aramaj gacchami

(f) absolutive
-

tuj

upasajkamitva bhagavantaj abhivadetva ekamantaj atthasi.

(g) conditional =
-

sace

sace te migaj ahareyyuj, ahaj (taj) kinissami.

(h) indiclinable =
-

tva

ama bhante

ama, na, va, atha

na bhikkhave pano hantabbo

sa ve uttamapuriso

atha kho bhagava

UPASAGGA

(1) Upasaggas are prefixes. They are sometimes prefixed to verbs and their derivatives.
(2) Generally, upsaggas modify the meaning of the root, or intensify it, and sometimes alter it; in some
cases they add nothing to the original meaning of the root.
(3) Upeccatthaj gadantiti upasaggahi padayo
(Having come near (the root), the upasagga decorate its meaning)
(4) They are twenty types of upasagga:
A ati adhi
anu abhi apa
du ni ni pa

para pari pati

api

ava

upa

vi saj su

gacchati

ati

rocati

adhi +

pati

anu

abhi +

rupa

apa

gacchati

api

lapeti

apilapeti

(talks idly)

ava

harati

avaharati

(takes away; steal)

chindati

10

upa

+ kara

11

du

12

ni

+ khamati

13

ni

14

pa

+ janati

15

para +

bhava

parabhava

(ruin)

16

pari

bhasati

paribhasati

(abuse)

agacchati

atirocati

(shines very much)

adhipati

(lord; superior)

(follows)

gacchati
=

abhirupa

(handsome; beautiful)

(moves away)

=
=

kara
gacchati

ucchindati

(cuts off)
(helps)

dukkara

nikkhamati
=

apagacchati

upakara
=

anugacchati

(goes out)

nigacchati

pajanati

(difficult to do)
(suffers; goes down to)
(knows clearly)

17

pati

rupa

patirupa

18

vi

+ gacchati

vigacchati

19

saj

+ vasati

20

su

sajvasati

kara

sukara

(resembling)
(departs; goes away)

(lives together)
(easily done)

Paper 2 Prose composition

Prof. G.D. Sumanapala - 1/10/97
An Introduction to the traditional methodology of learning pali language.
666P R ES E N T P A R T IC IP L E (V E R B A L A D J EC T IV E )

Participles are a kinds of adjective formed from the verbal bases. Like verbs, they are
divided into Present, Past and Future, and each group is again divided into Active and Passive.
Presents participles (missakiriya), active in meaning, are formed from the suffixes nta or
mana and declining like nouns. They indicate an action which takes place simultaneously with
(missa) the main action of the sentence.
Present participles are used like adjectives or qualifying nouns, with which they agree in
gender, number and case.
The nta stem, which is much more commonly used for almost all verbs, is inflected as
follows, for example from gam gacchata.

Musculine

Singular

Plural

Nom.

Gacchaj gacchanto

Acc.

Gacchantaj

Ins.

gacchanto gacchanta
gacchante

Gacchata

gacchantena

gacchantebhi

gacchantehi
Dat./Gen.

Gacchato

gacchantassa

Abl.

Gacchata

gacchantamha

gacchatan gacchatanaj
gacchantebhi

gacchantasma
Loc.

gacchantehi

Gacchati

gacchante

gacchantesu

Gacchantamhi gacchantasmij
Voc.

Gaccahj gaccha gaccha

gacchanto gacchanta

Feminine
Singular
Nom./Voc.

Plural

Gacchanti

gacchanti
gacchantiyo

Acc.

Gacchantij

gacchanti
gacchantiyo

Abl.

Gacchantiya

gacchantibhi
gacchantihi

Dat./Gen.

Gacchantiya

Loc.

Gacchantiya

gacchantinaj
gacchantisu

gacchantiyaj

Neuter
Singular
Nom.

Plural

Gacchaj

gacchanta
gacchantani

Acc.

Gacchantaj

gacchante
gacchantani

The rest are similar to that of Masculine.

Notes:

1.

The present participle expresses an action contemporaneous with that expressed by the main
verb, e.g.

Addasasumayasmantaj pindaya carantaj

= they saw the reverend one going round for alms.

2.

In some cases, the present participle is used as if it were an indeclinable, e.g.

api pana tumhe ayasmanto ekenta-sukhaj lokaj janaj passaj viharatha

= do you perhaps abide knowing and visualizing a perfect happy world?

3.

The present participle is sometimes used as the verb of the sentence either alone or in
periphrastic formation with atthi and titthati, e.g.

upasankamanta kho amu sappurisa yena ayasma sarputto tena dhammasavanaya

= those men came to the Reverend Sariputta to hear the doctrine.

atho kho ayasma Anando viharaj pavisitva rodamano atthasi

= then the Reverend Ananda entered the monastery and brust into tears.

4.

The present participle with the particle pi corresponds to a concessive clause.

evam pi ahaj karonto
= though I act in this way.

5. The present participle in absolute construction, e.g.

ayasmante Anande upasankamante
= when the Reverend Ananda was drawing near.

(accusative absolutive)

acira-pakkantassa Bhagavato
= not long after the Blessed One had gone away.

(genitive absolutive)

666S Y N TA X
Syntax shows the different usages of cases. The accusative case has the following usages:

1. It is generally used to denote an object in a sentence.

The object is of three kinds, i.e.
(1) Nibbati-kamma

(Generative object) e.g.

i. mata puttaj vijayati

= The mother gives birth to a son.

ii.

aharo sukhaj janeti

= The food produces happiness.

(2) Vikati-kamma

(Transformative object) e.g.

kattham avgaraj karoti

= The firewood turns into chacoal.

(3) Pattikamma

(Attainable object) e.g.

puriso gehaj pavisati

= The man enters the house.

2. Both the direct and indirect objects in a causative sentence are in accusative, e.g.

acariyo sissaj dhammaj bodheti

= The teacher causes the student to understand the dhamma

3.

All verbs implying motoin govern the Accusative (goal of motion).

(1)

puriso gamaj gacchati

(2)

Raja bhagavantaj upasamkami

4.

Most of the adverbs are in Accusative, e.g.

Tumhe imasmij mate yeva sukhaj jivissatha, jivante tu dukkhaj jivatha.

5.

Extension in time and space is denoted by the Accusative.

(1)

time e.g.
i. sattahaj majsodanaj
= in all the 7 days, there are meat and food

ii. saradaj ramaniya nadi

= during autumn, the river is beautiful

iii. masaj sajjhayati

= reciting for one month.

In the accantasamyoga (i.e. close-connection), the

above examples are:

i. dabba-kala

(thing and time)

ii. guna-kala

iii. kriya-kala

(2)

(quality and time)

(action and time)

Space e.g.
i.

yoyanaj vanaraji (dabba-addhana)

= the range of forest for miles

ii. kosaj sajjhayati

(kriya-addhana)

= going while reciting for a kosa.

6.

The ordinals denoting time are in Accusative.

so dutiyaj pi tatiyaj pi tath eva yaci

7.

The Accusatives are also used in the sense of possessive case with connection to the

indeclinables antara, abhito, parito, pati and patibha, e.g.

(1) antara ca Rajagahaj antara ca Nalandaj

= in between of Rajagaha and Nalanda

(2) abhito gamaj nadi vahati

= the river flows infront of the village

(3) parito gamaj nadi vahati

= the river flows round the village

(4) nadij Nerabjaraj pati.

= near the river Nerabjara

(5) upama maj patibhati

= a simile comes to my mind.

8.

Sometimes, it is used in the sense of instrumental case, e.g.

(1) sace maj nalapissati

= if (he) does not talk to me

(2) vina dhammaj kuto sukhaj

= without dhamma whence happiness

9.

10.

It is also used in the sense of locative case, e.g.

(1) ekaj samayaj

at one time

(2) pubhanhasamayaj

in the early morning

The prefixes anu, abhi, adhi, pati and upa govern the Accusative, e.g.

Yadettha maj pati (anu, pari) siya taj diyati

= whatever is suitable for me, give it to me.

11.

The Accusative is used for an attribute of another accusative, e.g.

Khattiyo brahmanaj mahamattaj passati
= the warrior sees the priest who is the minister

12.

The price or the value of a thing is in accusative, e.g.

Sabbani tani mettaya cetavimuttiya kalaj nagghanti solasij
= all of them are not worth 1 / 1 6 part of the emancipation of the mind through loving kindness.

QUESTION: ??? (VOWELS)

.... ??? ....
2. Where there are the consonants l, k, s and y between the ASSIMILATION
two consonants, i is inserted between them for the benefit
of easy pronunciation as in the example:
Vowel assimilation
Glana
Mlana
Sloka
Sarya
Arya
Viriya
Sri
Hri
Vajra
Maryada

-)
-)
-)
-)
-)
-)
-)
-)
-)
-)

gilana
milana
siloka
suriya
ariya, ayya
viriya
siri
hiri
vajira
moriyada

3. Inserting u where there are v and m among the

double consonant un is inserted between them in order to
pronounce without any effort:
Padma
Sva
Dve
Suksma -)
Usma
Smarati -)

-)
paduma
-)
suve
-)
duve
sukhuma
-)
usuma
sumarati

Examples
Shishu
Iksu
Aynsmat -)
Nshanna
Srungavera

-)
-)
ayasma
-)
-)

susu
uccu
nisinna
singavera

Consonant assimilation.
- Two consonants are similired(?)
Examples:
tma
-)
att
Bhadra -)
badda
Asva
-)
assa
Ramya
-)
ramma
Varga
-)
vagga
Cakra
-)
cakka
Shakra
-)
sakka
misra
-)
missa
sarpa
-)
sappa
(Group letters are more powerfull.)

??? (BONUS: HISTORY OF PLI (BOOK: PLI LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE, P. 42-45)) (NOT COMPLETED)
???
occur as in Pli; in adaraho we have a as the epenthetic vowel, not t as later; dugua shows du- for dvi-, later di- alone
is allowed, while Pli has both forms: Avaghosa again uses tura as in Pli for the later tuma, and has tava for tuha; he
has also karotha common in Pli, in later Prkrit unknown and for gerund kariya, found in Pli. Moreover we find pekkh
(Sanskrit prek-) as in Pli, and gamissiti may be compared with such Pli forms as sakkiti, dakkhiti.
As against this evidence no stress can now be laid on the argument of Oldenberg who did not accept as historical
the mission of Mahinda, and held instead that Pli came to Ceylong from Kaliga, a view accepted also by E. Mller, who
pointed out that the oldest settlements in Ceylon were founded from the mainland opposite, and not as the Magadhan
theory of Pli suggested from Bengal. Oldenberg supported his view by comparing Pli with the dialect of the
Khaagiri inscription. But the comparison yields nothing decisive, and there is now a substantial body of evidence which
points to western India as the prime source of the ryan element in Ceylon. La, Gujarat, is associated with the legend of
Vijaya, and, however slight is the value of that legend in other respects, there is no reason to dispute the importance of the
place name, when it is found that the affinities of Sinhalese lie with the western dialects.
We must, therefore, conclude that the basis of Pli is a western dialect; but in its literary form, in which alone we
have it, it is a very mixed language of the literary type, far removed from a vernacular, and under a strong Sanskritic
influence. The date of the development of this literary speech and the evolution of the Pli Canon, doubtless on the base of
older tradition largely in Magadhan dialects, cannot be ascertained with any certainty; probability points to a date posterior
to Aoka, the silence of whose inscriptions on the existence of the Pli Canon is most naturally explained by the assumption
that it did not then exist. The ascription of a comparatively late date is greatly supported by the fact, which must be stressed
as against Rhys Davids, that the forms of Pli are not historically the oldest of those Prkrit forms known to us. These are
to be found in the north-western dialect of the Aokan inscriptions where the maintenance in some measure of the three
sibilants, the transformation of r into ir or ur, the maintenance of r in conjunction with other consonants, and the retention
of im are, among other points, indications of a state of affairs linguistically older than the facts of Pli. Even in the case of
the Girnr dialect of the Aokan inscriptions, it would be impossible to establish the priority of Pli. Girnr manifests such
phenomena as the retention of long vowels before double consonants and traces of the retention of r in certain consonantal
combinations, as well as the use of s which Pli assimilates. Moreover, it appears that it preserved for a time the distinction
between the palatal and the lingual sibilants. There is accordingly nothing in the linguistic facts to throw doubt on the view
that the dialect on which Pli is based was one current some time after the Aokan period.
To sum up the conclusions suggested by our deplorably scanty evidence we may say (1) that the Buddha's
language cannot be definitely ascertained from the records, and it is only by conjecture that we can assert that it was of
Koalan rather than Magadhan type. Similarly it is purely a matter of speculation how far the Koalan or Old ArdhaMgadh (if for convenience we so style it) and the Magadhan or Mgadh corresponded with the Ardha-Mgadh of the
Jain texts as we have them and the Mgadh of the grammarians. In the former case certainly, and in the latter probably, we
should allow for much dialect mixture in the later forms. (2) The teachings, or the supposed teachings of the Buddha were
handed down in various dialects and in one at least of these the process of phonetic change had advanced further than is
normal in our Pli texts. (3) The Pli texts represent the doctrines accepted by a special school which used as the language
of their Canon the dialect of the educated classes of some western area whether Kaumb or Ujjayin or some other place
cannot be determined with any certainty. (4) The date of this Pli Canon cannot be defined with any exactitude. The one
source of tradition on which we have to rely insists that a Council under Aoka determined the Canon including as an
essential element the Kathvatthu. The Aokan inscriptions ignore entirely the Council and, when Aoka in his Bhabra
edict mentions passages of special importance in the teaching of the Buddha, grave difficulties arise when supporters of the
existence of the Pli Canon in Aokas time seek to identify the passages, suggesting the obvious conclusion that Aoka
knew nothing of the Canon. Further, it is certain that the language of the texts known to Aoka was not the Pli of the

Canon. Again, it is significant taht even those who are inclined to greater faith in the tradition than it is easy to feel have
much difficulty in believing that the Kathvatthu is of Aokan date, but what is clear is that this is an essential element in
the tradition of the Council, and that if it is not accepted as true, it becomes extremely difficult to attach any value to the
legend of the Council. We may well believe that the views embodied in the Pli Canon were current in certain circles in
Aokan time it is clear that they were not the points which appealed to Aoka himself whose Dhamma is far more popular
and we can, if we like, suppose that in Aokas reign some steps were taken towards formulating these views in definite
form and commencing the perparation of the Canon in the language we now know as Pli. But there is no reason to accept
the alleged patronage of Aoka, and we cannot be absolutely certain that even so much respect should be paid to the
tradition current in Ceylon.

Periods of the Development of Pli

Pli can be mentioned as an archaic Prkt, a middle-Indian idiom. It is said that directly it has not come from
Sanskrit. From its several characteristic features we learn that a close relationship existed between Pli and Vedic. For
example, we see in tvna (besides tv) the forms tehi, yehi Vedic tobis, yebhis (as opposed to Sanskrit (ais, yais) etc. Pli
cannot be described as a homogeneous language. Pli has numerous double forms which give us an idea that it is a mixed
dialect. H. Kern says that it is a compromise of various dialects. Minayeff agrees with him. E. Kuhn describes: Even an
artificial and literary language which an occasions draws materials from all possible dialects, must have had as its
foundation a particular dialect. There are many dialectical peculiarities in Pli. W. Geiger mentions four different stages of
development which took place in the history of the Pli language. He describes: ... stages of development associated with
periods following one after another can be clearly distinguished in the history of the Pli language. There are four stages:
(1) The language of the Gths, i.e., the metrical pieces: It is of a very heterogenous character. On the one hand, it contains
many archaic speech forms which are distinguished from the old-Indian form only phonologically; on the other hand, these
are also used in it, in large numbers such new formations as are wholly characteristic of Pli, and they are often crossed by
the archaic forms which may occur side by side with them, not seldom, even in one and the same verse. In some cases the
exigencies of metre might have determined the choice of the forms to be used. Particularly in those cases where verses out
of an older language were translated into a later one, the use of archaic forms was liberal, because it afforded a closer
approximation to the original.
(2) The language of the canonical prose: It is more homogeneous and uniform than the language of the Gths. The archaic
forms diminish more and more in number and partly disappear altogether. The use of new formations is no longer accidental
or arbitrary as in the oldest period of the language, but is governed by more rigid rules.
(3) The later prose of the post-canonical literature, as of the Milinda-book, the great commentaries etc.: It is based on the
canonical prose and reflects its artificial and erudite usage. The differences between the first and the second period is
therefore much greater than that between the second and the third. The latter is further characterised by a still more
restricted use of the archaic forms.
(4) The language of the later artificial poetry, no longer possesses a homogeneous character. The authors derived their
knowledge of the language and borrowed the speech-forms indiscriminately from older and later literature, and their
propensity to archaism and Sanskritism is more pronounced or less in different cases.

Prof. Suniti Kumar Chatterjee also gives an account of a development in the Pli language in the earliest stage
when it was closely associated with ancient Indias spoken dialects. This Pli language, which flourished from the Buddhist
times and is still continuing it up to our day, has a history of 2000 years. It cannot be mentioned as a uniform speech.
Numerous double forms inform us that it has a mixed character. There are many dialectal deposits in it. Prof. Suniti
Kumar Chatterjee gives four stages of its development. He states:
(1) The speech of the metrical portions (gths) is canonical literature, is of a very heterogeneous character. On one hand,
it retains many old speech forms separated from those of the old Indo-ryan only through sound change, while, on the other
hand, ???

SHORT QUESTIONS WITH SHORT ANSWERS

Write short note on the following terms

1. Assimilation

When there is an influence of neighbouring sounds in other sound or when in other sounds
there is an influence of one of the neighbouring sounds, then this phenomenon is known as
assimilation.
Basically, there are three types of assimilation, i.e.

(1)

progressive assimilation when the conditioning

element precedes the assimilated sound, e.g.

sahasra

>

sahassa

sr

>

kalya

>

kalla

ly

>

ss
ll

(2)

regressive assimilation when the conditioning

element goes after the assimilated sound, e.g.

tarka

>

takka

rk

>

kk

rakta

>

ratta

kt

>

tt

(3)

reciprocal assimilation when there is the

involvement of both progressive and regressive

assimilation, e.g.

satya
(progressive)

>

satca

>

sacca

(regressive)
ty

>

tc

>

cc

2. Metathesis
In a word if there is an inversion of etymological position of a sound, this is called
Metathesis. Thus

Karanu

>

kaneru

Masaka

>

makasa

Grhnati

>

ganhati

(taken)

Avaruhya

>

avaruyha

(descended)

3. Svarabhakti (Anaptyxis)
Between two consonants, there is the insertion of a vowel. Thus

Sneha >
Arya

sineha (love)
>

Garha >

ariya
garaha

Kriya >

kiriya

4. Nasal assimilation
The nasal of the prefix is assimilated to the first consonant of the word, e.g.

Sam

titthati

>

santitthati

Sam

carati

>

sabcarati

Sam

thana

>

santhana

5. Cluster simplification
In Sanskrit there are more consonant in a word, but this is reduced in Pali, e.g.

Bhedssati
ccc

>

bhe + ssati

>

>

ccc

bhe + sati
>

> bhcchatti
cc

>

cc

Kartuj

>

cc

1.

>

kattuj
cc

>
>

katuj

Unaspirated consonant in Sanskrit is always changed to aspirated consonant in Pali, e.g.

Asti

>

>

ista

atthi
th

>
t

ittha
>

th

QUESTIONS

Examine, on what basis the Pli alphabet was classified and show voiced and voiceless letters
separately.

Describe with examples the vowel sandhi in Pli.

(a) Decline fully the stem Jantu or Bhikkhu in Pli.
(b) Conjugate fully the Pli root gamu (to go) or sara (to remember) in Parassapada of present tense
and potential mood (Sattam).

Clarify secondary derivatives (taddhita) in Pli and describe with examples Apaccaha suffixes.

Explain with examples Tappurisa Samsa or Kammadhraya Samsa in Pli.

Describe the syntactical uses of either the accusative case or dative case in Pli.

Examine the various opinions of the scholars on the origin of Pli language.

Parse and explain the four of the following.

I. Niggahta combination
II. Dvanda Samsa
III. Past participles
IV. Prefixes
V. Bhva Taddhita
VI. Pacam Vibhakti (verbs)

Point out the various classifications of the Alphabet according to the traditional Pli grammarians.

(a) Show the combination and name of the following 10 disjoined words:
Tni + imni, Tatra + aya, Anu + eti, Tva + eva, Paca + indriyni, Rpa + Khandho, So + muni,
bahu + suto, abhinandu + ti, Ati + anta, Yadi + eva, abhi + okso

(b) Disjoin the following 10 words and clarify their combination.

Pariccajati, Pancakkhandha, Chalabhi, nimmalo, Sabbeva, Cakkav, Bandhusseva, abbuggato,
tvadeva, Svkkhto, Jaccandho, Bojjhang

(a) Decline fully masculine 'i' ending the stem 'muni' in Pli.

(b) Conjugate the root bh (to be) in both parassapada and attanopada.

(a) Parse and explain 10 words of the following.

Buddhacarita, Antogma, SamaaBrhma, Paratana, nandatthero, Upanagara,
rjaputto, Pcasla, Puanad, Jarmaraa, Khsavo, Sladhana

(b) Parse and explain 10 words of the following.

Manussatta, tad, Samaero, Janat, Pantataro, bhgineyyo, dhanav, catukka, mnavo, kyika,
medhvi, mgadhiko

Write an account on prefixes in Pli and show with examples how is the meaning of the Pli verbs
changed by the prefixes.

Show with examples the process of assimilation as depicted in the Pli language.

Describe the classification of Pli alphabet according to the Kaccyana tradition.

Explain with example the Niggahita combination in Pli.

(a)

Decline fully the stem 'Muni' or 'Pitu' in Pli

(b)
Conjugate the root 'Bh' (to be) or 'P' (to drink) in Parassapada and Attanopada of present
tense and imperative mood.

Define briefly the meaning of the word 'compound' and clarify with examples the 'kammadhraya
samsa' in Pli.

Define briefly the meaning of the word 'taddhita' and clarify with examples the bhva taddhita in Pli.

Observe the Vedic features that preserved in Pli language.

Write grammatical notes on any two of the following:

I. Consonant combination
II. Dvanda samsa
III. Apaccattha taddhita
IV. Absolutives
V. Janapadanirutti